ANSYS CFX-Pre User's Guide

ANSYS, Inc. Release 19.1

Southpointe April 2018
2600 ANSYS Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317 ANSYS, Inc. and
[email protected] ANSYS Europe,
Ltd. are UL
http://www.ansys.com registered ISO
(T) 724-746-3304 9001: 2008
(F) 724-514-9494 companies.
Copyright and Trademark Information

© 2018 ANSYS, Inc. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.

ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, AUTODYN, CFX, FLUENT and any and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature
names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries located in the
United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark
of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service and feature names or trademarks are the property
of their respective owners. FLEXlm and FLEXnet are trademarks of Flexera Software LLC.

Disclaimer Notice

THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFID-
ENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.

ANSYS, Inc. and ANSYS Europe, Ltd. are UL registered ISO 9001: 2008 companies.

U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).

Third-Party Software

See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, contact ANSYS, Inc.

Published in the U.S.A.

Table of Contents
1. CFX-Pre Basics ......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Starting CFX-Pre ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. CFX-Pre Modes of Operation ............................................................................................................. 2
1.3. Working with the CFX-Pre Interface ................................................................................................... 3
1.3.1. Viewer ..................................................................................................................................... 4
1.3.2. CFX-Pre Workspace .................................................................................................................. 4
1.3.2.1. Outline Tree View ............................................................................................................ 5
1.3.2.1.1. General Considerations ........................................................................................... 5
1.3.2.1.2. Outline Tree View Structure ..................................................................................... 5
1.3.2.1.2.1. Outline Tree View Shortcut Menu Commands ................................................. 7
1.3.2.2. Details View ................................................................................................................... 10
1.3.3. Physics Message Window ....................................................................................................... 12
1.3.3.1. Physics Errors from Old .def/.res Files .............................................................................. 13
1.3.3.2. Physics Message Window Shortcut Menu Commands ..................................................... 13
1.3.4. Menu Bar ............................................................................................................................... 14
1.3.5. Toolbar .................................................................................................................................. 15
1.4. CFX-Pre File Types ........................................................................................................................... 15
2. CFX-Pre 3D Viewer ................................................................................................................................ 17
2.1. Object Visibility ............................................................................................................................... 17
2.2. 3D Viewer Modes and Commands ................................................................................................... 18
2.2.1. 3D Viewer Toolbar .................................................................................................................. 18
2.2.2. Shortcut Menus ..................................................................................................................... 20
2.2.2.1. CFX-Pre 3D Viewer Shortcut Menu ................................................................................. 20
2.2.2.1.1. Shortcuts for CFX-Pre (Viewer Background) ........................................................... 20
2.2.2.1.2. Shortcuts for CFX-Pre (Viewer Object) ................................................................... 21
2.2.3. Viewer Hotkeys ...................................................................................................................... 22
2.2.4. Mouse Button Mapping .......................................................................................................... 23
2.2.5. Picking Mode ......................................................................................................................... 25
2.2.5.1. Selecting Objects .......................................................................................................... 26
2.2.6. Boundary Markers and Labels ................................................................................................. 26
2.2.6.1. Label Options ................................................................................................................ 26
2.2.6.2. Boundary Markers ......................................................................................................... 26
2.2.6.3. Boundary Vectors .......................................................................................................... 26
2.2.6.4. Profile Vectors ............................................................................................................... 27
2.3. Views and Figures ........................................................................................................................... 27
2.3.1. Switching to a View or Figure .................................................................................................. 27
2.3.2. Changing the Definition of a View or Figure ............................................................................ 27
2.4. Stereo Viewer ................................................................................................................................. 28
3. CFX-Pre File Menu ................................................................................................................................. 29
3.1. New Case Command ....................................................................................................................... 29
3.2. Open Case Command ..................................................................................................................... 30
3.2.1. Recover Original Session ........................................................................................................ 30
3.2.2. Opening Case (.cfx) Files ......................................................................................................... 31
3.2.3. Opening CFX-Solver Input (.def, .mdef ), Results (.res), Transient (.trn) or Backup (.bak) Files ....... 31
3.2.4. Opening CCL (.ccl) Files .......................................................................................................... 31
3.2.5. Opening Meshing (.cmdb or .dsdb) Files ................................................................................. 31
3.2.6. Opening CFX-Mesh (.gtm) Files ............................................................................................... 32
3.3. Close Command ............................................................................................................................. 32
3.4. Save Case Command ....................................................................................................................... 32
3.5. Save Project Command ................................................................................................................... 32

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. iii
CFX-Pre User's Guide

3.6. Refresh Command (ANSYS Workbench only) ................................................................................... 32

3.7. Save Case As Command .................................................................................................................. 32
3.8. Import Mesh Command .................................................................................................................. 33
3.9. Reload Mesh Files Command .......................................................................................................... 33
3.10. Import CCL Command .................................................................................................................. 33
3.10.1. Append or Replace ............................................................................................................... 34
3.10.1.1. Append ....................................................................................................................... 34
3.10.1.2. Replace ....................................................................................................................... 34
3.10.1.2.1. Auto-load materials ............................................................................................. 34
3.11. Export CCL Command ................................................................................................................... 34
3.11.1. Save All Objects .................................................................................................................... 35
3.11.1.1. Sample of Saving CEL Expressions ................................................................................ 35
3.12. Save Picture Command ................................................................................................................. 35
3.13. Recent Case Files Submenu ........................................................................................................... 38
3.14. Recent CCL Files Submenu ............................................................................................................ 38
3.15. Recent Session Files Submenu ....................................................................................................... 38
3.16. Quit Command ............................................................................................................................. 38
4. CFX-Pre Edit Menu ................................................................................................................................ 39
4.1. Undo and Redo ............................................................................................................................... 39
4.2. Options .......................................................................................................................................... 40
4.2.1. CFX-Pre Options ..................................................................................................................... 40
4.2.1.1. General ......................................................................................................................... 41
4.2.1.1.1. Beta Options ......................................................................................................... 41
4.2.1.1.1.1. Physics Beta Features ................................................................................... 41
4.2.1.1.1.2. Topology Beta Features ................................................................................ 42
4.2.1.1.2. Auto Generation ................................................................................................... 42
4.2.1.1.3. Physics ................................................................................................................. 43
4.2.1.2. Graphics Style ............................................................................................................... 44
4.2.1.2.1. Object Highlighting .............................................................................................. 45
4.2.1.2.2. Background .......................................................................................................... 45
4.2.1.2.2.1. Color ............................................................................................................ 45
4.2.1.2.2.2. Image .......................................................................................................... 45
4.2.1.2.3. Colors ................................................................................................................... 45
4.2.1.2.3.1. Labels .......................................................................................................... 45
4.2.1.2.3.2. Legend Text and Turbo Axis .......................................................................... 46
4.2.1.2.4. Visibility ................................................................................................................ 46
4.2.1.2.4.1. Axis and Ruler Visibility ................................................................................. 46
4.2.1.3. Render .......................................................................................................................... 46
4.2.1.4. Mesh ............................................................................................................................. 46
4.2.1.4.1. Mesh Import Options ............................................................................................ 46
4.2.1.5. Turbo ............................................................................................................................ 46
4.2.1.6. Labels and Markers ........................................................................................................ 46
4.2.1.6.1. Labels ................................................................................................................... 46
4.2.1.6.2. Boundary Markers ................................................................................................. 46
4.2.1.6.3. Boundary Vectors .................................................................................................. 47
4.2.1.6.4. Profile Vectors ....................................................................................................... 47
4.2.1.7. Extensions ..................................................................................................................... 47
4.2.1.8. Customization ............................................................................................................... 47
4.2.1.9. Solve ............................................................................................................................. 47
4.2.1.10. Viewer ......................................................................................................................... 47
4.2.2. Common Options ................................................................................................................... 47
4.2.2.1. Appearance ................................................................................................................... 48

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
iv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CFX-Pre User's Guide

4.2.2.2. Viewer Setup ................................................................................................................. 48

4.2.2.2.1. Mouse Mapping .................................................................................................... 49
4.2.2.3. Units ............................................................................................................................. 49
4.2.2.3.1. Additional Help on Units ....................................................................................... 49
5. CFX-Pre Session Menu ........................................................................................................................... 51
5.1. New Session Command .................................................................................................................. 51
5.2. Start Recording and Stop Recording Commands ............................................................................. 52
5.3. Play Session Command ................................................................................................................... 52
6. CFX-Pre Insert Menu ............................................................................................................................. 55
7. CFX-Pre Tools Menu .............................................................................................................................. 59
7.1. Command Editor ............................................................................................................................ 59
7.2. Edit Profile Data .............................................................................................................................. 59
7.2.1. Profile Data Expansion (Option = Expansion) ........................................................................... 60
7.2.1.1. Notes and Limitations of Profile Data Expansion ............................................................. 60
7.2.2. Profile Data Mapping (Option = Map to Mesh Regions) ........................................................... 61
7.2.2.1. Notes and Limitations of Profile Data Mapping ............................................................... 62
7.2.3. Profile Data Expansion with Mapping (Option = Mapped Expansion) ....................................... 62
7.3. Initialize Profile Data ....................................................................................................................... 62
7.3.1. Initializing Profile Data ........................................................................................................... 63
7.3.2. Importing Table Data .............................................................................................................. 63
7.4. Macro Calculator ............................................................................................................................. 63
7.5. Solve .............................................................................................................................................. 64
7.5.1. Write Solver Input File Command ............................................................................................ 64
7.6. Applications ................................................................................................................................... 65
7.7. Quick Setup Mode .......................................................................................................................... 65
7.8. Turbo Mode .................................................................................................................................... 65
8. CFX-Pre Extensions Menu ..................................................................................................................... 67
9. CFX-Pre Help Menu ............................................................................................................................... 69
10. Importing and Transforming Meshes ................................................................................................. 71
10.1. Importing Meshes ......................................................................................................................... 71
10.1.1. Importing Multiple Meshes ................................................................................................... 71
10.1.2. Common Import Options ..................................................................................................... 72
10.1.2.1. Mesh Units .................................................................................................................. 72
10.1.2.2. Assembly Prefix ........................................................................................................... 72
10.1.2.3. Primitive Strategy ........................................................................................................ 72
10.1.2.4. Ignore Invalid Degenerate Elements ............................................................................. 73
10.1.2.5. Duplicate Node Checking ............................................................................................ 73
10.1.3. Supported Mesh File Types ................................................................................................... 73
10.1.3.1. ANSYS Meshing Files .................................................................................................... 73
10.1.3.1.1. Named Selections ............................................................................................... 74
10.1.3.1.2. Contact Detection Settings ................................................................................. 74
10.1.3.2. CFX-Mesh Files ............................................................................................................ 75
10.1.3.3. CFX-Solver Input files ................................................................................................... 75
10.1.3.4. ICEM CFD Files ............................................................................................................. 75
10.1.3.5. ANSYS Files .................................................................................................................. 76
10.1.3.6. Fluent Files .................................................................................................................. 76
10.1.3.6.1. Override Default 2D Mesh Settings ...................................................................... 76
10.1.3.6.1.1. Interpret 2D Mesh as .................................................................................. 76
10.1.3.6.1.1.1. Axisymmetric .................................................................................... 76
10.1.3.6.1.1.2. Planar ................................................................................................ 77
10.1.3.7. CGNS Files ................................................................................................................... 77
10.1.3.7.1. Importing CGNS files into CFX ............................................................................. 77

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. v
CFX-Pre User's Guide

10.1.3.7.1.1. Method ...................................................................................................... 77

10.1.3.7.1.2. Base (Base_t) .............................................................................................. 77
10.1.3.7.1.3. Zone (Zone_t) ............................................................................................ 77
10.1.3.7.1.4. Elements (ElementSection_t) ...................................................................... 78
10.1.3.7.1.5. Element Types Supported ........................................................................... 78
10.1.3.7.1.6. Boundary Conditions (BC_t) ........................................................................ 78
10.1.3.7.1.7. Families (Family_t, FamilyBC_t, FamilyName_t) ............................................ 78
10.1.3.7.1.8. Grid Connectivity (GridConnectivity_t and GridConnectivity1to1_t) ............ 78
10.1.3.7.1.9. CGNS Data Ignored ..................................................................................... 79
10.1.3.7.2. Prefix regions with zone name ............................................................................. 79
10.1.3.7.3. Create Regions From: Element Sections ............................................................... 79
10.1.3.7.4. Create Regions From: Boundary Conditions ......................................................... 79
10.1.3.7.5. Create Regions From: Families ............................................................................. 79
10.1.3.7.6. Create Regions From: Connectivity Mappings ...................................................... 79
10.1.3.7.7. Example of Create Regions From ......................................................................... 80
10.1.3.7.8. Read Only One CGNS Base ................................................................................... 80
10.1.3.8. CFX-TASCflow Files ...................................................................................................... 80
10.1.3.8.1. Convert 3D Region Labels to Regions .................................................................. 81
10.1.3.8.2. Grid Connections Processed (in the .grd file) ........................................................ 81
10.1.3.8.3. Grid Embedding ................................................................................................. 81
10.1.3.8.4. Retain Block-off ................................................................................................... 82
10.1.3.8.5. Regions in the .grd file ......................................................................................... 82
10.1.3.8.6. Boundary Conditions in .bcf File .......................................................................... 82
10.1.3.8.7. Regions in the .gci File ......................................................................................... 82
10.1.3.8.8. Importing CFX-TASCflow TurboPre MFR Grids ...................................................... 83
10.1.3.8.9. Parameter File ..................................................................................................... 83
10.1.3.9. CFX-4 Grid Files ........................................................................................................... 83
10.1.3.9.1. Split Symmetry Planes ......................................................................................... 83
10.1.3.9.2. Import from Cylindrical Coordinates .................................................................... 84
10.1.3.9.3. Create 2D Regions on .......................................................................................... 84
10.1.3.9.4. Create 3D Regions on .......................................................................................... 84
10.1.3.9.5. Blocked Off Regions (SOLIDs) .............................................................................. 84
10.1.3.9.6. Conducting Solid Regions (SOLCONs) .................................................................. 84
10.1.3.9.7. Import 2D Axisymmetric Mesh ............................................................................ 85
10.1.3.9.8. Importing MFR Grids ........................................................................................... 85
10.1.3.10. CFX-BladeGenPlus Files .............................................................................................. 85
10.1.3.11. PATRAN Neutral Files .................................................................................................. 85
10.1.3.12. IDEAS Universal Files .................................................................................................. 86
10.1.3.13. GridPro/az3000 Grid Files ........................................................................................... 86
10.1.3.14. NASTRAN Files ........................................................................................................... 86
10.1.3.15. Pointwise Gridgen Files .............................................................................................. 87
10.1.3.16. User Import ............................................................................................................... 87
10.2. Mesh Tree View ............................................................................................................................. 88
10.2.1. Shortcut Menu Commands for Meshes and Regions .............................................................. 88
10.3. Deleting Meshes and Mesh Components from the Tree View ......................................................... 88
10.4. Transform Mesh Command ........................................................................................................... 89
10.4.1. Target Location .................................................................................................................... 89
10.4.2. Reference Coordinate Frame ................................................................................................. 90
10.4.3. Transformation: Rotation ...................................................................................................... 90
10.4.3.1. Rotation Option: Principal Axis ..................................................................................... 90
10.4.3.2. Rotation Option: Rotation Axis ..................................................................................... 90
10.4.3.3. Rotation Angle Option ................................................................................................. 90

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
vi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CFX-Pre User's Guide

10.4.3.3.1. Specified ............................................................................................................. 90

10.4.3.3.2. Full Circle ............................................................................................................ 90
10.4.3.3.3. Two Points .......................................................................................................... 90
10.4.4. Transformation: Translation ................................................................................................... 91
10.4.4.1. Method: Deltas ............................................................................................................ 91
10.4.4.2. Method: Vector ............................................................................................................ 91
10.4.5. Transformation: Scale ............................................................................................................ 91
10.4.5.1. Method: Uniform ......................................................................................................... 91
10.4.5.2. Method: Non Uniform .................................................................................................. 91
10.4.5.3. Scale Origin ................................................................................................................. 91
10.4.5.4. Apply Scale To ............................................................................................................. 92
10.4.6. Transformation: Reflection .................................................................................................... 92
10.4.6.1. Method ....................................................................................................................... 92
10.4.6.2. Apply Reflection To ...................................................................................................... 92
10.4.7. Transformation: Turbo Rotation ............................................................................................. 93
10.4.7.1. Rotation Option: Principal Axis ..................................................................................... 93
10.4.7.2. Rotation Option: Rotation Axis ..................................................................................... 93
10.4.7.3. Rotation Axis Options .................................................................................................. 93
10.4.8. Multiple Copies .................................................................................................................... 93
10.4.8.1. # of Copies .................................................................................................................. 94
10.4.8.2. Delete Original ............................................................................................................ 94
10.4.9. Advanced Options ................................................................................................................ 94
10.4.9.1. Glue Adjacent Meshes ................................................................................................. 94
10.4.10. Automatic Transformation Preview ..................................................................................... 95
10.5. Gluing Meshes Together ................................................................................................................ 95
10.6. Mesh Editor .................................................................................................................................. 96
10.7. Render Options ............................................................................................................................. 96
10.7.1. Render Options Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 96
10.7.1.1. Draw Faces .................................................................................................................. 96
10.7.1.2. Face Color ................................................................................................................... 96
10.7.1.3. Transparency ............................................................................................................... 96
10.7.1.4. Draw Mode/Surface Drawing ....................................................................................... 96
10.7.1.4.1. Flat Shading ........................................................................................................ 96
10.7.1.4.2. Smooth Shading ................................................................................................. 97
10.7.1.5. Face Culling ................................................................................................................. 97
10.7.1.5.1. Front Faces ......................................................................................................... 97
10.7.1.5.2. Back Faces .......................................................................................................... 97
10.7.1.5.3. No Culling ........................................................................................................... 97
10.7.1.6. Lighting ...................................................................................................................... 97
10.7.1.7. Specular ...................................................................................................................... 97
10.7.1.8. Draw Lines .................................................................................................................. 97
10.7.1.9. Edge Angle/Render Edge Angle ................................................................................... 97
10.7.1.10. Line Width ................................................................................................................. 97
10.7.1.11. Line Color .................................................................................................................. 98
10.7.1.12. Symbols .................................................................................................................... 98
10.7.1.12.1. Symbol ............................................................................................................. 98
10.7.1.12.2. Symbol Size ...................................................................................................... 98
10.7.1.13. Visibility ..................................................................................................................... 98
10.7.2. Render Options - Multiple 2D Regions .................................................................................. 98
10.7.3. Render Options - Profile Geometry ....................................................................................... 98
10.7.3.1. Color ........................................................................................................................... 99
10.7.3.2. Lines ........................................................................................................................... 99

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. vii
CFX-Pre User's Guide

10.7.3.3. Transparency ............................................................................................................... 99

10.7.3.4. Properties .................................................................................................................... 99
10.8. Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre ............................................................................................................. 99
10.8.1. Assemblies, Primitive Regions, and Composite Regions .......................................................... 99
10.8.1.1. Composite Regions .................................................................................................... 100
10.8.1.1.1. Applications of the Composite Regions .............................................................. 100
10.8.2. Domain and Subdomain Locations ..................................................................................... 101
10.8.3. Boundary Condition and Domain Interface Locations .......................................................... 101
10.8.4. Importing Multi-domain Cases ............................................................................................ 101
10.9. Advanced Topic: cfx5gtmconv Application ................................................................................... 101
11. Regions .............................................................................................................................................. 103
11.1. Primitive Regions ........................................................................................................................ 103
11.2. Composite Regions ..................................................................................................................... 103
11.3. Using Regions in CFX-Pre ............................................................................................................ 104
11.4. Editing Regions in CFX-Pre .......................................................................................................... 104
11.4.1. Defining and Editing Primitive Regions ............................................................................... 104
11.4.1.1. Advanced Options ..................................................................................................... 106
11.4.2. Defining and Editing Composite Regions ............................................................................ 106
11.4.2.1. Union ........................................................................................................................ 107
11.4.2.2. Alias .......................................................................................................................... 107
11.5. Applications of Composite Regions ............................................................................................. 107
12. Analysis Type ..................................................................................................................................... 109
12.1. Basic Settings Tab ........................................................................................................................ 109
12.1.1. Analysis Type Settings ........................................................................................................ 109
12.1.1.1. Steady State .............................................................................................................. 109
12.1.1.2. Transient ................................................................................................................... 109
12.1.1.2.1. Time Duration ................................................................................................... 109
12.1.1.2.2. Time Steps ........................................................................................................ 110
12.1.1.2.3. Initial Time ........................................................................................................ 110
12.1.1.3. Transient Blade Row ................................................................................................... 111
13. Domains ............................................................................................................................................ 113
13.1. Creating New Domains ............................................................................................................... 113
13.2. The Details View for Domain Objects ........................................................................................... 114
13.3. Using Multiple Domains .............................................................................................................. 114
13.3.1. Multiple Fluid Domains ....................................................................................................... 114
13.3.2. Multiple Solid Domains ...................................................................................................... 115
13.4. User Interface ............................................................................................................................. 115
13.4.1. Basic Settings Tab ............................................................................................................... 115
13.4.1.1. Location and Type ...................................................................................................... 115
13.4.1.1.1. Location ............................................................................................................ 115
13.4.1.1.2. Domain Type ..................................................................................................... 116
13.4.1.1.3. Coordinate Frame ............................................................................................. 116
13.4.1.2. Fluid and Particle Definitions and Solid Definitions ..................................................... 116
13.4.1.2.1. Morphology ...................................................................................................... 117
13.4.1.2.1.1. Mean Diameter ........................................................................................ 117
13.4.1.2.1.2. Minimum Volume Fraction ........................................................................ 117
13.4.1.2.1.3. Maximum Packing .................................................................................... 117
13.4.1.2.1.4. Restitution Coefficient .............................................................................. 118
13.4.1.2.1.5. Particle Diameter Distribution ................................................................... 118
13.4.1.2.1.6. Particle Shape Factors ............................................................................... 118
13.4.1.2.1.7. Particle Diameter Change ......................................................................... 118
13.4.1.2.1.7.1. Swelling Model ................................................................................ 118

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
viii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CFX-Pre User's Guide

13.4.1.3. Particle Tracking ........................................................................................................ 118

13.4.1.4. Domain Models ......................................................................................................... 118
13.4.1.4.1. Pressure: Reference Pressure .............................................................................. 118
13.4.1.4.2. Buoyancy: Option .............................................................................................. 118
13.4.1.4.3. Domain Motion ................................................................................................. 119
13.4.1.4.4. Mesh Deformation ............................................................................................ 121
13.4.1.4.5. Passage Definition ............................................................................................. 121
13.4.2. Fluid Models Tab ................................................................................................................ 122
13.4.2.1. Multiphase Options ................................................................................................... 122
13.4.2.1.1. Homogeneous Model ....................................................................................... 122
13.4.2.1.2. Free Surface Model ........................................................................................... 122
13.4.2.1.3. Multiphase Reactions ........................................................................................ 122
13.4.2.2. Heat Transfer ............................................................................................................. 123
13.4.2.2.1. Homogeneous Model ....................................................................................... 123
13.4.2.2.2. Heat Transfer: Option ......................................................................................... 123
13.4.2.3. Turbulence ................................................................................................................ 123
13.4.2.3.1. Homogeneous Model ....................................................................................... 124
13.4.2.3.2. Turbulence: Option ............................................................................................ 124
13.4.2.3.3. Buoyancy Turbulence ........................................................................................ 127
13.4.2.3.4. Wall Function .................................................................................................... 127
13.4.2.3.5. Turbulent Flux Closure for Heat Transfer ............................................................. 127
13.4.2.4. Reaction or Combustion Model .................................................................................. 127
13.4.2.4.1. Soot Model ....................................................................................................... 128
13.4.2.5. Thermal Radiation Model ........................................................................................... 128
13.4.2.6. Electromagnetic Model .............................................................................................. 129
13.4.2.7. Component Details .................................................................................................... 129
13.4.2.8. Additional Variable Details ......................................................................................... 130
13.4.3. Polydispersed Fluid Tab ...................................................................................................... 130
13.4.4. Fluid Specific Models Tab .................................................................................................... 131
13.4.4.1. Fluid List Box ............................................................................................................. 131
13.4.4.2. Kinetic Theory ............................................................................................................ 131
13.4.4.3. Heat Transfer Model ................................................................................................... 131
13.4.4.4. Turbulence Model ...................................................................................................... 132
13.4.4.5. Turbulent Wall Functions ............................................................................................ 132
13.4.4.6. Combustion Model .................................................................................................... 132
13.4.4.7. Erosion Model ........................................................................................................... 132
13.4.4.8. Fluid Buoyancy Model ................................................................................................ 133
13.4.4.9. Solid Pressure Model .................................................................................................. 133
13.4.4.10. Component Details .................................................................................................. 133
13.4.4.11. Additional Variable Models ....................................................................................... 133
13.4.5. Fluid Pair Models Tab .......................................................................................................... 133
13.4.5.1. Fluid Pair List box ....................................................................................................... 133
13.4.5.2. Particle Coupling ....................................................................................................... 134
13.4.5.3. Surface Tension Coefficient ........................................................................................ 134
13.4.5.4. Surface Tension Force Model ...................................................................................... 134
13.4.5.5. Interphase Transfer Model .......................................................................................... 134
13.4.5.5.1. Particle Model ................................................................................................... 134
13.4.5.5.2. Mixture Model .................................................................................................. 134
13.4.5.5.3. Free Surface Model ........................................................................................... 134
13.4.5.5.4. None ................................................................................................................ 135
13.4.5.6. Momentum Transfer .................................................................................................. 135
13.4.5.6.1. Drag Force ........................................................................................................ 135

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. ix
CFX-Pre User's Guide

13.4.5.6.2. Particle User Source ........................................................................................... 135

13.4.5.6.3. Lift Force ........................................................................................................... 135
13.4.5.6.4. Virtual Mass Force ............................................................................................. 136
13.4.5.6.5. Wall Lubrication Force ....................................................................................... 136
13.4.5.6.6. Turbulent Dispersion Force ................................................................................ 136
13.4.5.6.7. Pressure Gradient Force ..................................................................................... 136
13.4.5.7. Turbulence Transfer .................................................................................................... 136
13.4.5.8. Heat Transfer ............................................................................................................. 136
13.4.5.9. Mass Transfer ............................................................................................................. 136
13.4.5.10. Additional Variable Pairs ........................................................................................... 137
13.4.5.11. Component Pairs ..................................................................................................... 137
13.4.5.11.1. Eulerian | Eulerian Pairs .................................................................................... 137
13.4.5.11.2. Continuous | Particle Pairs ............................................................................... 138
13.4.5.12. Particle Breakup ....................................................................................................... 138
13.4.5.13. Particle Collision ...................................................................................................... 139
13.4.6. Solid Models Tab ................................................................................................................ 139
13.4.6.1. Heat Transfer ............................................................................................................. 139
13.4.6.2. Thermal Radiation Model ........................................................................................... 140
13.4.6.3. Electromagnetic Model .............................................................................................. 140
13.4.6.4. Additional Variables Models ....................................................................................... 140
13.4.6.5. Solid Motion .............................................................................................................. 140
13.4.7. Porosity Settings Tab .......................................................................................................... 141
13.4.7.1. Area Porosity ............................................................................................................. 141
13.4.7.2. Volume Porosity ......................................................................................................... 141
13.4.7.3. Loss Models ............................................................................................................... 141
13.4.7.4. Contact Area Model ................................................................................................... 142
13.4.7.5. Fluid Solid Area Density ............................................................................................. 142
13.4.7.6. Fluid Solid Heat Transfer ............................................................................................. 142
13.4.7.7. Additional Variable Pair Details ................................................................................... 143
13.4.8. Particle Injection Regions Tab ............................................................................................. 143
13.4.8.1. Particle Injection Regions List Box .............................................................................. 143
13.4.8.2. Coordinate Frame ...................................................................................................... 143
13.4.8.3. Fluid: List Box ............................................................................................................. 144
13.4.8.4. [fluid name] Check Box .............................................................................................. 144
13.4.8.4.1. Injection Method .............................................................................................. 144
13.4.8.4.1.1. Settings for Cone Definition ...................................................................... 145
13.4.8.4.1.2. Settings for Injection Velocity .................................................................... 145
13.4.8.4.1.3. Settings for Particle Primary Breakup ......................................................... 146
13.4.9. Initialization Tab ................................................................................................................. 147
13.4.10. Solver Control Tab ............................................................................................................ 147
13.4.10.1.Timescale Control for Solid Domains (Transient Cases; Transient Blade Row Cases with
Harmonic Balance) .................................................................................................................. 147
14. Domain Interfaces ............................................................................................................................. 149
14.1. Creating and Editing a Domain Interface ..................................................................................... 149
14.1.1. Domain Interface: Basic Settings Tab ................................................................................... 150
14.1.1.1. Interface Type ............................................................................................................ 150
14.1.1.2. Interface Side 1/2 ....................................................................................................... 150
14.1.1.2.1. Domain (Filter) .................................................................................................. 150
14.1.1.2.2. Region List ........................................................................................................ 150
14.1.1.3. Interface Models ........................................................................................................ 151
14.1.1.3.1. Interface Model Option: Translational Periodicity ................................................ 151
14.1.1.3.2. Interface Model Option: Rotational Periodicity ................................................... 151

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
x of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CFX-Pre User's Guide

14.1.1.3.3. Interface Model Option: General Connection ..................................................... 151

14.1.1.3.3.1. Frame Change/Mixing Model .................................................................... 151
14.1.1.3.3.1.1. Option ............................................................................................. 151
14.1.1.3.3.1.2. Frozen Rotor: Rotational Offset Check Box ........................................ 151
14.1.1.3.3.1.3. Stage: Pressure Profile Decay Check Box ........................................... 151
14.1.1.3.3.1.4. Stage: Downstream Velocity Constraint ............................................ 152
14.1.1.3.3.2. Pitch Change Options ............................................................................... 152
14.1.1.3.3.2.1. Pitch Change: Value: Pitch Ratio ........................................................ 152
14.1.1.3.3.2.2. Pitch Change: Specified Pitch Angles: Pitch Angle Side 1/2 ................ 152
14.1.2. Domain Interface: Additional Interface Models Tab .............................................................. 152
14.1.2.1. Mass And Momentum ................................................................................................ 152
14.1.2.1.1. Conservative Interface Flux ................................................................................ 153
14.1.2.1.2. No Slip Wall ....................................................................................................... 153
14.1.2.1.2.1. No Slip Wall: Wall Velocity .......................................................................... 153
14.1.2.1.3. Free Slip Wall ..................................................................................................... 153
14.1.2.1.4. Side Dependent ................................................................................................ 154
14.1.2.2. Heat Transfer ............................................................................................................. 154
14.1.2.2.1. Conservative Interface Flux ................................................................................ 154
14.1.2.2.2. Side Dependent ................................................................................................ 154
14.1.2.3. Electric Field .............................................................................................................. 154
14.1.2.3.1. Conservative Interface Flux ................................................................................ 154
14.1.2.3.2. Side Dependent ................................................................................................ 155
14.1.2.4. Additional Variable .................................................................................................... 155
14.1.2.4.1. Conservative Interface Flux ................................................................................ 155
14.1.2.4.2. Side Dependent ................................................................................................ 155
14.1.2.5. Conditional Connection Control ................................................................................. 155
14.1.3. Domain Interface: Solid Interface Models Tab ...................................................................... 156
14.1.4. Domain Interface: Mesh Connection Tab ............................................................................. 156
14.1.4.1. Mesh Connection Method .......................................................................................... 156
14.1.4.1.1. Mesh Connection: Option .................................................................................. 156
14.1.4.1.2. Intersection Control .......................................................................................... 157
14.1.4.1.2.1. Intersection Control: Option ...................................................................... 157
15. Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................................ 161
15.1. Default Boundary Condition ........................................................................................................ 161
15.2. Creating and Editing a Boundary Condition ................................................................................. 162
15.2.1. Boundary Basic Settings Tab ............................................................................................... 162
15.2.1.1. Boundary Type .......................................................................................................... 163
15.2.1.2. Location .................................................................................................................... 163
15.2.1.3. Coordinate Frame ...................................................................................................... 163
15.2.1.4. Frame Type ................................................................................................................ 163
15.2.1.5. Profile Boundary Conditions ....................................................................................... 164
15.2.1.5.1. Use Profile Data ................................................................................................. 164
15.2.2. Boundary Details Tab .......................................................................................................... 164
15.2.2.1. Boundary Details: Inlet ............................................................................................... 165
15.2.2.1.1. Flow Regime: Inlet ............................................................................................. 165
15.2.2.1.2. Mesh Motion: Inlet ............................................................................................ 165
15.2.2.2. Boundary Details: Outlet ............................................................................................ 165
15.2.2.2.1. Flow Regime: Outlet .......................................................................................... 165
15.2.2.2.2. Mass and Momentum: Outlet ............................................................................. 165
15.2.2.2.3. Pressure Averaging: Outlet ................................................................................. 165
15.2.2.2.4. Thermal Radiation: Outlet .................................................................................. 165
15.2.2.2.5. Mesh Motion: Outlet .......................................................................................... 166

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xi
CFX-Pre User's Guide

15.2.2.3. Boundary Details: Opening ........................................................................................ 166

15.2.2.3.1. Mass and Momentum: Opening ......................................................................... 166
15.2.2.3.2. Flow Direction: Opening .................................................................................... 166
15.2.2.3.3. Loss Coefficient: Opening .................................................................................. 166
15.2.2.3.4. Turbulence: Opening ......................................................................................... 166
15.2.2.3.5. Heat Transfer: Opening ...................................................................................... 166
15.2.2.3.6. Thermal Radiation: Opening .............................................................................. 166
15.2.2.3.7. Component Details: Opening ............................................................................ 166
15.2.2.3.8. Mesh Motion: Opening ...................................................................................... 166
15.2.2.4. Boundary Details: Wall ................................................................................................ 167
15.2.2.4.1. Mass And Momentum: Wall ............................................................................... 167
15.2.2.4.1.1. Slip Model Settings ................................................................................... 167
15.2.2.4.1.2. Shear Stress Settings ................................................................................ 167
15.2.2.4.1.3. Wall Velocity Settings ................................................................................ 167
15.2.2.4.1.3.1. Axis Definition ................................................................................. 167
15.2.2.4.2. Wall Roughness ................................................................................................. 167
15.2.2.4.3. Solid Motion: Wall .............................................................................................. 168
15.2.2.4.4. Heat Transfer: Wall ............................................................................................. 168
15.2.2.4.5. Fluid Pairs: Wall .................................................................................................. 168
15.2.2.4.6. Wall Contact Model ........................................................................................... 168
15.2.2.4.7. Thermal Radiation: Wall ..................................................................................... 168
15.2.2.4.8. Mesh Motion: Wall ............................................................................................. 168
15.2.2.5. Boundary Details: Symmetry ...................................................................................... 168
15.2.2.6. Boundary Details: Interfaces ....................................................................................... 169
15.2.2.7. Mesh Motion ............................................................................................................. 169
15.2.2.8. Electric Field .............................................................................................................. 169
15.2.3. Nonoverlap Conditions Tab ................................................................................................. 170
15.2.4. Boundary Fluid Values Tab .................................................................................................. 170
15.2.4.1. Fluid Values: Turbulence ............................................................................................. 170
15.2.4.1.1. Intensity and Length Scale ................................................................................. 171
15.2.4.1.2. Intensity and Eddy Viscosity Ratio ...................................................................... 171
15.2.4.1.3. k and Epsilon .................................................................................................... 171
15.2.4.1.4. Intensity and Auto Compute Length .................................................................. 171
15.2.4.2. Fluid Values: Volume Fraction ..................................................................................... 171
15.2.4.3. Fluid Values: Heat Transfer .......................................................................................... 172
15.2.4.4. Fluid Values for Inlets and Openings ........................................................................... 172
15.2.4.4.1. Multiphase ........................................................................................................ 172
15.2.4.4.2. MUSIG settings ................................................................................................. 172
15.2.4.4.3. Particle Tracking Settings for Inlets and Openings .............................................. 173
15.2.4.4.3.1. Phase List ................................................................................................. 173
15.2.4.4.3.2. Particle Behavior ....................................................................................... 173
15.2.4.4.3.3. Mass and Momentum ............................................................................... 173
15.2.4.4.3.4. Particle Position ........................................................................................ 173
15.2.4.4.3.5. Particle Locations ..................................................................................... 173
15.2.4.4.3.6. Number of Positions ................................................................................. 173
15.2.4.4.3.7. Particle Mass Flow .................................................................................... 173
15.2.4.4.3.8. Particle Diameter Distribution ................................................................... 173
15.2.4.4.3.9. Heat Transfer ............................................................................................ 173
15.2.4.4.3.10. Component Details ................................................................................. 173
15.2.4.5. Fluid Values for Outlets .............................................................................................. 173
15.2.4.6. Fluid Values for Walls .................................................................................................. 174
15.2.4.6.1. Particle Tracking Settings for Walls ..................................................................... 174

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CFX-Pre User's Guide

15.2.4.6.2. Settings for Particle-Wall Interaction .................................................................. 174

15.2.4.7. Fluid Values for Interfaces ........................................................................................... 175
15.2.4.7.1. Fluid-Solid Interface, Fluid Side .......................................................................... 175
15.2.4.7.2. Fluid-Fluid and Periodic Interfaces ..................................................................... 175
15.2.5. Boundary Solid Values Tab .................................................................................................. 175
15.2.5.1. Heat Transfer ............................................................................................................. 175
15.2.5.1.1. Adiabatic .......................................................................................................... 175
15.2.5.1.2. Fixed Temperature ............................................................................................ 175
15.2.5.1.3. Heat Flux .......................................................................................................... 175
15.2.5.1.4. Heat Transfer Coefficient ................................................................................... 176
15.2.5.1.5. Conservative Interface Flux ................................................................................ 176
15.2.5.2. Additional Variables ................................................................................................... 176
15.2.6. Boundary Sources Tab ........................................................................................................ 176
15.2.7. Boundary Plot Options Tab ................................................................................................. 176
15.2.7.1. Boundary Contour ..................................................................................................... 176
15.2.7.2. Boundary Vector ........................................................................................................ 177
15.3. Interface Boundary Conditions .................................................................................................... 177
15.4. Symmetry Boundary Conditions .................................................................................................. 177
15.5. Working with Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................. 177
15.5.1. Boundary Condition Visualization ....................................................................................... 177
15.5.2. Profile Data and CEL Functions ............................................................................................ 178
15.5.2.1. Types of Discrete Profiles ............................................................................................ 178
15.5.2.2. Multiphase Boundary Condition Example ................................................................... 178
16. Initialization ...................................................................................................................................... 179
16.1. Using the User Interface .............................................................................................................. 179
16.1.1. Domain: Initialization Tab .................................................................................................... 179
16.1.1.1. Domain Initialization .................................................................................................. 180
16.1.2. Global Settings and Fluid Settings Tabs ............................................................................... 180
16.1.2.1. Coordinate Frame Check Box ..................................................................................... 180
16.1.2.1.1. Coordinate Frame Check Box: Coordinate Frame ................................................ 180
16.1.2.2. Frame Type Check Box ............................................................................................... 180
16.1.2.2.1. Frame Type ....................................................................................................... 180
16.1.2.3. Initial Conditions: Velocity Type .................................................................................. 181
16.1.2.4. Initial Conditions: Cartesian Velocity Components ....................................................... 181
16.1.2.4.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 181
16.1.2.4.2. Velocity Scale Check Box ................................................................................... 181
16.1.2.4.2.1. Velocity Scale Check Box: Value ................................................................. 181
16.1.2.4.3. U, V, W ............................................................................................................... 181
16.1.2.5. Initial Conditions: Cylindrical Velocity Components ..................................................... 181
16.1.2.5.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 181
16.1.2.5.2. Velocity Scale Check Box ................................................................................... 182
16.1.2.5.3. Axial Component, Radial Component, Theta Component .................................... 182
16.1.2.6. Initial Conditions: Static Pressure ................................................................................ 182
16.1.2.6.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 182
16.1.2.6.2. Relative Pressure ............................................................................................... 182
16.1.2.7. Initial Conditions: Turbulence ..................................................................................... 182
16.1.2.7.1. Fractional Intensity ............................................................................................ 183
16.1.2.7.2. Eddy Viscosity Ratio .......................................................................................... 183
16.1.2.7.3. Eddy Length Scale ............................................................................................. 183
16.1.2.7.4. Turbulence Kinetic Energy ................................................................................. 184
16.1.2.7.5. Turbulence Eddy Dissipation ............................................................................. 184
16.1.2.7.6. Turbulence Eddy Frequency .............................................................................. 184

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xiii
CFX-Pre User's Guide

16.1.2.7.7. Reynolds Stress Components ............................................................................ 184

16.1.2.8. Initial Conditions: Temperature ................................................................................... 185
16.1.2.9. Initial Conditions: Radiation Intensity .......................................................................... 185
16.1.2.9.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 185
16.1.2.10. Initial Conditions: Mixture Fraction ........................................................................... 185
16.1.2.10.1. Option ............................................................................................................ 185
16.1.2.10.2. Mixture Fraction .............................................................................................. 185
16.1.2.11. Initial Conditions: Mixture Fraction Variance .............................................................. 186
16.1.2.11.1. Option ............................................................................................................ 186
16.1.2.11.2. Mix. Fracn. Variance .......................................................................................... 186
16.1.2.12. Initial Conditions: Component Details ....................................................................... 186
16.1.2.12.1. List Box ........................................................................................................... 186
16.1.2.12.2. [component name]: Option ............................................................................. 186
16.1.2.12.3. [component name]: Mass Fraction ................................................................... 186
16.1.2.13. Initial Conditions: Additional Variable Details ............................................................ 186
16.1.2.14. Fluid Specific Initialization ........................................................................................ 186
16.1.2.15. Fluid Specific Initialization: List Box ........................................................................... 187
16.1.2.16. Fluid Specific Initialization: [fluid name] Check Box .................................................... 187
16.1.2.17. Fluid Specific Initialization: [fluid name] Check Box: Initial Conditions ........................ 187
16.1.2.17.1. Velocity Type ................................................................................................... 187
16.1.2.17.2. Volume Fraction: Option .................................................................................. 187
16.1.2.17.3. Volume Fraction: Volume Fraction .................................................................... 187
16.1.2.18. Solid Specific Initialization ........................................................................................ 187
16.1.2.19. Solid Specific Initialization: List Box ........................................................................... 187
16.1.2.20. Solid Specific Initialization: [solid name] Check Box ................................................... 188
17. Source Points ..................................................................................................................................... 189
17.1. Basic Settings Tab ........................................................................................................................ 189
17.2. Sources Tab ................................................................................................................................. 189
17.2.1. Single-Phase Fluid Sources ................................................................................................. 190
17.2.1.1. Component Mass Fractions ........................................................................................ 190
17.2.1.2. Additional Variables ................................................................................................... 190
17.2.1.3. Continuity ................................................................................................................. 190
17.2.1.3.1. Continuity Option ............................................................................................. 190
17.2.1.3.2. Additional Variables .......................................................................................... 190
17.2.1.3.3. Component Mass Fractions ............................................................................... 190
17.2.1.3.4. Temperature ..................................................................................................... 191
17.2.1.3.5. Velocity ............................................................................................................. 191
17.2.1.4. Energy ....................................................................................................................... 191
17.2.1.5. Turbulence Eddy Dissipation or Turbulence Kinetic Energy .......................................... 191
17.2.2. Multiphase Bulk Sources ..................................................................................................... 191
17.2.3. Multiplying Sources by Porosity .......................................................................................... 191
17.3. Fluid Sources Tab ........................................................................................................................ 191
17.4. Sources in Solid Domains ............................................................................................................ 192
17.5. Source Points and Mesh Deformation .......................................................................................... 192
18. Subdomains ...................................................................................................................................... 193
18.1. Creating New Subdomains .......................................................................................................... 193
18.2. The Subdomains Tab ................................................................................................................... 194
18.3. Basic Settings Tab ........................................................................................................................ 194
18.3.1. Location ............................................................................................................................. 194
18.3.2. Coordinate Frame ............................................................................................................... 194
18.4. Sources Tab ................................................................................................................................. 194
18.4.1. Single-Phase Fluid Sources ................................................................................................. 195

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xiv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CFX-Pre User's Guide

18.4.1.1. Momentum Source/Porous Loss ................................................................................. 195

18.4.1.2. Equation Sources ....................................................................................................... 195
18.4.1.2.1. Component Mass Fractions ............................................................................... 195
18.4.1.2.2. Additional Variables .......................................................................................... 196
18.4.1.2.3. Continuity ......................................................................................................... 196
18.4.1.2.4. Turbulence Quantities ....................................................................................... 197
18.4.1.2.5. Energy .............................................................................................................. 197
18.4.2. Bulk Sources for Multiphase Simulations ............................................................................. 197
18.4.3. Multiplying Sources by Porosity .......................................................................................... 197
18.5. Fluids Tab .................................................................................................................................... 197
18.5.1. Particle Absorption ............................................................................................................. 198
18.6. Mesh Motion .............................................................................................................................. 198
19. Rigid Bodies ...................................................................................................................................... 199
19.1. Rigid Body User Interface ............................................................................................................ 199
19.1.1. Insert Rigid Body Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 199
19.1.2. Basic Settings Tab ............................................................................................................... 200
19.1.2.1. Mass .......................................................................................................................... 200
19.1.2.2. Location .................................................................................................................... 200
19.1.2.3. Coordinate Frame ...................................................................................................... 200
19.1.2.4. Mass Moment of Inertia ............................................................................................. 201
19.1.3. Dynamics Tab ..................................................................................................................... 201
19.1.3.1. External Force Definitions .......................................................................................... 201
19.1.3.2. External Torque Definitions ........................................................................................ 202
19.1.3.3. Degrees of Freedom .................................................................................................. 203
19.1.3.3.1. Translational Degrees of Freedom ...................................................................... 203
19.1.3.3.2. Rotational Degrees of Freedom ......................................................................... 203
19.1.3.4. Gravity ...................................................................................................................... 203
19.1.4. Initial Conditions Tab .......................................................................................................... 203
19.1.4.1. Center of Mass ........................................................................................................... 204
19.1.4.2. Linear Velocity ........................................................................................................... 204
19.1.4.3. Angular Velocity ........................................................................................................ 204
19.1.4.4. Linear Acceleration .................................................................................................... 204
19.1.4.5. Angular Acceleration ................................................................................................. 204
20. Units and Dimensions ....................................................................................................................... 205
20.1. Units Syntax ................................................................................................................................ 205
20.2. Using Units in CFX-Pre ................................................................................................................. 206
20.2.1. Units Commonly Used in CFX .............................................................................................. 206
20.2.2. Defining Your Own Units .................................................................................................... 209
20.3. Setting the Solution Units ........................................................................................................... 209
21. Solver Control .................................................................................................................................... 211
21.1. Basic Settings Tab ........................................................................................................................ 211
21.1.1. Basic Settings: Common ..................................................................................................... 211
21.1.1.1. Advection Scheme ..................................................................................................... 211
21.1.1.2. Transient Scheme ...................................................................................................... 211
21.1.1.3. Turbulence Numerics ................................................................................................. 211
21.1.1.4. Convergence Criteria ................................................................................................. 212
21.1.1.5. Elapsed Wall Clock Time Control ................................................................................. 212
21.1.1.6. Interrupt Control ........................................................................................................ 212
21.1.1.6.1. List Box ............................................................................................................. 213
21.1.1.6.1.1. [Interrupt Condition Name] ....................................................................... 213
21.1.1.7. Junction Box Routine ................................................................................................. 213

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xv
CFX-Pre User's Guide

21.1.2. Basic Settings for Steady-State Simulations and for Transient Blade Row Cases that use the
Harmonic Balance Transient Method ............................................................................................. 213
21.1.2.1. Convergence Control: Min. Iterations .......................................................................... 213
21.1.2.2. Convergence Control: Max. Iterations .......................................................................... 213
21.1.2.3. Convergence Control: Fluid Timescale Control ............................................................ 213
21.1.2.4. Convergence Control: Solid Timescale Control ............................................................ 214
21.1.3. Basic Settings for Transient Simulations ............................................................................... 214
21.1.3.1. Convergence Control ................................................................................................. 214
21.1.3.1.1. Min. Coeff. Loops ............................................................................................... 214
21.1.3.1.2. Max. Coeff. Loops ............................................................................................... 214
21.1.3.1.3. Fluid Timescale Control ..................................................................................... 214
21.1.3.1.4. Solid Timescale Control ..................................................................................... 215
21.1.4. Immersed Solid Control ...................................................................................................... 215
21.2. Equation Class Settings Tab ......................................................................................................... 216
21.3. Particle Control Tab ..................................................................................................................... 217
21.4. Rigid Body Control Tab ................................................................................................................ 217
21.5. Advanced Options Tab ................................................................................................................ 220
22. Output Control .................................................................................................................................. 227
22.1. User Interface ............................................................................................................................. 227
22.1.1. Results Tab ......................................................................................................................... 227
22.1.1.1. Option ....................................................................................................................... 227
22.1.1.2. File Compression ....................................................................................................... 227
22.1.1.3. Output Variables List .................................................................................................. 228
22.1.1.4. Output Equation Residuals Check Box ........................................................................ 228
22.1.1.5. Output Boundary Flows Check Box ............................................................................. 228
22.1.1.6. Output Variable Operators Check Box ......................................................................... 228
22.1.1.7. Extra Output Variables List ......................................................................................... 228
22.1.1.8. Output Particle Boundary Vertex Fields Check Box ...................................................... 228
22.1.2. Backup Tab ......................................................................................................................... 228
22.1.2.1. List Box ...................................................................................................................... 228
22.1.2.2. [Backup Results Name] ............................................................................................... 228
22.1.2.2.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 228
22.1.2.2.2. File Compression ............................................................................................... 228
22.1.2.2.3. Output Variables List ......................................................................................... 229
22.1.2.2.4. Output Equation Residuals Check Box ............................................................... 229
22.1.2.2.5. Output Boundary Flows Check Box .................................................................... 229
22.1.2.2.6. Output Variable Operators Check Box ................................................................ 229
22.1.2.2.7. Extra Output Variables List ................................................................................. 229
22.1.2.2.8. Output Particle Boundary Vertex Fields Check Box ............................................. 229
22.1.2.2.9. Include Tracks of One-way Coupled Particles Check Box ..................................... 229
22.1.2.2.10. Output Frequency: Option ............................................................................... 229
22.1.2.3. Backup Data Retention .............................................................................................. 229
22.1.2.3.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 229
22.1.3. Transient Results Tab .......................................................................................................... 229
22.1.3.1. List Box ...................................................................................................................... 230
22.1.3.2. [Transient Results Name] ............................................................................................ 230
22.1.3.2.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 230
22.1.3.2.2. File Compression ............................................................................................... 230
22.1.3.2.3. Output Variables List ......................................................................................... 230
22.1.3.2.4. Include Mesh .................................................................................................... 230
22.1.3.2.5. Output Equation Residuals Check Box ............................................................... 230
22.1.3.2.6. Output Boundary Flows Check Box .................................................................... 230

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xvi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CFX-Pre User's Guide

22.1.3.2.7. Output Variable Operators Check Box ................................................................ 230

22.1.3.2.8. Extra Output Variables List ................................................................................. 230
22.1.3.2.9. Output Particle Boundary Vertex Fields Check Box ............................................. 231
22.1.3.2.10. Output Frequency ........................................................................................... 231
22.1.3.3. Transient Blade Row Results ....................................................................................... 231
22.1.4. Transient Statistics Tab ........................................................................................................ 232
22.1.4.1. List Box ...................................................................................................................... 232
22.1.4.2. [Transient Statistics Name] ......................................................................................... 232
22.1.4.2.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 232
22.1.4.2.2. Output Variables List ......................................................................................... 232
22.1.4.2.3. Start Iteration List Check Box ............................................................................. 232
22.1.4.2.3.1. Start Iteration List Check Box: Start Iteration List ........................................ 233
22.1.4.2.4. Stop Iteration List Check Box ............................................................................. 233
22.1.4.2.4.1. Stop Iteration List Check Box: Stop Iteration List ........................................ 233
22.1.5. Monitor Tab ........................................................................................................................ 233
22.1.5.1. Monitor Objects Check Box ........................................................................................ 233
22.1.5.1.1. Monitor Coeff. Loop Convergence ...................................................................... 234
22.1.5.1.2. Monitor Balances: Option .................................................................................. 234
22.1.5.1.3. Monitor Forces: Option ...................................................................................... 234
22.1.5.1.4. Monitor Residuals: Option ................................................................................. 234
22.1.5.1.5. Monitor Totals: Option ....................................................................................... 234
22.1.5.1.6. Monitor Particles: Option ................................................................................... 234
22.1.5.1.7. Efficiency Output Check Box .............................................................................. 235
22.1.5.1.7.1. Inflow Boundary ....................................................................................... 235
22.1.5.1.7.2. Outflow Boundary .................................................................................... 235
22.1.5.1.7.3. Efficiency Type .......................................................................................... 235
22.1.5.1.7.4. Efficiency Calculation Method ................................................................... 235
22.1.5.1.8. Monitor Points And Expressions List Box ............................................................ 235
22.1.5.1.8.1. [Monitor Name]: Option ............................................................................ 235
22.1.5.1.8.2. [Monitor Name]: Output Variables List ....................................................... 236
22.1.5.1.8.3. [Monitor Name]: Cartesian Coordinates ..................................................... 236
22.1.5.1.8.4. [Monitor Name]: Cylindrical Coordinates ................................................... 236
22.1.5.1.8.5. [Monitor Name]: Expression Value ............................................................. 237
22.1.5.1.8.6. [Monitor Name]: Coordinate Frame ........................................................... 237
22.1.5.1.8.7. [Monitor Name]: Monitor Location Control ................................................ 237
22.1.5.1.8.8. [Monitor Name]: Monitor Statistics ............................................................ 238
22.1.5.1.9. Aerodynamic Damping: Frame Overview ........................................................... 240
22.1.5.1.10. Aerodynamic Damping List Box ....................................................................... 240
22.1.5.1.11. Aerodynamic Damping: [Aerodynamic Damping Name]: Option ....................... 241
22.1.5.1.12. Aerodynamic Damping: [Aerodynamic Damping Name]: Normalization ............ 241
22.1.5.1.13. Aerodynamic Damping: [Aerodynamic Damping Name]: Location Type ............ 241
22.1.5.1.14. Aerodynamic Damping: [Aerodynamic Damping Name]: Integration Multipli-
er ..................................................................................................................................... 241
22.1.5.1.15. Aerodynamic Damping: [Aerodynamic Damping Name]: Integration Interval .... 241
22.1.5.1.16. Radiometer: Frame Overview ........................................................................... 241
22.1.5.1.17. Radiometer: List Box ........................................................................................ 242
22.1.5.1.17.1. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Option ................................................. 242
22.1.5.1.17.2. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Cartesian Coordinates .......................... 242
22.1.5.1.17.3. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Temperature ......................................... 242
22.1.5.1.17.4. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Quadrature Points ................................ 242
22.1.5.1.17.5. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Coordinate Frame Check Box ................ 242

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xvii
CFX-Pre User's Guide

22.1.5.1.17.6. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Coordinate Frame Check Box: Coordinate

Frame ......................................................................................................................... 242
22.1.5.1.17.7. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Diagnostic Output Level Check Box ...... 242
22.1.5.1.17.8. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Diagnostic Output Level Check Box: Dia-
gnostic Output Level .................................................................................................. 242
22.1.5.1.17.9. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Direction: Option .................................. 242
22.1.5.1.17.10. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Direction: X Component,Y Component,
Z Component ............................................................................................................. 242
22.1.5.1.18. Monitor Surfaces: Frame Overview ................................................................... 243
22.1.5.1.19. Monitor Surfaces: List Box ................................................................................ 243
22.1.5.1.19.1. Monitor Surfaces: [Monitor Surface Name]: Option ................................... 243
22.1.5.1.19.2. Monitor Surfaces: [Monitor Surface Name]: Coordinate Frame .................. 243
22.1.5.1.19.3. Monitor Surfaces: [Monitor Surface Name]: Output Variables List .............. 243
22.1.5.1.19.4. Monitor Surfaces: [Monitor Surface Name]: Output Location List .............. 243
22.1.5.1.19.5. Monitor Surfaces: [Monitor Surface Name]: File Compression Level .......... 244
22.1.5.1.19.6. Monitor Surfaces: [Monitor Surface Name]: Output Frequency ................. 244
22.1.5.1.20. Monitor Surfaces: Monitor Location Data Retention .......................................... 244
22.1.6. Particles Tab ....................................................................................................................... 244
22.1.6.1. Particle Track File Check Box ....................................................................................... 244
22.1.6.1.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 244
22.1.6.1.2. Track Positions Check Box .................................................................................. 245
22.1.6.1.3. Track Positions Check Box: Track Positions .......................................................... 245
22.1.6.1.4. Interval ............................................................................................................. 245
22.1.6.1.5. Track Distance Spacing ...................................................................................... 245
22.1.6.1.6. Track Time Spacing ............................................................................................ 245
22.1.6.1.7. Track Printing Interval Check Box ....................................................................... 246
22.1.6.1.8. Track Printing Interval Check Box: Interval .......................................................... 246
22.1.6.1.9. Keep Track File Check Box .................................................................................. 246
22.1.6.1.10. Track File Format Check Box ............................................................................. 246
22.1.6.1.11. Track File Format Check Box: Track File Format .................................................. 246
22.1.6.2. Particle Histogram ..................................................................................................... 247
22.1.6.2.1. Histogram Type ................................................................................................. 247
22.1.6.2.2. Number of Bins ................................................................................................. 247
22.1.6.2.3. Particle Definition ............................................................................................. 247
22.1.6.2.4. x Variable .......................................................................................................... 247
22.1.6.2.5. y Variable .......................................................................................................... 248
22.1.6.2.6. x Var. Lower Bound ............................................................................................ 248
22.1.6.2.7. x Var. Upper Bound ............................................................................................ 248
22.1.6.2.8. Sample Location ............................................................................................... 248
22.1.6.2.9. Export Format ................................................................................................... 248
22.1.6.2.10. Export Frequency ............................................................................................ 248
22.1.6.3. Transient Particle Diagnostics ..................................................................................... 249
22.1.6.4. Transient Particle Diagnostics: List Box ........................................................................ 249
22.1.6.5. Transient Particle Diagnostics: [Transient Particle Diagnostics Name] ........................... 249
22.1.6.5.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 249
22.1.6.5.2. Particles List ...................................................................................................... 249
22.1.6.5.3. Spray Mass Frac. ................................................................................................ 249
22.1.6.5.4. Penetration Origin and Direction: Option ........................................................... 249
22.1.6.5.5. Penetration Origin and Direction: Injection Center ............................................. 249
22.1.6.5.6. Penetration Origin and Direction: Injection Direction ......................................... 249
22.1.6.5.6.1. Option ..................................................................................................... 249
22.1.6.5.7. Axial Penetration: Option ................................................................................... 250

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xviii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CFX-Pre User's Guide

22.1.6.5.8. Radial Penetration: Option ................................................................................. 250

22.1.6.5.9. Normal Penetration: Option ............................................................................... 250
22.1.6.5.10. Spray Angle: Option ......................................................................................... 250
22.1.6.5.10.1. Spray Angle: Spray Radius at Penetration Origin Check Box ...................... 250
22.1.6.5.10.2. Spray Angle: Spray Radius at Penetration Origin Check Box: Spray Radi-
us ............................................................................................................................... 250
22.1.7. Export Results Tab .............................................................................................................. 250
22.1.7.1. List Box ...................................................................................................................... 251
22.1.7.2. [Export Name]: Option ............................................................................................... 251
22.1.7.3. [Export Name]: Export Format .................................................................................... 251
22.1.7.3.1. Filename Prefix Check Box ................................................................................. 251
22.1.7.3.2. Filename Prefix Check Box: Filename Prefix ........................................................ 251
22.1.7.3.3. Include Topology Check Box .............................................................................. 251
22.1.7.3.4. Include File Info Header Check Box .................................................................... 251
22.1.7.3.5. Precision Check Box .......................................................................................... 251
22.1.7.3.6. Precision Check Box: Precision ........................................................................... 252
22.1.7.4. [Export Name]: Export Frequency ............................................................................... 252
22.1.7.4.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 252
22.1.7.5. [Export Name]: Export Surface .................................................................................... 252
22.1.7.5.1. List Box ............................................................................................................. 252
22.1.7.5.2. [Export Surface Name]: Option .......................................................................... 252
22.1.7.5.3. [Export Surface Name]: Particle Definition List .................................................... 253
22.1.7.5.4. [Export Surface Name]: Output Boundary List .................................................... 253
22.1.7.5.5. [Export Surface Name]: Location Type ................................................................ 253
22.1.7.5.6. [Export Surface Name]: Output Variables List ...................................................... 253
22.1.7.5.7. [Export Surface Name]: Output Nodal Area Vectors Check Box ............................ 253
22.1.7.5.8. [Export Surface Name]: Excitation Frequency ..................................................... 254
22.1.7.5.9. [Export Surface Name]: Accumulation Period ..................................................... 254
22.1.8. Common Settings .............................................................................................................. 254
22.1.8.1. Option ....................................................................................................................... 254
22.1.8.2. File Compression ....................................................................................................... 255
22.1.8.3. Output Variables List .................................................................................................. 256
22.1.8.4. Output Equation Residuals Check Box ........................................................................ 256
22.1.8.5. Output Boundary Flows Check Box ............................................................................. 256
22.1.8.6. Output Variable Operators Check Box ......................................................................... 256
22.1.8.7. Output Particle Boundary Vertex Fields Check Box ...................................................... 256
22.1.8.8. Output Frequency Options ........................................................................................ 257
22.1.8.8.1. Timestep Interval .............................................................................................. 257
22.1.8.8.2. Timestep List ..................................................................................................... 257
22.1.8.8.3. Time Interval ..................................................................................................... 257
22.1.8.8.4. Time List ........................................................................................................... 257
22.1.8.8.5. Every Timestep .................................................................................................. 257
22.1.8.8.6. Every Iteration ................................................................................................... 257
22.1.8.8.7. Iteration Interval ............................................................................................... 257
22.1.8.8.8. Iteration List ...................................................................................................... 257
22.1.8.8.9. Wall Clock Time Interval ..................................................................................... 258
22.1.8.8.10. None ............................................................................................................... 258
22.2. Working with Output Control ...................................................................................................... 258
22.2.1. Working with Transient Statistics ......................................................................................... 258
22.2.1.1. Statistic Initialization and Accumulation ..................................................................... 258
22.2.1.2. Statistics as Variable Operators ................................................................................... 259
22.2.1.3. Using Statistics with Transient Rotor-Stator Cases ....................................................... 259

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xix
CFX-Pre User's Guide

22.2.2. Working with Monitors ....................................................................................................... 260

22.2.2.1. Setting up Monitors ................................................................................................... 260
22.2.2.2. Transient/ Mesh Deformation Runs ............................................................................. 261
22.2.2.3. Output Information ................................................................................................... 261
22.2.2.4. Expression ................................................................................................................. 261
22.2.2.5. Viewing Monitor Values during a Run ......................................................................... 261
22.2.2.6. Viewing Monitor Point Values after a Run .................................................................... 261
22.2.2.7. Using Monitors in CEL ................................................................................................ 262
22.2.3. Working with Export Results ............................................................................................... 263
22.2.3.1. File Naming Conventions ........................................................................................... 263
22.2.3.2. Propagating Older Time Step Values ........................................................................... 264
22.2.3.3. Output Boundary List and Output Region Naming ...................................................... 264
22.2.3.4. Output Variables List .................................................................................................. 264
23. Transient Blade Row Models ............................................................................................................. 265
23.1. Inserting a New Transient Blade Row Models Object .................................................................... 265
23.2. Transient Blade Row Models Details View ..................................................................................... 265
23.2.1. Transient Blade Row Model Settings .................................................................................... 265
23.2.1.1. Time Transformation Disturbance Settings ................................................................. 266
23.2.1.2. Fourier Transformation Disturbance Settings .............................................................. 268
23.2.1.2.1. Basic Settings Tab .............................................................................................. 268
23.2.1.2.2. Advanced Options Tab ...................................................................................... 270
23.2.1.2.2.1. Frequency Filtering ................................................................................... 270
23.2.2. Transient Method ............................................................................................................... 270
23.2.2.1. Time Integration ........................................................................................................ 271
23.2.2.2. Harmonic Balance ...................................................................................................... 272
24. Mesh Adaption .................................................................................................................................. 273
24.1. Overview .................................................................................................................................... 273
24.2. Setting Up Mesh Adaption .......................................................................................................... 275
24.3. The Details View for Mesh Adaption ............................................................................................. 276
24.3.1. Basic Settings Tab ............................................................................................................... 276
24.3.1.1. Region List ................................................................................................................. 276
24.3.1.2. Save Intermediate Files .............................................................................................. 276
24.3.1.3. Adaption Criteria ....................................................................................................... 276
24.3.1.3.1. Variables List ..................................................................................................... 276
24.3.1.3.2. Max. Num. Steps ................................................................................................ 277
24.3.1.3.3. Option .............................................................................................................. 277
24.3.1.4. Adaption Method ...................................................................................................... 277
24.3.1.4.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 277
24.3.1.4.2. Minimum Edge Length ...................................................................................... 277
24.3.1.5. Adaption Convergence Criteria .................................................................................. 278
24.3.2. Advanced Options Tab ........................................................................................................ 278
24.3.2.1. Node Alloc. Parameter ................................................................................................ 278
24.3.2.2. Number of Levels ....................................................................................................... 278
24.4. Advanced Topic: Adaption with 2D Meshes .................................................................................. 279
25. Expert Control Parameters ................................................................................................................ 281
25.1. Modifying Expert Control Parameters .......................................................................................... 281
26. Coordinate Frames ............................................................................................................................ 283
26.1. Creating a New Coordinate Frame ............................................................................................... 283
26.2. Coordinate Frame Basic Settings Tab ........................................................................................... 283
26.2.1. Coordinate Frame: Option ................................................................................................... 284
26.2.1.1. Point and Normal ....................................................................................................... 284
26.2.1.2. Axis Points ................................................................................................................. 284

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xx of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CFX-Pre User's Guide

26.2.2. Coordinate Frame: Centroid ................................................................................................ 284

26.2.2.1. Location .................................................................................................................... 284
26.2.2.2. Centroid Type ............................................................................................................ 284
26.2.3. Coordinate Frame: Direction ............................................................................................... 285
26.2.3.1. Invert Normal Axis Direction Check Box ...................................................................... 285
26.2.3.2. Point on Reference Plane 1-3 Check Box ..................................................................... 285
26.2.3.3. Point on Reference Plane 1-3 Check Box: Coordinate ................................................... 285
26.2.4. Coord Frame Type .............................................................................................................. 285
26.2.5. Reference Coord Frame ...................................................................................................... 285
26.2.6. Origin ................................................................................................................................ 285
26.2.7. Z-Axis Point ........................................................................................................................ 286
26.2.8. X-Z Plane Point ................................................................................................................... 286
26.2.9. Frame Motion Settings ....................................................................................................... 286
26.2.10. Visibility Check Box ........................................................................................................... 287
27. User Locations ................................................................................................................................... 289
27.1. User Surfaces .............................................................................................................................. 289
27.2. Importing a User Surface into CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 289
28. Materials and Reactions .................................................................................................................... 291
28.1. Materials ..................................................................................................................................... 291
28.1.1. Library Materials ................................................................................................................. 291
28.1.2. Material Details View: Common Settings ............................................................................. 292
28.1.2.1. Option ....................................................................................................................... 292
28.1.2.2. Material Group .......................................................................................................... 292
28.1.2.2.1. User .................................................................................................................. 293
28.1.2.2.2. Air Data ............................................................................................................ 293
28.1.2.2.3. CHT Solids ......................................................................................................... 293
28.1.2.2.4. Calorically Perfect Ideal Gases ............................................................................ 293
28.1.2.2.5. Constant Property Gases / Liquids ..................................................................... 293
28.1.2.2.6. Dry/Wet Redlich Kwong .................................................................................... 293
28.1.2.2.7. Dry/Wet Redlich Kwong RGP ............................................................................. 293
28.1.2.2.8. Dry/Wet Peng Robinson RGP ............................................................................. 293
28.1.2.2.9. Dry/Wet Soave Redlich Kwong RGP ................................................................... 294
28.1.2.2.10. Dry/Wet Steam ................................................................................................ 294
28.1.2.2.11. Gas Phase Combustion .................................................................................... 294
28.1.2.2.12. Interphase Mass Transfer ................................................................................. 294
28.1.2.2.13. Particle Solids .................................................................................................. 294
28.1.2.2.14. Soot ................................................................................................................ 294
28.1.2.2.15. Water Data ...................................................................................................... 294
28.1.2.3. Material Description .................................................................................................. 294
28.1.2.4. Thermodynamic State ................................................................................................ 295
28.1.2.5. Coordinate Frame ...................................................................................................... 295
28.1.3. Material Details View: Pure Substance ................................................................................. 295
28.1.3.1. Basic Settings Tab ...................................................................................................... 295
28.1.3.2. Material Properties Tab .............................................................................................. 295
28.1.3.2.1. General Material ................................................................................................ 295
28.1.3.2.1.1. Equation of State - Value ........................................................................... 296
28.1.3.2.1.2. Equation of State - Ideal Gas ..................................................................... 296
28.1.3.2.1.3. Equation of State - Real Gas ...................................................................... 296
28.1.3.2.2. Table ................................................................................................................. 297
28.1.3.2.3. Table Generation ............................................................................................... 297
28.1.3.2.3.1. Minimum and Maximum Temperature ...................................................... 298
28.1.3.2.3.2. Minimum and Maximum Absolute Pressure .............................................. 298

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxi
CFX-Pre User's Guide

28.1.3.2.3.3. Error Tolerance ......................................................................................... 298

28.1.3.2.3.4. Maximum Points ...................................................................................... 298
28.1.3.2.3.5. Pressure/Temperature Extrapolation ......................................................... 298
28.1.4. Material Details View: Fixed Composition Mixture ................................................................ 298
28.1.4.1. Basic Settings Tab ...................................................................................................... 299
28.1.4.2. Mixture Properties Tab ............................................................................................... 299
28.1.5. Material Details View: Variable Composition Mixture ............................................................ 299
28.1.5.1. Basic Settings Tab ...................................................................................................... 299
28.1.5.2. Mixture Properties Tab ............................................................................................... 300
28.1.6. Material Details View: Homogeneous Binary Mixture ........................................................... 301
28.1.6.1. Basic Settings Tab ...................................................................................................... 301
28.1.6.2. Saturation Properties Tab ........................................................................................... 301
28.1.6.2.1. General ............................................................................................................. 301
28.1.6.2.2. Table ................................................................................................................. 302
28.1.6.2.3. Real Gas ............................................................................................................ 302
28.1.6.2.4. Table Generation ............................................................................................... 302
28.1.7. Material Details View: Reacting Mixture ............................................................................... 302
28.1.7.1. Basic Settings Tab ...................................................................................................... 302
28.1.7.2. Mixture Properties Tab ............................................................................................... 303
28.1.8. Material Details View: Hydrocarbon Fuel .............................................................................. 303
28.1.8.1. Basic Settings Tab ...................................................................................................... 303
28.1.8.2. Proximate/ Ultimate Analysis Tab ................................................................................ 303
28.1.8.3. Mixture Materials Tab ................................................................................................. 303
28.2. Reactions .................................................................................................................................... 304
28.2.1. Basic Settings Tab ............................................................................................................... 304
28.2.2. Single Step ......................................................................................................................... 304
28.2.2.1. Single Step: Basic Settings .......................................................................................... 304
28.2.2.2. Single Step: Reactants ................................................................................................ 304
28.2.2.3. Single Step: Products ................................................................................................. 305
28.2.2.4. Single Step: Reaction Rates ......................................................................................... 305
28.2.3. Multiple Step ...................................................................................................................... 305
28.2.4. Flamelet Library ................................................................................................................. 305
28.2.5. Multiphase ......................................................................................................................... 306
28.2.5.1. Multiphase: Basic Settings .......................................................................................... 306
28.2.5.2. Multiphase: Reactants ................................................................................................ 306
28.2.5.3. Multiphase: Products ................................................................................................. 306
28.2.5.4. Multiphase: Multiphase Reactions .............................................................................. 307
29. Additional Variables .......................................................................................................................... 309
29.1. User Interface ............................................................................................................................. 309
29.1.1. Insert Additional Variable Dialog Box .................................................................................. 309
29.1.2. Basic Settings Tab for Additional Variable Objects ................................................................ 309
29.1.2.1. Variable Type ............................................................................................................. 309
29.1.2.2. Units ......................................................................................................................... 310
29.1.2.3. Tensor Type ............................................................................................................... 310
29.1.3. Fluid Models and Fluid Specific Models Tabs for Domain Objects ......................................... 310
29.1.3.1. Additional Variable Details: List Box ............................................................................ 310
29.1.3.2. Additional Variable Details: [Additional Variable Name] Check Box ............................... 310
29.1.3.2.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 310
29.1.3.2.1.1. Transport Equation ................................................................................... 310
29.1.3.2.1.2. Diffusive Transport Equation ..................................................................... 311
29.1.3.2.1.3. Homogeneous Transport Equation ............................................................ 311
29.1.3.2.1.4. Homogeneous Diffusive Transport Equation ............................................. 311

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CFX-Pre User's Guide

29.1.3.2.1.5. Poisson Equation ...................................................................................... 311

29.1.3.2.1.6. Homogeneous Poisson Equation .............................................................. 311
29.1.3.2.1.7. Fluid Dependent ...................................................................................... 311
29.1.3.2.1.8. Algebraic Equation ................................................................................... 311
29.1.3.2.1.9. Vector Algebraic Equation ......................................................................... 312
29.1.3.2.2. Value ................................................................................................................ 312
29.1.3.2.3. Kinematic Diffusivity Check Box ......................................................................... 312
29.1.3.2.4. Kinematic Diffusivity Check Box: Kinematic Diffusivity ........................................ 312
29.1.3.2.5. AV Properties for Fluid: Frame Overview ............................................................. 312
29.1.3.2.6. AV Properties for Fluid: List Box .......................................................................... 312
29.1.3.2.7. AV Properties for Fluid: [Fluid Name] Check Box .................................................. 313
29.1.3.2.8. AV Properties for Fluid: [Fluid Name] Check Box: Kinematic Diffusivity ................. 313
29.1.3.2.9. Vector xValue, Vector yValue, and Vector zValue .................................................. 313
29.1.4. Boundary Details and Fluid Values Tabs for Boundary Condition Objects .............................. 313
29.1.4.1. Additional Variables: List Box ...................................................................................... 313
29.1.4.2. Additional Variables: [Name] ....................................................................................... 314
29.1.4.2.1. Option .............................................................................................................. 314
29.1.4.2.2. Value ................................................................................................................ 314
29.1.4.2.3. Flux .................................................................................................................. 314
29.1.4.2.4. Transfer Coefficient ........................................................................................... 314
29.2. Creating an Additional Variable ................................................................................................... 314
30. Expressions ....................................................................................................................................... 317
30.1. Expressions Workspace ............................................................................................................... 317
30.1.1. Definition ........................................................................................................................... 318
30.1.2. Plot .................................................................................................................................... 319
30.1.3. Evaluate ............................................................................................................................. 319
30.2. Creating an Expression ................................................................................................................ 319
30.3. Modifying an Expression ............................................................................................................. 320
30.4. Importing or Exporting an Expression .......................................................................................... 320
30.4.1. Importing CCL Expressions ................................................................................................. 320
30.4.2. Exporting CCL Expressions .................................................................................................. 321
31. User Functions ................................................................................................................................... 323
31.1. Interpolation (Data Input) User Functions .................................................................................... 323
31.1.1. One Dimensional Interpolation ........................................................................................... 324
31.1.1.1. Extended Minimum and Maximum ............................................................................ 325
31.1.2. Three Dimensional Interpolation ......................................................................................... 325
31.1.3. Importing Data from a File .................................................................................................. 326
31.1.4. Defining User Functions from Interpolation (Data Input) Functions ...................................... 326
31.2. Interpolation (From File) User Functions ...................................................................................... 327
31.2.1. Viewing and Editing Data Imported from a Profile Data File ................................................. 327
31.2.2. Defining User Functions from Profile Data or Interpolation (From File) Functions .................. 328
31.3. Table User Functions ................................................................................................................... 328
31.3.1. Defining User Functions from Table Data ............................................................................. 328
31.4. User CEL Functions ...................................................................................................................... 329
31.4.1. Function Name ................................................................................................................... 329
31.4.1.1. Defining Quantities with User CEL Functions .............................................................. 329
31.4.2. Argument Units .................................................................................................................. 329
31.4.3. Result Units ........................................................................................................................ 330
31.5. Profile Data Format ..................................................................................................................... 330
31.5.1. Table Data Format .............................................................................................................. 331
32. User Routines .................................................................................................................................... 333
32.1. User CEL Routines ....................................................................................................................... 333

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxiii
CFX-Pre User's Guide

32.1.1. Calling Name ...................................................................................................................... 334

32.1.2. Library Name and Library Path ............................................................................................ 334
32.2. Junction Box Routines ................................................................................................................. 335
32.3. Particle User Routines .................................................................................................................. 335
33. Simulation Control ............................................................................................................................ 337
34. Execution and Termination Control .................................................................................................. 339
34.1. Execution Control ....................................................................................................................... 339
34.1.1. Overview of Defining CFX-Solver Startup ............................................................................ 339
34.1.2. The Details View for Execution Control ................................................................................ 339
34.1.2.1. Run Definition Tab ..................................................................................................... 340
34.1.2.1.1. Parallel Environment ......................................................................................... 341
34.1.2.2. Initial Values Tab ........................................................................................................ 341
34.1.2.3. Partitioner Tab ........................................................................................................... 342
34.1.2.3.1. Executable Settings ........................................................................................... 343
34.1.2.3.2. Partitioning Detail ............................................................................................. 343
34.1.2.3.2.1. Partition Type ........................................................................................... 343
34.1.2.3.2.2. Partition Weighting .................................................................................. 343
34.1.2.3.2.3. Multidomain Option ................................................................................. 344
34.1.2.3.2.4. Multipass Partitioning ............................................................................... 344
34.1.2.3.3. Partition Smoothing .......................................................................................... 344
34.1.2.3.4. Partitioner Memory ........................................................................................... 345
34.1.2.4. Solver Tab .................................................................................................................. 345
34.1.2.5. Interpolator Tab ......................................................................................................... 345
34.2. Termination Control .................................................................................................................... 346
34.2.1. Overview of Configuration Termination ............................................................................... 346
34.2.2. Details View for Termination Control ................................................................................... 346
35. Configurations .................................................................................................................................. 349
35.1. Overview of Defining a Configuration .......................................................................................... 349
35.2. The Details View for Configuration ............................................................................................... 350
35.2.1. General Settings Tab ........................................................................................................... 350
35.2.2. Remeshing Tab ................................................................................................................... 351
35.2.2.1. User Defined Remeshing ............................................................................................ 352
35.2.2.2. ANSYS ICEM CFD Replay Remeshing ........................................................................... 353
35.2.2.2.1. ICEM CFD Geometry Control .............................................................................. 354
35.2.2.2.2. ICEM CFD Mesh Control ..................................................................................... 354
35.2.2.2.3. Scalar Parameter ............................................................................................... 354
35.2.3. Run Definition Tab .............................................................................................................. 355
35.2.4. Initial Values Tab ................................................................................................................. 355
35.2.5. Partitioner Tab .................................................................................................................... 355
35.2.6. Solver Tab .......................................................................................................................... 355
35.2.7. Interpolator Tab .................................................................................................................. 355
36. Quick Setup Mode ............................................................................................................................. 357
36.1. Starting a New Case in Quick Setup Mode .................................................................................... 357
36.2. Simulation Definition Tab ............................................................................................................ 357
36.2.1. Simulation Data .................................................................................................................. 357
36.2.1.1. Problem Type ............................................................................................................ 358
36.2.2. Working Fluid ..................................................................................................................... 358
36.2.3. Mesh Data .......................................................................................................................... 358
36.3. Physics Definition ........................................................................................................................ 359
36.3.1. Analysis Type ...................................................................................................................... 359
36.3.2. Model Data ........................................................................................................................ 359
36.4. Boundary Definition .................................................................................................................... 359

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxiv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CFX-Pre User's Guide

36.5. Final Operations .......................................................................................................................... 360

37. Turbomachinery Mode ...................................................................................................................... 361
37.1. Starting a New Case in Turbo Mode ............................................................................................. 361
37.2. Navigation through Turbo Mode ................................................................................................. 362
37.3. Basic Settings .............................................................................................................................. 362
37.3.1. Machine Type ..................................................................................................................... 362
37.3.2. Axes ................................................................................................................................... 362
37.3.2.1. Coordinate Frame ...................................................................................................... 362
37.3.2.2. Rotational Axis ........................................................................................................... 362
37.3.2.3. Axis Visibility .............................................................................................................. 363
37.3.3. Analysis Type ...................................................................................................................... 363
37.4. Component Definition ................................................................................................................ 363
37.4.1. Component Selector .......................................................................................................... 363
37.4.2. Component Type ................................................................................................................ 363
37.4.3. Mesh File ............................................................................................................................ 364
37.4.4. Passages and Alignment ..................................................................................................... 364
37.4.4.1. Passages/Mesh .......................................................................................................... 364
37.4.4.2. Passages to Model ..................................................................................................... 364
37.4.4.3. Passages in 360 .......................................................................................................... 364
37.4.4.4. Theta Offset ............................................................................................................... 364
37.4.5. Available Volumes .............................................................................................................. 365
37.4.6. Region Information ............................................................................................................ 365
37.4.7. Wall Configuration .............................................................................................................. 365
37.5. Physics Definition ........................................................................................................................ 365
37.5.1. Fluid .................................................................................................................................. 365
37.5.2. Model Data ........................................................................................................................ 365
37.5.2.1. Reference Pressure ..................................................................................................... 365
37.5.2.2. Heat Transfer ............................................................................................................. 365
37.5.2.3. Turbulence ................................................................................................................ 366
37.5.2.4. Mass Flow .................................................................................................................. 366
37.5.3. Boundary Templates ........................................................................................................... 366
37.5.4. Interface ............................................................................................................................ 366
37.5.5. Solver Parameters ............................................................................................................... 366
37.5.5.1. Advection Scheme ..................................................................................................... 366
37.5.5.2. Convergence Control ................................................................................................. 366
37.5.5.3. Time Scale Option ...................................................................................................... 366
37.5.5.4. Max. Coeff. Loops ....................................................................................................... 366
37.6. Interface Definition ..................................................................................................................... 367
37.6.1. Type ................................................................................................................................... 367
37.7. Disturbance Definition ................................................................................................................ 368
37.7.1. Type ................................................................................................................................... 368
37.8. Boundary Definition .................................................................................................................... 368
37.8.1. Boundary Data ................................................................................................................... 369
37.8.2. Flow Specification/Wall Influence on Flow ........................................................................... 369
37.9. Final Operations .......................................................................................................................... 369
38. Library Objects .................................................................................................................................. 371
38.1. Boiling Water .............................................................................................................................. 371
38.2. Cavitating Water ......................................................................................................................... 372
38.3. Coal Combustion ........................................................................................................................ 372
38.4. Comfort Factors .......................................................................................................................... 372
38.5. Multigray Radiation ..................................................................................................................... 373
39. Command Editor Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 375

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxv
CFX-Pre User's Guide

39.1. Using the Command Editor ......................................................................................................... 375

39.2. Performing Command Actions .................................................................................................... 376
39.3. Using Power Syntax ..................................................................................................................... 376

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxvi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
List of Figures
1.1. The New Case Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.2. Sample CFX-Pre Interface ........................................................................................................................ 4
1.3. Sample CFX-Pre Details View ................................................................................................................. 11
2.1. Mouse Mapping using Workbench Defaults ........................................................................................... 24
2.2. Viewport Control .................................................................................................................................. 27
24.1. Mesh Adaption Process ..................................................................................................................... 274
30.1. Sample Expressions Workspace ......................................................................................................... 318

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxvii
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxviii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
List of Tables
2.1. Mouse Operations and Shortcuts .......................................................................................................... 24
13.1. Domain Motion Options .................................................................................................................... 119
13.2. Advanced Turbulence Parameters ...................................................................................................... 125
35.1. Reload Options ................................................................................................................................. 351
35.2. Scalar Parameters .............................................................................................................................. 354

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxix
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxx of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 1: CFX-Pre Basics
CFX-Pre is the physics-definition preprocessor for ANSYS CFX. You import meshes (which can be produced
in a variety of mesh generation software packages) into CFX-Pre and select physical models1 to be used
in the CFD simulation. Files produced by CFX-Pre are sent to CFX-Solver.

This chapter describes:

1.1. Starting CFX-Pre
1.2. CFX-Pre Modes of Operation
1.3. Working with the CFX-Pre Interface
1.4. CFX-Pre File Types

1.1. Starting CFX-Pre

When starting CFX-Pre for the first time, the default system font is obtained and, if it is deemed inap-
propriate for CFX-Pre, a dialog box appears that enables you to choose a new font. When a new font
is selected, it is stored for future sessions. For details, see Appearance (p. 48).

CFX-Pre can be started in different ways:

• From within ANSYS Workbench choose Fluid Flow (CFX) from Toolbox > Analysis Systems or CFX from
Toolbox > Component Systems. In the Project Schematic, right-click the Setup cell and select Edit.

• From the ANSYS CFX Launcher: set the working directory and then click CFX-Pre 19.1.

• From the command line. The basic command is:

<CFXROOT>/bin/cfx5pre

The command line options are described in Starting CFX-Pre from the Command Line (p. 1).

Starting CFX-Pre from the Command Line

To start CFX-Pre from a command line, you must either:

• Specify the full path to the executable (<CFXROOT>/bin/cfx5pre)

• Append the path to the ANSYS CFX executables (<CFXROOT>/bin/) to your PATH.

– On Windows, right-click the My Computer icon and select Properties. Click the Advanced tab, then click
Environment Variables. In the System variables section, edit PATH to include the path to the ANSYS
CFX executables; typically this will be something like:
C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v191\CFX\bin;

– On Linux, edit your .<window_manager>rc file to include the path to the ANSYS CFX executables.

1
For details on physical models, see Physical Models in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1
CFX-Pre Basics

Once the PATH has been updated, the basic command is:
cfx5pre

• Run the executable from the launcher Tools > Command Line (which has the path to the ANSYS CFX ex-
ecutables built-in).

There are a number of optional command line flags, some of which are summarized in the following
table:

Argument Alternative Usage

Form
-batch <file Starts CFX-Pre in batch mode, running the session
name>.pre file you enter as an argument.
-display <dis -d Displays the graphical user interface on the X11
play> server <display> instead of using the X11
server defined by the DISPLAY environment variable.
-gui Starts CFX-Pre in graphical user interface (GUI)
mode. This is the default mode.
-line Starts CFX-Pre in line interface mode.
-graphics ogl -gr ogl For Linux only. Specify the graphics system: options
are ogl (default) and mesa.
-graphics mesa -gr mesa
-def <file> Loads the named CFX-Solver input file after starting.
-session <file> -s Plays the named session file after starting.
-cfx <file> Loads the named case file after starting.
-verbose -v Specifying this option may result in additional
output being sent to the standard output.

To view a full list of command-line flags, execute:

cfx5pre -help

1.2. CFX-Pre Modes of Operation

When you select File > New Case to create a new simulation, CFX-Pre presents four different modes
of operations:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
2 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Working with the CFX-Pre Interface

Figure 1.1: The New Case Dialog Box

• General mode is the general-purpose mode for defining all types of CFD simulation. This mode uses the
general CFX-Pre interface, which is described in Working with the CFX-Pre Interface (p. 3).

• Turbomachinery mode is a customized mode for defining turbomachinery simulations. For details, see Tur-
bomachinery Mode (p. 361).

• Quick Setup mode greatly simplifies the physics setup for a simulation. Quick Setup mode is limited to a
single-domain and single-phase problems; more complex physics, such as multiphase, combustion, radiation,
advanced turbulence models, and so on are not available. You can, however, use Quick Setup mode to get
started, and then add more physics details later. For details, see Quick Setup Mode (p. 357).

• Library Template mode provides a set of library files that are available with templates for specific physical
problem definitions. In this mode you can easily define a complex physics problem by loading a template
file, importing a mesh, and defining specific problem data. For details, see Library Objects (p. 371).

1.3. Working with the CFX-Pre Interface

The CFX-Pre interface enables the easy definition of a simulation. The main components are the viewer
(to display and manipulate meshes), the workspaces (to define different aspects of the physics setup),
the physics message window, and the menus and tool bars (access to extra tools and utilities).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3
CFX-Pre Basics

Figure 1.2: Sample CFX-Pre Interface

1.3.1. Viewer
The viewer displays imported geometries and meshes and enables manipulations and transformations
to be viewed. Information about boundary conditions, domains, point sources, and so on, is also dis-
played, and items can be picked directly from the Viewer.

CFX-Pre uses the same viewer as CFD-Post. Information on the generic CFX-Pre/CFD-Post viewer is
available in CFX-Pre 3D Viewer (p. 17). Many aspects of the viewer appearance can be customized, as
described in Options (p. 40).

1.3.2. CFX-Pre Workspace

The CFX-Pre workspace contains a tree view as well as various details views that are used during the
specification of mesh import, mesh transformation, physics, regions, materials, and expressions.

A powerful feature of CFX-Pre is automatic physics checking. Objects that contain inconsistent or incorrect
settings are highlighted in red. Detailed error messages are shown in the physics validation summary
window. For details, see Physics Message Window (p. 12).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
4 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Working with the CFX-Pre Interface

1.3.2.1. Outline Tree View

The Outline tree view displays a summary of the physics that have been defined for the simulation.
The tree view window initially contains a default list of objects in a tree format.

The following topics are discussed in this section:

• General Considerations (p. 5)

• Outline Tree View Structure (p. 5)

• Outline Tree View Shortcut Menu Commands (p. 7)

Tip

Typing Ctrl+F activates the search facility, which can be used to quickly locate an item in
the tree. Note that the search is case-sensitive and that the text box disappears after a few
seconds of inactivity.

1.3.2.1.1. General Considerations

When working with the tree view, note the following:

• New objects are displayed in the tree as they are created.

• Clicking on any object that is applied to a region will highlight that region in the viewer when highlighting
is enabled (that is, when the Highlighting icon is selected in the 3D Viewer toolbar). For details, see 3D
Viewer Toolbar (p. 18).

• Objects shown in red contain incorrect physics definitions.

• Right-click an object (or group selection of objects) to display the shortcut menu.

For details, see Outline Tree View Shortcut Menu Commands (p. 7).

1.3.2.1.2. Outline Tree View Structure

The Outline tab displays the tree view, which shows a summary of the current physics definition for a
simulation. The tree structure displayed reflects the structure used in the CFX Command Language
(CCL) for physics definition. You can select any object in the tree and double-click to gain direct access
to the appropriate tab to edit its settings. You can also right-click an object and display the CCL definition
of an object in the Command Editor dialog box, where it can be edited.

The remainder of this section describes the main areas in the Outline view.

Mesh
Provides access to all mesh operations in CFX-Pre. This includes mesh import, mesh transformations, and
the render/visibility properties of meshes in the viewer. Meshes generated in many other mesh generation
packages can be imported into CFX-Pre. For details, see Importing and Transforming Meshes (p. 71).

Meshes that have been glued together are listed under Connectivity in the tree view.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 5
CFX-Pre Basics

Simulation
Enables you to define the one or more analyses of the simulation.

Optionally, you can open a copy of the Simulation branch in a separate tab.

Analysis
Enables you to define and edit an analysis:

Analysis Type
Enables the specification of an analysis as steady-state or transient, and whether it requires coupling
to an external solver. For details, see Analysis Type (p. 109).

Domains
Enables you to define and edit the type, properties and region of the fluid, porous or solid. For
details, see Domains (p. 113), Boundary Conditions (p. 161), Subdomains (p. 193) and Source
Points (p. 189).

Domain Interfaces
Enables you to define and edit the method of connecting meshes or domains together. For details,
see Domain Interfaces (p. 149).

Global Initialization
Enables you to set global initial conditions (across all domains). Domain specific initialization is set
through the domain forms. For details, see Initialization (p. 179).

Solver
Enables the defining and editing of Setting the Solution Units (p. 209), Solver Control (p. 211), Solver:
Expert Parameter (p. 57), Output Control (p. 227) and Mesh Adaption (p. 273).

Coordinate Frames
Creates and edits coordinate frames. A Cartesian coordinate frame exists by default, but other Cartesian
coordinate frames can be made. For details, see Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide
and Coordinate Frames (p. 283).

Transformations
Creates and edits transformations that can be used for positioning data from a results file as part of
initialization. For details, see Interpolation Mapping in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Materials / Reactions
Creates, edits, and displays materials and reactions. Many different material types can be defined, edited
or imported. Specialist materials and reactions can be imported from external files, such as the RGP
(Real Gas Properties) file and Flamelet reaction files. For details, see Materials and Reactions (p. 291).

Expressions, Functions, and Variables

Used to create, edit and plot expressions, user functions, user routines, and Additional Variables. For
details, refer to the following sections:

• Additional Variables (p. 309)

• Expressions (p. 317)

• User Functions (p. 323)

• User Routines (p. 333)

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
6 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Working with the CFX-Pre Interface

Simulation Control

Enables you to set up the control of analyses in the simulation. This control is facilitated by defining
and editing one or more configurations as well as global solver execution control. For more inform-
ation, see Solve (p. 47).

Case Options
The Graphics Style, Labels and Markers, and General options enable you to override the defaults for
the current simulation only — they will not be retained for future simulations. The default settings for CFX-
Pre are set in the Edit > Options dialog box — these settings are retained and take effect when a new
case is started. See CFX-Pre Options (p. 40) for a description of these settings.

Extensions
Enables you to access to any customized extensions available to CFX-Pre. For details, see CFX-Pre Extensions
Menu (p. 67).

1.3.2.1.2.1. Outline Tree View Shortcut Menu Commands

Right-clicking on any object in the tree view displays a shortcut menu. Double-clicking on an object
performs the default action for that object. Shortcut menu command descriptions follow:

Command Description
Configuration Simulation Control > Configurations > Insert > Configuration opens the
Configuration Editor.
Copy The Copy command is usually combined with Paste to quickly replicate objects.
Define Mesh > Define Connection opens the Mesh Connections Editor.
Connection
Delete Deletes the selected object. The physics for the simulation are checked after
objects are deleted. Objects containing invalid parameters are highlighted in
red in the tree view.
Delete All Deletes the mesh, but not the named areas in the Outline view. When this
Mesh happens, the physics message window will show errors that say the named
objects cannot be found. If you then import a new mesh that uses the same
names for objects, the names will be resolved and the errors will disappear.
Duplicate Copies the definition of the selected object to a new object. You will be required
to enter a name for the duplicated object, which will then be created at the
same level (that is, for a boundary condition, the new boundary will be created
in the same domain as the initial object).
Edit Opens the relevant tab where new parameters for the object can be entered.
In most casesa, you can also edit an object by double-clicking it in the tree view.
Edit In Opens the Command Editor dialog box and displays the CCL definition for the
Command highlighted object. You can edit the CCL directly to change the object definitiona.
Editor For details, see Command Editor Dialog Box (p. 375).
Expand/Collapse Provides a fast way to navigate the tree view.
Sub-Branches
Export CCL Opens the Export CCL dialog box, which is similar to the dialog box described
in Export Region Data, below.
Export Opens the Export Region CCL dialog box, used to save the region data to a
Region Data .ccl file.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 7
CFX-Pre Basics

Command Description
Glue If there are multiple mesh assemblies that have matched meshes, you can use
Adjacent this option to try to glue them together. Select the assemblies in the tree view
Meshes (while holding down the Ctrl key).

Gluing can be useful to avoid setting up a GGI interface within a domain, but
does require that the meshes match exactly on the surfaces that are to be glued.
When you transform or copy multiple assemblies, each copy is not only glued
to its original assembly or to other copies, but also to any other assemblies that
are transformed or created. For more information, see Gluing Meshes
Together (p. 95).
Hide Makes the active object invisible in the viewer. Hide has the same effect as
clearing the check box next to an object in the tree view.
Hide Hides the interface boundaries in the Outline view.
Interface
Boundaries
Import CCL Opens the Import CCL dialog box, which is similar to the dialog box described
in Import Region Data, below.
Import Mesh Opens the Import Mesh dialog box. This is used to import a new mesh using
an appropriate file. For details, see Importing Meshes (p. 71).
Import This command, available from the Materials branch in the tree view, is used
Library Data to add a new material to the simulation. Examples of such a material include
Methanol CH4O, Rubber, Water at 25 C, and many more.
Import Opens the Import Region CCL dialog box. This is used to load region data from
Region Data a .ccl file.
Insert Various objects are available for insertion, depending on which object is
highlighted. All of the options available from this menu can also be accessed
from the Insert menu. For details, see CFX-Pre Insert Menu (p. 55).
Mesh Opens the Mesh Statistics dialog box and provides a detailed information about
Statistics the active mesh. The Mesh Statistics dialog box can be invoked for one or more
assemblies and/or primitive 3D/2D regions. The data displayed includes the
number of nodes, elements, the number of each element type, and physical
extents of the mesh. The Maximum Edge Length Ratio is also calculated.

Note that for multiple selections, or for selections that consist of composite
regions containing multiple primitive regions, the number of nodes and elements
displayed is the sum of the number of nodes and elements in each of the
underlying primitive regions. The sum takes no account of whether any nodes
in the underlying primitive regions are common to two or more of the primitive
regions in the selection. As a result, the number of nodes displayed may be
higher than the number of nodes in the final mesh that is written to the
CFX-Solver input file. In general, the number of nodes in the final mesh will
depend on the physics definition, which affects whether nodes that are common
to multiple primitive regions can be considered to be the same node.
Paste The Paste command is available when you have already used the Copy command
on an object.

To avoid producing objects with the same name, you are prompted to provide
a name when you paste the new object. For objects that contain a location

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
8 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Working with the CFX-Pre Interface

Command Description
parameter (such as domains and boundary conditions), you will usually need to
edit the new object after pasting it to avoid multiple objects that reference the
same location.

If you are pasting a domain object, then you will need to edit each child object
in the domain that references a location. For example, you will need to change
the locations that boundary conditions reference so that they point to locations
in the new domain. You can simply delete a default domain boundary in this
situation; this will enable CFX-Pre to create a new default boundary for the
domain that references the correct locations.
Reload Mesh If any of the mesh regions become corrupted or are accidentally deleted, selecting
Files Reload Mesh Files reloads all mesh files used in the simulation. This command
cannot be used to insert a new mesh; do to so, select Import Mesh. For details,
see Reload Mesh Files Command (p. 33).

Note

This command is not required (and is not available) in CFX-Pre

launched from ANSYS Workbench.

Rename Changes the selected object’s name.

Render Enables you to change the appearance of almost any object. For example, a
boundary condition or domain interface can be displayed with a solid color, the
transparency of a domain can be altered, and so on.
Report Invokes a message box that shows a summary of the interfaces and their types.
Interface For details, see Mesh Connection Options in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.
Summary
Show/Hide Makes the active object either visible (Show) or invisible (Hide) in the viewer.
Show and Hide have the same respective effects as selecting and clearing the
check box next to a specific object in the tree view.
Show Shows the interface boundaries in the Outline view.
Interface
Boundaries
Start Solver Enables you to access the Define Run, Run Solver, and Run Solver and Monitor
commands. These commands are also available from the main toolbar.
Transform Opens the Mesh Transformation Editor dialog box, enabling you to modify
Mesh the location of the active mesh through rotation, translation, or reflection. The
mesh can also be resized using a scaling method. For details, see Transform
Mesh Command (p. 89).
Use as Available when an expression is selected, this command allows the expression
Workbench to be used as a workbench input parameter.
Input
Parameter
View By This command, available for the Mesh object, opens a new tab that presents a
detailed mesh information in one of two ways. Selecting View By > Source File
displays the mesh regions based on the mesh file provided, whereas View By
> Region Type organizes the areas of the mesh based on the defined 2D regions.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9
CFX-Pre Basics

Command Description
View in New Simulation > View in New Tab enables you to view a copy of the contents of
Tab the Simulation branch in a separate tab.
View in Prompts you to save a CFX-Solver Input file, then automatically starts CFD-Post
CFD-Post with that file loaded.
Write Solver
Input File Has the same effect as clicking Write Solver Input File or selecting Tools >
Solve > Write Solver Input File from the menu bar. For details, see Write Solver
Input File Command (p. 64).
a
An expression that is set as an input parameter in ANSYS Workbench cannot be edited in CFX-Pre or CFD-Post (as the results of such
edits are not passed to ANSYS Workbench) and will be grayed out. However, the expression can be declared to no longer be an input
parameter or it can be deleted.

1.3.2.2. Details View

Details view is a generic term for the editor pane that opens when you edit an object in the Outline
tree view. These editors appear on tabs beside the Outline tab and present the fields and controls that
define the object.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
10 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Working with the CFX-Pre Interface

Figure 1.3: Sample CFX-Pre Details View

The optional toggles provide you with the opportunity to view and, if desired, to override CFX-Pre default
settings. In the example above, selecting the Upper Courant Number option has made it possible to
see the default value for that setting; the white background indicates that you can the edit that value.

Most CFX-Pre settings have default values that will enable you to define an object or set a control as
easily as possible. If there is a setting that requires you to set a value, basic physics checking occurs
when you click OK or Apply on a details view and most missing settings are detected then. Complete
physics checking takes place when you attempt to write a solver file and all missing settings are detected
and reported at that time.

You use the Details view to define the properties of an object. The Details view contains one or more
tabs, depending on the type of object being defined.

Many properties can be set via a CEL expression. To enter an expression:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 11
CFX-Pre Basics

1. Click in the field for a property.

2. Click the Enter Expression icon that appears beside the field. This enables the field to accept an expression
name.

3. Either enter an expression definition directly, or type the name of an existing expression. You must ensure
that the expression evaluates to a value having appropriate units for the property that uses the expression.

For details on CEL expressions, see Expressions (p. 317).

For CFX components in ANSYS Workbench, any CEL expression can be made into a parameterized CEL
expression by defining it as a Workbench input parameter. You can do this by creating an expression
and parameterize it by right-clicking it in the Expression editor. You can then use that expression as
the value of a property.

You can stop a property from being specified as a Workbench input parameter. However, the corres-
ponding CEL expression persists and can be managed by the Expression editor.

A property that accepts only an integer value (but not a CEL expression) is also capable of being con-

trolled by a Workbench input parameter. For such a property, the Set to Workbench input parameter

and Set to value icons are used to toggle the value between being a Workbench input parameter
or not.

1.3.3. Physics Message Window

As you work through your simulation, CFX-Pre continually checks the physics definitions you have
specified. Whenever an action is carried out, the physics validator runs a check on the CCL definitions
of all the objects created up to that point. Physics checking is carried out by comparing the current
CCL data against library files such as RULES, VARIABLES and PHYSICS, which are known to contain
only valid physics specifications. If an inconsistency is found in the physics, the object with associated
error(s) is highlighted in red text in the tree view.

In addition to object name highlighting, the physics validation window displays all error types in the
simulation: global errors, physics errors and expression errors. The output in this window gives an ex-
planation of each of the detected errors. Double-clicking on a red item or a maroon item (an expression
error) in the physics validation window will take you to the correct place in order to edit the object.

Global errors apply to the entire simulation and show errors that are not specific physics errors. Often
these errors show required objects that need to be defined to complete the simulation (for example,
initial conditions or a domain). They also show invalid referencing of regions in a simulation. In some
cases, the global errors offer a suggestion rather than being a definite error. For example, if you have
created two valid boundary conditions on one region, a global error will be shown (despite the fact
that the physics for both boundary conditions may be correct) because you cannot specify more than
one boundary condition on any given surface.

Physics errors (highlighted in red) involve an incorrect application of physics.

• Global errors appear in blue text.

• Specific physics errors appear in red text. You can double-click these to edit the object containing the error.

There are two common situations when you are likely to encounter physics errors:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
12 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Working with the CFX-Pre Interface

1. CFX-Pre defines some objects, such as the Solver Control settings, by default. If you create a new object
that is not compatible with the default objects settings, the physics validation summary window will show
errors in the default object. This occurs when creating a solid domain because the default Solver Control
settings do not contain a solid time scale. These errors will disappear when you define the Solver Control
settings.

2. When changing the physics of an existing model. There are many instances where you might want to
change the description of your simulation. One particular situation is when you want to use the values
in a results file as the initial field for another run with different physics.

When a domain is modified, perhaps with new model options, you will receive errors or warnings
in the physics validation summary window if you need to revisit and update existing boundary
conditions, initialization, solver controls, and so on. This happens, for example, when the turbulence
model is changed from the laminar model to the model and the boundary conditions for the
laminar case do not contain turbulence data (for example, at an Inlet). You should fix any such errors
before writing a CFX-Solver input file.

You should update boundary conditions if the number of Additional Variables has been increased,
or if the units for Additional Variable specifications have been changed.

If the simulation is set up correctly, there will not be any physics errors when you are ready to write
the CFX-Solver input file.

1.3.3.1. Physics Errors from Old .def/.res Files

When you load CFX-Solver input/results files from previous versions of ANSYS CFX, you may receive
error messages, despite the fact that the files can be run in the CFX-Solver. This is due to differences
in the previous CFX-Solver input files. In CFX-Pre, a more strict approach to CCL structure and content
has been implemented to ensure the integrity of the CCL made available to the CFX-Solver.

CFX-Pre performs some automatic updates when opening CFX-Solver input or results files from previous
versions of ANSYS CFX.

1.3.3.2. Physics Message Window Shortcut Menu Commands

Right-click a message in the physics message window to perform the following functions:

Copy
Enables copying of the selected message.

Edit
Enables you to use the Details View to edit the object generating the error.

Auto Fix Physics

Enables you to attempt to correct inconsistent physics automatically. In many cases, you will find that this
fixes the problem without a need to change any settings on the form. Alternatively, you can use the Details
View to edit the object generating the error.

Viewing the type of error before performing auto fix is strongly recommended. For example, auto
fix cannot fix a domain with an incorrectly specified location. In effect, auto fix opens the default
layout of the panel and performs an apply. If you are unsure about auto fix, you should subsequently
open the form and verify that the settings are still valid for your problem. You should fix all physics
validation errors to ensure that the CFX-Solver input file runs in the solver. If any errors are found

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 13
CFX-Pre Basics

when you attempt to write the CFX-Solver input file, a warning message is displayed giving you
the option to write the file anyway or cancel the operation.

Auto Fix All

Runs auto-fix on all objects that have physics validation errors.

Suppress this message

Suppress the selected message; a message summary is displayed instead.

Suppress all messages

Suppresses all messages; message summaries are displayed instead. Note that messages generated sub-
sequently will not be suppressed.

Unsuppress all messages

Unsuppress all messages.

1.3.4. Menu Bar

The menu bar provides access to CFX-Pre functions. Some of these functions are also available from
the Toolbar (p. 15).

File Menu
Provides access to file operations including opening and saving simulations, as well as importing or exporting
CCL. For details, see CFX-Pre File Menu (p. 29).

Edit Menu
Enables you to change the default options used by ANSYS CFX and undo/redo actions. For details, see
CFX-Pre Edit Menu (p. 39).

Note

Some options can be overridden for the current simulation; see Case Options in Outline
Tree View Structure (p. 5) for details.

Session Menu
Controls the recording and playing of session files. Session files are used to record a set of operations. You
can then play back a session file to quickly reproduce the same operations. For details, see CFX-Pre Session
Menu (p. 51).

Insert Menu
Enables you to create new objects such as domains or boundary conditions, or edit existing objects of that
type. For details, see CFX-Pre Insert Menu (p. 55).

Tools Menu
Provides access to tools such as command editor, macro calculator as well as quick setup and turbo modes.
For details, see CFX-Pre Tools Menu (p. 59).

Extensions Menu
Provides access to any customized extensions available to CFX-Pre. For details, see CFX-Pre Extensions
Menu (p. 67).

Help Menu
For details, see CFX-Pre Help Menu (p. 69).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
14 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 CFX-Pre File Types

1.3.5. Toolbar
The toolbar provides quick access to commonly used functions. The toolbar contains the most common
menu items and viewer controls. Holding the mouse pointer over a toolbar icon for a short period of
time displays the icon’s function.

1.4. CFX-Pre File Types

The following file types are used by or produced by CFX-Pre:

Case Files (.cfx)

The case file contains the physics data, region definitions, and mesh information for the simulation and is
used by CFX-Pre as the 'database' for the simulation setup. The case file is generated when you save a
simulation in CFX-Pre. To re-open a simulation, select File > Open Case and pick a case file to open.

When you import a mesh into CFX-Pre, it passes through an import filter and is stored as part of
the case file. Therefore, once a mesh has been imported, the original mesh file is not required by
CFX-Pre. Additional information on importing meshes is available in Importing Meshes (p. 71).

The case file is a binary file and cannot be edited directly.

You can open cases on any supported platform, regardless of the platform on which they were
created.

Mesh Files
There are many types of mesh files that can be imported into CFX-Pre. For details, see Supported Mesh
File Types (p. 73).

CFX-Solver Input Files (.def, .mdef)

A CFX-Solver input file is created by CFX-Pre. The input file for a single configuration simulation (.def)
contains all physics and mesh data; the input file for multi-configuration simulations (.mdef) contains
global physics data only (that is, Library and Simulation Control CFX Command Language specifications).
An .mdef input file is supplemented by Configuration Definition (.cfg) files that:

• Are located in a subdirectory that is named according to the base name of the input file

• Contain local physics and mesh data.

Note

Use the -norun command line option (described in Command-Line Options and Keywords
for cfx5solve in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide) to merge global information into
the configuration definition files, and produce a CFX-Solver input file (.def) that can be
run by the CFX-Solver.

You can load a CFX-Solver input file back into CFX-Pre to recreate a simulation. CFX-Solver input
files from previous releases of ANSYS CFX can be loaded into CFX-Pre, although the physics definition
may have to be updated for such files. For details, see Physics Errors from Old .def/.res Files (p. 13).

CFX-Solver Results Files (.res, .mres, .trn, .bak)

Intermediate and final results files are created by the CFX-Solver:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 15
CFX-Pre Basics

• Intermediate results files, which include transient and backup files (.trn and .bak, respectively) are
created while running an analysis.

• Final results files for single and multi-configuration simulations (.res and .mres, respectively) are
written at the end of the simulation’s execution. For multi-configuration simulations, a configuration
result file (.res) is also created at the end of each configuration’s execution.

Each results file contains the following information as of the iteration or time step at which it is
written:

• The physics data (that is, the CFX Command Language specifications)

• All or a subset of the mesh and solution data.

CFX-Solver Backup Results Files (.bak)

A backup file (.bak) is created at your request, either by configuring the settings on the Backup tab in
Output Control in CFX-Pre, or by choosing to write a backup file while the run is in progress in the CFX-
Solver Manager.

CFX-Solver Transient Results Files (.trn)

A transient results file (.trn) is created at your request, by configuring the settings on the Output Control
> Trn Results tab in CFX-Pre.

CFX-Solver Error Results Files (.err)

An error results file (.err) is created when the CFX-Solver detects a failure and stops executing an analysis.
The .err file can be loaded into CFD-Post and treated the same way as a .bak file, but if the CFX-Solver
encounters another failure while writing the .err file, it may become corrupted and accurate solutions
cannot be guaranteed.

Session Files (.pre)

Session files are used by CFX-Pre to record CFX Command Language (CCL) commands executed during a
session. The commands can be played back at a later date to reproduce the session. These files are in ASCII
format and can be edited or written in a text editor. For details, see New Session Command (p. 51).

CCL Files (.ccl)

CFX CCL files are used by CFX-Pre to save CFX Command Language (CCL) statements. CCL files differ from
session files in that only a snapshot of the current state is saved to a file. These files are in ASCII format
and can be edited or written in a text editor. The CCL statements stored in these files replace or append
the existing CCL data, depending on the option chosen. For details, see:

• Import CCL Command (p. 33)

• Append or Replace (p. 34).

An overview of the files used throughout ANSYS CFX is available in ANSYS CFX File Types in the CFX
Introduction.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
16 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 2: CFX-Pre 3D Viewer
In CFX-Pre, the 3D viewer is visible whenever a partial or complete case is loaded. After importing a
mesh into CFX-Pre, you can see a visual representation of the geometry in the 3D viewer. You can create
various other objects that can be viewed in the 3D viewer; for details, see CFX-Pre Insert Menu (p. 55).
The visibility of each object can be turned on and off using the check boxes in the tree view; for details,
see Object Visibility (p. 17).

Descriptions of the various viewing modes and 3D viewer commands, including toolbars, shortcut
menus, and hotkeys, are given in 3D Viewer Modes and Commands (p. 18).

You can switch between four adjustable “views” that each remember the camera angle and state of
visibility of all objects.

The 3D viewer can display multiple viewports at a time. The viewport arrangement is controlled from
the viewer toolbar.

This chapter describes:

2.1. Object Visibility
2.2. 3D Viewer Modes and Commands
2.3. Views and Figures
2.4. Stereo Viewer

2.1. Object Visibility

The visibility of each object can be turned on and off using the check boxes in the tree view, as described
in Object Visibility. However, you can also hide objects by right-clicking on them and selecting Hide.
The shortcut menu has a title that indicates the object that will be acted upon so that you do not acci-
dentally hide the wrong object. In the figure that follows, the user right-clicked on an object named
Primitive 2D A.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 17
CFX-Pre 3D Viewer

Once an object has been hidden, you can show it again by selecting that object's check box in the
Outline view.

2.2. 3D Viewer Modes and Commands

The topics in this section include:

• 3D Viewer Toolbar (p. 18)

• Shortcut Menus (p. 20)

• Viewer Hotkeys (p. 22)

• Mouse Button Mapping (p. 23)

• Picking Mode (p. 25)

• Boundary Markers and Labels (p. 26)

2.2.1. 3D Viewer Toolbar

The 3D Viewer toolbar has the following tools:

Tool Description
Makes one of the picking tools active; see Picking
Mode (p. 25) for details.

Selects objects. When a number of objects overlap, the one

closest to the camera is picked. In CFX-Pre, when selecting
regions for boundaries, if more than one region is under the
mouse pointer at the location that you click, those regions will
be listed in a list box, enabling you to select the intended region.
Selects objects using a box. Drag a box around the objects you
want to select.
Selects objects using an enclosed polygon. Click to drop points
around the objects. Double-click to complete the selection.

Note

Polygon Select mode will not enable you to

create an invalid region, such as would occur if
you attempted to move a point such that the
resulting line would cross an existing line in the
polygon.

The paint function selects the all the mesh elements on the face.
The “counter” widget enables you to change the crease angle

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
18 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 3D Viewer Modes and Commands

Tool Description
in degrees used to decide where the flood-pick algorithm will
stop.
This feature controls which objects you can select.

Visible Entries treats the contents of the Viewer as opaque

and enables you to select only the top objects at any point.

All Entries treats the contents of the Viewer as “transparent”

and enables you to select any of the objects that you would
encounter if you drilled through the object at a given point.
You use this option with the depth indicator in the
bottom-left of the Viewer.
This feature controls which objects you can select with a box
or enclosed polygon.

Choose Fully Enclosed selects only the objects that have

boundaries that are completely within the box or polygon
you draw.

Choose Enclosed and Touching selects both the objects

that are completely within the box or polygon you draw
as well as any objects of which any part is within that area.
These features control whether primitives are chosen over
composites.

Rotates the view as you drag with the mouse. Alternatively, hold
down the middle mouse button to rotate the view.
Pans the view as you drag with the mouse. Alternatively, you
can pan the view by holding down Ctrl and the middle mouse
button.
Adjusts the zoom level as you drag with the mouse vertically.
Alternatively, you can zoom the view by holding down Shift
and the middle mouse button.
Zooms to the area enclosed in a box that you create by dragging
with the mouse. Alternatively, you can drag and zoom the view
by holding down the right mouse button.
Centers all visible objects in the viewer.

Toggles highlighting according to the highlighting preferences

(select Edit > Options > CFX-Pre > Graphics Style > Object
Highlighting > Type). Highlighting is active only when the
viewer is set to Picking Mode. For details, see Picking
Mode (p. 25).
Enables you to select mesh nodes. When picking a point from
the viewer to populate a widget that defines a coordinate, the
point can either be a point in space or a mesh “node”. This tool

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 19
CFX-Pre 3D Viewer

Tool Description
enables you to select the mesh node nearest to the location
you click.
Displays the Labels and Markers dialog box that is used to
select/clear the display of named regions and markers in the
viewer. For details, see Boundary Markers and Labels (p. 26).
Selects the viewport arrangement. You can perform Independent
zoom, rotation and translate options in each viewport.

Toggles between locking and unlocking the views of all

viewports. When the views are locked, the camera orientation
and zoom level of the non-selected viewports are continuously
synchronized with the selected viewport. Locking the view for
the viewports in this way can be a useful technique for
comparing different sets of visible objects between the
viewports. This tool is available only when all viewports are using
the Cartesian (X-Y-Z) transformation.
Displays the Viewer Key Mapping dialog box. See Viewer
Hotkeys (p. 22) for details.

2.2.2. Shortcut Menus

You can access the shortcut menu by right-clicking anywhere on the viewer. The shortcut menu is dif-
ferent depending on where you right-click.

2.2.2.1. CFX-Pre 3D Viewer Shortcut Menu

2.2.2.1.1. Shortcuts for CFX-Pre (Viewer Background)
The following commands are available in CFX-Pre when you right-click the viewer background:

Command Description
Import Library Data Opens the Select Library Data to Import dialog box so that you can add a new
material to the simulation. Examples of such materials include Methanol CH4O,
Rubber, Water at 25 C, and many more.

This option is the same as right-clicking on Materials in the tree view and
selecting Import Library Data.
Start Solver • Define Run writes the CFX-Solver input file and starts the CFX-Solver Manager.

• Run Solver writes the CFX-Solver input file and starts the CFX-Solver.

• Run Solver and Monitor writes the CFX-Solver input file and starts both the
CFX-Solver and the CFX-Solver Manager.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
20 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 3D Viewer Modes and Commands

Command Description
View in CFD-Post Writes the CFX-Solver input file and start CFD-Post
Write Solver Input The same as selecting Tools > Solve > Write Solver Input File. For details, see
File Write Solver Input File Command (p. 64).
Create New View ... Creates a new view. The new view will become the current view. For more
information about views, see Views and Figures (p. 27).
Delete View Delete the current view.
Predefined Camera Displays different views by changing the camera angle to a preset direction.

Fit View
Centers all visible objects in the viewer. This is equivalent to clicking the icon.
Projection Switches between perspective and orthographic camera angles.
Default Legend Shows or hides the default legend object.
Axis Shows or hides the axis orientation indicator (triad) in the bottom-right corner of
the viewer.
Ruler Shows or hides the ruler on the bottom of the viewer.
Labels Controls the display of labels. For more information, see Boundary Markers and
Labels (p. 26).
Markers Controls the display and properties of boundary markers. For more information,
see Boundary Markers and Labels (p. 26).
Save Picture Same as selecting File > Save Picture. For details, see Save Picture
Command (p. 35).
Viewer Options Opens the Options dialog box with the viewer options displayed. For details, see
Graphics Style (p. 44).

2.2.2.1.2. Shortcuts for CFX-Pre (Viewer Object)

The following commands are available in CFX-Pre when you right-click an object in the viewer:

Command Description
Edit, Edit Definition, Opens the details view for the selected object so that you can edit its properties.
Edit Mesh
Mesh Statistics Opens the Mesh Statistics dialog box and provides a detailed information
about the active mesh. The Mesh Statistics dialog box can be invoked for one
or more assemblies and/or primitive 3D/2D regions. The data displayed

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 21
CFX-Pre 3D Viewer

Command Description
includes the number of nodes, elements, the number of each element type,
and physical extents of the mesh. The Maximum Edge Length Ratio is
also calculated.

Note that for multiple selections, or for selections that consist of composite
regions containing multiple primitive regions, the number of nodes and
elements displayed is the sum of the number of nodes and elements in each
of the underlying primitive regions. The sum takes no account of whether
any nodes in the underlying primitive regions are common to two or more
of the primitive regions in the selection. As a result, the number of nodes
displayed may be higher than the number of nodes in the final mesh that is
written to the CFX-Solver input file. In general, the number of nodes in the
final mesh will depend on the physics definition, which affects whether nodes
that are common to multiple primitive regions can be considered to be the
same node.
Insert Enables you to insert a boundary, interface, subdomain, or source point. For details,
see Boundary Conditions (p. 161), Domain Interfaces (p. 149), Subdomains (p. 193),
or Source Points (p. 189).
Edit in Command Opens the Command Editor dialog box, displaying the CEL for the selected object.
Editor For details, see Using the Command Editor (p. 375).
Render Displays the following render options:

Color enables you to choose a color for the selected object.

Lines enables you to select to Show Wireframe, Show Mesh or No Lines.

Transparency enables you to set the transparency levels of the domain. The
choices are Opaque, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, or Fully Transparent.

Properties invokes the Render Options dialog box. For details, see Render
Options (p. 96).
Show Shows the object in the viewer.
Hide Hides the selected object in the 3D viewer.
Delete Deletes the selected object.
Rename Changes the selected object’s name.
Alternatives When you right-click a location in the viewer, CFX-Pre presents a shortcut menu
for one object at that location. Shortcut menus for the other objects at the same
location are accessible as submenus under the Alternatives heading.

2.2.3. Viewer Hotkeys

A number of shortcut keys are available to carry out common viewer tasks. These can be carried out
by clicking in the viewer window and pressing the associated key.

Key Action
space Toggles between picking and viewing mode.
arrow keys Rotates about horizontal and vertical axes.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
22 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 3D Viewer Modes and Commands

Key Action
Ctrl + up/down Rotates about an axis normal to the screen.
arrow keys
Shift + arrow keys Moves the light source.
1 Switches to one viewport.
2 Switches to two viewports.
3 Switches to three viewports.
4 Switches to four viewports.
C Centers the graphic object in the viewer window.
N Toggles the projection between orthographic
and perspective.
rR Resets the view to the initial orientation.
S Toggles the level of detail between auto, off, and
on.
U Undoes transformation.
Shift+U Redoes transformation.
X Sets view from +X axis.
Shift+X Sets view from -X axis.
Y Sets view from +Y axis.
Shift+Y Sets view from -Y axis.
Z Sets view from +Z axis.
Shift+Z Sets view from -Z axis.

The information in this table is accessible by clicking the Show Help Dialog toolbar icon in the 3D
viewer toolbar.

2.2.4. Mouse Button Mapping

The mouse mapping options enable you to assign viewer actions to mouse clicks and keyboard/mouse
combined clicks. To adjust or view the mouse mapping options, select Edit > Options, then Common
> Viewer Setup > Mouse Mapping.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 23
CFX-Pre 3D Viewer

Figure 2.1: Mouse Mapping using Workbench Defaults

Table 2.1: Mouse Operations and Shortcuts

Operation Description Workbench Mode CFX Mode Shortcuts

Shortcuts
Zoom To zoom out, drag the pointer up; to Shift + middle mouse Middle mouse
zoom in, drag the pointer down. button button
Object
Zoom Shift + middle
mouse button
Camera zooms in a step.
Zoom
Shift + right
mouse button
zooms out a
step.
Translate Drag the object across the viewer. Ctrl + middle mouse Right mouse button
button
Zoom Box Draw a rectangle around the area of Right mouse Shift + left mouse
interest, starting from one corner and button button
ending at the opposite corner. The
selected area fills the viewer when the Shift + left
mouse button is released. mouse button

Shift + right
mouse button

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
24 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 3D Viewer Modes and Commands

Operation Description Workbench Mode CFX Mode Shortcuts

Shortcuts
Rotate Rotate the view about the pivot point Middle mouse button
(if no pivot point is visible, the rotation
point will be the center of the object).
Set Pivot Set the point about which the Rotate Left mouse button Ctrl + middle mouse
Point actions pivot. The point selected must when in rotate, pan, button
be on an object in the 3D Viewer. zoom, or zoom box
When you set the pivot point, it mode (as set by the
appears as a small red sphere that icons in the viewer's
moves (along with the point on the toolbar).
image where you clicked) to the center
of the 3D Viewer. To hide the red dot
that represents the pivot point, click a
blank area in the 3D Viewer.
Move Light Move the lighting angle for the 3D Ctrl + right mouse Ctrl + right mouse
Viewer. Drag the mouse left or right button button
to move the horizontal lighting source
and up or down to move the vertical
lighting source. The light angle hold
two angular values between 0 - 180.
Picking Mode Select an object in the viewer. Ctrl + Shift + left Ctrl + Shift + left
mouse button mouse button

2.2.5. Picking Mode

Picking mode is used to select and drag objects in the viewer. The mesh faces must be visible on an

object or region to enable it to be picked. Enter picking mode by selecting the Single Select tool in

a drop-down menu of the viewer toolbar. If the Single Select icon is already visible, you can simply

click the New Selection icon.

You can also pick objects while still in viewing mode by holding down Ctrl+Shift as you click in the
viewer.

There are several types of entities that you can select in the viewer, and which type you use depends
on the context of what you are doing:

• When you insert a primitive region, you need to use picking to select the mesh elements to put into the
new primitive region.

• When you add any sort of location (such as domain, sub-domain, or boundary condition), you can also use
picking to select the 2D or 3D regions for these locations. To select a 3D region, you have to select all the
2D regions that are part of it. (CFX-Pre does not plot 3D regions directly; it plots only the associated 2D re-
gions.)

• When you need to select Cartesian coordinates for locations such as monitor points or source points, you
can use picking to select the coordinates. Note that the coordinates selected always correspond to the loc-
ation of the point in the global coordinate frame, Coord 0.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 25
CFX-Pre 3D Viewer

2.2.5.1. Selecting Objects

Use the mouse to select objects (for example, points and boundaries) from the viewer. When a number
of objects overlap, the one closest to the camera is picked.

You can change the picking mode by selecting one of the toolbar icons:

• Single Select

• Box Select

• Polygon Select

For details on the operation of the toolbar icons, see 3D Viewer Toolbar (p. 18).

2.2.6. Boundary Markers and Labels

Click Case Options > Labels and Markers to invoke the Labels and Markers Options details
view, used to select/clear the display of named regions and markers in the viewer as well as change
the appearance of the markers.

Also see Boundary Condition Visualization (p. 177) for more details.

2.2.6.1. Label Options

Select the options to enable label visibility. To disable all labels, clear the Show Labels option. The first
three options refer to primitive and composite regions. For details, see Assemblies, Primitive Regions,
and Composite Regions (p. 99).

2.2.6.2. Boundary Markers

The Show Boundary Markers option turns on boundary condition symbols such as arrows indicating
flow direction at an inlet.

The Marker Quantity slider controls the number of markers displayed. Moving the slider to the right
increases the number.

The Marker Length slider controls the size of the markers displayed. Moving the slider to the right in-
creases the size.

2.2.6.3. Boundary Vectors

The Vector Quantity slider controls the number of vectors displayed. Moving the slider to the right
increases the number.

The Vector Length slider controls the size of the vectors displayed. Moving the slider to the right in-
creases the size.

See Boundary Plot Options Tab (p. 176) for a discussion of displaying boundary vectors.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
26 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Views and Figures

2.2.6.4. Profile Vectors

The Vector Length slider controls the size of the vectors displayed. Moving the slider to the right in-
creases the size.

See Viewing and Editing Data Imported from a Profile Data File (p. 327) for a discussion of displaying
profile vectors

2.3. Views and Figures

The 3D Viewer opens with a single viewport; you can increase the number of viewports to four by using
the viewport icon:

Figure 2.2: Viewport Control

The contents of a viewport are a view, which is a CCL object that contains the camera angle, zoom level,
lighting, and visibility setting of each object in the tree view.

Each viewport contains a different, independent view. By default, four views exist: View 1, View 2, View
3, View 4.

When you select an object in the tree view, its information is applied to the active viewport. When you
manipulate an object in the viewport, the view's CCL is updated immediately. However if the focus is
on that viewport, you can press u to revert your change.

2.3.1. Switching to a View or Figure

To switch to a view or figure, do one of the following:

• Use the drop-down menu in the upper-left corner of the viewport.

• For figures only: Double-click the figure in the tree view (under the Report object).

• For figures only: Right-click the figure in the tree view (under the Report object), then select Edit from the
shortcut menu.

2.3.2. Changing the Definition of a View or Figure

To change a view or figure:

1. Switch to the view or figure that you want to change.

For details, see Switching to a View or Figure (p. 27).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 27
CFX-Pre 3D Viewer

2. Change the view or figure (for example, rotate the view).

View and figure objects are saved automatically when you switch to a different view or figure.

2.4. Stereo Viewer

If you:

1. Have a standard stereo display

2. Have a graphics card that supports quad buffering OpenGL output

3. Have set your graphics card to "Stereo"

4. Have set your view to Perspective mode (right-click in the Viewer and select Projection > Perspective)

...you can view output in stereo. To enable this functionality:

1. Select Edit > Options.

2. In the Options dialog box, select CFX-Pre > Viewer.

3. On the Viewer panel:

a. Set Stereo > Mode to Stereo.

b. Set the Stereo Effect. The value of the "stereo effect" that is required is related to the distance
between the observer and the display. If the stereo effect is too strong, either move away from the
display, or move the slider towards Weaker.

4. Click OK to save the settings.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
28 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 3: CFX-Pre File Menu
There are a number of basic functions available in CFX-Pre, such as opening and saving an existing
case. These are described in detail in this chapter:
3.1. New Case Command
3.2. Open Case Command
3.3. Close Command
3.4. Save Case Command
3.5. Save Project Command
3.6. Refresh Command (ANSYS Workbench only)
3.7. Save Case As Command
3.8. Import Mesh Command
3.9. Reload Mesh Files Command
3.10. Import CCL Command
3.11. Export CCL Command
3.12. Save Picture Command
3.13. Recent Case Files Submenu
3.14. Recent CCL Files Submenu
3.15. Recent Session Files Submenu
3.16. Quit Command

3.1. New Case Command

Note

If a case is open, New Case is not available. To create new cases, ensure all open cases are
saved (if required) and closed.

1. Select File > New Case.

The New Case dialog box appears.

2. Select a case type.

• General makes use of all features in CFX-Pre. This is the most common mode of operation.

• Turbomachinery is used specifically for turbomachinery applications and enables quick setup in such
cases. For details, see Turbomachinery Mode (p. 361).

• Quick Setup provides fewer model options and is suitable for simple physics setup. It is useful as a tool
to learn the basic paradigms of CFX-Pre before using General mode. For details, see Quick Setup
Mode (p. 357).

• Library Template enables a CCL physics definition to be imported for use on a mesh. For details, see
Library Objects (p. 371).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 29
CFX-Pre File Menu

3.2. Open Case Command

The Open Case command can be used to open existing CFX-Pre case files (.cfx), as well as implicitly
start a new case by opening a *.def, *.mdef, *.res, .ccl, “full” transient results file (*.trn), or
backup file (*.bak). Other supported file types include: Mesh or Simulation Database file (*.cmdb or
*.dsdb), and GTM Database file (.gtm).

Note

If a case is already open, Open Case is not available. To open cases, ensure that all open
cases are saved (if required) and closed.

1. Select File > Open Case.

The Load Case File dialog box appears.

2. Select a location to open the file from.

3. Under Files of type, select the type of file to open.

• Case files can be selected. CFX case files (*.cfx) contain all of the physics, region, and mesh information
for your case. For details, see Opening Case (.cfx) Files (p. 31).

• CFX-Solver input or result files can be selected. For details, see Opening CFX-Solver Input (.def, .mdef ),
Results (.res), Transient (.trn) or Backup (.bak) Files (p. 31).

• CCL files can be selected. For details, see Opening CCL (.ccl) Files (p. 31).

• Mesh or Simulation Database files can be selected. For details, see Opening Meshing (.cmdb or .dsdb)
Files (p. 31).

• GTM Database files can be selected. For details, see Opening CFX-Mesh (.gtm) Files (p. 32).

4. Select the file to open and click Open.

Note

When CFX-Solver input or results files from a previous release of CFX are opened in CFX-Pre,
physics errors are highlighted in red in the message area. If these errors are ignored, a case
can still run in the CFX-Solver in many cases, but it is recommend that the errors be fixed.
This ensures CCL is updated to the current version. These errors are usually fixed easily by
right-clicking on the object and selecting Auto Fix Physics. Also, double-clicking on the error
in the message area opens the details view in which the error was made. For details, see
Physics Errors from Old .def/.res Files (p. 13). Also, the Command Editor can be used to
correct CCL. For details, see Command Editor Dialog Box (p. 375).

3.2.1. Recover Original Session

When opening a CFX-Solver input file, the option Recover Original Session can be used to find the
location of the original CFX Case file (that was used to generate the CFX-Solver input file) and load it.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
30 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Open Case Command

Using this option enables CFX-Pre to access more information (such as composite regions, unused ma-
terials and meshes, layouts, and views) and then write that information to the CFX-Solver input file.

When the Recover Original Session option is selected, the Replace Flow Data option is available. This
will extract the CCL from the CFX-Solver input file and replace the existing Case file data. This is useful
to recover the problem definition when it has been modified outside of CFX-Pre during the run.

3.2.2. Opening Case (.cfx) Files

When opening an existing case file, CFX-Pre opens the case in the state in which it was last saved, in-
cluding the mesh.

3.2.3. Opening CFX-Solver Input (.def, .mdef), Results (.res), Transient (.trn)
or Backup (.bak) Files
CFX-Solver input and results files from the current and previous releases of CFX can be opened. When
opening these files, a new case file is created. The mesh and physics are imported into the new case.
All preprocessing information in these files is imported into CFX-Pre and is edited in the same way as
in other case files.

CFX-Pre can also load “full” transient results file (*.trn) or backup file (*.bak) by typing *trn or
*bak, respectively, as the File Name in the Load Case File dialog box. Using the * character returns
a list of available files of type *.trn or *.bak. The selected file is imported as a CFX-Solver input file.

Note

• If a Release 11.0 .def file containing automatically generated interfaces is loaded into CFX-Pre,
and these interfaces were generated as a result of 'contact' information in the original .cmdb
file, these interfaces may be removed by CFX-Pre. This is a problem only when loading Release
11.0 .def files, and will occur only in a small percentage of cases. Loading a .cfx file will work
correctly.

• It is not possible to load an .mres file into CFX-Pre.

3.2.4. Opening CCL (.ccl) Files

Opening a CCL file creates a new case file. Any physics, material and expression information is imported
into CFX-Pre and can be edited in the same way as for case files. CCL files do not contain any mesh
data, so it is necessary to import a mesh before assigning locations to domains and boundary conditions.

3.2.5. Opening Meshing (.cmdb or .dsdb) Files

Opening a .cmdb or .dsdb file loads the mesh and creates an initial physics state, in the same manner
as creating a new case.

Important

.cmdb and .dsdb files require the cfxacmo library, which is supplied with ANSYS Workbench.
If you are unable to load such files into CFX-Pre, one solution is to install ANSYS Workbench
to make those library files available.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 31
CFX-Pre File Menu

3.2.6. Opening CFX-Mesh (.gtm) Files

Opening a .gtm file loads the mesh and creates an initial physics state, in the same manner as creating
a new case.

3.3. Close Command

Closes the existing case, prompting to save if appropriate.

Note

On Linux machines with an NVIDIA graphics card, processes related to CFX-Pre (in par-
ticular, PreGui_ogl.exe) do not always terminate automatically when CFX-Pre is
closed. These processes may need to be terminated manually.

3.4. Save Case Command

When CFX-Pre is started from the ANSYS CFX Launcher, the Save Case command writes the current
state to the case file. You should save a case before closing it to be able to reopen it at a later date; all
data is lost if CFX-Pre is closed without saving the case.

When CFX-Pre is started from ANSYS Workbench, the Save Project command writes the current state
of the project.

3.5. Save Project Command

When CFX-Pre is started from ANSYS Workbench, the Save Project command writes the current state
of the project.

3.6. Refresh Command (ANSYS Workbench only)

Reads the upstream data, but does not perform any long-running operation.

3.7. Save Case As Command

When using Save As, the previous case files are closed and remain unchanged from the last time they
were explicitly saved.

1. Select File > Save Case As.

The Save Case dialog box appears.

2. Select a location where the file will be saved.

3. Under File name, type the name to save the file as.

4. Click Save.

A new file is saved and is kept open in CFX-Pre.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
32 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Import CCL Command

3.8. Import Mesh Command

Numerous options are available when importing a mesh. For details, see Importing Meshes (p. 71).

3.9. Reload Mesh Files Command

It is possible to import and manipulate many meshes within a CFX-Pre case. In some cases, this can
result in a complex set of operations (for example, a single 'blade' mesh may have been imported, and
then 30 copies may have been made). In some cases, it is desirable to swap this mesh for one that is
much finer, or of better quality. The process of deleting all existing meshes, re-importing the new mesh
and then applying the transformations again could be costly. Hence, the mesh reload function enables
one or more mesh files to be replaced in a fraction of the time.

1. Select File > Reload Mesh Files.

The Reload Mesh Files dialog box appears.

2. Select or clear the mesh files to replace the ones that were previously imported.

3. Click OK.

Note

This feature is not required (and is not available) in CFX-Pre launched from ANSYS Workbench.

3.10. Import CCL Command

CFX Command Language (CCL) consists of commands used to carry out actions in CFX-Pre, the CFX-
Solver Manager and CFD-Post. All of the steps carried out in CFX-Pre are executed as CCL commands
in the software’s engine, and these commands can be exported and imported to other cases.

Tip

• You can also import expressions and regions using the Import CCL command.

• To import composite region definitions from older versions of CCL, use the Import CCL command
found in the File menu, rather than the import command found in the Regions workspace.

A useful application of importing CCL is to apply the same preprocessing data to a number of different
meshes. In such a case, the following general workflow may be ensued:

1. Import the new mesh.

2. Import the CCL data.

3. Assign mesh locations to the domains and boundary conditions, if required.

4. Write the CFX-Solver input file for the CFX-Solver.

The benefit of using this workflow is that there would be no need to specify all of the preprocessing
data again.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 33
CFX-Pre File Menu

Importing a set of commonly used customized material or reaction definitions is also possible by im-
porting a CCL file. A useful application of the import CCL feature is demonstrated when using Library
Mode. For details, see Library Objects (p. 371).

3.10.1. Append or Replace

3.10.1.1. Append
This option never deletes existing objects such as domains, boundary conditions, and initialization.
Objects with a different name than existing objects are added. If an object of the same name and type
already exists, parameters within the object that are unique to the imported CCL file are added to the
existing object. When the imported CCL file contains parameter definitions that already exist within
existing objects, they will replace the existing definitions.

3.10.1.2. Replace
This option overwrites, in full, existing objects of the same name and type. Because boundary conditions,
subdomains, and so on are defined within a domain, if that domain is replaced, these objects are lost
if not defined in the imported CCL file. Objects with a unique name are added to the existing case.

Replace only replaces any object listed in the new file that is a subobject of FLOW with the new
definition in the file. However, it does not remove objects that are not listed in the new file. To remove
objects not mentioned in the replacement CCL, you can either delete FLOW (and all its contents) before
importing the new CCL or import the new CCL and then remove the objects that are no longer required.

3.10.1.2.1. Auto-load materials

When Replace is selected, the Auto-load materials check box is made available. When a file is imported
with the Auto-load materials check box selected, any materials and reactions that are missing from
the problem setup being imported, and that are not defined in the case already, will be loaded auto-
matically. These added materials and reactions can be found in the standard materials and reactions
library files.

3.11. Export CCL Command

Using Export CCL, some or all CCL definitions can be exported to a file.

1. Select File > Export > CCL.

The Export CCL dialog box appears.

2. Select or clear Save All Objects.

A list of all existing CCL objects is available. To export particular objects, clear Save All Objects and
select only the objects to export. For details, see Save All Objects (p. 35).

3. Select a location to export to.

4. Enter a name for the exported file.

5. Click Save.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
34 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Save Picture Command

To export the physics definition for a problem, select all the FLOW objects. Additional Variables, CEL
expressions, User Functions and material definitions are stored in LIBRARY objects; these will need to
be included if you want to export these objects.

3.11.1. Save All Objects

When Save All Objects is selected, all CCL object definitions are written to the CCL file. To export only
a sub-set of CCL objects, clear this and select only the required CCL objects.

3.11.1.1. Sample of Saving CEL Expressions

This sample is specifically for the export of expressions.

1. Select File > Export > CCL.

2. Clear Save All Objects and expand LIBRARY.

3. Expand CEL.

4. Select EXPRESSIONS.

5. Select a location to export to.

6. Enter a name for the exported file.

7. Click Save.

3.12. Save Picture Command

To save the current contents of the viewer window to a file, select File > Save Picture from the main

menu or click Save Picture . The Save Picture dialog box is displayed.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 35
CFX-Pre File Menu

Options Tab
The Options tab has the following settings:

File
Enables you to specify the filename of the file. You may enter the filename and path into the File field, or

click the Browse icon and search for the directory in which the file is to be saved.

Files are always saved with the file extension corresponding to the selected graphics format.

Format
To choose a file format, click . When creating a new image file, the file format you choose affects the
quality of the image:

PNG
Portable Network Graphics is a raster file format (*.png) that supports lossless image compression.

AVZ (3D)
ANSYS Viewer Format is a file format (*.avz) used to present interactive three-dimensional views. It
can be displayed using the ANSYS Viewer.

JPEG
A compressed file format (*.jpg) developed for compressing raw digital information. File sizes are
relatively small. Due to compression artifacts, this format is not recommended for line drawings.

Windows Bitmap
A file type (*.bmp) that is usually large and does not adjust well to resizing or editing. This file type
does retain all of the quality of the original image and can be easily converted to other formats.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
36 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Save Picture Command

PPM
Portable Pixel Map is a file format (*.ppm) similar to a Windows Bitmap. It is an uncompressed
format and is not recommended for large images.

PostScript and Encapsulated PS

PostScript (*.ps) and Encapsulated PS (*.eps) are generally recommended for output to a printer
or line drawings. However, some graphics objects and features can cause the PS/EPS to output as a
very large bitmap file, in which case a PNG file would be a more efficient alternative. Note that the
ANSYS logo and the axis do not cause the PS/EPS output to become a bitmap.

VRML (3D)
Virtual Reality Modeling Language is a file format (*.wrl) used to present interactive three-dimen-
sional views. The output is VRML 2.0.

Note

Existing CFD-Viewer State (*.cvf) files previously generated can be converted by using an
application supplied as part of the CFX, TurboGrid and CFD-Post installations:
C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v$ANSYSCFXRELEASE\CFX\bin\cfx5cvfconvert <cvf-file>

Use Screen Capture Check Box

When Use Screen Capture is selected, a screen capture of the viewer is saved to the output file.

Note

• When a clip plane is coincident with regions, boundaries, or interfaces that are planes, the
results of a Save Picture command may not match what you see in the 3D Viewer (depending
on the orientation of the case). In this situation, select the Use Screen Capture check box.

White Background Check Box

You can save the current image with a white background by selecting White Background.

When the White Background check box is selected, certain white objects may be colored black and
certain black objects may be colored white in the image file. Objects that are not affected can
usually be manually colored by editing them.

Enhanced Output (Smooth Edges) Check Box

When Enhanced Output (Smooth Edges) is selected, the image is processed by antialiasing.

Use Screen Size Check Box

When Use Screen Size is selected, the output has the same width and height, measured in pixels, as shown
in the viewer. You can clear the check box to specify the width and height manually.

Width/Height
You can specify the width and height of the image in pixels by entering values for Width and Height. In
order to use these settings, the Use Screen Size check box must be cleared.

Scale (%)
Scale (%) is used to scale the size of bitmap images to a fraction (in percent) of the current viewer window
size. This option is available when Use Screen Size is selected.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 37
CFX-Pre File Menu

Image Quality
Image Quality is available only for the JPEG format. A value of 100 specifies the highest image quality; a
value of 1 specifies the lowest image quality.

Tolerance
Tolerance is a non-dimensional value used in face sorting when generating pictures. Larger values result
in faster generation times, but may cause defects in the resulting output.

Click Save to save the current viewer contents to an image file.

3.13. Recent Case Files Submenu

CFX-Pre saves the file paths of the last five case files (.cfx) opened. To open one of these case files,
select File > Recent Case Files.

3.14. Recent CCL Files Submenu

CFX-Pre saves the file paths of the last five CCL files opened. To open one of these CCL files, select File
> Recent CCL Files.

3.15. Recent Session Files Submenu

CFX-Pre saves the file paths of the last five session files opened. To open one of these session files
(*.pre), select File > Recent Session Files.

3.16. Quit Command

To quit CFX-Pre, select File > Quit. In stand-alone mode, if the case is not already saved, there will be
a prompt as to whether a save should be done.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
38 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 4: CFX-Pre Edit Menu
This chapter describes:
4.1. Undo and Redo
4.2. Options

Undo and Redo commands are available in the Edit menu. Additionally, there are a variety of options
that can be set to customize the software.

4.1. Undo and Redo

The undo and redo capability is limited by the amount of available memory.

In stand-alone mode, the undo stack is cleared whenever a New, Open, or Close action occurs. Similarly,
when using CFX-Pre/CFD-Post from within ANSYS Workbench, the undo stack is cleared in CFX-Pre/CFD-
Post after the application receives commands from ANSYS Workbench.

Issue the Undo command by doing any of the following:

• Select Edit > Undo.

• Click Undo on the toolbar.

• Press Ctrl + Z

Note

• You can repeatedly issue the Undo command.

• Some viewer manipulations cannot be reverted using the Undo command.

• Some commands that you issue have multiple components. For example, when you create some
objects the software creates the object and sets the visibility of the object on (in two separate
operations). Thus, when you perform an undo operation in such a situation, you are setting the
visibility of the object off; you must choose undo a second time to “uncreate” the object.

• Undo cannot be used when recording session files.

The redo feature is used to do an action that you have just undone using the Undo command. Issue
the Redo command by doing any of the following:

• Select Edit > Redo.

• Click Redo on the toolbar.

• Press Ctrl + Y

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 39
CFX-Pre Edit Menu

4.2. Options
The Options dialog box enables you to set various general preferences. Settings are retained per user.

1. Select Edit > Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

2. Set options as required. For descriptions of the available options, see:

• CFX-Pre Options (p. 40)

• Common Options (p. 47)

If desired, you can use the CFX Defaults or the Workbench Defaults buttons at the bottom of
the dialog box to quickly set CFX-Pre, CFX-Solver Manager, and CFD-Post to have the standard
appearance and operation of CFX or Workbench respectively. The only CFX-Pre settings that are
affected by these buttons are:

• CFX-Pre > Graphics Style > Background > Color Type

• CFX-Pre > Graphics Style > Background > Color

• CFX-Pre > Colors > Labels

• CFX-Pre > Colors > Legend Text

• CFX-Pre > Colors > Turbo Axis

• Common > Viewer Setup > Mouse Mapping

3. Click OK.

Note

Changes made under the Options dialog box do not take effect until a new case is opened.

When changing some user preferences, it will be necessary to restart the application for the
setting to take effect. For example, changes to the highlighting mode, whether made in the
Edit > Options panel or from the Outline tree Case Options > General > General Options
panel, do not take place until the application is restarted.

4.2.1. CFX-Pre Options

The CFX-Pre options are.

• Record Default Session File

When selected, a session file named cfx.xx.pre will be recorded automatically each time CFX-Pre
is started (where 'xx' is the next available number).

• Default User Mode can be set to General, Turbo, or Quick Setup.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
40 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Options

This determines the default mode that CFX-Pre will use when creating a simulation. For details on
Turbo mode, see Turbomachinery Mode (p. 361). For details on Quick Setup mode, see Quick Setup
Mode (p. 357).

• Report CCL Update Summary produces an information window when you load a file that contains CCL
from a previous version of CFX-Pre. This window describes the updates that were made to the CCL to make
it compatible with the current software release.

The following sections describe the options under CFX-Pre:

4.2.1.1. General
4.2.1.2. Graphics Style
4.2.1.3. Render
4.2.1.4. Mesh
4.2.1.5.Turbo
4.2.1.6. Labels and Markers
4.2.1.7. Extensions
4.2.1.8. Customization
4.2.1.9. Solve
4.2.1.10. Viewer

4.2.1.1. General
The General options can be accessed in two ways:

• Edit Menu

Select Edit > Options to open the Options dialog box, then select CFX-Pre > General in the tree.

These settings persist until you change them, and can be used to control the behavior of CFX-Pre
for new cases.

• Case Options

Go to the Outline tree view and edit Case Options > General.

These settings apply only for the current case. The corresponding General settings of the Options
dialog box are used to initialize the case options, but are overridden by modifications made to the
case options.

Note

Some of the options related to Beta features cannot be set in the case options.

4.2.1.1.1. Beta Options

The Beta options are:
4.2.1.1.1.1. Physics Beta Features
4.2.1.1.1.2.Topology Beta Features

4.2.1.1.1.1. Physics Beta Features

The physics Beta feature options are:

• Enable Beta Features

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 41
CFX-Pre Edit Menu

Some Beta features are hidden in the user interface. You can select this option to “unhide” those
features. When selected, such features are identified by "(Beta)" in the user interface. Note that Beta
features are unofficial and not well tested.

• Constant Domain Physics

Note

Physics Beta features are normally indicated by a message in the physics message window.
The physics message window is shown in Figure 1.2: Sample CFX-Pre Interface (p. 4).

4.2.1.1.1.2. Topology Beta Features

The topology Beta feature options are:

• Enable Simplification On Load and Import

• Preserve Direct Connections On Load and Import (applies only when Enable Simplification On Load
and Import is selected)

• Combine Unreferenced Primitives On Load and Import (applies only when Enable Simplification On
Load and Import is selected)

• Enable Simplification On Write

4.2.1.1.2. Auto Generation

• Automatic Default Domain

When this option is selected, a domain with the name Default Domain will be created upon im-
porting a mesh.

To toggle default domain generation on or off for a session, without affecting the user preference
setting, you can right-click the Simulation object in the tree view and select Automatic Default
Domain from the shortcut menu.

If you manually delete a default domain, the default domain mechanism will be disabled, and a
warning message will appear in the physics message window.

If you create a domain that uses the same region(s) as the default domain, the latter will be redefined
with the remaining locations, or deleted if all the regions are referenced by user-defined domains.

If you modify the location of the default domain, the name will change to Default Domain
Modified and no additional default domain will be generated.

When loading an existing case (cfx file or def file), if there are any mesh volumes that are not as-
signed to a domain, the default domain generation will be disabled. It can be re-activated as described
previously.

• Automatic Default Interfaces

When selected, CFX-Pre will attempt to create domain interfaces when a domain is created or modified.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
42 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Options

To toggle default interface generation on or off for a session, without affecting the user preference
setting, you can right-click the Simulation object in the tree view and select Automatic Default
Interfaces from the shortcut menu.

Domain interface generation is always deactivated when loading an existing simulation.

• Interface Method

When Automatic Default Interfaces has been selected, the Interface Method can be set to one of
the following to control how interfaces are automatically generated between domains where regions
are found to be connected:

– One per Interface Type

This method groups as many domains into as few interfaces as possible.

– One per Domain Pair

An interface is generated for each pair of domains.

• Default Boundary can be set to one of the following:

– Standard

A default boundary condition is created that covers all primitive regions that are not assigned to
any boundary condition in the current domain. The default boundary is modified dynamically when
other boundary conditions are subsequently added or deleted such that it includes all regions not
assigned to any other boundary condition.

– One per Relevant Region

A default boundary condition on each relevant region not assigned to any boundary condition is
created. In this context, ‘relevant’ means every composite 2D region, plus any 2D primitive regions
that are not referenced by a composite 2D region. If boundary conditions are subsequently deleted,
causing some regions to be unassigned, a single default boundary condition will include all such
regions.

– One per Primitive Region

A default boundary condition on each individual 2D primitive region not assigned to any boundary
condition is created. If boundary conditions are subsequently deleted, causing some regions to be
unassigned, a single default boundary condition will include all such regions.

– Disabled

• Strict Domain Type Checking for Automatic Interfaces option checks that the domain type is consistent
between all parts of an interface before the automatic domain interfaces are created.

4.2.1.1.3. Physics
• Disable Physics Validation

This option prevents CFX-Pre from issuing messages in the physics message window. For details, see
Physics Message Window (p. 12).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 43
CFX-Pre Edit Menu

• Filter Messages

Three types of messages are displayed in the physics message window: information messages,
warning messages, and error messages.

Filter Messages can be set to one of the following to control the types of messages that are displayed:

– Suppress None

Upon applying this setting, all information messages, warning messages, and error messages are
displayed.

– Suppress Information

Upon applying this setting, all information messages1 are suppressed, and all warning messages
and error messages are displayed.

– Suppress Information/Warning

Upon applying this setting, all information messages1 and warning messages are suppressed, and
all error messages are displayed.

– Suppress All

Upon applying this setting, all information messages1, warning messages, and error messages are
suppressed.

When you change the Filter Messages setting, it overrides any messages that have previously been
individually suppressed.

Note

An information message is displayed in the physics message window when Beta Features
are enabled. This message cannot be suppressed with the Filter Messages setting.

• Automatic Physics Update

If this option is selected and you change settings in the simulation definition, CFX-Pre will, for certain
settings, respond by changing other settings automatically in an attempt to make problem specification
consistent. This incurs an overhead, so for large problems you may want to disable this feature.

• Show Interface Boundaries in Outline Tree

Shows the interface boundaries in the Outline view.

4.2.1.2. Graphics Style

Settings made here set the default operation for CFX-Pre; however, you can override these settings for
your current simulation by going to the Outline tree view and editing Case Options > Graphics Style.

1
When you have suppressed messages, an information message appears summarizing the number of information messages, warning
messages, and error messages that are suppressed. This message cannot be suppressed with the Filter Messages setting.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
44 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Options

4.2.1.2.1. Object Highlighting

Controls how an object that is generated after a change to the setting of this option is highlighted in
the viewer. Such highlighting occurs when in picking mode, when selecting a region in a list, or when
selecting items in the tree view.

Under Type, select one of the following:

• Surface Mesh: Displays the surface mesh for selected regions using lines.

• Face Highlight: Displays the selected regions using faces.

• Wireframe: Traces objects that contain surfaces with green lines.

• Bounding Box: Highlights the selected objects with a green box.

Note

When you load a case, the highlighting is dictated by the setting that is stored in the case,
rather than by the current preferences setting.

4.2.1.2.2. Background
Set Mode to Color or Image.

4.2.1.2.2.1. Color

Use Color Type to set either a solid color or a gradient of colors; use Color to set the color (and Color
2 for gradients).

4.2.1.2.2.2. Image

Select one of a list of predefined images or a custom image.

If selecting a custom image, choose an image file and a type of mapping. Image types that are supported
include *.bmp (24-bit BMP only), *.jpg, *.png, and *.ppm. Mapping options are Flat and
Spherical. Flat maps are stationary while spherical maps surround the virtual environment and rotate
with the objects in the viewer.

Custom images have some restrictions: all background images and textures sent to the viewer must be
square and must have dimensions that are powers of 2 (for example, 512 x 512 or 1024 x 1024).

If the dimensions of your background image is not a power of 2, the viewer sizes the image to be a
power of 2 by doing bicubic resampling.

To make the background image square, transparent pixels are added to the smaller dimension to make
it the same as the larger dimension. The transparent pixels enable you to see the regular viewer back-
ground, which gives you control over what fill color your background has.

4.2.1.2.3. Colors
4.2.1.2.3.1. Labels

Set the labels to be bright or dark.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 45
CFX-Pre Edit Menu

4.2.1.2.3.2. Legend Text and Turbo Axis

Select a color by clicking in the box, or clicking the Ellipsis icon.

4.2.1.2.4. Visibility
4.2.1.2.4.1. Axis and Ruler Visibility

Select or clear Axis Visibility or Ruler Visibility to show or hide the axis indicator or ruler in the
viewer.

4.2.1.3. Render
These settings are used to control the display properties of faces and lines. For details, see Render Op-
tions (p. 96).

4.2.1.4. Mesh
Mesh Match Tolerance is used when creating domain interfaces. It is used to determine whether a
one-to-one connection can be made at a domain interface. The tolerance is relative to the local mesh
length scale; the default value is 0.005 (or 0.5%) of the local edge length on the first side of the interface.
A node on the second side must be within this tolerance to a node on the first side for the two to be
considered coincident.

4.2.1.4.1. Mesh Import Options

Source Format specifies which type of mesh file is the general default. For details, see Supported Mesh
File Types (p. 73). Source Directory specifies the default directory from which meshes are imported
upon selecting the Import Mesh command. It is also possible to set other general options (such as
mesh units) and specific advanced options on a per-mesh format basis.

4.2.1.5. Turbo
These settings are used in the recognition of turbo regions when importing a mesh using Turbo mode.

4.2.1.6. Labels and Markers

The settings under this category control whether labels and boundaries appear in the cases displayed
in the 3D Viewer. Settings made here set the default operation for CFX-Pre; however, you can override
these settings for your current simulation by going to the Outline tree view and editing Case Options
> Labels and Markers.

4.2.1.6.1. Labels
The Show Labels option controls whether any labels are displayed; when selected, the remaining options
control whether particular types of labels are displayed.

4.2.1.6.2. Boundary Markers

When Show Boundary Markers is selected, the check boxes in that panel control which markers are
displayed.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
46 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Options

The Marker Quantity slider controls the number of markers displayed. Moving the slider to the right
increases the number.

The Marker Length slider controls the size of the markers displayed. Moving the slider to the right in-
creases the size.

4.2.1.6.3. Boundary Vectors

The Vector Quantity slider controls the number of vectors displayed. Moving the slider to the right
increases the number.

The Vector Length slider controls the size of the vectors displayed. Moving the slider to the right in-
creases the size.

See Boundary Plot Options Tab (p. 176) for a discussion of displaying boundary vectors.

4.2.1.6.4. Profile Vectors

The Vector Length slider controls the size of the vectors displayed. Moving the slider to the right in-
creases the size.

See Viewing and Editing Data Imported from a Profile Data File (p. 327) for a discussion of displaying
profile vectors

4.2.1.7. Extensions
When Include Installed Extension Files is selected, you have the option of creating a comma-separated
list of file to exclude.

4.2.1.8. Customization
The Use Custom Files setting enables the creation of special-purpose interfaces that extend the func-
tionality of CFX-Pre for your environment. Contact your Customer Support representative for more in-
formation.

The Force generation of rules files an advanced setting used to maintain synchronization of customized
RULES files. This option is useful during the development of customized RULES files and is available
only when Use Custom Files is selected.

4.2.1.9. Solve
The Definition File Timeout setting controls how long CFX-Pre will wait in seconds while attempting
to obtain enough data from the CFX-Solver in order to spawn a CFX-Solver Manager to monitor an ex-
isting batch run. This parameter is used when employing the Simulation Control > Start Solver > Run
Solver and Monitor command to start the CFX-Solver Manager. See Simulation Control in Outline Tree
View Structure (p. 5) for details on monitoring a running solver batch run.

4.2.1.10. Viewer
For details on Stereo settings, see Stereo Viewer (p. 28).

4.2.2. Common Options

The Common options are:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 47
CFX-Pre Edit Menu

Auto Save
Select the time between automatic saves.

To turn off automatic saves, set Auto Save to Never.

Note

This option affects more than one CFX product.

Temporary directory

To set a temporary directory, click Browse to find a convenient directory where the autosave feature
will save state files.

The following sections describe the options under Common:

4.2.2.1. Appearance
4.2.2.2. Viewer Setup
4.2.2.3. Units

4.2.2.1. Appearance
The appearance of the user interface can be controlled from the Appearance options. The default user
interface style will be set to that of your machine. For example, on Windows, the user interface has a
Windows look to it. If, for example, a Motif appearance to the user interface is preferred, select to use
this instead of the Windows style.

1. Under GUI Style, select the user interface style to use.

2. For Font and Formatted Font, specify the fonts to use in the application.

Note

It is important not to set the font size too high (over 24 pt. is not recommended) or the
dialog boxes may become difficult to read. Setting the font size too small may cause
some portions of the text to not be visible on monitors set at low resolutions. It is also
important not to set the font to a family such as Webdings, Wingdings, Symbols, or
similar type faces, or the dialog boxes become illegible.

4.2.2.2. Viewer Setup

1. If you have complicated simulations that feature many overlapping lines, you can specify a Picking Tol-
erance that will increase the resolution for picking operations. Values must be between 1 (low resolution)
and 0 (very high resolution); the default value is 0.1. Note that increasing the resolution will slow printing
times.

2. Select Double Buffering to use two color buffers for improved visualization.

Double Buffering is a feature supported by most OpenGL implementations. It provides two complete
color buffers that swap between each other to animate graphics smoothly. If your implementation
of OpenGL does not support double buffering, you can clear this check box.

3. Select or clear Unlimited Zoom.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
48 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Options

By default, zoom is restricted to prevent graphics problems related to depth sorting. Selecting
Unlimited Zoom allows an unrestricted zoom.

4.2.2.2.1. Mouse Mapping

The mouse-mapping options enable you to assign viewer actions to mouse clicks and keyboard/mouse
combinations. These options are available when running in stand-alone mode. To adjust or view the
mouse mapping options, select Edit > Options, then Common > Viewer Setup > Mouse Mapping.
For details, see Mouse Button Mapping.

4.2.2.3. Units
1. Under System, select the unit system to use. Unit systems are sets of quantity types for mass, length,
time, and so on.

The options under System include SI, CGS, English Engineering, British Technical,
US Customary, US Engineering, or Custom. Only Custom enables you to redefine a
quantity type (for example, to use inches for the dimensions in a file that otherwise used SI units).

The most common quantity types appear in the main Options dialog box; to see all quantity types,
click More Units.

2. Select or clear Always convert units to Preferred Units.

If Always convert units to Preferred Units is selected, the units of entered quantities are imme-
diately converted to those set in this dialog box.

For example, if you have set Velocity to [m s^-1] in this dialog box to make that the preferred
velocity unit, and elsewhere you enter 20 [mile hr^-1] for a velocity quantity, the entered
value is immediately converted and displayed as 8.94078 [m s^-1].

The two sets of units are:

• The units presented on this dialog box, which control the default units presented in the user interface as
well as the units used for mesh transformation.

• The solution units. For details, see Setting the Solution Units (p. 209).

4.2.2.3.1. Additional Help on Units

For additional information about units, see Mesh Units (p. 72).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 49
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
50 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 5: CFX-Pre Session Menu
A session file is a record of the actions performed during a CFX-Pre session, saved in a file as commands.
The actions that cause commands to be written to a session file include:

• Viewer manipulation performed using the commands available by right-clicking in the viewer window.

• All actions available from the File and Edit menus.

• Creation of expressions.

• Creation of new objects and changes to an object committed by clicking OK or Apply on any of the panels
available from the Tools and Insert menus/toolbars.

• Commands issued in the Command Editor dialog box.

• Mesh import, delete, and transformation operations.

This chapter describes:

5.1. New Session Command
5.2. Start Recording and Stop Recording Commands
5.3. Play Session Command

5.1. New Session Command

To record your actions in CFX-Pre in a session file:

1. Select Session > New Session. This opens the Set Session File dialog box, where you can enter a filename
for your session file. Once you have saved the file, it becomes the current session file.

Note

This command is available only when a session file is not currently being recorded.

2. Browse to the directory in which you want to create the session file, and then enter a name for the file
ending with a .pre (CFX-Pre) extension.

3. Click Save to create the file.

4. To start recording to the session file, select Session > Start Recording.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 51
CFX-Pre Session Menu

5. To stop recording to the session file, select Session > Stop Recording.

Important

Session files must not contain > undo commands. These commands would produce errors
when playing back the session file.

If you create more than one session file during a CFX-Pre session, the most recently created file is the
current session file by default. You can set a different file to be the current session file by selecting an
existing file from the New Session > Set Session File window and then clicking Save. Because the file
exists, a warning dialog box appears:

• If you select Overwrite, the existing session file is deleted and a new file is created in its place.

• If you select Append, commands will be added to the end of the existing session file when recording begins.

Note

By default, CFX-Pre does not continuously write commands to a session file while you are
working on your simulation. You can change a setting in Edit > Options so that a session
file is recorded by default. If a session file is being recorded by CFX-Pre, whether by default
or intentionally, a new session file cannot be recorded.

5.2. Start Recording and Stop Recording Commands

The Start Recording action activates recording of CCL commands issued to the current session file. A
session file must first be set before you can start recording (see New Session Command (p. 51)).

Stop Recording terminates writing of CCL commands to the current session file. You can start and stop
recording to a session file as many times as necessary.

5.3. Play Session Command

A session file is a record of the actions performed during a CFX-Pre session, saved to a file when you
have defined a session filename and have clicked Session > Start Recording. By default, this file is
stored in your working directory.

After you have recorded a session file, you can select Session > Play Session, which opens the Play
Session File dialog box in which you can select the session file to play. The commands listed in the
selected session file are then executed.

Important

If a session file is played while a current simulation is open, existing data will be lost in the
following situations:

• If the session file starts a new simulation (that is, if it contains a >load command), then the
current simulation is closed without saving.

• If the session file does not contain a >load command, the behavior is the same as importing a
CCL file using the Append option. For details, see Append or Replace (p. 34). Existing objects

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
52 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Play Session Command

with the same name as objects defined in the session file are replaced by those in the session
file.

To play a session file:

1. From the menu bar, select Session > Play Session.

2. Browse to the directory containing the session file and select the file you want to play.

3. Click Open to play the session file.

Note

You can play session files in stand-alone CFX-Pre, but not in CFX-Pre in ANSYS Workbench.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 53
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
54 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 6: CFX-Pre Insert Menu
The Insert menu enables you to create new objects, such as domains or boundary conditions, or to
edit existing objects.

Tip

You are also able to create objects from shortcut menus in some contexts.

The settings specified in the various Insert menu panels correspond to all the data displayed in the
tree view. In many cases, the name of the new object can be specified. This name must be no more
than 80 characters in length.

Valid Syntax for Named Objects Any of the following characters are allowed in names of objects
in CFX-Pre: A-Z a-z 0-9 <space> (however, the first character must be A-Z or a-z). Multiple
spaces are treated as a single space character, and spaces at the end of a name are ignored.

In general, object names must be unique within the physics setup.

Analysis
Creates a new Flow Analysis in the Outline tree under Simulation. This enables you to define a steady-
state analysis or a transient analysis.

Analysis Type
Specifies a steady-state or a transient analysis (in the analysis you select, when multiple analyses are
available). Steady-state analyses are used to model flows that do not change over time, while transient
analyses model flows that are time-dependent. For details, see Analysis Type (p. 109).

Domain
Creates new fluid and solid domains (in the analysis you select, when multiple analyses are available).
These are the bounding volumes within which your CFD analysis is performed. You can create many domains
in CFX-Pre and each can be stationary or rotate at its own rate, using different mesh element types. For
details, see Domains (p. 113).

Boundary
Sets the conditions on the external boundaries of a specified domain in a selected analysis. In CFX-Pre,
boundary conditions are applied to existing 2D mesh regions. For details, see Boundary Conditions (p. 161).

Subdomain
Creates subdomains, which are volumes within a specified domain in a selected analysis that are used to
create volumetric sources. For details, see Subdomains (p. 193).

Source Point
Creates sources of quantities at a point location within a specified domain in a selected analysis. For details,
see Source Points (p. 189).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 55
CFX-Pre Insert Menu

Domain Interface
Connects fluid domains together (in the analysis you select, when multiple analyses are available). If a
frame change occurs across the interface, you have the choice of using a frozen rotor, stage, or transient
rotor-stator model to account for the frame change. You can also take advantage of domain interfaces to
produce periodic connections between dissimilar meshes. For details, see Domain Interfaces (p. 149).

Global Initialization
Sets values or expressions for the global initial conditions (across all domains in the analysis you select,
when multiple analyses are available). Domain specific initialization is set through the domain forms. In
CFX-Pre, you can set linearly varying conditions from inlet to outlet using the initialization forms. For details,
see Initialization (p. 179).

Coordinate Frame
Creates and edits coordinate frames. A Cartesian coordinate frame exists by default, but other Cartesian
frames can be made. For details, see Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide and Coordinate
Frames (p. 283).

User Surface
Defines a User Surface locator. A User Surface is a set of points and 2D face definitions which can be used
for Post Processing. For example, solution data can be written using the User Surface instead of every
vertex of the mesh, which reduces the amount of data present in results files. For details, see User Loca-
tions (p. 289).

Transformation
Creates transformations that can be used for positioning data from a results file as part of initialization.
For details, see Interpolation Mapping in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Material / Reaction
Creates and modifies materials and reactions. For details, see Materials and Reactions (p. 291).

Regions: Composite Region / Primitive Region

Composite regions can be created from basic primitive regions that are imported with a mesh. The Regions
details view supports union and alias operations. This enables you to manipulate existing 2D and 3D regions
without returning to the mesh generation software package. The creation of new regions is limited by the
topology of the existing primitive regions; therefore, you must still create appropriate regions in the mesh-
generation software package.

You can specify physics on either a primitive region, a composite region, or a mixture of both.

For details, see Regions (p. 103).

Additional Variable
Under Expressions, Functions and Variables, Additional Variable creates and modifies additional
solution variables. For details, see Additional Variables (p. 309).

Expression
Under Expressions, Functions and Variables, Expression creates and generates expressions using the
CFX Expression Language (CEL). For details, see Expressions (p. 317).

User Functions
Under Expressions, Functions and Variables, User Function creates 1D and cloud of points interpolation
functions. The interpolation functions are typically used to set boundary and initialization values in addition
to profile data interpolation functions. For details, see User Functions (p. 323).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
56 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User Routines
Under Expressions, Functions and Variables, User Routine creates User CEL, Junction Box, and Particle
User Routines. For details, see User Routines (p. 333).

Solver: Solution Units

Sets the solution units used by the CFX-Solver (in the analysis you select, when multiple analyses are
available). These are the units that your results will appear in. For details, see Units and Dimensions (p. 205).

Solver: Solver Control

Controls the execution of the CFX-Solver (in the analysis you select, when multiple analyses are available).
This includes timestep and convergence details, as well as the choice of advection scheme. For details, see
Solver Control (p. 211).

Solver: Output Control

Controls output from the CFX-Solver, including backup and transient results file creation (in the analysis
you select, when multiple analyses are available). For details, see Output Control (p. 227).

Solver: Mesh Adaption

Controls if and how the mesh will be automatically refined during the solution (in the analysis you select,
when multiple analyses are available). This technique can be used to refine the mesh to a particular flow
feature whose location is unknown prior to starting the analysis, such as a shock wave. For details, see
Mesh Adaption (p. 273).

Solver: Expert Parameter

Provides advanced control of the CFX-Solver (in the analysis you select, when multiple analyses are available).
For most analyses, you do not need to use expert parameters. For details, see Expert Control Paramet-
ers (p. 281).

Solver: Execution Control

Enables you to define how the CFX-Solver is to be started for a simulation. See Execution Control (p. 339)
for details.

Configurations: Configuration / Termination Control

Simulation controls enable you to define the execution of analyses and related tasks such as remeshing
in the simulation. Specific controls include definitions of global execution and termination controls for
one or more configurations. See Configurations (p. 349) for additional information.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 57
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
58 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 7: CFX-Pre Tools Menu
The Tools menu provides access to the following:
7.1. Command Editor
7.2. Edit Profile Data
7.3. Initialize Profile Data
7.4. Macro Calculator
7.5. Solve
7.6. Applications
7.7. Quick Setup Mode
7.8.Turbo Mode

7.1. Command Editor

Displays and edits the CCL definition of objects, and as well issues commands directly to CFX-Pre. For
details, see Command Editor Dialog Box (p. 375).

7.2. Edit Profile Data

When setting up a boundary profile for a turbomachinery case (for example, involving an inlet disturbance
or blade flutter), it is sometimes necessary or convenient to perform various transformations of the
profile data. As an example, you might expand a profile around the machine axis so that it can be used
for a boundary condition that contains all passages of interest (more passages than in the original
profile). As another example, you might want to map a profile to a new location.

To edit profile data:

1. Select Tools > Edit Profile Data.

The Edit Profile Data dialog box appears.

2. Set Source Profile to the name of the original profile file.

(You may use the file browser for this purpose, by clicking Browse .)

3. Set Write to Profile to the name of the file that will hold the expanded profile.

(You may use the file browser for this purpose, by clicking Browse .)

4. To have the written profile data automatically initialized (the equivalent of selecting Tools > Initialize
Profile Data and then opening the written profile using the Initialize Profile Data dialog box), leave
Initialize New Profile After Writing selected.

5. Add one or more transformations as needed.

The following sections provide details on the profile transformation options.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 59
CFX-Pre Tools Menu

6. Click OK to begin the operation.

7. When finished, click Close to close the dialog box.

The Apply button begins the operation but leaves the Edit Profile Data dialog box opened.

Note that if the path or filename of the source profile (as it appears in the Source Profile field) is altered,
the OK and Apply buttons become unavailable. You must then click Reload to re-read the specified
source profile.

7.2.1. Profile Data Expansion (Option = Expansion)

Given an existing profile data file that describes, in Cartesian coordinates, a section that possesses rota-
tional periodicity around a rotation axis, you can use an Expansion transformation to obtain a new
profile with multiple “copies” of the section, rotated around the axis, extending to as many passages
as required (up to a full wheel). The input profile is “replicated” about the specified axis in the positive
rotational direction (according to the right-hand rule). The number of replications required is either
specified directly or, if Expansion Option is set to Expand to Full Circle, given by the ratio of
the specified values for Passages in 360 and Passages in Profile.

In the expanded profile, a sector number is added to account for the number of passages that must
be covered by the expansion. Sector numbering starts from 1. In the case of a single passage per sector,
the sector number corresponds to the passage number. Note that sector numbers are not added to
profiles that contain gaps within the part being expanded.

The procedure for expanding profile data involves the following steps:

1. Set the profile transformation option to Expansion.

2. If the original profile contains variables that require phase shifting during expansion (for example, Mode
Shapes from ANSYS Mechanical cyclic symmetry analysis), the Use Profile Instancing option is available
(and selected by default). This option is available only for a profile that has been exported by ANSYS
Mechanical and that contains a complex mode shape, including the Harmonic Index parameter.

Expanding the profile using instancing takes proper account of the phase shift between the blade
passages.

3. Specify the axis about which the profile must rotate during the expansion process.

4. Set Passages in Profile to the number of passages that are modeled by the original profile.

5. Set Passages in 360 to the number of passages in a complete 360° revolution.

6. By default, Expansion Option is set to Expand to Full Circle, causing the profile to expand such
that it wraps completely around the machine axis. If this is not wanted, then set Expansion Option to
Spec. Number of Passages and specify the required number of passages for the expansion (Pass.
in Expansion).

7. Specify a non-zero Theta Offset value to carry out the expansion starting from a rotated version of the
original profile.

7.2.1.1. Notes and Limitations of Profile Data Expansion

Profile Expansion has the following limitations:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
60 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Edit Profile Data

• If a non-integer number of replications is needed to obtain a 360° profile, then the data for the last replicated
portion is truncated and a gap is left. The gap is positioned to be as far away from the original profile as
possible.

• Only files that have spatial data consisting of three spatial Cartesian coordinates (X, Y, Z) are supported.

• Variables in the profile file that are identified as vector components in cylindrical coordinates will be trans-
formed so that their axial, circumferential, and radial components remain constant in each replication. It is
assumed that vector variables in cylindrical coordinates (such as Velocity Axial, Velocity Radial, and Velocity
Circumferential) are relative to the same axis of rotation as used for the profile expansion.

• Variables are identified as components of Cartesian vectors if they are standard CFX Cartesian vector com-
ponents or if they have named with a X, Y, or Z suffix (upper or lower case). If all three components of a
vector are present, then the three components are treated as components of a Cartesian vector, and the
vector is rotated appropriately when the profile is replicated. If not all three components of the vector are
present, then the components are ignored and will not appear in the expanded profile file. It is assumed
that all three components of a vector have consistent units.

• Variables that are standard CFX tensor components (for example, components of Reynolds Stress) will be
ignored and will not appear in the expanded profile file.

• Variables from the profile file that are not identified as vector and tensor components will be assumed to
be scalar variables and will take the same value in each replication, leading to a rotationally-periodic variable
definition in the expanded profile.

• It is advisable to check an expanded profile file by initializing it and then coloring the resulting User Function,
to ensure that vector variables have been transformed as intended.

• A new variable, Sector Tag, is written to the expanded profile file only if an integer number of replications
is needed to obtain a 360° profile. This identifies each replication by a unique integer.

7.2.2. Profile Data Mapping (Option = Map to Mesh Regions)

When the points in a boundary condition profile do not exactly match the underlying CFX mesh, the
CEL functions that evaluate the associated expressions use a “cloud of points” method, using the closest
three points, to interpolate the profile data onto the CFX mesh (see Three Dimensional Interpola-
tion (p. 325)). This can be inaccurate for some profiles and meshes, particularly those situations where
the profile is coarse and the mesh is fine, or where relatively thin structures (like blades) are present.

To improve accuracy in these situations, the profile mapping operation maps the profile data onto the
selected CFX mesh regions explicitly, using a more accurate mapping algorithm to interpolate the
profile data onto the CFX mesh.

After the mapping process is complete, you are presented with the diagnostics for the mapping operation.
If any of the “Mapped Profile face/area/node” statistics are significantly below 100% then you should
check the resulting profile carefully to ensure that the mapping setup has worked as expected.

The procedure for mapping profile data involves the following steps:

1. Set the profile transformation option to Mapped Expansion.

2. Specify the Mesh Regions onto which the profile data needs to be mapped.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 61
CFX-Pre Tools Menu

3. Leave Add Node Mapping Status Variable selected to create variable Node Mapping Status, which
has a value of 1 for a mapped node and 0 for an unmapped node. This variable can be visualized in CFX-
Pre (by coloring by a profile variable) or by importing the profile into CFD-Post.

7.2.2.1. Notes and Limitations of Profile Data Mapping

The following limitations apply to profile data mapping:

• A coordinate frame defined in the profile is ignored; the nodal coordinates, when passed to the mapper,
and the resulting mapped profile, are assumed to be in the global frame. However, the coordinate frame
definition is still included in the mapped file.

• Failures in the mapping process might occur if the selected mesh regions include regions from both sides
of a periodic boundary. If such a failure occurs then you can map onto subsets of the mesh regions and
combine the resulting profile files as necessary.

• Mapping is performed in a way that preserves profiles for solution variables; flow quantities are not neces-
sarily conserved.

7.2.3. Profile Data Expansion with Mapping (Option = Mapped Expansion)

The Mapped Expansion option enables you to streamline your workflow by combining profile
mapping and profile expansion into one operation. When you select this option, you are presented
with all of the settings used by both the Expansion and Map to Mesh Regions options.

When the profile transformation is applied, the following operations take place:

1. An initial profile expansion takes place, using the expansion-related settings, except that the Expand
to Full Circle option is used.

The initial expansion ensures that the original profile covers the whole of the regions of interest,
even though the location of the periodic interfaces may differ between the original profile and the
CFX mesh. It is assumed that the position of the profile already aligns with the CFX mesh (that is,
the blades/hub/shroud are coincident); otherwise, other profile transformations must first be set
up in order to align the profile correctly.

2. The profile is mapped onto the selected mesh regions.

3. A second expansion takes place, using your expansion settings. Note that it is assumed that the selected
mesh regions are all from the same passage; this is important for ensuring that the Sector Tag variable
(added in the Expansion process) correctly numbers the passages in the expanded profile — all of the
selected mesh regions are given a Sector Tag variable set to 1.

For very large meshes or profiles, the initial full-wheel expansion in step 1 could be computationally
expensive, since the mapping process needs to match the full-wheel profile with the selected mesh
regions. If the initial full-wheel expansion is not necessary in order to ensure that the selected mesh
regions are completely covered by the initial profile, you should consider setting up the three individual
transformations separately.

7.3. Initialize Profile Data

Imports data from a file to use a profile boundary condition or table function.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
62 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Macro Calculator

7.3.1. Initializing Profile Data

1. Select Tools > Initialize Profile Data.

The Initialize Profile Data dialog box appears.

2. Click Browse.

3. Select the file containing your profile data.

4. Click Open. The profile data is loaded and the profile data name, coordinates, variable names and units
are displayed.

Note that if the path or filename is altered by typing in Data File, the OK and Apply buttons become
unavailable. You must then click Reload to re-read the specified file and update the contents in
the displayed profile data information.

5. You can enable the Visibility option to visualize the geometry of the profile shape to ensure that it is
correctly aligned and scaled with the boundaries of the CFD model.

When you enable the Visibility option in the Initialize Profile Data dialog box, or make the cor-
responding User Function visible, you can control the rendering properties of the profile geometry.
The appearance of the profile shape will depend on the specified face connectivity.

• If a profile file has face connectivity specified, in addition to nodal values, then the profile geometry
will appear as faces.

• If a profile file has no face connectivity, then the profile geometry will appear as points based on
the nodes.

For details, see Render Options in the CFX-Pre User's Guide (p. 96).

Note

This feature only supports profiles with three dimensions and three Cartesian spatial
coordinates.

6. Click OK.

Under the library section of the object tree, a new User Function object is generated for this profile
function. The profile geometry will only be plotted once the Initialize Profile Data panel is applied
and the corresponding user function has been created.

7.3.2. Importing Table Data

Tables are imported using the same instructions as shown in Initialize Profile Data (p. 62), except there
are no options for visibility.

7.4. Macro Calculator

The macro calculator in CFX-Pre is very similar to the one in CFD-Post. For details, see Macro Calculator
in the CFD-Post User's Guide. There are some minor differences between the two, however. For instance,

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 63
CFX-Pre Tools Menu

an additional widget type, Location, is available in the CFX-Pre macro calculator. This enables the
selection of mesh regions within the macro. An example of how to use this widget type is:
# Macro GUI begin
#
# macro name = StaticMixer
# macro subroutine = test
# macro report file = test_report.html
#
# macro parameter = Domain Location
# type = Location
# value list = 3d composites, 3d primitives
#

A number of standard lists are available for this widget. The valid value list entries are as follows:

• 2d primitives / 3d primitives: all primitive 2D and 3D regions for the model

• internal 2d primitives: all primitive 2D regions that are internal to the model

• composites: all composite regions

• 2d composites / 3d composites: all 2D and 3D composite regions

• assemblies: all assemblies

Also, predefined macros are not supplied for CFX-Pre the way they are in CFD-Post. For details, see
Predefined Macros in the CFD-Post User's Guide.

7.5. Solve
Available in stand-alone mode for the current definition of the case, you can use the Solve option to
do the following:

• From Start Solver, you can:

– Select Define Run to write the CFX-Solver input file and start the CFX-Solver Manager

– Select Run Solver to write the CFX-Solver input file and start the CFX-Solver

– Select Run Solver and Monitor to write the CFX-Solver input file and start both the CFX-Solver and
the CFX-Solver Manager.

• From View in CFD-Post, you can write the CFX-Solver input file and start CFD-Post.

• From Write Solver Input File, you can write the CFX-Solver input file.

7.5.1. Write Solver Input File Command

A CFX-Solver input file contains information (such as physics, mesh) required to execute a case in CFX-
Solver to solve physics.

1. Select Tools > Solve > Write Solver Input File from the menu bar or click Write Input Solver File .

The Write Solver Input File dialog box appears.

2. Select a location to which to save the file.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
64 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Turbo Mode

3. Under File name, type the name of the file.

4. Click Save.

If the filename assigned is the same as an existing filename in the same location, select Overwrite
to overwrite the original file, Re-select to specify a new filename, or Cancel to cancel the writing
of the .def file.

7.6. Applications
Available in stand-alone mode, these commands immediately load CFX-Solver Manager or CFD-Post.

7.7. Quick Setup Mode

Quick Setup Mode is used to quickly specify cases that involve simple physics. For details, see Quick
Setup Mode (p. 357).

7.8. Turbo Mode

Set up certain turbomachinery cases quickly and easily using Turbo mode. For details, see Turbomachinery
Mode (p. 361).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 65
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
66 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 8: CFX-Pre Extensions Menu
The Extensions menu provides access to any customized extensions available to CFX-Pre.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 67
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
68 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 9: CFX-Pre Help Menu
The Help menu has the following commands:

CFX-Pre
Opens CFX-Pre User's Guide (p. 1).

Contents
Opens a page that lists various help resources associated with this product.

[various help resources]

Each of these commands goes directly to a particular help resource.

ANSYS Product Improvement Program

Provides a brief description of, and enables you to control participation in, the ANSYS Product Improvement
Program.

About CFX-Pre
This gives the point releases and software patches that are installed.

Help on Help
Opens documentation about the help system: Help On Help in the CFX Introduction.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 69
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
70 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 10: Importing and Transforming Meshes
CFX-Pre can import meshes from a wide range of sources. Once imported, you can position and scale
each mesh as required (as described in Transform Mesh Command (p. 89)).

You can import more than one mesh per CFX-Pre simulation. After you have imported all your meshes
and created all your domains, the domains should be joined together, either by gluing them together,
or by using domain interfaces. For details, see Gluing Meshes Together (p. 95) and Domain Inter-
faces (p. 149).

This chapter describes:

10.1. Importing Meshes
10.2. Mesh Tree View
10.3. Deleting Meshes and Mesh Components from the Tree View
10.4.Transform Mesh Command
10.5. Gluing Meshes Together
10.6. Mesh Editor
10.7. Render Options
10.8. Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre
10.9. Advanced Topic: cfx5gtmconv Application

Additional information on assemblies, primitive regions, composite regions, and the regions that are
created when importing meshes is available in Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre (p. 99).

10.1. Importing Meshes

Meshes are imported via the Import Mesh dialog box, which is accessible in several ways:

• By selecting File > Import > Mesh

• By right-clicking the Mesh branch in the tree view and selecting Import Mesh from the shortcut menu

• By selecting Browse when setting the filename for a mesh (for example, in Turbomachinery mode).

You can multi-select mesh files by holding the Ctrl key while you click the filenames.

Import options may appear on the Import Mesh dialog box, depending on the type of mesh being
imported. Some common import options are described next. Other options that are specific to particular
mesh formats are discussed in Supported Mesh File Types (p. 73).

10.1.1. Importing Multiple Meshes

It is possible in CFX-Pre to import multiple mesh file to construct an appropriate model for your simu-
lation. Each mesh imported is represented in the Mesh part of the Outline tree by a unique identifier
based on the name of the mesh file imported.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 71
Importing and Transforming Meshes

In general, a mesh file is represented by the filename of the file imported without any preceding path
(for example, if you imported C:\Directory\File.cmdb, this will be represented in the tree as
File.cmdb). If after transforming the filename in this way the transformed name is already present
in the tree, either because this is an earlier import of the same file or another file with the same name
has been imported from a different directory, the new file will be labeled with a suffix, such as
File.cmdb(1) for example.

If multiple mesh files are transformed in such a way that the result of the transformation glues the two
files together or the files are explicitly glued together, the original mesh file entries will no longer appear
under the Mesh entry as file names, but the resulting Principal 3D regions will appear under a Merged
Meshes item under Mesh.

10.1.2. Common Import Options

10.1.2.1. Mesh Units
This option is displayed depending on the file type selected. The units selected on the Import Mesh
dialog box are the units used to import the mesh and are the default units for transforming mesh as-
semblies using the Mesh Transformation Editor dialog box. These units are local to the mesh import
and transformation options and do not affect either the solution units or the units set under Edit >
Options. For details, see:

• Setting the Solution Units (p. 209)

• Units (p. 49).

CFX-Pre will attempt to determine the units used in a mesh file and convert them to the specified units
during import. For example, a mesh of 1000 units long, with units in the mesh file of mm, will appear
in CFX-Pre as 1 m long, if units of m are set on the Import Mesh dialog box. If CFX-Pre cannot determine
the units used in the mesh file, then in this example the mesh would appear as 1000 m long.

10.1.2.2. Assembly Prefix

This is the name used to prefix the assemblies that are created when the mesh is imported. A number
suffix is added to the second, and any subsequent meshes, using the same assembly prefix, so that
each assembly is named uniquely.

10.1.2.3. Primitive Strategy

This setting enables you to control the names of split regions.

The following options are available:

Standard - Select this option so that the name of each split region starts with “Primitive 2D” or
“Primitive 3D”. For example, this option splits “My Region Name” into “Primitive 2D A” and “Primitive
2D B”.

Derived - Select this option so that the name of each split region is derived from the name of the
region that is being split. For example, this option splits “My Region Name” into “My Region Name A”
and “My Region Name B”.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
72 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Importing Meshes

10.1.2.4. Ignore Invalid Degenerate Elements

If your mesh import fails because of invalid degenerate elements, then you can enable this toggle.
However, your mesh may not be valid for use in the CFX-Solver. You may have to fix or remove the
degenerate elements in the software used to generate the mesh.

10.1.2.5. Duplicate Node Checking

Duplicate Node Checking is off by default and, in general, need not be selected.

Nodes within the specified relative tolerance are equivalenced into a single node (duplicate node re-
moval). The default tolerance of 1e-04 is sensible and you should not change it. The relative tolerance
is based on the local mesh length scale, so by default nodes within 0.001% of the average mesh edge
length of all edges connected to a node will be equivalenced.

10.1.3. Supported Mesh File Types

Mesh file types supported by CFX-Pre are:
10.1.3.1. ANSYS Meshing Files
10.1.3.2. CFX-Mesh Files
10.1.3.3. CFX-Solver Input files
10.1.3.4. ICEM CFD Files
10.1.3.5. ANSYS Files
10.1.3.6. Fluent Files
10.1.3.7. CGNS Files
10.1.3.8. CFX-TASCflow Files
10.1.3.9. CFX-4 Grid Files
10.1.3.10. CFX-BladeGenPlus Files
10.1.3.11. PATRAN Neutral Files
10.1.3.12. IDEAS Universal Files
10.1.3.13. GridPro/az3000 Grid Files
10.1.3.14. NASTRAN Files
10.1.3.15. Pointwise Gridgen Files
10.1.3.16. User Import

Note

Users of the DesignModeler, Meshing application, and ANSYS CFX products should refer to
Named Selections and Regions for ANSYS CFX in the Meshing User's Guide for important in-
formation about region definitions.

10.1.3.1. ANSYS Meshing Files

ANSYS Meshing files of the form .cmdb and .dsdb can be imported.

Note

• You must have ANSYS Workbench installed in order to import ANSYS Meshing files (.cmdb and
.dsdb) into CFX-Pre or CFD-Post.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 73
Importing and Transforming Meshes

• CFX-Pre does not support importing meshes from .cmdb files generated by the Meshing applic-
ation prior to Release 11.0.

• When CFX-Pre is run outside of ANSYS Workbench, and when importing or loading .cmdb or
.dsdb files into CFX-Pre, meshes generated with the "Assembly Mesh" method cannot be read.

You can specify an assembly prefix. For details, see Common Import Options (p. 72).

There are import settings that are specific to ANSYS Meshing files.

The Model(s) To Read setting defaults to All, which specifies that all models are to be imported from
the ANSYS Meshing file. However, if you load a cmdb/dsdb file that has multiple models in it, you can
specify which models to load.

Note

You must click next to the Model(s) To Read setting before the other models will appear.

10.1.3.1.1. Named Selections

Named selections are aliases for collections of regions. When importing a mesh from an ANSYS Meshing
file, you can preserve these named selections based on where they were created:

• CFX Mesh Names for regions defined in CFX-Mesh.

• Simulation Names for named selections generated in the Mechanical application and ANSYS Workbench
Meshing.

• Symmetry Names for named selections of 2D symmetry and periodic regions generated in the Mech-
anical application and ANSYS Workbench Meshing.

• Part Manager Names for named selections generated in DesignModeler or other CAD systems that
are not written to the .cmdb file by the meshing application.

• Fall Back to Part Manager Names for using named selections generated directly by DesignModeler
or other CAD systems as a fall back if no CFX-Mesh, Simulation or Symmetry named selections are found.

Also see Named Selections Involving Interior Faces in the Meshing User's Guide.

10.1.3.1.2. Contact Detection Settings

The Contact check box, when selected, makes contact detection settings available.

When importing ANSYS Mesh files (.cmdb / .dsdb files), it is possible to select Detection Method >
Read to read contact information from the file or to select Detection Method > Detect to use the
contact detection methods to determine whether regions within the mesh are “in contact” with each
other. CFX-Pre uses the Mechanical application contact detection methods to determine which mesh
volumes should be placed within each mesh assembly and which 2D regions are connected.

The Read Method setting can be set to Modify Topology meaning that CFX-Pre will create connec-
tions between pairs of regions according to the contact information read from the ANSYS Meshing file.
The topology is modified as part of this process, which can result in two or more bodies becoming part

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
74 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Importing Meshes

of a single assembly. When using the Create Regions option, the contact information read from
the file will result in each contact being represented as composite regions on each side of the contact
definition allowing easy identification of the contact regions. Using the Create Regions option will
not modify the underlying topology of the mesh.

The Detection Between setting can be set to Bodies or All Contact. When using the Bodies option,
2D regions will be matched between different bodies. This is the default option and should result in
bodies that are “close” to one another being placed in the same mesh assembly. If automatic domain
interface generation is selected, interfaces will be generated between such regions. When using the All
Contact option, CFX-Pre will still recognize contact between discrete bodies, but in addition, it will look
for contact between 2D regions within the same “body”, or “volume”. This can result in unexpected
behavior, such as adjacent surfaces being considered “in contact” and hence this is not the default option,
but in some cases, where there are non-matched 2D mesh regions within a mesh volume, it can help
generate “internal” interfaces.

The tolerance that is used in detecting contact can be altered and it is possible to define it relative to
the local geometry size, or as an absolute spatial value.

If CFX-Pre is set to read contact information from the file, then it will import only connections that
connect two single regions. Connections connecting multiple regions to a single region, or multiple
regions to multiple regions, will be ignored. Also, contact detection works only within a single file; CFX-
Pre will not read or detect contact between meshes that are imported from different files.

If the Meshing application is set to generate connections automatically, you can set the Global Contact
Setting option to Group By > None to generate only single region to single region connections. For
more details, see Generation of Contact Elements in the Meshing User's Guide.

10.1.3.2. CFX-Mesh Files

The CFX-Mesh (.gtm, .cfx) files are native for CFX-Pre; therefore, all information in such a file is read
in by the import process. There are no options needed to control the reading of these files.

Note

Only .cfx files that are version 11.0 or newer are supported.

10.1.3.3. CFX-Solver Input files

CFX-Solver files include CFX-Solver input (.def), results (.res), transient results (.trn), and backup
(.bak) results files. There are no options specific to importing CFX Def/Res, files but the general advanced
options are described in Common Import Options (p. 72).

For additional information on the regions created in CFX-Pre when CFX-Solver files are imported, see
Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre (p. 99).

10.1.3.4. ICEM CFD Files

ICEM CFD files are of the form .cfx, .cfx5, .msh. There are no import options specific to ICEM CFD
files; however the Common Import Options (p. 72) apply.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 75
Importing and Transforming Meshes

10.1.3.5. ANSYS Files

ANSYS files are of the form .cdb or .inp. There are no import options specific to ANSYS files; however
the Common Import Options (p. 72) apply.

Only .cdb files can be imported into CFX-Pre. If you have an ANSYS .db file, you can convert it to a
.cdb file in ANSYS by:

1. Opening the ANSYS database in ANSYS.

2. Issuing the ALLSEL command to select everything.

3. Issuing the CDWRITE, DB command to write the .cdb file.

To get a list of all element types (ET)/keyops(KEYOP) that are supported by mesh import, you can
run the following from the operating system command line:
<CFXROOT>/bin/<OS>/ImportANSYS.exe -S

Note

Before executing the CDWRITE command, verify that the data base has a separate named
component of 2D MESH200 elements for each surface that will require a boundary condition.
Delete any MESH200 elements that are not members of named components. To define spe-
cific 3D regions, create a 3D named component of 3D elements. The component names will
appear in CFX-Pre as defined regions.

10.1.3.6. Fluent Files

Fluent files of the form .cas and .msh can be imported.

Note

When importing meshes from Fluent files in CFX-Pre, Release 12.0 (or later), the topology
and naming of regions may not be the same as those generated by importing these
meshes into previous releases. As a result, session files generated in CFX-Pre Release,
11.0 (or earlier) that import meshes from Fluent files may generate errors when loaded
into CFX-Pre, Release 12.0 (or later).

10.1.3.6.1. Override Default 2D Mesh Settings

10.1.3.6.1.1. Interpret 2D Mesh as

10.1.3.6.1.1.1. Axisymmetric

This option enables you to create a 3D geometry by extruding a 2D geometry through a specified rotation
angle in the third dimension.

Number of Planes:
This value enables you to create additional planes, arranged in the extruded direction, to create a 3D
problem. This will increase the number of elements in the extruded direction, but does not change the
enclosed angle of the mesh.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
76 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Importing Meshes

Angle (deg):
This is the angle through which the original 2D mesh is extruded.

Remove Duplicate Nodes at Axis:

This check box enables you to choose to have the duplicate node removed from the axis of an axisymmetric
case upon import.

10.1.3.6.1.1.2. Planar

This option enables you to create a 3D geometry by linearly extruding a 2D geometry in the third di-
mension.

Extrude Distance:
This is the distance through which the geometry is extruded in the third direction.

For further advice on how to model 2D problems in CFX, refer to Modeling 2D Problems in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

10.1.3.7. CGNS Files

CGNS files are of the form: .cgns. Applicable import options are:

• Ignore Invalid Degenerate Elements (p. 73)

• Duplicate Node Checking (p. 73)

10.1.3.7.1. Importing CGNS files into CFX

10.1.3.7.1.1. Method

Mesh data contained within CGNS files can be read into a CFX-Pre after a new case has been created
or an existing case has been opened. To read the CGNS file, select the file to import and, if necessary,
alter the options used to import the mesh under the Advanced Options section.

Further information on importing files is contained within the standard documentation.

10.1.3.7.1.2. Base (Base_t)

The top-level object in a CGNS file is a container called a base, a CGNS file that can contain multiple
bases. What a base contains is user defined so that CFX-Pre allows all bases to be read by one import,
or single bases to be read by separate imports.

10.1.3.7.1.3. Zone (Zone_t)

Each base contains one or more zones. For each base read, the import process reads all zones, provided
they are 3D dimensional (structured or unstructured zones are supported).

• Grids can be read in single or double precision.

• Zones may be specified in Cartesian or Cylindrical coordinates. Other coordinate systems are not currently
supported.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 77
Importing and Transforming Meshes

10.1.3.7.1.4. Elements (ElementSection_t)

Element sections can be imported as regions of interest or ignored. How this is done is controlled by
the user interface - you must understand which behavior you want to see. It may be useful to import
the element sections, for example, if the file has been written with all faces (2D elements) in a boundary
patch as a separate element section, which could be useful for setting up the problem in CFX-Pre.
Similar scenarios can be imagined in 3D element sections or even mixed element sections.

10.1.3.7.1.5. Element Types Supported

Supported 3D elements (TETRA_4, PYRA_5, PENTA_6 and HEXA_8). Other 3D elements can be read but
are reduced to the lower order elements (that is, TETRA_10 is translated to TETRA_4 and then this is
imported).

Supported 2D elements (TRI_3 and QUAD_4). Other 2D elements can be read but are reduced to the
lower order elements (that is, TRI_6 is translated to TRI_3 and then is imported).

The vertices of 2D elements should ideally be based on the node indices as are used for to define the
3D elements.

It is preferable to define 2D elements with parent information so that mapping from 2D elements to
3D elements does not have to be determined by the process, therefore, reducing import times.

10.1.3.7.1.6. Boundary Conditions (BC_t)

Boundary conditions are processed but physical setup information (for example, equations) is ignored.
The facility for importing the CGNS files into CFX (CFX-Pre) is a mesh (grid) importer, not a physics im-
porter.

No physics information is imported. Boundary condition locations are read because the collections (re-
gions) of mesh elements the condition is defined upon are required for ease of use and correct physics
setup in CFX.

It is quicker to read boundary conditions when they are defined as a range of elements (ElementRange)
or a list of elements (ElementList), rather than a range of nodes (PointRange) or a list of nodes
(PointList). The latter may also be read, but the nodes referenced must also be used by higher-di-
mension elements (for example, 3D elements) for correct interpretation.

10.1.3.7.1.7. Families (Family_t, FamilyBC_t, FamilyName_t)

Families are read and, in general, imported as composite regions (groupings) of underlying primitive
regions.

10.1.3.7.1.8. Grid Connectivity (GridConnectivity_t and GridConnectivity1to1_t)

Grid connectivity can be read but with certain restrictions.

• If the interface is read from a GridConnectivity1to1_t node or is a read from a GridConnectiv

ity_t node and is of type Abutting1to1, importing of the node mapping is attempted.

• If the node mapping cannot be established or you request that the two sides of the interface are imported
as separate regions.

Other interface types are always imported as two separate regions.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
78 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Importing Meshes

10.1.3.7.1.9. CGNS Data Ignored

The CGNS Mid Level Library Documentation Page (http://www.grc.nasa.gov/WWW/cgns/CGNS_docs_cur-

rent/midlevel/index.html) details the interface used for reading CGNS files within CFX-Pre. The following
high level headings used within the document are ignored.

• Simulation Type

• Descriptors

• Physical Data

• Location and Position1

• Auxiliary Data

• Solution Data

• Equation specification

• Time Dependent Data

10.1.3.7.2. Prefix regions with zone name

This check box determines whether or not each imported region is prefixed with the name of the zone
within which it is defined.

10.1.3.7.3. Create Regions From: Element Sections

Each element section that specifies the topology of elements within the CGNS file may or may not imply
a grouping of these elements that is important. If the grouping of elements within each element section
is important, this option should be selected so the grouping is preserved within CFX-Pre.

Element sections can be 2D or 3D or a mixture of both, and as such can form 3D regions or 2D regions
in CFX-Pre.

The way they are grouped depends on vendor interpretation of the CGNS standard.

10.1.3.7.4. Create Regions From: Boundary Conditions

This check box determines whether or not to import boundary conditions as regions.

10.1.3.7.5. Create Regions From: Families

This check box determines whether or not to import families of elements, or faces as regions.

10.1.3.7.6. Create Regions From: Connectivity Mappings

This check box determines whether or not to import zone interfaces (that is, 1-to-1 and GGI connections)
as regions.

1
Rind Data is processed but not imported.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 79
Importing and Transforming Meshes

10.1.3.7.7. Example of Create Regions From

Consider a CGNS file with one zone, Zone 1, made up of four element sections (ES1 and ES2 defining
the 3D elements, and ES3 and ES4 defining the 2D elements). It also contains 2D boundary conditions
BC1 and BC2.

These element sections, ES1 and ES2, could consist of, for example, hexahedral elements in ES1 and
tetrahedral elements in ES2. In this case, the groupings of elements into the first two element sections
appears to be due to their topological identity. However, this may or may not be the case and you must
decided as to whether importing these groupings is important.

In this case, it may be that ES1 and ES2 should be combined by clearing the Create Regions From:
Element Sections option. Another possibility is that ES1 may be a subregion of mesh that should be
kept separate (that is, it will be set up as a subdomain). If that were the case, Element Sections should
be selected.

If BC1 is defined on all the faces in ES3 and BC2 is defined on all the faces in ES4, then it will probably
not be necessary to select Boundary Conditions if Element Sections is selected, as this would introduce
complexity in the region definitions (that is, composites would be defined). However if the groupings
of ES3 and ES4 are different from the groupings in the boundary conditions then Create Regions
From: Boundary Conditions should be selected.

10.1.3.7.8. Read Only One CGNS Base

When this toggle is selected, a mesh is read from a single base specified by the CGNS base to read
number. If your CGNS file contains only a single base, you should leave the number set to 1. If it contains
more than one base, you should specify the base number from which to read. If the base number spe-
cified does not exist, an error will be raised. If it does not contain a valid mesh then a mesh will not be
imported.

Note

You must click before you can specify which base to read.

If you disable the Read Only One CGNS Base toggle, then CFX-Pre will look for meshes in all bases
and import them. If multiple assemblies are imported and they overlap, then the mesh will be invalid
within CFX-Pre unless assemblies are transformed in some way.

For details, see SplitCGNS.exe in the CFX Reference Guide. This is a program that splits a CGNS file into
multiple problem files.

10.1.3.8. CFX-TASCflow Files

CFX-TASCflow mesh files are of the form .grd or are simply named grd. You may receive warning
messages when importing a CFX-TASCflow mesh file: these will usually tell you which regions have not
been imported. The sections below indicate the situations when a warning message may occur.

• If Convert 3D Region Labels to Regions is selected, then the 3D Region labels in the .grd file are imported
as individual 3D Regions. The default setting omits all 3D Region labels.

• If Ignore One-to-One Connections is selected, then one-to-one contiguous grid connections are deleted on
import. You would then have to recreate the connections in CFX-Pre. There are very few cases when you
would want to enable this toggle.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
80 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Importing Meshes

• Select the file type for the imported mesh from the GRD File Format Type drop-down. You can select from
Formatted, Unformatted or Unknown. If you select Unknown, CFX attempts to determine the file
format before importing the mesh.

• If Retain Block Off is selected, then “user defined” elements that are blocked off in the mesh file are not
imported into CFX-Pre. If not selected, then “user defined” objects are ignored and the elements are included
in the imported mesh (rarely desired).

Additional information is available in:

• Ignore Invalid Degenerate Elements (p. 73)

• Duplicate Node Checking (p. 73).

10.1.3.8.1. Convert 3D Region Labels to Regions

This toggle controls 3D region import from the .grd file only. When selected, 3D regions in the .grd
file will be imported into separate 3D primitives in CFX-Pre. If you do not select this option, all mesh
elements will be imported into a single 3D primitive that is uniquely named by the import process. 3D
regions defined in the .gci and .bcf files are always imported.

10.1.3.8.2. Grid Connections Processed (in the .grd file)

When importing CFX-TASCflow meshes, the only grid connections that are imported automatically are
“many-to-one” contiguous topology connections that are specified as one-to-one node pairings.

“Many-to-one” contiguous topology connections that involve any number of many-to-one node
groupings are ignored and a warning message is issued; however, the two sides of the connection are
preserved as a pair of 2D regions on which a GGI Connection can be defined. You should recreate the
connection in CFX-Pre using a Fluid-Fluid Domain Interface. For details, see Creating and Editing a Domain
Interface (p. 149). In some cases, if you have not created regions in CFX-TASCflow on each side of an
interface, you will not be able to recreate it in CFX-Pre because there will be no region available for
selection. If this occurs, you should explicitly create regions in CFX-TASCflow before importing the mesh
into CFX-Pre.

Important

Some ANSYS TurboGrid grids contain many-to-one node groupings. These will not be imported
into CFX-Pre. You need to know if your grid contains these connections and then recreate
them in CFX-Pre using Fluid-Fluid Domain Interfaces.

“Many-to-one” periodic topology connections are always removed with a warning message issued. You
should recreate the connections using a periodic domain interface. For details, see Creating and Editing
a Domain Interface (p. 149).

The regions associated with periodic boundary conditions are imported, but you will need to assign
the regions to a periodic domain interface.

10.1.3.8.3. Grid Embedding

Embedded grids, along with the parent grid, are automatically imported into separate assemblies in
CFX-Pre. The many-to-one topology connections on the interface between the embedded grid and the
parent grid will be removed and a warning issued. You will need to create fluid-fluid domain interfaces

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 81
Importing and Transforming Meshes

between the embedded grid and the parent grid. For details, see Creating and Editing a Domain Inter-
face (p. 149).

10.1.3.8.4. Retain Block-off

The Retain BlockOff toggle is selected by default. There is no harm in leaving this on, but it is not re-
quired unless user defined block-off is defined in the .bcf the file, and you want it to remain blocked-
off (ignored).

Porous and CHT objects in the .bcf file are ignored, and must be manually created in CFX-Pre after
importing the grid. You should make sure that a 3D volume region was defined in the grd file for the
porous or CHT object location prior to import.

By default, CFX-Pre will look in the same directory as the .grd file to locate the .bcf file. If the .bcf
file is located elsewhere, you can browse and select the file.

10.1.3.8.5. Regions in the .grd file

You should delete any regions from the .grd file that are not needed.

If necessary, you can force all “user defined” regions to be included in a .grd file by executing the
following command at the TASCtool command prompt:
TASCtool{}: write grd all_regions_to_grd=on

This is usually not needed because you can import regions from the .gci file directly (see below).

Note that when faces are referenced by more than one named region, the import process will resolve
this conflict such that faces are not referenced by more than one region.

10.1.3.8.6. Boundary Conditions in .bcf File

The regions associated with the boundary conditions defined in the .bcf file are imported into CFX-
Pre. The boundary condition physics definitions are ignored and must be defined in CFX-Pre.

The CFX-TASCflow symmetry/slip boundary condition should be recreated as either:

• A symmetry boundary condition for flat surfaces.

• A wall boundary condition using the Free Slip option for curved surfaces.

10.1.3.8.7. Regions in the .gci File

Regions in the .gci file defined in (i, j, k) coordinates (such as boundary conditions) are imported if
the Use GCI file toggle is selected on the Advanced Options tab. By default, CFX-Pre looks in the same
directory as the .grd file for the location of the .gci file. You should select the location of the .gci
file by clicking on the browse icon if it is located elsewhere.

Regions defined in physical space (x, y, z coordinates) are always ignored.

An alternative method for reading the .gci file is to force all regions to be included in the .grd file.
For details, see Regions in the .grd file (p. 82).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
82 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Importing Meshes

10.1.3.8.8. Importing CFX-TASCflow TurboPre MFR Grids

You can create multiple domains from a single .grd file if it contains multiple 3D regions or GGI con-
nections. For an MFR grid, a separate assembly will be created for each noncontinuous grid region. This
enables a multiple frame of reference (MFR) case to be easily recreated in CFX-Pre from a single mesh
import.

Grids from CFX-TASCflow TurboPre usually contain many named regions that may not be required to
set up the problem in CFX-Pre. You might want to remove some of these regions before importing the
grid to speed up the import of the mesh and simplify the imported mesh.

In CFX-TASCflow TurboPre, you can create multiple copies of blade passages. The ‘open ends’ of the
machine section will use a periodic connection. These must be recreated in CFX-Pre using a periodic
domain interface. For details, see Creating and Editing a Domain Interface (p. 149). The internal connection
between blade passages can be connected in CFX-TASCflow TurboPre using an automatic periodic
boundary condition. If such a connection is used you will have to manually reconnect each passage in
CFX-Pre. You might therefore want to define a many-to-one topology connection for one-to-one grid
connections so that passages are connected by CFX-TASCflow TurboPre as topology connections (which
import immediately). For details, see Grid Connections Processed (in the .grd file) (p. 81).

10.1.3.8.9. Parameter File

CFX-TASCflow does not have units checking, whereas CFX-Pre does. Grid numbers will be imported
using the units specified on the Import Mesh dialog box. You should convert all units in the properties
and parameter files within TASCflow into SI units (kg, meter, second) prior to import.

10.1.3.9. CFX-4 Grid Files

CFX grid files are of the form .geo.

• Select Split Symmetry Planes to split symmetry planes that exist in more than one region. For details, see
Split Symmetry Planes (p. 83).

• Select Import from Cylindrical Coordinates to transform a problem defined in cylindrical coordinates into
Cartesian coordinates for use in CFX-Pre. It should be selected for all CFX-4 problems that use cylindrical
coordinates. For details, see Import from Cylindrical Coordinates (p. 84).

• Select Block Interfaces to create 2D regions in CFX-Pre on block interfaces. For details, see Create 2D Regions
on (p. 84).

• Import 2D axisymmetric mesh. For details, see Import 2D Axisymmetric Mesh (p. 85).

Other available options are:

• Ignore Invalid Degenerate Elements (p. 73)

• Duplicate Node Checking (p. 73)

10.1.3.9.1. Split Symmetry Planes

The Split Symmetry Planes option is on by default. Symmetry planes that are defined by more than
one CFX-4 region will be split so that each definition is imported. For example, a symmetry plane that
is defined on two sides of a 3D region will be split into regions named <regionname>1 and <region

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 83
Importing and Transforming Meshes

name>2, and so on, where <regionname> is the original name of the symmetry plane in the CFX-4
file.

10.1.3.9.2. Import from Cylindrical Coordinates

CFX-Pre can import problems defined in Cylindrical Coordinate (x, r, ) form from CFX-4. The problem
is converted to Cartesian Coordinates (x, y, z) by the import process. The resulting CFX-Solver input file
will not be written in cylindrical coordinates. You must select the Import from Cylindrical Coordinates
option to successfully import a CFX-4 cylindrical coordinate problem.

Note

This is not the same as an axisymmetric problem. For details, see Import 2D Axisymmetric
Mesh (p. 85).

10.1.3.9.3. Create 2D Regions on

Block Interfaces
When this option is selected, named regions will be created on the interfaces between mesh blocks. This
can produce many regions in CFX-Pre, so it is usually better to define all the regions you require as patches
in CFX-4.

10.1.3.9.4. Create 3D Regions on

Fluid Regions (USER3D, POROUS)
In CFX-4, most 3D regions are classified as USER3D patches. Porous regions are treated in the same way
as USER3D regions when importing them into CFX-Pre. When the Fluid Regions (USER3D, POROUS)
toggle is not selected, these regions are not imported. When the toggle is selected, they are imported as
separate 3D regions. This toggle should be selected if you need the USER3D regions to create domains
and subdomains. You should disable it to simplify the regions created in CFX-Pre. If, in CFX-4, you have
created a USER3D region for the purpose of creating thin surfaces, you do not need to import the USER3D
region in CFX-Pre because thin surfaces can be defined without the need for a separate subdomain.

10.1.3.9.5. Blocked Off Regions (SOLIDs)

• If Fluid Regions (USER3D, POROUS) is not selected, and Blocked Off Regions (SOLIDs) is not selected,
then SOLID regions are blocked-off (that is, this part of the mesh is not imported).

• If Fluid Regions (USER3D, POROUS) is not selected, and Blocked Off Regions (SOLIDs) is selected, then
SOLID regions are imported into the default 3D region created by the import process.

• If Fluid Regions (USER3D, POROUS) is selected, and Import SOLID regions is toggled OFF, then SOLID
regions become blocked-off (that is, this part of the mesh is not imported).

• If Fluid Regions (USER3D, POROUS) is selected, and Import SOLID regions is toggled ON, then SOLID re-
gions are imported as separate 3D regions (which can be useful for CHT simulations).

10.1.3.9.6. Conducting Solid Regions (SOLCONs)

• These are regions defined as conducting solid regions in CFX-4. There is no way to completely ignore SOLCON
regions, they are always imported as either a separate region or as part of the parent region. If you want to
ignore these regions (that is, so that there is no flow), then they should be removed from the CFX-4 mesh

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
84 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Importing Meshes

file using CFX-4 or with manual editing. Alternatively they can be imported but simply not used to define
a subdomain in CFX-Pre. The import behavior is described below:

– If Fluid Regions (USER3D, POROUS) is not selected, and Conducting Solid Regions (SOLCONs) is not
selected, then SOLCON regions are imported as part of the “Assembly 3D” region.

– If Fluid Regions (USER3D, POROUS) is not selected, and Conducting Solid Regions (SOLCONs) is selected,
then SOLCON regions are imported as separate 3D regions.

– If Fluid Regions (USER3D, POROUS) is selected, and Conducting Solid Regions (SOLCONs) is not selected,
then SOLCON regions are imported as part of the regions in which they appear.

– If Fluid Regions (USER3D, POROUS) is selected, and Conducting Solid Regions (SOLCONs) is selected,
then SOLCON regions are imported as separate 3D regions and will be cut out of the parent regions.

10.1.3.9.7. Import 2D Axisymmetric Mesh

You can enable this toggle if you want to import a mesh created as a 2D mesh on an axisymmetric
section in CFX-4. This is different to a mesh defined using cylindrical coordinates; however, it can also
use an (x, r, ) coordinate system. The CFX-4 mesh must be only 1 element thick in the k direction to
use this option.

The Number of Planes value enables you to create additional planes in the direction within the ori-
ginal 2D mesh to create a 3D problem. This will increase the number of elements in the k direction, but
does not change the extent of the mesh.

The Angle value should be the angle of the mesh section in degrees. Because the mesh is only one
element thick, then is the same for all nodes.

10.1.3.9.8. Importing MFR Grids

If you have a CFX-4 MFR case, it can easily be imported into CFX-Pre and recreated.

• Each noncontinuous mesh section will be imported into a separate assembly.

• Each USER3D region will be imported into a separate 3D primitive.

• Both assemblies and 3D primitives can be used to create separate domains.

10.1.3.10. CFX-BladeGenPlus Files

CFX-BladeGenPlus files are of the form .bg+. There are no options specific to importing CFX-BladeGenPlus
files. For details, see Common Import Options (p. 72).

10.1.3.11. PATRAN Neutral Files

PATRAN Neutral files are of the form .out.

• Select Import Distributed Loads as 2D Regions to convert predefined distributed loads as 2D primitives
within CFX-Pre.

For details, see Common Import Options (p. 72).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 85
Importing and Transforming Meshes

10.1.3.12. IDEAS Universal Files

IDEAS Universal files are of the form .unv.

• Select the entities, under IDEAS Universal Specific Options, to import from Permanent Groups.

For details, see Common Import Options (p. 72).

IDEAS mesh files contain groups of nodes, faces and/or elements. The groups can be normal groups or
permanent groups. The normal groups are imported into CFX-Pre as up to three separate regions, de-
pending on the information available in the mesh file. These regions will be named:

• <groupName>_Nodes

• <groupName>_Faces

• <groupName>_Elements

Only permanent groups of the selected types are imported into CFX-Pre. If overlapping regions are
imported, CFX-Pre will split them into distinct regions; therefore, you may not want to import all per-
manent group types.

10.1.3.13. GridPro/az3000 Grid Files

GridPro/az3000 ‘grid’ files are of the form .grid.

• Select Include Periodic Regions to convert predefined periodic boundaries into 2D primitives on import.

• Select Ignore Connectivity to import grid blocks as unconnected 3D primitives. Ignoring connectivity does
not equivalence nodes at grid block interfaces.

• Select Import Grid Blocks as Subdomains so that for each predefined grid block, a separate 3D primitive
is created.

• Selecting Ignore Properties causes data in the properties file to be ignored. This includes boundary condi-
tions, 2D and 3D regions, and other data.

Additional information is available in:

• Ignore Invalid Degenerate Elements (p. 73)

• Duplicate Node Checking (p. 73).

10.1.3.14. NASTRAN Files

NASTRAN files can be imported.

• When Include Subdomains is cleared, all mesh elements are merged into a single 3D primitive.

• “Distributed loads” are pressure boundaries that, if imported, are used to generate 2D primitives in CFX-Pre.
Select Import Loads as 2D Regions to import distributed loads.

Additional information is available in:

• Ignore Invalid Degenerate Elements (p. 73)

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
86 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Importing Meshes

• Duplicate Node Checking (p. 73).

10.1.3.15. Pointwise Gridgen Files

Pointwise Gridgen files can be imported. There are no options available specific to the Pointwise Gridgen
format. For details, see Common Import Options (p. 72).

10.1.3.16. User Import

If you should require facilities for importing a mesh other than those available through the standard
Mesh Import forms, you can create your own customized mesh import program and make it available
through the Import Mesh forms. For details, see Volume Mesh Import API in the CFX Reference Guide.
If you have created your own mesh import program, it must be run from within CFX-Pre; one way of
doing this is by using the Import Mesh dialog box.

To run a custom import program using the Import Mesh dialog box:

1. Open the Import Mesh dialog box.

For details, see Importing Meshes (p. 71).

2. Set Files of Type to User Import(*).

3. Select the file containing the mesh to import.

4. Click Browse to browse to the location of the user executable file or enter its name under Exec Location.

5. Under Exec Arguments, enter the command-line arguments that should be passed to the import program.

6. Set advanced options as required.

For details, see:

• Ignore Invalid Degenerate Elements (p. 73)

• Duplicate Node Checking (p. 73)

7. Click Open.

CFX-Pre calls the custom import program with a command line that has the following form:

<user import executable> <executable arguments> <mesh file>

It is important therefore that the executable handles any arguments that are specified.

If you usually use a particular import program, you can set it as the default import program by any one
of the following methods:

• Specify the full pathname of the import program, and other settings, in the Options dialog box.

• Add the following line to the .cfx5rc file:

CFX_IMPORT_EXEC="<executable_path>"

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 87
Importing and Transforming Meshes

where <executable_path> is the full path and name of your executable.

For details, see Resources Set in cfx5rc Files in the CFX Introduction.

• Set CFX_IMPORT_EXEC in the system environment.

10.2. Mesh Tree View

The Mesh branch of the main tree view shows the regions of the imported meshes arranged in a hier-
archy for each loaded mesh file. You can also view regions arranged in a hierarchy based on composite
regions and mesh assemblies. To view either hierarchy in a separate Mesh tree view, right-click Mesh
(from the Mesh branch of the main tree view) and select one of the View by submenu commands.

When viewing the file-based hierarchy, each imported mesh forms one or more assemblies at the first
level of the tree. The second level of the tree shows all 3D primitives and the third level shows

• 2D primitives bounding each 3D primitive

• some composite regions.

10.2.1. Shortcut Menu Commands for Meshes and Regions

Right-clicking on a region, mesh assembly, 3D primitive, or 2D primitive in the tree view displays a
shortcut menu containing various options depending on what is selected. For details about the generic
shortcut menu commands, see Outline Tree View Shortcut Menu Commands (p. 7). Details about the
mesh-related shortcut menu items are provided in:

• Importing Meshes (p. 71)

• Deleting Meshes and Mesh Components from the Tree View (p. 88)

• Transform Mesh Command (p. 89)

• Gluing Meshes Together (p. 95)

• Mesh Editor (p. 96)

• Render Options (p. 96)

Note

If Highlighting is selected (from the viewer toolbar), mesh entities will be highlighted in
the viewer when you select them in the tree view.

10.3. Deleting Meshes and Mesh Components from the Tree View
There are several options for deleting meshes and mesh components and composite regions using
shortcut menu items available in the Outline tree view in CFX-Pre. These options are:

• Delete All Mesh: Available when you right-click Mesh. When selected this option deletes all meshes currently
present.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
88 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Transform Mesh Command

• Delete Mesh: Available when you right-click individual meshes themselves or Composite 3D Regions or
Primitive 3D Regions that map directly and entirely to one or more assemblies. When selected, this option
deletes all mesh associated with the selected assemblies.

• Delete Definition: Available when you right-click a composite region. When selected this option deletes
the definition of the composite region name but not the underlying mesh.

10.4. Transform Mesh Command

You can transform meshes using the Mesh Transformation Editor dialog box. To access this dialog
box, right-click a mesh file or selection of one or more 3D meshes in the tree view, then select the
Transform Mesh command from the shortcut menu. There are four basic transformations: Rotation,
Translation, Scale, and Reflection. More complex transformations can be achieved by successive
application of the basic types. You can also copy meshes, either by retaining the original mesh, or by
creating multiple copies.

When picking points from the viewer, the Show Faces render option must be selected to enable a
point on a region to be picked. It may also be useful to have Snap to Node selected (on by default in
the viewer toolbar).

The values entered on this form use the units defined on the Edit > Options > Common > Units form.
For details, see Units (p. 49).

The topics in this section include:

• Target Location (p. 89)

• Reference Coordinate Frame (p. 90)

• Transformation: Rotation (p. 90)

• Transformation: Translation (p. 91)

• Transformation: Scale (p. 91)

• Transformation: Reflection (p. 92)

• Transformation: Turbo Rotation (p. 93)

• Multiple Copies (p. 93)

• Advanced Options (p. 94)

• Automatic Transformation Preview (p. 95)

10.4.1. Target Location

Select the assemblies and/or other regions to transform from the Target Assemblies drop-down box.

Click the icon to access the full list of available regions.

Not all regions are transformable. For example, 2D regions or 3D regions not resolving to at least one
assembly are not transformable.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 89
Importing and Transforming Meshes

10.4.2. Reference Coordinate Frame

Toggle on Reference Coordinate Frame to specify if the transformation is defined in another coordinate
frame. Select the reference coordinate frame from the Coordinate Frame list.

10.4.3. Transformation: Rotation

Use the Rotation transformation to rotate an assembly about an axis defined by two points or a
principal axis.

10.4.3.1. Rotation Option: Principal Axis

This Rotation Option uses the X, Y, or Z axis as the axis of rotation. Select one of the principal axes,
under Axis, to be the axis of rotation.

10.4.3.2. Rotation Option: Rotation Axis

This Rotation Option uses a user-defined axis as the axis of rotation for the transformation. This axis
is defined by two Cartesian points, From and To. These points can be entered manually or selected in
the viewer by clicking any coordinate box and then clicking in the viewer. The working units are assumed
to apply to the point coordinates.

10.4.3.3. Rotation Angle Option

The rotation angle options are Specified, Full Circle, and Two Points.

10.4.3.3.1. Specified
The Specified option simply rotates the assembly by the specified angle. When looking from the start
point to the end point of the axis, a positive angle will produce a rotation in the clockwise direction.

10.4.3.3.2. Full Circle

The Full Circle option should be used in conjunction with Multiple Copy, otherwise, the assembly will
simply be transformed back to its original position. The effect this has is described more fully in Multiple
Copy.

10.4.3.3.3. Two Points

The Two Points option calculates an angle using the axis of rotation and the two points specified, as
shown in the following figure. The two points and the start point of the axis define a plane with a
normal direction pointing towards the end point of the axis. The angle proceeds in the clockwise direction
from the Start to the End point when looking from the start point to the end point of the axis. When
picking points from the viewer, the Show Faces render option must be selected to enable a point on
a region to be picked. It may also be useful to have Snap to Node selected (on by default in the
viewer toolbar).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
90 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Transform Mesh Command

10.4.4. Transformation: Translation

Use the translation transformation to move an assembly in the X, Y, and Z directions.

10.4.4.1. Method: Deltas

The Deltas method moves the mesh by the Dx, Dy, Dz values entered. Enter the Dx, Dy, Dz values
with which to translate the mesh. This is equivalent to a displacement vector translation, using the
origin as the start point of the vector and the point entered as the end point. A point can be entered
manually or selected in the viewer after clicking any coordinate box. The working units are assumed to
apply to the displacement vector components.

10.4.4.2. Method: Vector

The Vector option moves the assembly by the vector described by the From and To points.

Enter From and To points to describe the translation. These points can be entered manually or selected
in the viewer after clicking any coordinate box.

10.4.5. Transformation: Scale

The Scale method is used to scale an assembly by a scale factor.

10.4.5.1. Method: Uniform

The Uniform option uses the same scale factor for all coordinate directions, therefore scaling the size
of the assembly while maintaining the same aspect ratio. Specify the scale factor by entering a value
for Uniform Scale (which must be greater than zero).

10.4.5.2. Method: Non Uniform

The Non Uniform option scales the assembly independently in each coordinate direction.

Enter scale factors Sx, Sy, and Sz to scale the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the assembly, respectively.

10.4.5.3. Scale Origin

Scaling is achieved by multiplying the location of each mesh node relative to the Scale Origin by the
scaling factor.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 91
Importing and Transforming Meshes

Enter the Scale Origin as a Cartesian coordinate (for example, [0 0 0]), or use Picking mode by
clicking any Cartesian coordinate box then picking a point from the viewer. The working units are as-
sumed to apply to the point coordinates. When you are in Picking mode, the Cartesian coordinate boxes
turn yellow. To manipulate the object in the viewer while in this state you have to click the viewer icons
(rotate, pan, zoom) in the toolbar. You can turn off Picking mode by changing the keyboard focus (by
clicking on another field, for example).

10.4.5.4. Apply Scale To

This setting controls whether the transformation is applied to the original mesh or to a copy of the
mesh. If you have set up physics locations on the original mesh, such locations are retained after the
transformation.

The following options are available:

Original (No Copy)

Transforms the original mesh without making a copy.

Copy (Keep Original)

Copies the original mesh before applying the transformation. In this case, the original mesh remains in its
current location.

10.4.6. Transformation: Reflection

The Reflection method is used to mirror a mesh in a specified plane. Apart from using the principal
planes (for example, the XY plane), arbitrary planes can be created with the Three Points and the Point
and Normal methods. These are the same plane definition methods that are available in CFD-Post.

10.4.6.1. Method
The options available are YZ Plane, XZ Plane, XY Plane, Three Points and Point and
Normal.

When using the YZ Plane, XZ Plane, or XY Plane method, an offset can be applied by entering
values in the X, Y, Z offset box.

If you use the Three Points or Point and Normal method, the points can be manually entered
or selected in the viewer after you click in any coordinate field.

10.4.6.2. Apply Reflection To

This setting controls whether the transformation is applied to the original mesh or to a copy of the
mesh. If you have set up physics locations on the original mesh, such locations are retained after the
transformation.

The following options are available:

Original (No Copy)

Transforms the original mesh without making a copy.

Copy (Keep Original)

Copies the original mesh before applying the transformation. In this case, the original mesh remains in its
current location.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
92 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Transform Mesh Command

10.4.7. Transformation: Turbo Rotation

Use the Turbo Rotation transformation to rotate an assembly about an axis defined by the rotation
axis or a principal axis.

10.4.7.1. Rotation Option: Principal Axis

This Rotation Option uses the X, Y or Z axis as the axis of rotation. Select one of the principal axis,
under Axis, to be the axis of rotation.

10.4.7.2. Rotation Option: Rotation Axis

The Rotation Option uses a user-defined axis as the axis of rotation for the transformation. This axis
is defined by two Cartesian points, From and To. These points can be entered manually or selected in
the viewer by clicking any coordinate box and then clicking in the viewer.

10.4.7.3. Rotation Axis Options

In addition to the From and To points, you can select the following options:

Passages per Mesh

An indication of the number of blade passages that exist in the selected mesh file. The value will normally
be 1.

Passages to Model
An optional parameter that is used to specify the number of passages in the section being modeled. This
value is used in CFD-Post.

Passages in 360
An optional parameter that is used to specify the number of passages in the machine. This value is used
in CFD-Post.

Theta Offset
Rotates the selected mesh, about the rotational axis, through an angle Theta. The offset can be a single

value or set to an expression by clicking .

10.4.8. Multiple Copies

When the Multiple Copies toggle is disabled, then the assembly is simply transformed to the new
location, without retaining a copy of the assembly at the original location. You can enable the Multiple
Copies toggle to enable multiple copies of an assembly to be made during the transformation. It should
be noted that this section is not available for Scale Transformations.

In general, the multiple copies will be evenly spaced throughout the transformation. For rotational
transformations copies will appear at evenly spaced angles, while for translational transformations
copies will appear at evenly spaced intervals along the vector describing the translation. For example,
if you have a mesh for a single blade passage, you can make copies of it using the rotation transform-
ation. If your full machine has 60 blades and you want to reproduce the full geometry, you should use
the Full Circle option for the Angle and select to make 59 copies (the original copy is the 60th).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 93
Importing and Transforming Meshes

10.4.8.1. # of Copies
Enter the number of copies for the assembly to make. This number does not include the original copy.

10.4.8.2. Delete Original

Controls whether the original copy is retained or deleted after the transformation. Composite regions
associated with the original mesh are not deleted during this operation.

10.4.9. Advanced Options

The Advanced Options control your mesh-gluing strategy as described below.

10.4.9.1. Glue Adjacent Meshes

If you enable this toggle, CFX-Pre will attempt to automatically glue each copy of the assembly together.
This means that CFX-Pre will try to create a continuous mesh contained in a single assembly from the
multiple copies. For the glue to be successful, physically matching boundaries with one-to-one node
pairings must be found between the copy (or copies) and the original. The multiple copies will then be
treated as a single continuous mesh in a single assembly with multiple 3D regions. A single domain
can be created for the entire assembly without the need to create domain or periodic interfaces between
each copy. If multiple domains are created, automatic domain interfaces can be created. For details,
see Automatic Creation and Treatment of Domain Interfaces in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

If boundaries do not physically match or one-to-one node pairings do not exist, then each copy will
form a new assembly, which will require the creation of domain interfaces to connect them together.

When Delete Original is used in conjunction with Glue Matching Meshes, the original is deleted only
if the gluing operation is successful.

For more information on gluing, see Gluing Meshes Together (p. 95).

You can set the following advanced options:

Glue Strategy
Choose the strategy that CFX-Pre will use in deciding how mesh selections being transformed are glued
with each other and with other areas of mesh:

• Location and Transformed causes CFX-Pre to try to create connections automatically between the se-
lected location being transformed and any copies that are made.

• Location and Transformed and Touching requests that CFX-Pre tries to glue the transformed locations
with any copies made and also with any other mesh locations that are in contact with the transformed
location or transformed copies.

Keep Assembly Names

An assembly is a group of mesh regions that are topologically connected. Each assembly can contain only
one mesh, but multiple assemblies are permitted.

When transforming a location, existing assemblies can be modified or created by removing connec-
tions between 3D regions or can be merged by creating connections between 3D regions. The
setting of Keep Assembly Names can be altered to indicate whether CFX-Pre should attempt to
preserve assembly names that were present in the problem before the transformation took place,
therefore ensuring that the locations used by physics objects are not invalidated:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
94 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Gluing Meshes Together

• None: no attempt is made by CFX-Pre to retain existing assembly names

• Existing: assembly names specified before the transformation takes place are preserved

• Existing and Intermediate: the names of assemblies prior to the transformation and also any interme-
diate assembly names created during the transformation process will be preserved.

10.4.10. Automatic Transformation Preview

This toggle enables you to see the transformation before you click Apply. After you click Apply, the
preview toggle clears automatically.

10.5. Gluing Meshes Together

If there are multiple mesh assemblies that have matched meshes, you can try to glue these together
by selecting the assemblies in the tree view (using the Ctrl key), right-clicking, and selecting Glue Regions
from the shortcut menu. If the meshes match exactly, a 1:1 connection is made; otherwise a GGI con-
nection is used. In either case, the connection appears as a mapping of two regions under Connectivity
in the tree view (for example, F3.B1.P3<->F3.B2.P4). Note that you can select Connectivity >
Hide 1:1 Connections so that the list of GGI connections is easier to work with.

Important

Merging/connecting meshes in CFX-Pre is not supported when those meshes are provided
by ANSYS Workbench during a Workbench session. Doing so may result in extra copies of
these meshes appearing when refreshing meshes.

Tip

Another way to glue two meshes together is to select Connectivity > Define Connection

from the tree view. In the Mesh Connections Editor that appears, click to browse the
Selection Dialog for the regions to choose for Side One and Side Two. If is selected,
the regions are highlighted in the viewer as you highlight regions in the Selection Dialog.

If a pair of meshes cannot be glued together, you can use a domain interface instead. For details, see
Domain Interfaces (p. 149).

Note

• There is limited checking of the validity of GGI connections created by gluing meshes together.

• When you transform or copy multiple assemblies, it is possible to have each copy glued to its
original assembly or to other copies made. For details, see Advanced Options (p. 94) in the
Transform Mesh Command (p. 89) section.

• For more information on mesh connection types, see Mesh Connection Options in the CFX-Solver
Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 95
Importing and Transforming Meshes

10.6. Mesh Editor

The mesh editor is described in Editing Regions in CFX-Pre (p. 104).

10.7. Render Options

The Render Options dialog box controls how 2D objects will appear in the viewer, such as visibility,
line width, line color, and so on. Rendering for individual 2D objects, or any composite regions that
resolve to only one 2D object, is set on the Render Options dialog box for 2D objects. The Render
Options dialog box can be used to control the properties of both, 2D primitives and profile geometry.
For details, see Render Options Dialog Box (p. 96).

Render Options for any regions that are made up of more than one 2D object (such as a 3D region or
a composite 2D region consisting of more than one 2D object) can be set on a global basis for all 2D
objects within the particular region. For details, see Render Options - Multiple 2D Regions (p. 98).

Profile geometries can be rendered in different ways depending upon the underlying profile file. For
details on profile rendering, see Render Options - Profile Geometry (p. 98).

You can access the Render Options dialog box by right-clicking on a region or profile geometry in the
tree view and then selecting Render > Properties from the shortcut menu.

10.7.1. Render Options Dialog Box

When the Render Options dialog box is accessed by right-clicking on regions, the controls apply only
to those regions selected.

10.7.1.1. Draw Faces

Shows the faces of the mesh elements on 2D primitives or the faces of a profile geometry if faces are
available. Show Faces should be selected if the effect of changing the face options is to be seen.

10.7.1.2. Face Color

The color used for the faces drawn on the 2D objects. Pick a Face Color by clicking on the color box

to cycle through common colors or click to select a custom face color.

10.7.1.3. Transparency
Select a Transparency level from 0 to 1, where 0 is opaque and 1 is transparent.

10.7.1.4. Draw Mode/Surface Drawing

Controls the shading property applied to faces on 2D objects.

10.7.1.4.1. Flat Shading

Each element is colored a constant color. Color interpolation is not used across or between elements.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
96 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Render Options

10.7.1.4.2. Smooth Shading

Color interpolation is applied, which results in color variation across an element based on the color of
surrounding elements.

10.7.1.5. Face Culling

This controls the visibility for element faces of objects that either face the viewer or point away from
the viewer. Domain boundaries always have a normal vector that points out of the domain. The two
sides of a thin surface have normal vectors that point towards each other.

Note

Face Culling affects printouts performed using the Screen Capture method only.

10.7.1.5.1. Front Faces

Clears visibility for all outward-facing element faces (the faces on the same side as the normal vector).

10.7.1.5.2. Back Faces

Clears visibility for inward-facing element faces (the faces on the opposite side to the normal vector).

10.7.1.5.3. No Culling
Shows element faces when viewed from either side.

10.7.1.6. Lighting
Toggle the lighting source on or off.

10.7.1.7. Specular
When selected, treats the object as a reflector of light.

10.7.1.8. Draw Lines

Shows the lines of the surface mesh elements on 2D primitives, or the face edges of a profile geometry
if faces are available.

10.7.1.9. Edge Angle/Render Edge Angle

To change how much of the line or wireframe is drawn, you can change the edge angle. The Edge
Angle is the angle between one edge of a face and its neighboring face. Setting an Edge Angle will
define a minimum angle for drawing edges of the surface mesh or faces. If you want to see more of
the surface mesh, reduce the edge angle.

10.7.1.10. Line Width

The line width can be changed by entering a value in the Line Width field corresponding to the pixel
width of the line. When the box is active, the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard can be used
to increment the value.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 97
Importing and Transforming Meshes

10.7.1.11. Line Color

Pick a Line Color by clicking on the color box to cycle through common colors or click to select a
custom line color.

10.7.1.12. Symbols
Symbols are displayed to represent a profile geometry for which there is no face connectivity. You can
change the appearance of the symbols by modifying their type and size.

10.7.1.12.1. Symbol
Enables you to change the appearance of the symbol.

10.7.1.12.2. Symbol Size

The symbol size can be changed by entering a value in the Symbol Size text.

10.7.1.13. Visibility
Set the visibility for the primitives in the viewer. Clearing the visibility may improve the viewer perform-
ance for complex meshes.

10.7.2. Render Options - Multiple 2D Regions

The Render Options dialog box for multiple regions is both an indicator of consistency of the render
options of the regions selected, and a tool to set render options for all selected regions. The presence
of a check mark in the check box for an option indicates whether consistent settings exist for that option
across all of the selected regions.

For example if the Shading option is selected and set to Flat Shading this means that all the regions
selected have their Shading options set to Flat Shading. By contrast, if Face Color is cleared this
indicates that at least one region has a different color. You can still apply a color to all regions by enabling
the check box next to Face Color and selecting a color. After any changes, CFX-Pre will recheck all objects
for consistency, and update the form accordingly. The options themselves are the same as for individual
regions.

10.7.3. Render Options - Profile Geometry

The Render Options dialog box can be used to control the appearance of profile geometries imported
from external profile data files. When you enable the Visibility option in the Initialize Profile Data
dialog box, or make the corresponding User Function visible, to visualize the geometry of the profile,
you have the ability to modify the render options for the profile geometry. The appearance of the
profile geometry will differ, depending on the specified face connectivity information in the profile file.

• If a profile file has face connectivity specified, in addition to nodal values, then the profile geometry will
appear as faces.

• If a profile file has no face connectivity, then the profile geometry will appear as symbols based on the nodes.

Right-click the profile geometry to modify color, wireframe appearance, and transparency options.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
98 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre

10.7.3.1. Color
Use the Color option to pick a color for the profile geometry symbol or faces. Click the color box to
cycle through common colors or select a custom color.

10.7.3.2. Lines
Use the Lines option to show or hide the wireframe and/or face edges on profile geometry faces.

10.7.3.3. Transparency
Use the Transparency option to set a transparency level for the profile geometry faces.

10.7.3.4. Properties
Launches Render Options dialog box for additional rendering options. For details, see Render Options
Dialog Box (p. 96).

Note

Not all rendering options are applicable for profile geometries displayed as symbols.

10.8. Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre

The mesh topology in CFX-Pre is largely determined by the primitive regions imported with the mesh.
You must consider the requirements of the physics being simulated when generating the geometry
and mesh outside of CFX-Pre.

10.8.1. Assemblies, Primitive Regions, and Composite Regions

Each mesh is imported into one or more assemblies. An assembly represents a connected mesh. A mesh
containing one-to-one node connections is considered to be connected and is imported into a single
assembly.

Each assembly contains one or more 3D primitives (mesh regions), and each 3D primitive is bounded
by one or more 2D primitive mesh regions. Each 3D primitive may also contain 2D mesh primitives that
are located within the interior of the mesh. A primitive is the lowest level of region information available
in a mesh file.

Primitives could be regions that were explicitly created in the mesh generation software. However, in
some mesh files, the mesh references underlying CAD faces, in which case these will be the primitive
regions. GTM files are an example of this; a 2D primitive region will resolve to the CAD face Solid
1.2, for example. If CAD face data is available in the mesh file, then regions explicitly created in the
mesh generation software, or in CFX-Pre, will reference the CAD faces and, therefore, themselves will
not be the lowest level of region data. These regions are known as composite regions because they are
composed of one or more primitive regions.

Note

Because CFX-Pre can recognize underlying CAD surfaces from CFX GTM Files, it is not necessary
to create composite regions, although it will often make selecting locations easier in CFX-

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 99
Importing and Transforming Meshes

Pre. Other mesh types may or may not require the definition of composite regions within
CFX-Pre.

New composite regions can be created in CFX-Pre using the Regions details view. However, the topology
of the existing primitives limits the scope of composite region creation and it is not possible to create
any new primitives in CFX-Pre. For details, see Defining and Editing Composite Regions (p. 106).

The number and location of 2D primitives and 3D primitives is defined by the software that generated
the mesh. You should consider your domain, boundary condition, domain interface and subdomain
requirements when creating the mesh and create appropriate regions that can be used in CFX-Pre. You
will need to create each region explicitly in the mesh generation software if your mesh file does not
contain data that references the underlying CAD faces.

If primitives reference the underlying CAD faces, it does not mean that the exact CAD geometry is re-
covered. The mesh simply references all the CAD faces and makes the mesh associated with them
available in CFX-Pre.

In CFX-Pre 3D primitives are always distinct, as such a mesh element is always contained in a single 3D
primitive. All regions in the mesh file that define a set of 3D elements are imported into CFX-Pre. If any
element exists in more than one grouping of elements, the import process will split the groupings so
that each element is contained within a single 3D primitive. Composite regions will be defined that
group the 3D primitives into the topology that the original mesh file represented. Depending on your
mesh file, this could include 3D subregions, solid regions, block-off regions, user defined 3D regions,
porous regions, and so on.

If a 2D primitive spans more than one 3D primitive, it will be split into multiple 2D primitives on import,
so that each 2D primitive is part of only one 3D primitive. All overlapping 2D primitives are also split
into distinct primitives upon import and composite regions are created to represent the original regions
read from the mesh file. When a 2D primitive forms a boundary between 3D primitives, it will be split
into two sides, such that a 2D primitive is associated with each 3D primitive. When a 2D primitive is
split, a suffix is added to the name so that the resulting 2D primitives are named uniquely. For example,
a 2D primitive called Solid 1.2 would be split into Solid 1.2A and Solid 1.2B.

10.8.1.1. Composite Regions

Composite regions are defined as combinations of one or more 2D primitive, 3D primitive or other
composite regions. New composite regions created in CFX-Pre must therefore be defined by a combin-
ation of at least one other region, however it is possible that a composite region can be defined that
resolves to nothing.

Composite regions that are specified in the original mesh file imported into CFX-Pre will be imported
into the application if the import format can be translated into one that CFX-Pre can use. The composite
regions imported into CFX-Pre can be selected, modified and deleted in the same way as composite
regions defined in the application.

Additional information on primitive and composite regions is available in Assemblies, Primitive Regions,
and Composite Regions (p. 99).

For details about creating regions, see Regions (p. 103).

10.8.1.1.1. Applications of the Composite Regions

For details, see Applications of Composite Regions (p. 107).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
100 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Topic: cfx5gtmconv Application

10.8.2. Domain and Subdomain Locations

Domains are created from a list of 3D primitives, and subdomains from list of 3D primitives that are
also contained in a domain. Assemblies and 3D composites can also be used as locations for domains
and subdomains. In this case, all 3D primitives contained within the assembly or 3D composite are in-
cluded in the domain.

Assemblies and 3D primitives not included in a domain are not used in the simulation. A 3D primitive
may be implicitly included if it forms part of a 3D composite or assembly that is used in a domain.

The domains in a multi-domain simulation must be continuous or connected via domain interfaces -
you cannot have separate isolated domains.

10.8.3. Boundary Condition and Domain Interface Locations

2D primitives and 2D composite regions can be used as locations to create boundary conditions and
domain interfaces.

If your assembly has more than one 3D primitive and they share a common boundary, then at least
one pair of 2D primitives will exist at the common boundary. One 2D primitive of each pair will bind
one of the 3D primitives that shares the common boundary.

It is not possible for a region to span more than one domain in a single boundary condition.

10.8.4. Importing Multi-domain Cases

Meshes intended or previously used for multi-domain simulations can be imported into CFX-Pre. You
will still be able to set up a multi-domain simulation from a single mesh import.

If the imported mesh is not connected, a separate assembly will be created for each connected section.
Each assembly can be used to create a separate domain. If the mesh is connected, then a single assembly
will be created but 3D primitives will be created for each 3D region defined in the mesh file. Each 3D
primitive can be used to create a separate domain, even if it is contained in a single assembly.

10.9. Advanced Topic: cfx5gtmconv Application

The cfx5gtmconv application is a command line executable that can be used to convert between a
number of mesh file formats. It can be used to perform import of a mesh into a GTM database or to
convert a GTM database into a CFX-Solver input file that can be viewed in CFD-Post. If appropriate
physics CCL is available, it can also be used to create a definition that can be run in a solver. In this
case, the exported mesh obeys the constraints imposed on it by the solver and the physics model.

Full details can be found by entering:

<CFXROOT>/bin/cfx5gtmconv -help

at the command line, where <CFXROOT> is the path to your installation of CFX-Pre.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 101
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
102 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 11: Regions
CFX-Pre has two types of regions:

• Primitive

• Composite

This chapter describes:

11.1. Primitive Regions
11.2. Composite Regions
11.3. Using Regions in CFX-Pre
11.4. Editing Regions in CFX-Pre
11.5. Applications of Composite Regions

Additional information on primitive and composite regions is available. For details, see Mesh Topology
in CFX-Pre (p. 99).

11.1. Primitive Regions

Primitive regions are a unique selection of 2D faces or 3D elements that define a location in the model.

A model containing a mesh will have at least one 2D primitive region and one 3D primitive region.

It is not possible for a primitive region to contain 2D faces and 3D elements.

11.2. Composite Regions

Composite regions are regions defined in terms of other regions. For example:

• A named Region “A” may be an alias for another Region “B”

A composite region that is an alias can directly reference only one other region, but may reference
more than one region if the region it references is itself another composite region.

• Region “C” may be a union (that is, all) of Region “D” and Region “E”.

A composite region that is a union will reference one or more other regions directly and may indirectly
reference many other regions if the regions it references themselves reference other regions.

Composite regions ultimately resolve to primitive regions.

The tree view and the Region details view are used to select, create, rename, modify, and delete com-
posite regions.

If any of the primitive regions to which a composite region resolves does not exist in the model, the
composite region is said to be unresolved.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 103
Regions

Composite regions can be defined in terms of 2D and 3D primitive regions. If the composite region
resolves to both 2D and 3D primitive regions, the composite region is known as a mixed dimensionality
composite.

An Assembly is a special case of a mixed-dimensionality composite region. It can be used in the same
way, but its composition implies connectivity within the mesh. All 3D mesh volumes within an Assembly
‘know’ about their connections to each other. This information is used by CFX-Pre when calculating in-
terfaces between domains.

Composite regions that are specified in the original mesh file imported into CFX-Pre will be imported
into the application if the import format can be translated into one that CFX-Pre can use. The composite
regions imported into CFX-Pre can be selected, modified, and deleted in the same way as composite
regions defined in CFX-Pre.

11.3. Using Regions in CFX-Pre

A composite 2D region may be used in exactly the same way as a primitive 2D region to define the
location of a Boundary Condition, Domain Interface, and so on, in the model.

A composite 3D region may be used in exactly the same way as a primitive 3D region to define the
location of a Domain or Sub-domain in the model.

Mixed-dimensionality composite regions can be used as locators, but only the primitive regions of ap-
propriate dimensionality are used in the location. For example, a mixed-dimensionality region used as
the location of a boundary condition will mean that the boundary condition is defined only on the 2D
components.

11.4. Editing Regions in CFX-Pre

As there are two types of regions in CFX-Pre, there are two editors used for defining and modifying
these regions. For details, see:

• Defining and Editing Primitive Regions (p. 104)

• Defining and Editing Composite Regions (p. 106)

11.4.1. Defining and Editing Primitive Regions

Currently only definition and modification of 2D primitive regions is supported.

To define a primitive region, select Regions from the Insert > Primitive Region on the main menu or
from the shortcut menu available from Mesh in the Outline or Mesh trees. To edit an existing primitive
2D region when on the name of the region in the Outline or Mesh trees, right-click and select Edit
Mesh from the shortcut menu.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
104 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Editing Regions in CFX-Pre

Faces can be moved or copied from one or more 2D primitive regions into a new or an existing 2D
primitive region.

The Region Filter enables you to modify the source from which faces will be picked. Select All Regions
from the drop-down list if faces are to be selected from anywhere in the model, or any number of regions
if you want to restrict your source regions. (Note: If you have entered the editor by selecting Edit Mesh,
the region filter will be set to the regions selected in the tree by default. You are able to change this
selection if required.)

Initially no faces will be selected in the viewer and the dialog box will indicate this.

Click Start Picking and use one of the toolbar buttons on the 3D viewer, for details, see 3D Viewer
Toolbar (p. 18):

• To set the pick mode to single face selection, click this button. Clicking in the viewer will select the first
face to move.

• To flood fill an area, click this button and then click in the viewer. Changing the crease angle will control
how far the flood will extend. The angle indicates that any face that bounds the face first selected and has

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 105
Regions

a normal within the angle will be selected. The same angle is then used again on any faces selected by the
algorithm until no more faces can be reached using this method.

• To select all faces within a rectangle, click this button and then click in the viewer and drag the box to
perform the selection. The option to the left of Pick All indicates whether the selection only includes fully
enclosed faces or any touching or enclosed faces.

• To select all faces within a polygon, click this button and then click multiple times in the viewer finishing
with a double-click to perform the selection. The option to the left of Pick All indicates whether the selection
only includes fully enclosed faces or any touching or enclosed faces.

Appending further faces to the current selection is performed in the same way as above, but by using
Ctrl and click to pick the faces in the viewer. All operations can use this method.

The names of the 2D primitive regions from which faces have been selected are shown in the Mesh
Face Selection tree. The number of faces selected from each 2D primitive is also shown. The set of
faces associated with a single 2D primitive can be removed by right-clicking the 2D primitive in the
tree.

Faces are moved or copied to a destination region; the action can be selected from those shown in
Destination box.

You can select the destination for the faces from the list to the right of the Move Faces To field, or you
can type a new name into the field.

Note

Unexpected results may occur if the topology of the current model is altered in some way
during the course of the edit. For example adding a new composite region or deleting an
existing one or importing or deleting a mesh may alter how the editor acts. In a similar way,
performing an Undo or Redo when faces are selected may change the topology. If any of
these operations are performed, click Reset and re-pick the faces as required.

11.4.1.1. Advanced Options

At the bottom of the form, the Options box can be expanded and Remove Invalid Components from
Composite Definitions can be selected. Selecting this option will remove any references to primitives
that are completely removed by the operation. If this is not done, composite regions that reference a
removed primitive region will become unresolved.

11.4.2. Defining and Editing Composite Regions

The Regions details view is used to create new, and edit existing composite regions. To create a new
region, select Composite Region from either the Insert > Regions menu or the shortcut menu available
from Mesh in the Outline or Mesh trees. To edit an existing composite region, right-click it in the Outline
or Mesh tree view, then select Edit Definition from the shortcut menu.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
106 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Applications of Composite Regions

A composite region is defined by specifying a list of regions and a method for combining them. The
Regions details view can be used to create or modify a region by selecting a method of combination
from the Combination list and a selection of regions from the Region List.

Note

The Regions details view enables you to restrict the regions available for selection by limiting
them by Dimension(Filter). Selecting 2D will cause the Region List to only display 2D regions
and selecting 3D will cause the Region List to only select 3D regions. Regions of mixed di-
mensionality are always available.

11.4.2.1. Union
A Combination setting of Union combines the area or volume of the selected regions to create a new
region. The new region will include all the regions from which it is constructed. For example, two or
more 3D regions can be combined to create a new region, which can then be used as the location for
a domain.

11.4.2.2. Alias
A Combination setting of Alias is used to produce a composite region that when resolved is based
upon the same set of primitive regions as the region it is defined on. A composite region with a Com-
bination of Alias may only reference a single region (this may be a composite or primitive region).
The new composite region may, however, resolve to more than one primitive region. This feature is
useful to assign recognizable names to regions with non-intuitive names.

11.5. Applications of Composite Regions

Composite Regions that are defined in the simulation can be used as locations for domains, sub-domains,
boundary conditions and domain interfaces. For example, a composite region with a combination
method of Union can be used to group two separate 3D regions. A domain that spans both 3D regions
can then be created using the single composite 3D region. Domain interfaces should still be created
to connect the two assemblies together if the composite region does not form a continuous mesh and
flow is to pass between the two assemblies. For details, see Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre (p. 99).

Another application of composite regions is to set up a consistent set of locations that can be applied
to a number of different simulations that use the same physics definition. By referencing the composite
regions in the physics definitions, the need to edit the definitions for each mesh is avoided and if dif-
ferences in the mesh topology do exist this can be coped with by editing the composite regions used
to locate the physics relatively simply. In this way for every problem in which the physics is to be applied,
the mesh, region CCL, and physics CCL can be imported. Locations of boundary conditions, domains
and subdomains should all match provided that the composite regions can all be resolved as expected.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 107
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
108 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 12: Analysis Type
The Analysis Type details view is used to specify whether the analysis is steady-state, transient, or
transient blade row. A discussion on steady-state and transient flows is presented in Steady State and
Transient Flows in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

12.1. Basic Settings Tab

The following topic is discussed in this section:

• Analysis Type Settings (p. 109)

12.1.1. Analysis Type Settings

The Analysis Type settings enable you to specify an analysis as being Steady State, Transient,
or Transient Blade Row. Steady-state analyses are used to model flows that do not change over
time; transient analyses model flows that are time-dependent. Transient blade row analyses are transient
analyses that have special handling for turbomachinery cases.

The Analysis Type options are described in the following sections:

• Steady State (p. 109)

• Transient (p. 109)

• Transient Blade Row (p. 111)

12.1.1.1. Steady State

No further settings are required for the Steady State option. Modeling advice for setting the time
scale for steady-state simulations is provided in Steady-state Time Scale Control in the CFX-Solver Mod-
eling Guide.

12.1.1.2. Transient
12.1.1.2.1. Time Duration
Set Option to determine the length of the transient analysis:

• Total Time

• Time per run

• Maximum Number of Timesteps

• Number of Timesteps per Run

• Coupling Time Duration

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 109
Analysis Type

For details, see Time Duration in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

12.1.1.2.2. Time Steps

Set Option to determine the size of timesteps for the run:

• Timesteps

• Timesteps for the Run

• Adaptive

• Coupling Timesteps

The Timesteps and Timesteps for the Run parameters can accept a single value or lists. If a list is
entered, it should be comma separated, for example, 2, 1.2, 2.4. If an expression is used, you must
associate units with each item in the list, for example, 2 [s], 1.2 [s], 2.4 [s]. In addition, it
is possible to define multiples of a timestep value in the user interface when not using the expression
method. For example, you could enter 5*0.1, 2*0.5, 10*1 as a list of values, and set the units to
[s] separately. The corresponding CCL that would be generated would be:

0.1 [s], 0.1 [s], 0.1 [s], 0.1 [s], 0.1 [s], 0.5 [s], 0.5 [s], 1 [s],
1 [s], 1 [s], 1 [s], 1 [s], 1 [s], 1 [s], 1 [s], 1 [s], 1 [s]

If you accidentally enter 5*0.1 [s], 2*0.5 [s], 10*1 [s] as an expression, the multiplication
would be carried out, and the corresponding CCL that would be generated would be:

0.5 [s], 1.0 [s], 10.0 [s]

For details, see Transient Timestep Control in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

When Adaptive time is selected, set one of the following three conditions for Timestep Adaption
to automate the calculation of timestep size:

• Number of Coefficient Loops

• RMS Courant Number

• MAX Courant Number

For details, see Transient Timestep Control in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

12.1.1.2.3. Initial Time

Set the Option to specify the Initial Time for a transient analysis.

• Automatic

• Automatic with Value

• Value

• Coupling Initial Time

For details, see Initial Time in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
110 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Basic Settings Tab

12.1.1.3. Transient Blade Row

The Transient Blade Row option is required in order to access the Transient Blade Row models:

• None

• Profile Transformation

• Time Transformation

• Fourier Transformation

The Initial Time settings must be specified in the Analysis Type settings. For details on these settings,
see Initial Time (p. 110).

For instructions on setting up and using Transient Blade Row models, see Transient Blade Row Modeling
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 111
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
112 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 13: Domains
This chapter describes:
13.1. Creating New Domains
13.2.The Details View for Domain Objects
13.3. Using Multiple Domains
13.4. User Interface

CFX-Pre uses the concept of domains to define the type, properties, and region of the fluid, porous, or
solid. Domains are regions of space in which the equations of fluid flow or heat transfer are solved. This
section describes how to use the domain details view to define the physics of fluid, porous or solid
domains in your simulation. This includes selecting the 3D bounding regions and choosing appropriate
physical models.

A list of the physical models available in CFX, as well as additional information on the physical meaning
of the models used, is available. For details, see Physical Models in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Domains are created from a list of Assemblies, 3D primitive regions and/or 3D composite regions that
are associated with a volume of an imported mesh. A discussion of these objects can be found in CFX-
Pre. For details, see Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre (p. 99).

In some cases, separate domains will need to be connected via a domain interface, while in other cases,
no interface is required or a default interface is created and is suitable. For details, see Domain Inter-
faces (p. 149).

Within fluid, porous, and solid domains, internal 3D regions can be assigned to a subdomain. These are
used to create volumetric sources of mass, momentum, energy, and so on. For details, see Subdo-
mains (p. 193).

Boundary conditions can be applied to any bounding surface of a 3D primitive that is included in a
domain (that is, including internal surfaces). For details, see Boundary Conditions (p. 161).

13.1. Creating New Domains

New domains are created by selecting Insert > Domain or clicking the Domains icon. Note that
creation of domains from the menu bar or toolbar may subsequently require selection of the appropriate
analysis type. Domains can also be created by right-clicking the appropriate analysis type in the Outline
view.

Creating a new domain will present a dialog box where a unique name for the domain should be
entered.

Additional information on valid names is available in Valid Syntax for Named Objects (p. 55). Existing
domains may be edited by double-clicking the domain in the Outline view, or by right-clicking the
domain and selecting Edit. For details, see Outline Tree View (p. 5).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 113
Domains

13.2. The Details View for Domain Objects

After entering a name for the domain, or selecting a domain to edit, the domain details view appears
in the workspace. In this view, you should complete each of the following tabs in turn, proceeding from
left to right across the tabs. The tabs shown depends on your simulation, but could be:

• Basic Settings: Sets the location and type of domains, as well as the fluid, porous or solid, used in the domain.
The reference pressure, buoyancy options and domain motion are also set here. For details, see Basic Settings
Tab (p. 115).

• Porosity Settings: Only available for porous domains. Set the general description of a porous domain.

• Fluid Models: Only available for fluid domains. Sets the physical models that apply to all domain fluids. For
details, see Fluid Models Tab (p. 122).

• Fluid Specific Models (for example, Water at RTP): Only available for fluid or porous domains when more
than one fluid is selected, or for a single phase case when particles are included. A separate tab is used for
each fluid in the domain and uses the fluid name as the name for the tab. This sets physical model options
that are specific to each domain fluid. For details, see Fluid Specific Models Tab (p. 131).

• Fluid Pair Models: Only available for fluid domains using multiple fluids or when particles are included.
This sets options that depend on the interaction between fluid pairs, such as transfer options. For details,
see Fluid Pair Models Tab (p. 133).

• Solid Models: Only available for solid domains. Sets the physical models that apply to the solid. For details,
see Solid Models Tab (p. 139).

• Particle Injection Regions: When a particle tracking simulation is used, custom injection regions can be
created using this tab. For details, see Particle Injection Regions Tab (p. 143).

• Initialization: Sets initial conditions on a domain basis. For details, see Initialization Tab (p. 147). This is op-
tional since global initialization can also be performed, but is essential for solid domains.

• Solver Control: Sets solver control settings on a domain basis. For details, see Solver Control Tab (p. 147).

13.3. Using Multiple Domains

For any given CFD problem, more than one domain may be defined. By default, the physical models
used in each domain must be consistent; therefore, each time you create or edit a domain, the physical
models (fluid lists, heat transfer models, and so on) are applied across all domains of the same type
(such as fluid or solid), possibly overwriting models chosen earlier for other domains.

Note the following:

• Some exceptions exist when using fluid and solid domains together and also to enable MFR (multiple frame
of reference) simulations to be defined.

• If a domain interface is required, refer to Using Domain Interfaces in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide for in-
formation on the correct use of interfaces.

13.3.1. Multiple Fluid Domains

When consistent physics has been enforced, all settings are copied across all fluid domains when any
fluid domain is edited with the following exceptions:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
114 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

• Location: The location of each domain must obviously be different.

• Coordinate Frame: Each domain can use a different reference local coordinate frame.

• Domain Motion: Each domain can be independently stationary or rotating. For rotating domains, the angular
velocity and axis of rotating can be different for each domain. This enables MFR simulations to be set up.

Note that these parameters are all set on the Basic Settings tab on the Domains form.

Fluid and Solid Domains: Settings are not copied between fluid and solid domains with the exception
of Thermal Radiation Model. If any solid domain uses the Monte Carlo radiation model, then all fluid
domains must also model radiation and must use the Monte Carlo model. If no solid domain has radiation
modeling (that is, Option = None), then the fluid domains can use any radiation model.

13.3.2. Multiple Solid Domains

Settings are not copied between solid domains. Each solid domain can be made from a different mater-
ial and can mix the Monte Carlo radiation model and no radiation model.

13.4. User Interface

The following topics will be discussed:
13.4.1. Basic Settings Tab
13.4.2. Fluid Models Tab
13.4.3. Polydispersed Fluid Tab
13.4.4. Fluid Specific Models Tab
13.4.5. Fluid Pair Models Tab
13.4.6. Solid Models Tab
13.4.7. Porosity Settings Tab
13.4.8. Particle Injection Regions Tab
13.4.9. Initialization Tab
13.4.10. Solver Control Tab

13.4.1. Basic Settings Tab

The basic settings apply to the whole of the domain. When you create a new domain, the Basic Settings
tab is initially shown.

13.4.1.1. Location and Type

13.4.1.1.1. Location
The Location is the list of assemblies, 3D primitive regions and/or 3D composite regions that define
the volume of the domain. For details, see Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre (p. 99). Using an assembly or a
composite region in the Location list implicitly includes all 3D primitives contained within the object.
You can use more than one location by using the Shift or Ctrl keys to pick multiple entries from the

drop-down list. The icon to the right of the drop-down list can be used to pick locations from an
expanded list. Alternatively, clicking a location in the viewer displays a small box containing the available
locations.

For details, see Domain and Subdomain Locations (p. 101).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 115
Domains

13.4.1.1.2. Domain Type

The Domain Type setting can be set to one of the following:

• Fluid Domain

Fluid domains are used to model one fluid or a combination of fluids, with a wide range of modeling
options. It is possible to deform the mesh to simulate movement of the boundaries of the domain;
for details, see Mesh Deformation (p. 121).

• Solid Domain

Solid domains are used to model regions that contain no fluid or porous flow. Several modeling options
are available, including heat transfer (see Conjugate Heat Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide),
radiation (see Radiation Modeling in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide), and Additional Variables (see
Additional Variables (p. 309) and Additional Variables in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide). In addition,
you can model the motion of a solid that moves relative to its reference frame; for details, see Solid
Motion (p. 140).

• Porous Domain

Porous domains are similar to fluid domains, but are used to model flows where the geometry is too
complex to resolve with a grid. For details, see Flow in Porous Media in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

• Immersed Solid

Immersed Solid domains can be used in transient simulations to model rigid solid objects that move
through fluid domains; for details, see Domain Motion (p. 119) and Immersed Solids in the CFX-Solver
Modeling Guide.

13.4.1.1.3. Coordinate Frame

By default in a fluid domain, Coordinate Frame is set to the default Cartesian frame, Coord 0, but
you can select any predefined coordinate frame. To create a new coordinate frame, select Insert > Co-
ordinate Frame from the menu bar. For details, see Coordinate Frames (p. 283) and Coordinate Frames
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

The coordinate frame set for a domain is local to only that domain and is used to interpret all x, y and
z component values set in the domain details view. This includes the gravity components in a buoyant
flow and the rotation axis definition in a rotating domain. The coordinate frame set here has no influence
on boundary conditions for the domain. For details, see Global Coordinate Frame (Coord 0) in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.1.2. Fluid and Particle Definitions and Solid Definitions

To define a fluid, particle or solid (including the solid portion of a porous domain):

1. If required, click Add new item to the right of the definition list, type a name for the definition and
click OK. For multiphase simulation, more than one fluid is required. For details, see Multiphase Flow
Modeling in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

2. For the definition Option select Material Library (the default) to enable choosing a material from
a supplied or user defined library or Material Definition for Reacting Mixtures.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
116 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

3. For the definition Material select from the drop-down list for some commonly used materials or click

Select from extended list to access a complete list of materials.

4. After clicking you may also choose to select Import Library Data to load library data from a file.

The specification of material properties (for example, density and viscosity) and the creation of custom
materials is performed in the Materials details view. For details, see Materials (p. 291). New materials
are added to the relevant drop-down list.

A solid domain must be made from a single solid material.

13.4.1.2.1. Morphology
Which morphology options are available depends on whether you are setting fluid-specific details for
an Eulerian phase or for a particle phase. For Eulerian phases, the options are:

• Continuous Fluid

• Dispersed Fluid

• Dispersed Solid

• Droplets (Phase Change)

• Polydispersed Fluid

For details, see Morphology in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

For a particle phase, the options are:

• Particle Transport Fluid

• Particle Transport Solid

For details, see Particle Morphology Options in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.1.2.1.1. Mean Diameter

For Dispersed Fluid and Dispersed Solid phases, a mean diameter is required. For details,
see Mean Diameter in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.1.2.1.2. Minimum Volume Fraction

This is available for dispersed phases, but you will not usually need to set a value. For details, see Min-
imum Volume Fraction in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.1.2.1.3. Maximum Packing

This is available for the Dispersed Fluid and Dispersed Solid phases. For details, see Maximum
Packing in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 117
Domains

13.4.1.2.1.4. Restitution Coefficient

This restitution coefficient setting holds a value from 0 to 1 that indicates the degree of elasticity of a
collision between a pair of particles. For such a collision, the restitution coefficient is the ratio of separ-
ation speed to closing speed. This restitution coefficient setting is used only for the kinetic theory
model. For details, see Kinetic Theory Models for Solids Pressure in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

13.4.1.2.1.5. Particle Diameter Distribution

This is available for particle phases. For details, see Particle Diameter Distribution in the CFX-Solver
Modeling Guide.

13.4.1.2.1.6. Particle Shape Factors

This is available for particle phases. For details, see Particle Shape Factors in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

13.4.1.2.1.7. Particle Diameter Change

This option is available when multiphase reactions have been enabled with particle tracking. When
Particle Diameter Change is selected choose either Mass Equivalent or Swelling Model.

13.4.1.2.1.7.1. Swelling Model

Select a reference material from the list. Enter a Swelling Factor greater than or equal to zero; a value
of zero indicates no swelling, and CEL expressions are permitted. For details, see Particle Diameter
Change Due to Swelling in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.1.3. Particle Tracking

To include particles in the domain, define a particle in Fluid and Particle Definitions..., select the
particle material and select the Particle Transport Fluid or Particle Transport Solid option for Fluid
and Particle Definitions... > <particle definition> > Morphology on the Basic Settings tab. For details,
see Particle Transport Modeling in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.1.4. Domain Models

13.4.1.4.1. Pressure: Reference Pressure
This sets the absolute pressure level to which all other relative pressure set in a simulation are measured.
For details, see Setting a Reference Pressure in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.1.4.2. Buoyancy: Option

For flows in which gravity is important, you should include the buoyancy term. Gravity components in
the x, y and z directions should be entered; these are interpreted in the coordinate frame for the domain.
For details, see Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

There are two different buoyancy models in CFX: the one used depends upon the properties of the
selected fluid(s). Depending on the types of fluid selected, a Buoyancy Reference Temperature and
/ or a Buoyancy Reference Density must be set. This is because different fluids use either the full or
Boussinesq buoyancy model. In multiphase flows, the reference density can have a significant effect.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
118 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

The Buoyancy Reference Location can be set automatically, or to a specific location with X/Y/Z co-
ordinates. For details, see:

• Buoyancy in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Buoyancy in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

13.4.1.4.3. Domain Motion

The available Domain Motion options depend on the type of domain, and are described in
Table 13.1: Domain Motion Options (p. 119):

Table 13.1: Domain Motion Options

Option Eligible Domain Description

Types
Stationary All domain types The domain remains stationary in the absolute frame
of reference.
Rotating All domain types The domain rotates with a specified angular velocity
about the given axis.

For fluid, porous, and solid domains, a Rotational

Offset setting exists.

For fluid and porous domains, an Alternate Rotation

Model option exists.
Speed Immersed solid The domain translates at the specified speed in the
and domain specified direction. The translation direction can be
Direction specified by Cartesian components, or by a coordinate
axis.
Specified Immersed solid The domain is displaced according to the specified
Displacement domain Cartesian components. For example, you could use CEL
expressions that are functions of time to move the
domain.
General Immersed solid Specify a reference origin that is considered to be
Motion domain attached to the domain. Then specify a motion for that
origin, and a rotation of the domain about that origin.

The reference origin location is specified by the Refer-

ence Location settings.

The motion of the reference origin is specified by Ori-

gin Motion settings that are similar to those for the
Domain Motion options (other than General Mo
tion).

The rotation of the domain about the reference origin

is specified by the Body Rotation settings.
Rigid Immersed solid Specify a mass, moment of inertia, and various
Body domain dynamics settings. The dynamics settings include
Solution external forces and torques, translational and rotational
degrees of freedom, and gravity. All of these settings

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 119
Domains

Option Eligible Domain Description

Types
are analogous to the settings of the rigid body object,
which is described in Rigid Bodies (p. 199). Note that,
unlike for a rigid body object, you cannot specify
initialization values for the rigid body solution that
applies to an immersed solid domain; these initialization
values (such as angular velocity and angular
acceleration) are effectively initialized with values of
magnitude zero.

For additional information on modeling rigid bodies,

see Rigid Body Modeling in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

Details of some of the settings mentioned in Table 13.1: Domain Motion Options (p. 119):

• Angular Velocity: The angular velocity gives the rotation rate of the domain, which can be a function of
time.

• Axis Definition: The axis of rotation can be a coordinate axis of the local coordinate frame or a local cyl-
indrical axis defined by two points.

– If Coordinate Axis is selected, the available axes are all local and global coordinate axes. Coord 0
is the global coordinate frame, and its axes are referred to as Global X, Global Y and Global Z. A
local coordinate frame's axes are referred to as myCoord.1, myCoord.2, myCoord.3 where 1,2,3
represent the local X,Y,Z directions.

– If Two Points is selected, Rotation Axis From and Rotation Axis To must be set. The points are inter-
preted in the coordinate frame for the domain. If the coordinate frame is cylindrical, then the components
correspond to the r, , z directions. For details, see Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Rotational Offset: This setting transforms the domain by the specified rotation angle. The rotation axis
used for this transformation is specified by the Axis Definition settings.

• Alternate Rotation Model: For details, see Alternate Rotation Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Reference Location: The reference location is an origin point that should be defined to conveniently describe
the body rotation of the immersed solid domain. When Body Rotation > Option is set to None, the reference
location will be neglected. Specify the reference location by choosing an existing coordinate frame origin,
or by specifying Cartesian coordinates.

A solver run that starts from a previous run should have the same domain motion options in the
immersed solids domains, and must have identical reference location specifications if supplied.

• Origin Motion: The origin motion can be specified in any of the ways that the domain motion can be specified
(not counting the General Motion option for domain motion), and by Specified Velocity, which
accepts Cartesian components of velocity.

• Body Rotation: The body rotation options are:

– None

– Rotating

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
120 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

Specify an angular velocity and the instantaneous axis of rotation.

– Specified Angular Velocity

Use Cartesian components to define a vector. The rotation axis passes through the reference location
in the direction of the specified vector. The angular velocity is the magnitude of the specified
vector.

Note

• CEL expressions used to define domain motion can be functions of time only.

• If you create two or more fluid domains and modify a model setting of one of the domains, that
setting is generally copied to all other fluid domains in the simulation. An exception to this is
that if you edit the Domain Motion settings of a domain, those settings are not copied to any
other domains; this enables each domain to rotate or remain stationary independently of the
other domains.

13.4.1.4.4. Mesh Deformation

Mesh deformation can be used to model flows with varying geometry, for both transient and steady-
state simulations. The following mesh deformation model options are available for a domain:

• None

• Regions of Motion Specified: permits wall boundaries and subdomains to move, and makes mesh
motion settings available. These include a mesh motion model option and mesh stiffness settings. For details,
see Regions of Motion Specified in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Periodic Regions of Motion: permits wall boundaries to move, and makes mesh motion settings
available. These include a Periodic Model setting, a mesh motion model option and mesh stiffness settings.
The Periodic Regions of Motion option can save computational time compared to the Regions
of Motion Specified option by taking advantage of the nature of periodic motion and solving the
mesh motion equations only at the start of the simulation. However, the Periodic Regions of Motion
mesh deformation model implementation uses a linear approximation and has some limitations compared
to the Regions of Motion Specified option. For details, see Periodic Regions of Motion in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

• Junction Box Routine: reads mesh coordinate datasets from a file into the CFX-Solver as the solution
proceeds. This step requires the specification of a series of meshes and User Fortran routine(s). For details,
see Junction Box Routine in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.1.4.5. Passage Definition

For Transient Blade Row cases, specify the number of passages in 360° and the number of passages
per component for the domain. This information may be used in the automatic calculation of time step
size, depending on the Transient Method settings (which are described in Transient Method (p. 270)).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 121
Domains

13.4.2. Fluid Models Tab

The Fluid Models tab is where models are chosen, which apply to all Eulerian fluids in the simulation.
By default, the fluids models must be consistent between all fluid domains in a multidomain simulation,
but CFX supports inconsistent physics through the setting of an environment variable. For details, see:

• Using Multiple Domains (p. 114)

• Solid Models Tab (p. 139).

In a multiphase simulation, the options that are allowed to vary between fluids will appear on the Fluid
Specific Models tab instead. For details, see Fluid Specific Models Tab (p. 131).

Some fluid models can apply to all fluids or can be set on a fluid-specific basis, these models will appear
on the Fluid Models section with a Fluid Dependent option. If this is selected, then the model
appears on the Fluid Specific Models tab.

The options available on the Fluid Specific Models tab depends on the simulation set up (including
the type and number of fluids used in the simulation (such as single or multicomponent, single or
multiphase, reacting or non-reacting)) and whether Additional Variables have been created.

All details related to Particle Tracking are set on the General Settings tab and the models chosen on
the Fluid Models tab do not apply to the particle phase.

Radiation with multiphase is not supported. However, it is allowed for single Eulerian particle tracking
cases on the Fluid Specific Models tab.

The available settings depend on the physical models chosen in your simulation.

13.4.2.1. Multiphase Options

These options are only applicable to multiphase simulations.

13.4.2.1.1. Homogeneous Model

Inhomogeneous is the general case of multiphase flow, where each fluid has its own velocity field,
turbulence field, and so on. You can select the Homogeneous Model check box to switch to this
model, where all fluids share a velocity field, turbulence field, and so on. For details, see The Homogen-
eous and Inhomogeneous Models in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide. Both the inhomogeneous and ho-
mogeneous models have a Free Surface Model option.

13.4.2.1.2. Free Surface Model

You can select the Standard free surface model if you are modeling multiphase flow with a distinct
interface between the fluids. For details, see Free Surface Flow in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.2.1.3. Multiphase Reactions

Multiphase Reactions are available when any reactions have been defined with type Multiphase. For
details, see Multiphase: Basic Settings (p. 306). Any reactions that are to be included in the simulation
should be selected from the drop-down list. For details, see Multiphase Reactions in the CFX-Solver
Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
122 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

13.4.2.2. Heat Transfer

13.4.2.2.1. Homogeneous Model
For details, see Homogeneous Heat Transfer in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.2.2.2. Heat Transfer: Option

Depending on your simulation, the following heat transfer options are possible. For details, see Heat
Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• None: Not available for compressible fluids, since a temperature is required at which to evaluate the fluid
properties.

• Isothermal: Not available for reacting fluids.

• Thermal Energy: Models the transport of enthalpy through the fluid and is suitable for modeling heat
transfer in low-speed flows. For details, see The Thermal Energy Equation in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

The Turbulent Prandtl Number may be customized by selecting the Turbulent Flux Closure check
box in the Turbulence settings.

• Total Energy: Includes high-speed energy effects. You should include the viscous work term in the energy
equation (select Heat Transfer > Incl. Viscous Work Term). For details, see The Total Energy Equation in
the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

The Turbulent Prandtl Number may be customized by selecting the Turbulent Flux Closure check
box in the Turbulence settings.

• Fluid Dependent: Is used to set different heat transfer models for each fluid in a multiphase simulation.
A heat transfer model is then set for each fluid on the Fluid Specific Models tab. This option cannot be
used when Homogeneous Model is selected for the heat transfer model.

Important

If a compressible transient flow is undertaken with only one iteration per time step, then the
solution can be incorrect if the Heat Transfer option is not set to Total Energy, or if heat
transfer is not included in the simulation. This is due to the CFX-Solver not extrapolating the
pressure at the start of the time step in these circumstances. This means that density is not
extrapolated, and so the solver cannot calculate an accurate value for the time derivative of
density on the first iteration. The workaround for this problem is to either run with at least
two iterations per time step, or to use the Total Energy option for Heat Transfer.

13.4.2.3. Turbulence
Advice on which turbulence model is appropriate for your simulation and a description of each model
can be reviewed. For details, see:

• Turbulence and Near-Wall Modeling in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Turbulence Modeling in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Turbulence Models in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 123
Domains

13.4.2.3.1. Homogeneous Model

If you have not selected Homogeneous Model under Multiphase Options, then Homogeneous
Model under Turbulence frame will be available.

If selected, this will solve a single turbulence field for an inhomogeneous simulation. There will be no
fluid-specific turbulence data to set. For details, see Homogeneous Turbulence in Inhomogeneous Flow
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

If you do not select this check box, then you will usually select Fluid Dependent and specify turbu-
lence data on the fluid-specific tabs. Alternatively, the Laminar model can be picked to apply to all fluids
(this is not homogeneous turbulence).

Homogeneous multiphase flow always uses homogeneous turbulence; therefore, you only need select
the turbulence model to use.

13.4.2.3.2. Turbulence: Option

You can select one of the following turbulence models:

• None (Laminar): Turbulence is not modeled. This should only be used for laminar flow. Of the combustion
models, only Finite Rate Chemistry is available for laminar flow. For details, see The Laminar Model in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• k-Epsilon: A standard fluid model that is suitable for a wide range of simulations. For details, see The k-
epsilon Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Fluid Dependent: Allows you to set different turbulence models for each fluid in the domain. If this
option is selected, the turbulence model for each fluid is set in the Fluid Specific Models tab. This is only
available for multiphase simulations when Homogeneous Model is not selected.

• Shear Stress Transport: Recommended for accurate boundary layer simulations. For details, see
The k-omega and SST Models in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Omega Reynolds Stress / BSL Reynolds Stress: For details, see Omega-Based Reynolds Stress
Models in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• QI / SSG / LRR Reynolds Stress: Provides high accuracy for some complex flows. For details, see
Reynolds Stress Turbulence Models in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

• Zero Equation: Only the Finite Rate Chemistry combustion model is available when using the zero
equation turbulence model. For details, see The Zero Equation Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• RNG k-Epsilon: A variation of the k-epsilon model.

• k-Omega / BSL: The SST model is often preferred to this model.

• k epsilon EARSM / BSL EARSM: These models are a simplified version of the Reynolds stress models
with application to problems with secondary flows as well as flows with streamline curvature and/or system
rotation. For details, see Explicit Algebraic Reynolds Stress Model in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide

• LES Smagorinsky / LES WALE / LES Dynamic Model: Available for transient simulation only.
For details, see The Large Eddy Simulation Model (LES) in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
124 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

• Detached Eddy Simulation: Available for transient simulation only. For details, see The Detached
Eddy Simulation Model (DES) in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Stress Blended Eddy Simulation: Available for transient simulation only. This is a refinement of
Detached Eddy Simulation. For details, see The Stress-Blended Eddy Simulation (SBES) Model in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

• SAS SST: Available for transient simulation only. For details see, The Scale-Adaptive Simulation (SAS) in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Eddy Viscosity Transport Equation: A one-equation variation of the k-epsilon model. For details,
see The Eddy Viscosity Transport Model in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

The available Advanced Turbulence Control settings for turbulence modeling depend on the turbulence
model. The settings can be used to specify the coefficients for the selected turbulence model. These
coefficients are described in Table 13.2: Advanced Turbulence Parameters (p. 125):

Table 13.2: Advanced Turbulence Parameters

Parameter Description
SST Reattachment Modification Available only when Turbulence > Option is set to Shear
Stress Transport. For details, see The Reattachment
Modification (RM) Model in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.
Eddy Viscosity Enables you to specify a value that will be picked up by the
specified turbulence model; in this case the internal
algorithm will not be used.
BC TKI Factor A factor for turbulence intensity used in turbulence boundary
conditions based on “Autocompute Length Scale”, such as
“Default Intensity and Autocompute Length Scale” (default
= 1000).

For more details, see Inlet (Subsonic) in the CFX-Solver Theory

Guide.
BetaStar Coefficient Model coefficient; appears when an omega-based turbulence
model is selected (default = 0.09).

Can appear in several equations. For example, see

Equation 2.36 in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide or Equation 2.51
in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.
Cmu Coefficient Model coefficient; appears when an epsilon-based turbulence
model is selected (default = 0.09).

See Equation 2.22 in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

Compressible Production For details, see The k-epsilon Model in ANSYS CFX in the
CFX-Solver Theory Guide.
A1 Coefficient Model coefficient of the SST turbulence model (default =
0.31).

See Equation 2.60 in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

Curvature Correction For details, see:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 125
Domains

• Curvature Correction for Two-Equation Models in the CFX-Solver

Theory Guide

• Explicit Algebraic Reynolds Stress Model in the CFX-Solver Theory

Guide

High Lift Modification For improved modeling of high-lift devices (for example,
airfoils and wings). Leads to stronger flow separation and
reduced maximum lift.

Available only when Turbulence > Option is set to Shear

Stress Transport.

The High Lift Correction option has an adjustable

CHL Coefficient, which has a range from 0.5 to 1.0 and a
default value of 0.9. For details, see Modifications to SST for
High Lift Devices in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.
K Coefficients For details, see:

• The k-epsilon Model in ANSYS CFX in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide

• The k-omega Models in ANSYS CFX in the CFX-Solver Theory

Guide

k-Omega Regime For details, see:

• The Baseline (BSL) k-omega Model in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide

• The Shear Stress Transport (SST) Model in the CFX-Solver Theory

Guide

k-Epsilon Regime For details, see:

• The Baseline (BSL) k-omega Model in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide

• The Shear Stress Transport (SST) Model in the CFX-Solver Theory

Guide

Epsilon Coefficients For details, see The k-epsilon Model in ANSYS CFX in the
CFX-Solver Theory Guide.
Production Limiter For details, see Production Limiters in the CFX-Solver Theory
Guide.
DES Coefficients Model parameters for the Detached Eddy Simulation model.
For details, see:

• Detached Eddy Simulation Theory in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide

• The Detached Eddy Simulation Model (DES) in the CFX-Solver

Modeling Guide

SBES Coefficients Model parameters for the Stress-Blended Eddy Simulation

model. For details, see:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
126 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

• The Stress-Blended Eddy Simulation (SBES) Model in the

CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Stress-Blended Eddy Simulation (SBES) in the CFX-Solver Theory

Guide

Omega Coefficients For details, see The k-omega Models in ANSYS CFX in the
CFX-Solver Theory Guide.
High Wave Number Damping Enables you to specify the limiter coefficient ( ) in
Equation 2.215 in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide for the SAS
SST model (default = 0.11).

13.4.2.3.3. Buoyancy Turbulence

Buoyancy Turbulence is available for two (or more) equation turbulence models. For details, see Buoyancy
Turbulence in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.2.3.4. Wall Function

The wall function is automatically set depending on the turbulence model selected. Therefore, you will
not need to change this setting. For multiphase flow, if the fluid dependent turbulence model option
is selected, the wall function option appears on the fluid- specific tabs. The Laminar and zero equation
turbulence models do not use wall functions. For details, see Modeling Flow Near the Wall in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.2.3.5. Turbulent Flux Closure for Heat Transfer

Turbulent Flux Closure for Heat Transfer is available for turbulent flow with Thermal Energy or Total
Energy heat transfer model. For details, see Heat Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.2.4. Reaction or Combustion Model

If the fluid material is defined as Option is Material Definition and Composition Option is
Reacting Mixture, or if a reacting mixture from the material library has been selected as the ma-
terial for one of the domain fluids, then you can select a combustion model as:

• Eddy Dissipation

• Finite Rate Chemistry

• Finite Rate Chemistry and Eddy Dissipation

• PDF Flamelet

• BVM (Partially Premixed)

• Extended Coherent Flame Model

• Fluid Dependent (multiphase only)

Only Finite Rate Chemistry is available when Laminar or Zero Equation turbulence
model is used.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 127
Domains

In multiphase simulations, when Fluid Dependent is selected, a different combustion model can
be used for each reacting fluid in the simulation. If the homogeneous multiphase model is used, all
fluids must be reacting mixtures that include reactions to enable a combustion to be modeled.

If the fluid material is defined as a reacting mixture from the material library, then the available com-
bustion models are filtered in order to be compatible with the reactions specified in the reacting mater-
ial.

If the fluid material is defined as Option is Material Definition and Composition Option is
Reacting Mixture, then the complete list of combustion models is presented and the reactions
list for the mixture has to be specified. Only those reactions from the material library will be available
that are compatible with the selected combustion model.

Depending on the selected combustion model, additional options (such as Autoignition Model,
NO Model, and Chemistry Post-Processing) and parameters may be available. For details, see
Combustion Modeling in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.2.4.1. Soot Model

When a combustion model is selected, you can optionally enable the Magnussen soot model to account
for the formation of soot. In multiphase simulations, this model appears on the fluid-specific tab for
each fluid that uses a combustion model.

A Fuel and Soot Material is required, and the following optional parameters can also be set:

• Fuel Consumption Reaction

• Fuel Carbon Mass Fraction

• Soot Density

• Soot Particle Mean Diameter

For details, see Soot Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.2.5. Thermal Radiation Model

If a heat transfer model other than None has been selected, you can model thermal radiation. If a radi-
ation model is selected, you must make sure that the radiation properties for that fluid have been set
in the Material details view. For details, see Material Properties Tab (p. 295). Radiation is not supported
for multiphase simulations in CFX.

The four radiation models available in CFX are:

• Rosseland

• P1

• Discrete Transfer

• Monte Carlo

A Spectral Model can be selected for all radiation models. If the Multigray or Weighted Sum of
Gray Gases representation is selected for the Spectral Model, then you should create the required
number of gray gases.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
128 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

1. Click Add new item to add a new gray gas. (You can click Delete to delete a highlighted gray gas.)

2. Set the Weight and Absorption Coefficient for each gray gas.

For details, see Multigray/Weighted Sum of Gray Gases in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Alternatively, if the Multiband representation is selected, you should create Spectral Bands:

1. Click Add new item to add a new spectral band. (You can click Delete to delete a highlighted
spectral band.)

2. Set Option to either Frequency, Wavelength or Wavenumber.

3. Enter upper and lower limits for the option selected.

This defines the range of the spectral band. For details, see:

• Multiband in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Spectral Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Radiation Modeling in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.2.6. Electromagnetic Model

The Electromagnetic Model enables you to define:

Electric Field Model

Option can be set to None, Electric Potential, or User Defined. For details, see Electric Field
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Magnetic Field Model

Option can be set to None, Magnetic Vector Potential, or User Defined.

If a user-defined model is selected, you must make sure that the electromagnetic properties have been
set in the Material details view. For details, see Material Properties Tab (p. 295). Electromagnetic models
are supported for multiphase simulations only if homogeneous.

For more information on electromagnetic theory, see Electromagnetic Hydrodynamic Theory in the CFX-
Solver Theory Guide.

13.4.2.7. Component Details

If your fluid contains more than one component (that is, you are using a variable composition or reacting
mixture, or HCF fuel, created in the Material details view), then Component Details will need to be
set on the Fluid Models tab. If using the Algebraic Slip Multiphase model (ASM), the settings are specified
in this view as well. For details, see Algebraic Slip Model (ASM) in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide. When
a non-ASM multiphase model is used, the Component Details form appears on the fluid-specific tabs.

• Select each component in turn and set the required option.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 129
Domains

• Select the type of equation to solve for this component as Automatic, Transport Equation, Con
straint, Algebraic Equation or Algebraic Slip. A description of the multiphase model is
available in:

– Algebraic Slip Model (ASM) in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

– Component Domain Settings in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• If you have chosen to solve a transport equation for the component, you can optionally enter a value for
Kinematic Diffusivity. If you do not set Kinematic Diffusivity, then the Bulk Viscosity value is used.

• If you have chosen to solve a transport equation or an Algebraic Slip component, you can optionally set a
component dependent Turbulent Schmidt Number by enabling the Turbulent Flux Closure check box.
If you do not select Turbulent Flux Closure, the value from Turbulence > Turbulent Flux Closure for Heat
Transfer will be used.

The Component Details specify the model used to calculate the mass fraction of each component
throughout the domain. For details, see Component Domain Settings in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.2.8. Additional Variable Details

If you have defined any Additional Variables from the Additional Variable details view, then you can
choose to include or exclude them here. An Additional Variable is included by selecting it from the
Additional Variables Details list and then enabling the check box with the name of the Additional
Variable. For details, see Additional Variables (p. 309).

If an Additional Variable is included, you must select how the Additional Variable level is calculated.

For single phase flows, the CFX-Solver can solve different variations of the conservation equations for
the variable including Transport Equation, Diffusive Transport Equation or Poisson
Equation.

For multiphase flows, the CFX-Solver can solve different variations of the conservation equations for
the variable including Homogeneous Transport Equation, Homogeneous Diffusive
Transport Equation, Homogeneous Poisson Equation or Fluid Dependent. When the
Fluid Dependent option is selected, the Additional Variable model details can be set for each fluid
on the Fluid Specific Models tab.

If a transport equation is being solved for an Additional Variable, the Turbulent Flux Closure may be
optionally specified for turbulent flow. If you do not select Turbulent Flux Closure for the Additional
Variable, the default is Option is Eddy Diffusivity and the Turb. Schmidt Num. is set to 0.9.

Alternatively, you can define the variable value algebraically using CEL by selecting the Algebraic
Equation option. Note that the Algebraic Equation option is not available for homogeneous
Additional Variables. In addition, only specific Additional Variables are permitted to be homogeneous.
For details, see Additional Variables in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.3. Polydispersed Fluid Tab

The Polydispersed Fluid tab for a domain object contains settings that define the properties of poly-
dispersed (MUSIG) fluids. It is accessible by selecting the Polydispersed Fluid option for Fluid and
Particle Definitions... > <fluid definition> > Morphology on the Basic Settings tab.

For details, see Polydispersed, Multiple Size Group (MUSIG) Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
130 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

13.4.4. Fluid Specific Models Tab

The Fluid Specific Models tab contains settings for fluid-specific properties. It appears for multiphase
simulations and when particles are included in the domain.

Which options are available depends on the simulation set up, including the type and number of fluids
used in the simulation (for example, single or multicomponent, single or multiphase, reacting or non-
reacting), and whether Additional Variables have been created.

13.4.4.1. Fluid List Box

This list box is used to select a fluid (which can, in some cases, represent a solid). The rest of the tab
contains settings for the selected fluid.

13.4.4.2. Kinetic Theory

The Kinetic Theory settings control the solid particle collision model. When you set Kinetic Theory to
Kinetic Theory, you should set the granular temperature model and radial distribution function.
CFX-Pre will also set the Solid Pressure Model, Solid Bulk Viscosity, and the Solid Shear Viscosity
settings to Kinetic Theory.

For details on these See:

settings:
Granular temperature model Granular Temperature
Radial distribution function Kinetic Theory Models for Solids Pressure
Solid pressure model Solids Pressure
Solid bulk viscosity Solids Bulk Viscosity
Solid shear viscosity Solids Shear Viscosity

For modeling information about solid particle collision models, see Solid Particle Collision Models in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

For theoretical information about solid particle collision models, see Solid Particle Collision Models in
the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

13.4.4.3. Heat Transfer Model

If you have set Heat Transfer to Fluid Dependent on the Fluid Models tab, Heat Transfer Model
options appear on the fluid-specific tabs for each Eulerian phase. If the heat transfer occurs between
two fluids, then additional information must be entered on the Fluid Pairs tab. Information on heat
transfer between phases is available in Interphase Heat Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Some of the available Heat Transfer Model options are similar to those in the single-phase case. See
Heat Transfer (p. 123) for details on the following options:

• None

• Isothermal

• Thermal Energy

• Total Energy

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 131
Domains

Additional Heat Transfer Model options include:

• Particle Temperature: Can only be used for particle transport fluids and solids. For details, see Heat
Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Saturation Temperature: Can only be used for a fluid that is a component of a homogeneous binary
mixture. This model is applicable only when the heat transfer modeling is inhomogeneous. For its most
common use, one of the phases of a two-phase flow is set to use Saturation Temperature while the
other uses a different Heat Transfer Model option, such as Thermal Energy or Total Energy. The
Saturation Temperature option behaves similarly to the Isothermal option except that, instead
of the fluid temperature being forced to be the specified Fluid Temperature value, the fluid temperature
is forced to be the saturation temperature as computed from the saturation properties of the homogeneous
binary mixture.

• Small Droplet Temperature: Can only be used for a fluid that has Morphology > Option set to
Droplets with Phase Change. For details, see Droplet Condensation Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

13.4.4.4. Turbulence Model

If you have set Turbulence to Fluid Dependent on the Fluid Models tab, the Turbulence Model
option appears on the fluid-specific tabs for each Eulerian phase. The models available are similar to
those available in single-phase simulations, with the following exceptions:

• For dispersed fluid, or dispersed/polydispersed solid phases, only the Dispersed Phase Zero Equa
tion, Laminar or Zero Equation models are available. The Dispersed Phase Zero Equation model is
the recommended choice. For details, see Phase-Dependent Turbulence Models in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

• The LES and DES models are available for transient simulations for the continuous phase.

For details, see Turbulence (p. 123).

13.4.4.5. Turbulent Wall Functions

The turbulent wall functions are selected automatically, but apply only to the current fluid. For details,
see Wall Function (p. 127).

13.4.4.6. Combustion Model

If you have set the reaction or combustion model to Fluid Dependent on the Fluid Models tab, the
Reaction or Combustion Model option can appear on the Fluid Specific Models tab for each Eulerian
phase. You will only be able to pick a combustion model for fluids that are reacting mixtures. The
models available are similar to those available in single-phase simulations. For details, see:

• Phasic Combustion in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Reaction or Combustion Model (p. 127).

13.4.4.7. Erosion Model

The erosion properties specified on this form are applied to all wall boundaries. The wall boundaries
can also have erosion properties set to override the global settings specified here. For details, see Erosion
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
132 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

13.4.4.8. Fluid Buoyancy Model

This option is available for multiphase buoyant flows and/or buoyant flows that include particles (set
on the Basic Settings tab). For details, see Buoyancy in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

13.4.4.9. Solid Pressure Model

This is available for Dispersed Solid Eulerian phases (phases with Dispersed Solid as the
Morphology setting). For details, see Solid Pressure Force Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.4.10. Component Details

This is available for each Eulerian phase in the simulation that is a mixture of more than one component.
It does not apply to fluids or solids using the particle tracking model. The options available are the
same as those on the Fluid Models tab in a single-phase simulation. For details, see Component De-
tails (p. 129).

If the component transfer occurs between two fluids, then additional information must be entered on
the Fluid Pairs tab. This is only possible when more than one multicomponent fluid exists in a simulation.
For details, see Interphase Species Mass Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.4.11. Additional Variable Models

This is available for each Eulerian phase in the simulation when Additional Variables have been created
as well as selected and set to Fluid Dependent on the Fluid Models tab. The options available are
the same as those on the Fluid Models tab in a single-phase simulation. It does not apply to fluids or
solids using the particle tracking model. For details, see Additional Variable Details (p. 130).

If the Additional Variable transfer occurs between two fluids, then additional information must be
entered on the Fluid Pairs tab. This is possible only when more than one phase in a simulation includes
Additional Variables. For details, see Additional Variables in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

13.4.5. Fluid Pair Models Tab

The Fluid Pairs tab appears for multiphase simulations and/or when particles are included in the domain.
It is used to specify how the fluids interact in a multiphase simulation and how particles interact with
the fluids when particles are included.

For details, see Fluid Pairs in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.1. Fluid Pair List box

The top of the Fluid Pair Models tab shows a list of all the phase pairs in the simulation. A phase pair
will exist when the morphology of the pair is Continuous Fluid | Continuous Fluid, Continuous Fluid
| Dispersed Fluid or Continuous Fluid | Dispersed Solid. If particles have also been included, then a
pair will exist for each Continuous Fluid | Particle pair. You should select each pair in turn and set the
appropriate options.

The options available will vary considerably depending on your simulation. Many options are not
available when the homogeneous multiphase model is used. This is because the interphase transfer

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 133
Domains

rates are assumed to be very large for the homogeneous model and do not require further correlations
to model them.

13.4.5.2. Particle Coupling

This only applies to Continuous Fluid | Particle pairs. For details, see Particle Fluid Pair Coupling Options
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.3. Surface Tension Coefficient

You can optionally provide a Surface Tension Coefficient. This should be set in either of the following
two cases:

• For a Continuous Fluid | Dispersed Fluid pair when you want to model the Drag Force using either the
Grace or Ishii Zuber models. The flow must also be Buoyant to enable these models to be selected.
For details, see Interphase Drag for the Particle Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• When you want to use the surface tension model. This model is only available when Standard has been
selected as the Free Surface Model on the Fluid Models tab.

You can set a Surface Tension Coefficient in other cases, but it will not be used in your simulation. It
does not apply to Continuous Fluid | Particle pairs.

For details, see Surface Tension in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.4. Surface Tension Force Model

You can model the surface tension force that exists at a free surface interface. This model applies to all
morphology combinations for Eulerian | Eulerian pairs. You must also specify a Surface Tension Coef-
ficient and select the Primary Fluid. For liquid-gas free surface flows, the primary fluid should be the
liquid phase.

For details, see Surface Tension in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.5. Interphase Transfer Model

This can be selected as one of the following:

13.4.5.5.1. Particle Model

This model assumes a continuous phase fluid containing particles of a dispersed phase fluid or solid. It
is available when the morphology of the pair is Continuous Fluid | Dispersed Fluid or Continuous
Fluid | Dispersed Solid. For details, see The Particle Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.5.2. Mixture Model

This model is only available when the morphology of the pair is Continuous Fluid | Continuous Fluid.
An Interface Length Scale is required. It is usually used as a first approximation or combined with a
custom interface transfer model. For details, see The Mixture Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.5.3. Free Surface Model

This model is available when the free surface model is selected. For details, see The Free Surface Model
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide. For free surface flow, the particle model is also available if the phase

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
134 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

pair is Continuous Fluid | Dispersed Fluid, and the mixture model is also available if the phase pair
is Continuous Fluid | Continuous Fluid.

13.4.5.5.4. None
For homogeneous multiphase flow in which there is no interphase transfer of any type, the interphase
transfer model is not relevant and None may be selected.

13.4.5.6. Momentum Transfer

There are a variety of momentum transfer that can be modeled, including the drag force and non-drag
forces, which include lift force, virtual mass force, wall lubrication force and turbulent dispersion force.

13.4.5.6.1. Drag Force

This option applies to all morphology pair combinations including Continuous Fluid | Particle pairs,
but does not apply when the Homogeneous multiphase model is active.

There are many drag force models available in CFX, but most are only applicable to certain morphology
combinations. For Continuous Fluid | Particle pairs, the available options are:

• The Schiller-Naumann drag model.

For details, see Interphase Drag in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• The Drag Coefficient.

For details, see Drag Force for Particles in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• The Ishii Zuber drag model.

For details, see Sparsely Distributed Fluid Particles: Ishii-Zuber Drag Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide and Densely Distributed Fluid Particles: Ishii-Zuber Drag Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• The Grace drag model.

For details, see Sparsely Distributed Fluid Particles: Grace Drag Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide
and Densely Distributed Fluid Particles: Grace Drag Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.6.2. Particle User Source

The Particle User Source check box is available when any User Routines of type Particle User Routines
exist. For details, see:

• Particle User Routines (p. 335)

• Particle User Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.6.3. Lift Force

The lift force is only applicable to the Particle Model, which is active for Continuous Fluid | Dis-
persed (Fluid, Solid) and Continuous Fluid | Polydispersed Fluid. For details, see Lift Force in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 135
Domains

13.4.5.6.4. Virtual Mass Force

This option applies to Continuous Fluid | Dispersed Fluid pairs using the Particle Model, and to
Continuous Fluid | Particle pairs, but does not apply when the Homogeneous multiphase model is
active. For details, see Virtual Mass Force in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.6.5. Wall Lubrication Force

This option is only applicable to the Particle Model. For details, see Wall Lubrication Force in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.6.6. Turbulent Dispersion Force

This applies to Continuous Fluid | Dispersed Fluid, Continuous Fluid | Polydispersed Fluid and
Continuous Fluid | Dispersed Solid pair combinations for Eulerian | Eulerian pairs, but does not apply
when the Homogeneous multiphase model is active. In these cases, the Lopez de Bertodano model is
used. For details, see Interphase Turbulent Dispersion Force in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

When particle tracking is used, the turbulent dispersion force also applies to Continuous Fluid | Particle
pairs. In these cases, the Particle Dispersion models is used. For details, see Turbulent Dispersion Force
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.6.7. Pressure Gradient Force

This option is only available for Particle Tracking simulations. For details, see Pressure Gradient Force
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.7. Turbulence Transfer

This model is available for Continuous Fluid | Dispersed Fluid, Continuous Fluid | Polydispersed
Fluid and Continuous Fluid | Dispersed Solid pair combinations for Eulerian | Eulerian pairs, but
does not apply when the Homogeneous multiphase model is active and is not available for Continuous
Fluid | Particle pairs. For details, see Turbulence Enhancement in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.8. Heat Transfer

This applies to all morphology combinations for Eulerian | Eulerian and Continuous Fluid | Particle
pairs, but does not apply when the Homogeneous multiphase model is active.

For details, see Interphase Heat Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide for multiphase applications
and Interphase Heat Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide for particle transport modeling.

13.4.5.9. Mass Transfer

Mass transfer can occur in homogeneous and inhomogeneous Eulerian multiphase flows. For such flows,
you can set the Mass Transfer option to one of the following:

• None

• Specified Mass Transfer

This is an advanced option that allows you to define your own mass transfer sources. For details, see
User Specified Mass Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
136 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

• Phase Change

This models mass transfer due to phase change, such as boiling, condensation, melting or solidification.
For details, see Thermal Phase Change Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Cavitation

Vapor formation in low pressure regions of a liquid flow (cavitation) can be modeled using the Rayleigh
Plesset model or, for advanced users, a user-defined model. For details, see Cavitation Model in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.10. Additional Variable Pairs

Additional Variable Pairs details describe the way in which Additional Variables interact between
phases. It applies to all morphology combinations for Eulerian | Eulerian pairs, but does not apply
when the Homogeneous multiphase model is active.

Only Additional Variable pairs where both are solved using the Transport Equation and have a Kin-
ematic Diffusivity value set can be transferred between phases. These options are set on the fluid-
specific tabs for each phase.

For example, consider two phases, Phase A and Phase B, and two Additional Variables, AV1 and
AV2.

• AV1 uses a Transport Equation with diffusion in Phase A and is unused in Phase B.

• AV2 uses an Algebraic Equation in Phase A and uses a Transport Equation with diffusion in Phase B.

Additional Variable interphase transfer can only occur between Phase A / AV1 and Phase B / AV2.

For details, see Additional Variables in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.11. Component Pairs

13.4.5.11.1. Eulerian | Eulerian Pairs
You can model transfer of components between phases for Eulerian | Eulerian pairs, when both fluids
are multicomponent mixtures of any type (except fixed composition mixtures). Interphase species
transfer (or component transfer) may be specified between any two components, A and B, in fluids,
and , respectively, subject to the following condition:

• The mass fractions of A and B must both be determined from transport equations.

• It is not possible to specify the species transfer of a component whose mass fraction is determined algebra-
ically, or from the constraint equation.

For more information on implementing component pairs in CFX-Solver, see Component Pairs in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Mixtures are created in the Material details view, which is described in Material Details View: Variable
Composition Mixture (p. 299). Component transfer enables you to model processes such as evaporation,
absorption, and dissolution.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 137
Domains

To specify the component transfer model, you should select the component pair from the list on the
Fluid Pairs tab and then select the associated toggle. The first component of the component pair cor-
responds to the first fluid in the fluid pairs list.

Option can be set to Two Resistance or Ranz Marshall. For details, see:

• Two Resistance Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Ranz Marshall in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

The choice of interfacial equilibrium model depends on the process that you are modeling. For details,
see Interfacial Equilibrium Models in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

The Fluid1 and Fluid2 Species Mass Transfer options are used to choose a correlation to
model the mass transfer coefficient on each side on the interface. For details, see Species Mass Transfer
Coefficients in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.5.11.2. Continuous | Particle Pairs

Selecting the toggle enables mass transfer between the two phases.

The options for mass transfer are:

• Ranz Marshall. For details, see Ranz Marshall in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Liquid Evaporation Model. For details, see Liquid Evaporation Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide. For oil evaporation, the Light Oil check box should be selected. For details, see Liquid Evaporation
Model: Oil Evaporation/Combustion in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• None

For details on these options, see:

• Latent Heat in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Particle User Source in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

The drop-down list will contain any User Particle Routines you have created. For details, see Particle
User Routines (p. 335).

Mass transfer between a species in a particle phase and a species in the continuous phase is possible.
For example, consider liquid water from a particle evaporating into gaseous H20 in a continuous phase
mixture. The particle can be a pure substance or variable composition mixture.

13.4.5.12. Particle Breakup

The Particle Breakup models enable you to simulate the breakup of droplets due to external aerody-
namic forces. The droplet breakup models are set on a per fluid-pair basis. By default, the Use Liu Dy-
namic Drag Modification option is activated for the TAB, ETAB and CAB breakup models, whereas the
Use Schmehl Dynamic Drag Law option is activated for the Schmehl breakup model. See Particle
Breakup Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide for details on the available particle breakup models.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
138 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

13.4.5.13. Particle Collision

The particle collision model enables you to simulate dense gas-solid flows with high mass-loading while
the particle volume fraction is still low. Select either Sommerfeld Collision Model or User
Defined and specify values for the particle collision parameters outlined below:

Sommerfeld Collision Model

• Coefficient of Restitution: Enter a numerical quantity or CEL based expression to specify the
value of coefficient of restitution for inter-particle collisions. A value of ‘1.0’ means a fully elastic collision,
while a value of ‘0.0’ would result in an inelastic collision.

• Static Friction Coefficient and Kinetic Friction Coefficient: Enter a numerical

quantity or CEL based expression to specify values of coefficients of friction for inter-particle collisions.

See Implementation Theory in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide for more information on setting up
Coefficient of Restitution, Static Friction Coefficient, and Kinetic
Friction Coefficient.

User Defined
This option is available only if you have created a particle user routine to set up the model. Specify the
name of Particle User Routine and select input arguments and type of particle variables returned to the
user routine from the Arguments and Variable List drop-down list, respectively. See Particle User Routines
in the CFX-Pre User's Guide (p. 335) for information on setting up a particle user routine.

For additional information, see Particle Collision Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide and the following
topics available under Particle Collision Model in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide:

• Introduction to the Particle Collision Model

• Implementation of a Stochastic Particle-Particle Collision Model in ANSYS CFX (includes the discussion on
the implementation theory, particle variables, and virtual collision partner)

• Particle Collision Coefficients Used for Particle-Particle Collision Model

• Range of Applicability of Particle-Particle Collision Model

• Limitations of Particle-Particle Collision Model in ANSYS CFX

13.4.6. Solid Models Tab

The Solid Models tab sets the models that apply to solid domains and to the solid material in a porous
domain. The models chosen can vary between each domain, but if radiation is modeled, then all fluid
domains must also model radiation. For details, see Using Multiple Domains (p. 114).

13.4.6.1. Heat Transfer

The Thermal Energy model and Isothermal model are available for the solid domain. If you do
not want to model heat transfer for the domain, then set Heat Transfer > Option to None.

For details, see Conjugate Heat Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 139
Domains

13.4.6.2. Thermal Radiation Model

You can use only the Monte Carlo option to model radiation in a solid domain. The options available
are the same as for the Monte Carlo model in a fluid domain. For details, see Thermal Radiation
Model (p. 128).

You cannot model radiation in a porous domain.

13.4.6.3. Electromagnetic Model

The Electromagnetic Model enables you to define:

Electric Field Model

Option can be set to None, Electric Potential, or User Defined.

For a User Defined setting, you have to specify the electric field strength for the X, Y, and Z
directions.

Magnetic Field Model

Option can be set to None, Magnetic Vector Potential, or User Defined.

For the Magnetic Vector Potential option, you can specify External Magnetic Field settings
using Cartesian or cylindrical components. Using the User Defined option will enable you to
specify the induced magnetic field model in the X, Y, and Z directions.

If a user-defined model is selected, you must make sure that the electromagnetic properties have been
set in the Material details view. For details, see Material Properties Tab (p. 295). Electromagnetic models
are supported for multiphase simulations only if homogeneous.

For more information on electromagnetic theory, see Electromagnetic Hydrodynamic Theory in the CFX-
Solver Theory Guide.

13.4.6.4. Additional Variables Models

See Additional Variables.

13.4.6.5. Solid Motion

You can model the motion of a solid that moves relative to its reference frame by selecting the Solid
Motion option and specifying a velocity.

You can specify the velocity using one of the following methods:

• Cartesian velocity components

You must specify values for U, V, and W.

• Cylindrical velocity components

You must specify values for Axial Component, Radial Component, and Theta Component. You
must also specify an Axis Definition.

• Rotating

Specify an Angular Velocity and an Axis Definition.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
140 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

The velocity that you specify is interpreted as being relative to the domain motion which is, in turn,
relative to the coordinate frame; both of these are specified on the Basic Settings tab for the domain.

The motion of the solid is simulated by adding an advection term to relevant transport equations in
the solid (for example, Energy and User Variables). For more details, see Conjugate Heat Transfer in the
CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

On interfaces to other domains (fluid-solid or solid-solid interfaces) the solid must move only tangentially
to its surface. On an external boundary, if the solid has a velocity component normal to the surface,
then consider activating the advection term(s) on the boundary condition for that surface, by visiting
the Boundary Details tab and selecting Solid Motion > Boundary Advection. For details on setting
up boundary advection on a wall, see Solid Motion: Wall (p. 168).

Note

• Most solid motion cases will involve setting either non-stationary domain motion (on the Basic
Settings tab) or activating the Solid Motion setting (on the Solid Models tab) but not both.

• If you have a solid with Solid Motion activated that meets a fluid domain at a fluid-solid interface,
then you must explicitly set the wall boundary condition applied to the fluid side of the interface
to have a wall velocity corresponding to the solid motion, as required.

13.4.7. Porosity Settings Tab

The Porosity Settings tab is where the general description of a porous domain is specified for the
simulation.

13.4.7.1. Area Porosity

Area Porosity represents the fraction of physical area that is available for the flow to go through. The
default setting is Isotropic.

13.4.7.2. Volume Porosity

Volume Porosity is the local ratio of the volume of fluid to the total physical volume.

13.4.7.3. Loss Models

The porous loss options are:

• Isotropic Loss

For the isotropic loss model, the loss may be specified using either one of the following methods:

– Permeability And Loss Coefficient

– Linear And Quadratic Resistance Coefficients

• Directional Loss

Specify the streamwise direction via Cartesian or cylindrical components (in the coordinate frame
specified on the Basic Settings tab).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 141
Domains

The loss in the streamwise direction can be specified using one of the following options:

– Permeability And Loss Coefficient

– Linear And Quadratic Resistance Coefficients

– No Loss

The loss in the transverse directions can be specified using one of the following options:

– Streamwise Coefficient Multiplier

– Permeability and Loss Coefficient

– Linear and Quadratic Resistance Coefficients

– No Loss

• None

When specifying the loss coefficients, it is important to set the Loss Velocity Type properly. For details,
see Porous Momentum Loss Models in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

13.4.7.4. Contact Area Model

This setting is available only when the porous domain has a solid phase.

When there is more than one fluid in a porous domain that has a solid phase, specify the contact area
model to indicate how the contact area between a given fluid and the solid is to be calculated.

The options are:

• Use Volume Fraction

This option makes use of the volume fraction of each fluid to calculate the contact area between that
fluid and the solid.

• Fluid Dependent

This option enables the direct specification of the contact area fraction for each fluid. The area fractions
must sum to unity.

13.4.7.5. Fluid Solid Area Density

This setting is available only when the porous domain has a solid phase.

Specify the fluid-solid area density, which is the contact area per unit volume, where the contact area
is the surface area of the solid in contact with the fluid(s).

13.4.7.6. Fluid Solid Heat Transfer

This setting is available only when the porous domain has a solid phase.

Specify the overall heat transfer coefficient for heat transfer between the fluid(s) and the solid. This is
analogous to the heat transfer coefficient between fluids in an inhomogeneous multiphase case, as
described in Inhomogeneous Interphase Heat Transfer Models.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
142 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

13.4.7.7. Additional Variable Pair Details

This setting is available only when the porous domain has a solid phase.

Specify pairs of the same Additional Variable to enable the Additional Variable transfer between the
solid and the fluid(s).

The options are:

• Additional Variable Transfer Coefficient

This option applies a bulk value of the Additional Variable transfer coefficient between the fluid(s)
and the solid.

• Fluid Dependent

This option enables the direct specification of the Additional Variable transfer coefficient for each
fluid.

The Additional Variable transfer coefficient is analogous to the transfer coefficient between fluids in an
inhomogeneous multiphase case. For details, see Additional Variable Interphase Transfer Models in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide and Additional Variables in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

13.4.8. Particle Injection Regions Tab

Injection regions are used to define locators anywhere within a domain, and can be set up as spheres,
cones, or using a custom Fortran subroutine. For details, see Particle Injection Regions in the CFX-Solver
Modeling Guide.

13.4.8.1. Particle Injection Regions List Box

This list box is used to select Particle Injection Regions for editing or deletion. Particle Injection Regions
can be created or deleted with the icons that appear beside the list box.

13.4.8.2. Coordinate Frame

In some cases it may be useful to specify injection quantities using coordinates from a coordinate frame
other than the global default frame (Coord 0). To do this, choose a local coordinate frame from the
drop-down list. You can then set the injection center and the injection direction relative to the selected
coordinate frame. In a typical application, it makes sense to use a coordinate frame that has a principal
axis aligned with the general spray direction.

Note

The coordinate frame of a particle injection region is independent of the coordinate frame
of the domain.

Note

In the case of user defined injection, the particle position and the injection velocity – if re-
turned from the user routine – refer to the global coordinate frame Coord 0 rather than
to the one specified under Coordinate Frame.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 143
Domains

13.4.8.3. Fluid: List Box

This list box is used to select a particle material in order to apply it to the injection region and define
its properties for the injection region.

13.4.8.4. [fluid name] Check Box

This check box determines whether or not the particle is to be injected over the selected injection region.

For multicomponent particles, specify the mass fraction of each. Other quantities are optional and are
the same as found on the Fluid Values tab. For details, see Fluid Values for Inlets and Openings (p. 172).

13.4.8.4.1. Injection Method

The following table outlines various settings available on Particle Injection Regions tab. The settings
are marked as required or optional based on the type of injection method chosen.

Injection Method
Settings for Injection Method Cone Cone with
Primary Sphere
Breakup
Injection Center Required Required Required
a Required
Injection Velocity Magnitude
Radius of Injection Spherea Optional

Number of Positionsa Required Required Required

Particle Diameter Distribution Optional Optional
Particle Mass Flow Rate Optional Required Optional
Cone Definition
Required
For details, see Settings for Cone
Definition (p. 145).
Injection Direction Required
Injection Velocity
Required
For details, see Settings for Injection
Velocity (p. 145).
Particle Primary Breakup
Required
For details, see Settings for Particle
Primary Breakup (p. 146).
b Required
Nozzle Definition
a
Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression for the indicated parameter.
b
Nozzle Definition: Select either Ring Nozzle or Full Nozzle and specify the values to define the nozzle.

For details, see the following topics in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide:

• Particle Injection Regions (includes description of various types of cone locators)

• Number of Positions

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
144 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

• Particle Diameter Distribution

• Particle Mass Flow Rate

13.4.8.4.1.1. Settings for Cone Definition

Settings Point Hollow Ring Full

Cone Cone Cone Cone
a Required
Cone Angle
Dispersion Anglea Optional Optional

Radius of Injection Planea Required Required

Inner Radius Of Planea Required

Outer Radius Of Planea Required

a
Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression for the indicated parameter.

For details, see Cone in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.8.4.1.2. Settings for Injection Velocity

The Injection Velocity options are:

• Velocity Magnitude

Specify the component of velocity normal to the 2D injection region. Note that the normal direction
is specified by the Injection Direction settings.

Specify the cone angle, measured as the angle between the axis of the cone (which, for the Velocity
Magnitude option, is normal to the 2D injection region) and one side of the cone.

• Cartesian Components

Specify the particle velocity components in Cartesian coordinates. These coordinates are in the co-
ordinate frame specified for the particle injection region. The velocity components can be expressions.

• Cylindrical Components

Specify the particle velocity components in cylindrical coordinates. These coordinates are in the co-
ordinate frame specified for the particle injection region. The velocity components can be expressions.

You can put swirl into the flow of injected particles by specifying a non-zero theta (circumferential)
component of velocity.

• Zero Slip Velocity

Particles are injected at the local velocity of the continuous phase.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 145
Domains

13.4.8.4.1.3. Settings for Particle Primary Breakup

Settings Blob Enhanced Lisa Turbulence

Method Blob Model Induced
Method Atomization
a b Required Required Required
Cone Angle
Coefficient of
Required
Contractiona
Injection Total Pressurea Required
Injection Pressure
Required Required
Differencea
Pressure Probe Normal
Required
Distancea
Density Probe Normal
Required Required
Distance
Length/Diameter Ratio Required
Particle Material Vapor
Required
Pressure
Critical Weber Number Optional
Short Wave Ligament
Optional
Factor
Long Wave Ligament
Optional
Factor
Droplet Diameter Size
Optional
Factor
Swirl Definition Optional
Form Loss Coefficient Optional
C1 Constant Optional
C2 Constant Optional
C3 Constant Optional
C4 Constant Optional
CA1 Constant Optional
K1 Constant Optional
Average Turbulent
Energy Dissipation Optional
Factor
Turbulent Length Scale
Optional
Power Factor
Nozzle Discharge
Required
Coefficient
a
Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression for the indicated parameter.
b
Cone Angle: Specify a fixed cone angle or select Reitz and Bracco option to set a correlation to compute the injection angle
based on the nozzle geometry.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
146 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

For details, see Cone with Primary Breakup in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

13.4.9. Initialization Tab

Initialization can be set on a domain or global basis; the available options are the same. For details, see
Initialization (p. 179).

The Initialization tab for the domain sets domain initial conditions. These will override any settings
made in the Global Initialization details view. Any domain for which initialization is not set will use
the global initial conditions.

13.4.10. Solver Control Tab

For immersed solid domains, the Solver Control tab contains the Immersed Solid Control settings.
For details, see Immersed Solid Control (p. 215).

For transient (and transient blade row) cases involving CHT (Conjugate Heat Transfer), the Solver Control
tab contains the Timescale Control settings. For details, see Timescale Control for Solid Domains
(Transient Cases; Transient Blade Row Cases with Harmonic Balance) (p. 147).

13.4.10.1.Timescale Control for Solid Domains (Transient Cases; Transient Blade Row
Cases with Harmonic Balance)
Due to a large disparity in time scales between fluid convection and solid diffusion, the transient
modeling of a CHT (Conjugate Heat Transfer) problem is impractical, without special numerical treatment,
because it can take many time steps for the temperature distribution in the solid to reach a steady
state. For example, in a hot streak migration simulation, thousands of blade passing periods may have
to be computed before the solution in the solid converges and reaches a steady-state temperature.

A good engineering approximation is to advance the simulation in time while altering the thermal re-
sponse of the solid to effectively accelerate the solid thermal diffusion convergence. The thermal response
in the solid can be altered by Timescale Control settings. Using the Domain Solver Control >
Timescale Control settings, you can specify a value for Timescale Factor.

You must enter the solid Timescale Factor, which is defined as:

where is the simulation time-step size necessary to resolve flow features of interest.

The solid time scale can be determined by the following formula:

where is the characteristic length of the solid (in the case of a turbine blade, can be the
blade chord) and is the solid material thermal diffusivity. You can alter the rate of the solid response
by a slight modification of the Timescale Factor.

This modeling approximation increases the thermal response of the solid to the temperature variation
in the fluid. As a result, the temperature at any given point in the solid will, during convergence, fluctuate
slightly about an average value. It should be noted that the fluctuations in solid temperature are non-

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 147
Domains

physical. The time-averaged temperature (after convergence) is very close to the real physical temper-
ature.

Note

For steady-state cases, and for transient blade row cases that use the Harmonic Balance
transient method, you can control the solid timescale (affecting all solid domains in a given
flow analysis) using the Solid Timescale Control settings in the Solver Control details view.
For details, see Convergence Control: Solid Timescale Control (p. 214).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
148 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 14: Domain Interfaces
Domain interfaces have multiple purposes:

• Connecting domains or assemblies

Domain interfaces are required to connect multiple unmatched meshes within a domain (for example,
when there is a hexahedral mesh volume and a tetrahedral mesh volume within a single domain)
and to connect separate domains.

• Modeling changes in reference frame between domains

This occurs when you have a stationary and a rotating domain or domains rotating at different rates.

• Creating periodic interfaces between regions

This occurs when you are reducing the size of the computational domain by assuming periodicity in
the simulation.

• Creating thin surfaces

Thin surfaces enable you to model physics such as heat transfer across a thin material or gap without
needing to explicitly mesh the surface. For example, thin surfaces can be used to model contact
resistance at a solid-solid interface, a thin film on a fluid-solid interface, or a thin baffle at a fluid-fluid
interface.

Interface boundaries are created automatically for each domain interface. For details, see Interface
Boundary Conditions (p. 177).

Additional information about domain interfaces is provided in Overview of Domain Interfaces in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

14.1. Creating and Editing a Domain Interface

To create a domain interface:

1. Select Insert > Domain Interface from the main menu or by clicking Domain Interface on the main
toolbar.

2. Enter a new name, if required, using the rules described in Valid Syntax for Named Objects (p. 55) and
click Apply.

To edit an existing domain interface:

1. Right-click the domain interface's name in the Outline view.

2. Select Edit. The details view for the domain interface appears.

For more information on the edit command, see Outline Tree View (p. 5).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 149
Domain Interfaces

The details view describes the characteristics of a domain interface on a series of tabs:

• Domain Interface: Basic Settings Tab (p. 150)

• Domain Interface: Additional Interface Models Tab (p. 152).

14.1.1. Domain Interface: Basic Settings Tab

The Basic Settings tab is where you define the domain interface. It is accessible by clicking Domain In-

terface , or by selecting Insert > Domain Interface.

14.1.1.1. Interface Type

• Fluid Fluid

Connects two fluid domains or makes a periodic connection between two regions in a fluid domain.

• Fluid Porous

Connects a fluid domain to a porous domain.

• Fluid Solid

Connects a fluid domain to a solid domain.

• Porous Porous

Connects two porous domains or makes a periodic connection between two regions in a porous
domain.

• Solid Porous

Connects a solid domain to a porous domain.

• Solid Solid

Connects two solid domains or makes a periodic connection between two regions in a solid domain.

The interface type you select controls the domains that are available for Interface Side 1/2.

14.1.1.2. Interface Side 1/2

14.1.1.2.1. Domain (Filter)
The domain filter is used to filter out 2D regions that are of no interest. The drop-down list contains
commonly used regions (all composite names and primitive names that are not referenced by any

composites) and the extended list (displayed by clicking the Ellipsis icon) contains all regions in a
domain.

14.1.1.2.2. Region List

Region List 1 and Region List 2 enable the selection of regions that form each side of the interface.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
150 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Editing a Domain Interface

14.1.1.3. Interface Models

The interface model options (Translational Periodicity, Rotational Periodicity, and General Connection)
each require that you specify a mesh connection method as well as specialized settings for some
model options.

14.1.1.3.1. Interface Model Option: Translational Periodicity

In the case of Translational Periodicity, the two sides of the interface must be parallel to each other
such that a single translation transformation can be used to map Region List 1 to Region List 2. The
Translational Periodicity model requires no specialized settings.

For details on the Translational Periodicity model, see Translational Periodicity in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

14.1.1.3.2. Interface Model Option: Rotational Periodicity

In the case of Rotational Periodicity, the two sides of the periodic interface can be mapped by a single
rotational transformation about an axis. This is the most common case of periodicity and is used, for
example, in the analysis of a single blade passage in a rotating machine.

If a domain interface involves rotational periodicity, the axis for the rotational transformation must also
be specified in the Axis Definition area.

14.1.1.3.3. Interface Model Option: General Connection

In the case of a General Connection, more options apply. The settings are described below; for inform-
ation about the General Connection model, see General Connection in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

14.1.1.3.3.1. Frame Change/Mixing Model

14.1.1.3.3.1.1. Option

• None

• Frozen Rotor

• Stage (Mixing-Plane)

• Transient Rotor-Stator

For details, see Frame Change/Mixing Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

14.1.1.3.3.1.2. Frozen Rotor: Rotational Offset Check Box

This check box determines whether or not to apply a rotational offset for one side of the interface. For
details, see Rotational Offset in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

When set, enter a Rotational Offset for one side of the interface.

14.1.1.3.3.1.3. Stage: Pressure Profile Decay Check Box

This option affects solution stability. For details, see Pressure Profile Decay in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 151
Domain Interfaces

When set, enter a Pressure Profile Decay numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the rate
of decay of the pressure profile.

14.1.1.3.3.1.4. Stage: Downstream Velocity Constraint

For details, see Downstream Velocity Constraint in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

14.1.1.3.3.2. Pitch Change Options

The Pitch Change options are:

• None

A pitch change option of None cannot be used for a stage interface.

• Automatic

(applies only when Interface Models: Frame Change/Mixing Model: Option is not set to None)

• Value

(applies only when Interface Models: Frame Change/Mixing Model: Option is not set to None)

• Specified Pitch Angles

(applies only when Interface Models: Frame Change/Mixing Model: Option is not set to None)

For details, see Pitch Change in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

14.1.1.3.3.2.1. Pitch Change: Value: Pitch Ratio

Enter the pitch ratio. For details, see Value in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

14.1.1.3.3.2.2. Pitch Change: Specified Pitch Angles: Pitch Angle Side 1/2

Enter pitch angle for each side of the interface. For details, see Specified Pitch Angles in the CFX-Solver
Modeling Guide.

14.1.2. Domain Interface: Additional Interface Models Tab

The Additional Interface Models tab contains settings as described in the following sections:
14.1.2.1. Mass And Momentum
14.1.2.2. Heat Transfer
14.1.2.3. Electric Field
14.1.2.4. Additional Variable
14.1.2.5. Conditional Connection Control

14.1.2.1. Mass And Momentum

Allows the specification of additional models at the interface.

The Mass And Momentum options are described in the following sections:
14.1.2.1.1. Conservative Interface Flux
14.1.2.1.2. No Slip Wall
14.1.2.1.3. Free Slip Wall

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
152 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Editing a Domain Interface

14.1.2.1.4. Side Dependent

14.1.2.1.1. Conservative Interface Flux

The Conservative Interface Flux Mass And Momentum option enables you to define the
physics across a thin surface.

The Interface Model options are:

• None

The default behavior (conservative interface flux) is applied to the interface. No additional models
are applied.

• Pressure Change

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the pressure change across the interface
from side 1 to side 2. If there is a pressure drop, the specified value should be negative.

• Mass Flow Rate

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the value of the mass flow rate from side
1 to side 2 of the interface.

Note

When imposing a mass flow rate at a domain interface, the CFX-Solver updates the pressure
change to drive the mass flow rate toward the specified value. The update is based on an
internally-estimated coefficient, which may not be optimal.

The Pressure Update Multiplier enables you to tune convergence behavior. Enter a nu-
merical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the pressure update multiplier. The default
value is 0.25. If convergence is slow (as may occur for low Reynolds number flows), consider
increasing the value. If convergence is unstable, consider decreasing the value. Note that
values above 1 are permissible.

14.1.2.1.2. No Slip Wall

For a description of the options that influence flow on a wall boundary, see Mass and Momentum in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

14.1.2.1.2.1. No Slip Wall: Wall Velocity

When set, this option enables you to specify the wall velocity. Various options are available for specifying
the wall velocity.

14.1.2.1.3. Free Slip Wall

Free Slip Wall has no sub-options.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 153
Domain Interfaces

14.1.2.1.4. Side Dependent

Selecting this option allows a different boundary condition to be applied on each side of the interface.
Each boundary condition is specified on the related interface boundary (which appears in the Outline
tree view under the associated domain).

14.1.2.2. Heat Transfer

Allows the specification of additional models at the interface.

The Heat Transfer options are described in the following sections:

14.1.2.2.1. Conservative Interface Flux
14.1.2.2.2. Side Dependent

14.1.2.2.1. Conservative Interface Flux

This option enables you to define the Thermal Contact Resistance or Thin Material, which are two
ways of defining the same characteristics. That is, if you do not know the contact resistance, you can
define the thin material and its thickness and have the solver derive the resistance.

The Interface Model options are:

• None

The default behavior (conservative interface flux) is applied to the interface. No additional models
are applied.

• Thermal Contact Resistance

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the value of the thermal contact resistance
between side 1 and side 2 of the interface.

• Thin Material

Select a material and enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the value of the
thickness of the material spanning from side 1 to side 2 of the interface.

14.1.2.2.2. Side Dependent

Selecting this option allows a different boundary condition to be applied on each side of the interface.
Each boundary condition is specified on the related interface boundary (which appears in the Outline
tree view under the associated domain).

14.1.2.3. Electric Field

Allows the specification of additional models at the interface.

The Electric Field options are:

14.1.2.3.1. Conservative Interface Flux
14.1.2.3.2. Side Dependent

14.1.2.3.1. Conservative Interface Flux

The Interface Model options are:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
154 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Editing a Domain Interface

• None

The default behavior (conservative interface flux) is applied to the interface. No additional models
are applied.

• Electrical Contact Resistance

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the value of the electrical contact resistance
between side 1 and side 2 of the interface.

14.1.2.3.2. Side Dependent

Selecting this option allows a different boundary condition to be applied on each side of the interface.
Each boundary condition is specified on the related interface boundary (which appears in the Outline
tree view under the associated domain).

14.1.2.4. Additional Variable

Allows the specification of additional models at the interface.

The Additional Variable options are described in the following sections:

14.1.2.4.1. Conservative Interface Flux
14.1.2.4.2. Side Dependent

14.1.2.4.1. Conservative Interface Flux

The Interface Model options are:

• None

The default behavior (conservative interface flux) is applied to the interface. No additional models
are applied.

• Additional Variable Contact Resistance

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the value of the Additional Variable contact
resistance between side 1 and side 2 of the interface.

14.1.2.4.2. Side Dependent

Selecting this option allows a different boundary condition to be applied on each side of the interface.
Each boundary condition is specified on the related interface boundary (which appears in the Outline
tree view under the associated domain).

14.1.2.5. Conditional Connection Control

Conditional Connection Control is an optional group of settings. These settings enable a CEL expression
to control whether an interface is open (connected) or closed (not connected; a wall boundary is applied).

When Conditional Connection Control is selected, you have the following options:

• Specified Open State

Provide a CEL expression. The connection is open when the expression evaluates to true and
closed when the expression evaluates to false.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 155
Domain Interfaces

• Irreversible State Change

Provide a CEL expression and an initial state (Open or Closed).

The state switches once the expression evaluates to true but then remains in that opposite state
(that is, opposite to the initial condition) regardless of what happens to the expression after that
point.

For details on conditional connection control, see Conditional Connections in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

14.1.3. Domain Interface: Solid Interface Models Tab

This tab is available when at least one side of the interface is on a porous domain that contains a solid.

The Solid Interface Models tab contains the following settings:

• Heat Transfer

These settings are basically the same as the corresponding settings described in Heat Transfer (p. 154).

Note that:

– Any additional heat transfer models are applied to the solid(s) in the porous domain(s).

– The Conservative Interface Flux option is available only if there are solids on both sides of the
domain interface.

• Additional Variable

These settings are basically the same as the corresponding settings described in Additional Vari-
able (p. 155).

14.1.4. Domain Interface: Mesh Connection Tab

The Mesh Connection tab contains the Mesh Connection Method (p. 156) settings.

14.1.4.1. Mesh Connection Method

You must specify a mesh connection method for all interface models.

14.1.4.1.1. Mesh Connection: Option

The following options may be available, depending on other settings:

• Automatic

• 1:1 Direct (One-to-One)

• GGI (General Grid Interface)

For details on these options, see Mesh Connection Options in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
156 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Editing a Domain Interface

14.1.4.1.2. Intersection Control

You can use the options described in this section to control the intersection of non-matching meshes
for a particular interface.

Note

You can also use Solver Controls to apply default controls for the intersection of all interfaces
(settings that are overwritten by Intersection Control settings that you apply individually to
domain interfaces using the settings below). See Intersection Control (p. 223) to learn how
to apply default Intersection Control settings to all interfaces.

Note

• If Direct (one-to-one) mesh connectivity is available, the solver will ignore the Intersection
Control option and will instead use a 'topological intersection', that is, use the one-to-one inform-
ation to generate the intersection data.

• If you are restarting a run, the intersection step is skipped and the intersection data is read from
the results file. This behavior can be overridden by setting the expert parameter force inter
section to True.

14.1.4.1.2.1. Intersection Control: Option

The Intersection Control options for when the Mesh Connection Option is set to GGI or Automatic
are as described below. The following options can be used to control the intersection of non-matching
meshes. CFX provides the GGI (General Grid Interface) capability which determines the connectivity
between the meshes on either side of the interface using an intersection algorithm. In general, two in-
tersection methods are provided:

• Bitmap Intersection:

Two faces on either side of the interface which have to be intersected are both drawn into an
equidistant 2D pixel map. The area fractions are determined by counting the number of pixels that
reside inside both intersected faces (that is, within the union of the two faces). The area fraction for
a face is then calculated by dividing the number of overlapping pixels by the total number of pixels
in the face. This method is very robust.

• Direct Intersection (Default):

Two faces on either side of the interface are intersected using the Sutherland-Hodgeman clipping
algorithm. This method computes the exact area fractions using polygon intersection, and is much
faster and more accurate than the bitmap method.

The Bitmap Resolution controls the number of pixels used to fill the 2D pixel map (see description of
the bitmap intersection method above). The higher this number, the more accurate the final calculation
of the area fractions. In general, the default resolution of 100 should be sufficient but large differences
in the mesh resolution on both sides of the interface as well as other mesh anomalies may require the
bitmap resolution to be increased. Larger numbers will cause longer intersection times, for example,
doubling the bitmap resolution will approximately quadruple the GGI intersection time.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 157
Domain Interfaces

The Angle tolerance option (in degrees) is used for Direct intersections only. In order for two faces
to be able to intersect, the angular difference between their normals must be within the specified tol-
erance of 180 degrees.

Both Intersection Control options enable you to set the following:

Permit No Intersection
When the Permit No Intersection option is set, the solver will run when there is no overlap between the
two sides of an interface. This parameter is mainly useful for transient cases where interface geometry is
closing and opening during the run. For example, transient rotor-stator cases with rotating valves, or
moving mesh cases where the GGI interface changes from overlap to non-overlap during the simulation
both can exhibit this type of behavior. This parameter is not switched on by default.

Discernible Fraction
Controls the minimum area fraction below which partially intersected faces are discarded. The following
default values used by the solver depend on the intersection method:

• Bitmap Intersection: 1/(Bitmap Resolution)^1.5

• Direct Intersection: 1.0E-06

Edge Scale Factor

Controls the value of the GGI edge scale factor. Control volume sector faces on GGI interfaces are detected
as degenerate if two opposite edges are smaller than the GGI edge scale factor times the cube root of the
corresponding sector volume. Those faces are not intersected.

Periodic Axial Radial Tolerance

Used when determining if the surface represented by the interface is a constant axial or radial surface. For
a rotational periodic GGI interface, the solver ensures that the ratio of the radial and axial extent compared
to the overall extent of each interface side is bigger than the specified value and therefore, the interface
vertices do not have the same radial or axial positions.

Circumferential Normalized Coordinates Option

The Circumferential Normalized Coordinates Option is used to set the type of normalization applied
to the axial or radial position coordinates (η). Mesh coordinate positions on GGI interfaces using pitch
change are transformed into a circumferential (θ) and axial or radial position (η). The η coordinates span
from hub to shroud and are normalized to values between 0 and 1. In cases where the hub and/or shroud
curves do not match on side 1 and side 2, different approaches are available to calculate the normalized
η coordinates based on side local or global minimum and maximum η values:

• Mixed (Default for Fluid Fluid interfaces): Normalization of η is based on local minimum and maximum
η values as well as the η range of side 1. This method forces the hub curves on side 1 and 2 to align.
Non-overlap regions adjacent to the shroud may be produced if the shroud curves are not the same.

• Global (Default for Fluid Solid Interfaces): Normalization of η is based on global minimum and maximum
eta values. This method intersects side 1 and 2 unchanged from their relative positions in physical co-
ordinates. If the hub and shroud curves do not match then non-overlap regions will be produced.

• Local: Normalization of η is done locally for each side of the interface. This method will always produce
an intersection of side 1 and 2, but may cause undesirable scaling of the geometry in some cases.

Face Search Tolerance Factor

A scaling factor applied to the element sized based separation distance, which is used to find candidates
for intersection. For a given face on side 1 of the interface, candidate faces for intersection are identified

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
158 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Editing a Domain Interface

on side 2 using an octree search algorithm. The octree search uses this tolerance to increase the sizes of
the bounding boxes used to identify candidates. Making this parameter larger will increase the size of the
bounding boxes, resulting in possible identification of more candidates.

Face Intersection Depth Factor

A scaling factor applied to the element sized based separation distance used when performing the direct
or bitmap intersection. The final intersection of faces is only applied to those faces that are closer to each
other than a specified distance. This distance is calculated as the sum of the average depth of the elements
on side 1 and side 2 of the interface. This factor is applied as a scaling on the default distance. It might be
necessary to adjust this factor if the normal element depth on the two interfaces sides varies a lot, or side
1 and 2 of the interface are separated by thin regions (for example, thin fin type geometries).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 159
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
160 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 15: Boundary Conditions
Boundary conditions must be applied to all the bounding regions of your domains. Boundary conditions
can be inlets, outlets, openings, walls, and symmetry planes.

Unspecified external regions are automatically assigned a no-slip, adiabatic wall boundary condition.
Such regions assume the name <Domain> Default, where <Domain> corresponds to the name of
the domain. Unspecified internal boundaries are ignored.

You can apply boundary conditions to any bounding surface of a 3D primitive that is included in a domain
(including internal surfaces). If you choose to specify a boundary condition on an internal surface (for
example, to create a thin surface), then boundary conditions must be applied to both sides of the surface.

This chapter describes:

15.1. Default Boundary Condition
15.2. Creating and Editing a Boundary Condition
15.3. Interface Boundary Conditions
15.4. Symmetry Boundary Conditions
15.5. Working with Boundary Conditions

Additional information on boundary conditions is available in:

• The Purpose of Boundary Conditions in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Available Boundary Conditions in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Using Boundary Conditions in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

15.1. Default Boundary Condition

You should be familiar with the concept of primitive and composite regions before reading this section.
If you are not, see Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre (p. 99) for details.

When a domain is created, all of the bounding 2D regions that are not used elsewhere are assigned to
a default boundary condition that is created automatically. These regions can be considered to be the
boundary between the current domain and the rest of the "world". The boundary that is generated is
given the name <Domain name> Default. When 2D primitives (or composites that reference them)
are assigned to other boundary conditions and domain interfaces, they are removed from the <Domain
name> Default boundary condition. The default boundary condition is a no-slip adiabatic wall, but
this can be edited like any other boundary condition. Solid-world 2D primitives behave in a similar way.

Removing Regions from the Default Domain

Fluid-solid regions are initially contained in the <Domain Name> Default boundary condition.
When a CFX-Solver input file is written, or a user-defined domain interface is created, any fluid-solid
regions referenced by this interface are removed from the default boundary.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 161
Boundary Conditions

If every region is assigned to another boundary condition, the <Domain Name> Default boundary
object will cease to exist. In such a case, if a boundary condition is subsequently deleted, the <Domain
name> Default wall boundary will be recreated for the unspecified region. Because the <Domain
name> Default wall boundary condition is controlled automatically, you should never need to explicitly
edit its Location list.

Internal 2D Regions
Any 2D regions that lie within a domain are ignored unless a boundary condition is explicitly assigned
(these are treated as thin surfaces). Each side of a fluid-fluid 2D primitive can have a different boundary
condition, but most often both sides will be a wall. Thin surfaces are created by assigning a wall
boundary condition to each side of a fluid-fluid 2D region. You can specify physics (such as thermal
conduction) across thin surfaces in CFX-Pre by defining a domain interface. For details, see Defining
Domain Interfaces as Thin Surfaces in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2. Creating and Editing a Boundary Condition

To create a new boundary:

1. Select Insert > Boundary from the main menu or by clicking Boundary on the main toolbar.

2. Enter a new name, if required, using the rules described in Valid Syntax for Named Objects (p. 55) and
click Apply.

To edit an existing boundary:

1. Right-click the boundary's name in the Outline view.

2. Select Edit. The details view for the boundary appears.

For more information on the edit command, see Outline Tree View (p. 5).

The details view describes the characteristics of a boundary condition on a series of tabs:

• Boundary Basic Settings Tab (p. 162)

• Boundary Details Tab (p. 164)

• Boundary Fluid Values Tab (p. 170)

• Boundary Sources Tab (p. 176)

• Boundary Plot Options Tab (p. 176)

15.2.1. Boundary Basic Settings Tab

This tab sets the type, location, coordinate frame, and frame type (stationary or rotating) for each
boundary condition as detailed in the following sections:

• Boundary Type (p. 163)

• Location (p. 163)

• Coordinate Frame (p. 163)

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
162 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Editing a Boundary Condition

• Frame Type (p. 163)

• Profile Boundary Conditions (p. 164)

15.2.1.1. Boundary Type

Inlet, outlet, opening, wall, and symmetry boundary conditions can be selected. Interface boundaries can
be edited, but not created. For details, see Available Boundary Conditions in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

15.2.1.2. Location
You can choose the location of a boundary condition from a list containing all 2D composite and
primitive regions. For details, refer to the following sections:

• Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre (p. 99)

• Boundary Condition and Domain Interface Locations (p. 101)

The drop-down list contains commonly used regions (all composite names and primitive names that
are not referenced by any composites) and the extended list (displayed when clicking the Ellipsis icon

) contains all regions in a domain.

Tip

• Hold the Ctrl key as you click to select multiple regions.

• With the Location drop-down list active, you can select regions by clicking them in the viewer
with the mouse. This will display a small box containing the names of the regions that are available
for selection.

15.2.1.3. Coordinate Frame

Coordinate frames are used to determine the principal reference directions of specified and solved
vector quantities in your domain, and to specify reference directions when creating boundary conditions
or setting initial values. By default, CFX-Pre uses Coord 0 as the reference coordinate frame for all
specifications in the model, but this can be changed to any valid CFX-Pre coordinate frame. For details,
see Coordinate Frames (p. 283) and Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.1.4. Frame Type

When the boundary condition is in a rotating domain, the Frame Type setting affects whether the
conditions you specify on the boundary (pressure, velocity, and so on) are interpreted relative to the
(rotating) domain (Frame Type set to Rotating) or relative to the absolute (stationary) frame of ref-
erence (Frame Type set to Stationary), from the point of view of absolute versus relative quantities.

For cases where there is relative motion between the coordinate frame and the boundaries, the
boundary conditions are evaluated at the appropriate coordinate frame, either absolute or relative. The
mesh coordinates are either rotated or counter-rotated at the boundary to match the coordinate frame.
However, this is not true for the global coordinate frame (Coord 0).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 163
Boundary Conditions

For details, refer to the following sections:

• Cartesian Velocity Components in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Cylindrical Velocity Components

15.2.1.5. Profile Boundary Conditions

This option is available only if profile data is loaded. For instructions on loading a profile, see Initialize
Profile Data (p. 62).

15.2.1.5.1. Use Profile Data

Select Use Profile Data to define this boundary condition using the external data file previously initial-
ized. Choose from the Profile Name list and click Generate Values to apply. CFX-Pre will automatically
select options and values to best match the variables contained in the selected profile. Check the settings
on the other tabs to ensure that the correct CEL expressions have been set. For details on how to adjust
these, see Interpolation (From File) User Functions (p. 327).

Note

If the points supplied in the profile data file do not geometrically overlap with the intended
boundary mesh then there may be inaccuracies in the interpolation of profile data to the
mesh.

15.2.2. Boundary Details Tab

Boundary value settings depend on characteristics of the flow. For instance, temperature is required at
a boundary only if heat transfer is being modeled.

If you are changing the characteristics of the flow, ensure that boundary conditions are correctly updated.
In most cases, CFX-Pre alerts you of the need to update settings in the form of physics validation errors.
For details, see Physics Message Window (p. 12).

Example:

Suppose a domain is created, isothermal flow is specified, and an inlet boundary condition set. If flow
characteristics are then altered to include heat transfer, the inlet specification must be changed to include
the temperature of the fluid at that location.

More information on some of the settings is available:

• Mass and Momentum in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Flow Direction in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Turbulence in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Heat Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Mesh Deformation in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

Various settings are available on the Boundary Details tab, depending on the type of boundary condition:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
164 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Editing a Boundary Condition

• Boundary Details: Inlet (p. 165)

• Boundary Details: Outlet (p. 165)

• Boundary Details: Opening (p. 166)

• Boundary Details: Wall (p. 167)

• Boundary Details: Symmetry (p. 168)

• Boundary Details: Interfaces (p. 169)

15.2.2.1. Boundary Details: Inlet

15.2.2.1.1. Flow Regime: Inlet
Option can be set to one of Subsonic, Supersonic, or Mixed. For details, refer to the following
sections:

• Inlet (Subsonic) in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Inlet (Supersonic) in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Inlet (Mixed Subsonic-Supersonic) in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

15.2.2.1.2. Mesh Motion: Inlet

The option for Mesh Motion is set to Stationary by default. For details, see Mesh Deformation in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.2. Boundary Details: Outlet

15.2.2.2.1. Flow Regime: Outlet
First, specify the flow regime option. For details, refer to the following sections:

• Outlet (Subsonic) in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide

• Outlet (Supersonic) in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide

15.2.2.2.2. Mass and Momentum: Outlet

For details, see Mass and Momentum in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.2.3. Pressure Averaging: Outlet

This option appears when Average Static Pressure is selected under Mass and Momentum.
For details, see Average Static Pressure in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.2.4. Thermal Radiation: Outlet

For details, see Thermal Radiation in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 165
Boundary Conditions

15.2.2.2.5. Mesh Motion: Outlet

The option for Mesh Motion is set to Stationary by default. For details, see Mesh Deformation in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.3. Boundary Details: Opening

15.2.2.3.1. Mass and Momentum: Opening
For details, see Mass and Momentum in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.3.2. Flow Direction: Opening

This option appears when a flow direction is required; that is, when one of Opening Pres. and
Dirn. or Static Pres. and Dirn. is selected under Mass and Momentum. For details, see
Flow Direction in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.3.3. Loss Coefficient: Opening

For details, see Loss Coefficient in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

15.2.2.3.4. Turbulence: Opening

For details, see Turbulence in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.3.5. Heat Transfer: Opening

For details, see Heat Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.3.6. Thermal Radiation: Opening

This is the same as specifying thermal radiation at an inlet. For details, see Thermal Radiation in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.3.7. Component Details: Opening

The Component Details section appears when a variable composition/reacting mixture has been created
for a single phase simulation, or a simulation with one continuous phase and particle tracking.

The mass fractions must sum to unity on all boundaries. With this in mind, highlight the materials you
want to modify and enter the mass fraction. To enter an expression for the mass fraction, click Enter

Expression and enter the name of your expression.

15.2.2.3.8. Mesh Motion: Opening

The option for Mesh Motion is set to Stationary by default. For details, see Mesh Deformation in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
166 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Editing a Boundary Condition

15.2.2.4. Boundary Details: Wall

15.2.2.4.1. Mass And Momentum: Wall
Option can be set to one of No Slip Wall, Free Slip Wall, Finite Slip Wall, Specified
Shear, Counter-rotating Wall, Rotating Wall or Fluid Dependent. For details, see Mass
and Momentum in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.4.1.1. Slip Model Settings

The Slip Model settings apply for finite slip walls.

The only available option is Power Law. You must provide the nominal slip speed (Us ), the critical
stress ( ), the slip power (m), the pressure coefficient (B), and the normalizing stress ( ).

For details about the finite slip wall model, see Finite Slip Wall in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.4.1.2. Shear Stress Settings

The Shear Stress settings apply for walls with specified shear.

You specify the shear stress value directly, using a vector that points tangentially to the wall. The normal
component of the vector that you specify is ignored.

15.2.2.4.1.3. Wall Velocity Settings

The Wall Velocity settings apply for no slip walls, and walls with finite slip.

The Wall Velocity Relative To option can be used to set the wall velocity relative to either the
Boundary Frame or Mesh Motion occurring on the boundary. You can select only the Boundary
Frame option if the wall mesh motion is set to either Unspecified, Parallel to Boundary or
Surface of Revolution. For details about no slip wall velocity, see No Slip Wall in the CFX-Solver
Modeling Guide.

If Wall Velocity > Option is set to Cartesian Components, you must specify the velocity in the X,
Y, and Z axis directions. Similarly, if you choose Cylindrical Components then values are required
for Axial Component, Radial Component, and Theta Component.

You can specify a counter rotating wall. For details, see Counter-rotating Wall in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

Specifying a Rotating Wall requires an angular velocity and, if the domain is stationary, an axis
definition. For details, see Rotating Wall in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.4.1.3.1. Axis Definition

If you select Coordinate Axis, a Rotation Axis is required. The Two Points method requires a
pair of coordinate values specified as Rotation Axis From and Rotation Axis To.

15.2.2.4.2. Wall Roughness

For details, see Wall Roughness in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 167
Boundary Conditions

15.2.2.4.3. Solid Motion: Wall

If the boundary is for a domain that involves solid motion, then the Solid Motion > Boundary Advection
option may be available. If the velocity for the solid motion (specified in the Boundary Details tab for
the domain) is directed into the domain everywhere on a boundary, and if you specify a fixed temper-
ature or a fixed value of an Additional Variable on that boundary, then you should consider turning on
the Boundary Advection option.

If you have specified a fixed temperature, then turning on the Boundary Advection option causes the
advection of thermal energy into the solid domain at a rate that is consistent with the velocity normal
to the boundary, the specified fixed temperature, and the material properties.

If you have specified a fixed value for an Additional Variable, then turning on the Boundary Advection
option causes the advection of that Additional Variable into the solid domain at a rate that is in accord-
ance with the velocity normal to the boundary, the specified fixed value of the Additional Variable, and,
for mass-specific Additional Variables, the density of the solid material.

For a boundary where the solid is moving out of the domain, consider turning on the Boundary Advec-
tion option in order to allow thermal energy and Additional Variables to be advected out.

For details on setting up the solid motion model for a domain, see Solid Motion (p. 140). For details on
Additional Variables, see Additional Variables (p. 309).

15.2.2.4.4. Heat Transfer: Wall

For details, see Heat Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.4.5. Fluid Pairs: Wall

For details on the wall boiling model, see Wall Boiling Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.4.6. Wall Contact Model

For details, see Wall Contact Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.4.7. Thermal Radiation: Wall

For details, see Thermal Radiation in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.4.8. Mesh Motion: Wall

The option for Mesh Motion is set to Stationary by default. For details, see Mesh Motion in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.2.5. Boundary Details: Symmetry

Only Mesh Motion can be set in this tab for Symmetry boundary conditions. The option for Mesh
Motion is set to Unspecified by default. For details, see Mesh Deformation in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
168 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Editing a Boundary Condition

15.2.2.6. Boundary Details: Interfaces

The options for Mass and Momentum, Turbulence, Heat transfer, Mesh Motion, and Additional
Variables are set to Conservative Interface Flux by default.

Important

Conservative Interface Flux implies that the quantity in question will “flow”
between the current boundary and the boundary on the other side of the interface. This
means that Conservative Interface Flux must also be used on the boundary on
the other side of the interface. Accordingly, the CFX-Solver will not be able to handle cases
where Conservative Interface Flux is set on just one side of the interface, or where
the quantity being transferred does not exist on the other side. CFX-Pre will issue a warning
if either of these cases exist.

For details on Nonoverlap Conditions, refer to Non-overlap Boundary Conditions.

15.2.2.7. Mesh Motion

When mesh deformation is selected for the domain that contains a boundary condition, mesh motion
can be specified for the boundary on the Boundary Details tab.

The available options are:

• Conservative Interface Flux

• Unspecified

• Stationary

• Specified Displacement

• Specified Location

• Periodic Displacement

• Parallel to Boundary

• Surface of Revolution

• Rigid Body Solution

For details on these options, see Mesh Motion Options in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

For details on mesh deformation, see Mesh Deformation in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

See Mesh Deformation (p. 121) for information about activating mesh deformation for the domain.

15.2.2.8. Electric Field

When an electric field model is activated for a domain that contains a boundary condition, Electric
Field can be specified for a boundary from the Boundary Details tab.

The available options are:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 169
Boundary Conditions

• Voltage

• Ground

• Flux In

• Zero Flux

• Electrical Current Transfer Coefficient

• Conservative Interface Flux

• Electric Field Contact Resistance

For details, see Electric Field in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

For information about activating an electric field model for a domain, see Electromagnetic Model (p. 129).

15.2.3. Nonoverlap Conditions Tab

The settings for nonoverlap conditions of an interface boundary are similar to the corresponding settings
of wall boundaries, which are described under Boundary Details: Wall (p. 167).

For modeling details, see Non-overlap Boundary Conditions in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.4. Boundary Fluid Values Tab

The Fluid Values tab for a boundary condition object is used to set boundary conditions for each fluid
in an Eulerian multiphase simulation and each particle material when particle tracking is modeled.

The Boundary Conditions list box contains the materials of the fluid passing through the boundary
condition. Selecting a material from the list will create a frame with the name of the material and
properties available to edit. These properties are detailed in the following sections.

15.2.4.1. Fluid Values: Turbulence

Turbulence > Option can be set to any one of the following values. Unless otherwise specified, do not
change any further turbulence settings.

• Low (Intensity = 1%)

• Medium (Intensity = 5%)

• High (Intensity = 10%)

• Intensity and Length Scale

For details, see Intensity and Length Scale (p. 171).

• Intensity and Eddy Viscosity Ratio

For details, see Intensity and Eddy Viscosity Ratio (p. 171).

• k and Epsilon

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
170 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Editing a Boundary Condition

For details, see k and Epsilon (p. 171).

• k and Omega

• k and Eddy Viscosity Ratio

• k and Length Scale

• Reynolds Stresses and Epsilon

• Reynolds Stresses and Omega

• Reynolds Stresses and Eddy Viscosity Ratio

• Reynolds Stresses and Length Scale

• Default Intensity and Autocompute Length Scale

• Intensity and Autocompute Length

For details, see Intensity and Auto Compute Length (p. 171).

• Zero Gradient

15.2.4.1.1. Intensity and Length Scale

Enter a numeric value or an expression for Value, and specify a value for the eddy length scale.

15.2.4.1.2. Intensity and Eddy Viscosity Ratio

Enter a numeric value or an expression for Value, and specify a value for the eddy viscosity ratio.

15.2.4.1.3. k and Epsilon

Specify a turbulent kinetic energy value and a turbulent eddy dissipation value.

15.2.4.1.4. Intensity and Auto Compute Length

Enter a numeric value or an expression for Value.

15.2.4.2. Fluid Values: Volume Fraction

Volume Fraction > Option can be set to:

• Value

If set to Value, you must enter a numeric value or an expression for the volume fraction for each
fluid. Note that the total volume fractions of the fluids in the list box must be equal to 1.

• Zero Gradient

The volume fraction can also be set to Zero Gradient, which implies that the volume fraction
gradient perpendicular to the boundary is zero. This setting can be useful for subcritical free surface
flow when the free surface elevation is specified (via a pressure profile) at the outlet.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 171
Boundary Conditions

15.2.4.3. Fluid Values: Heat Transfer

If Option is set to Static Temperature, you must specify a value for the static temperature.

15.2.4.4. Fluid Values for Inlets and Openings

15.2.4.4.1. Multiphase
1. Set the fluid velocity on the Boundary Details tab.

2. Select from the following:

• Normal Speed

• Cartesian Velocity Components

• Mass Flow Rate

For details, see Mass and Momentum in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

3. Set the static pressure on the Boundary Details tab.

4. Select from the following:

• Normal to Boundary

• Directional Components

For details, see Mass and Momentum in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

5. Set turbulence quantities at the inlet boundary (if applicable).

For details, see Turbulence in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

6. Set the inlet temperature of each phase (if applicable).

For details, see Heat Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

7. Enter the volume fraction of the selected fluid at the inlet.

The total volume fraction summed over all the fluids must be equal to 1.

8. If one of the fluids is a variable composition mixture, specify the mass fractions of each of the components.

For details, see Component Details: Opening (p. 166).

15.2.4.4.2. MUSIG settings

When the fluid selected in the list box at the top of the Fluid Values tab has a morphology of Poly
dispersed Fluid, size fractions must be specified for each of the size groups. The size fractions
can be set to Value or Automatic. All size fractions set to Automatic are calculated to have the
same value such that the overall sum of size fractions (including those that are specified by value) is
unity. If all size fractions are set to Value, you must ensure that the specified size fractions sum to
unity.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
172 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Editing a Boundary Condition

15.2.4.4.3. Particle Tracking Settings for Inlets and Openings

15.2.4.4.3.1. Phase List

Select the phase for which to set properties.

15.2.4.4.3.2. Particle Behavior

Optionally, specify particle properties at the boundary.

When this check box is disabled, particles do not enter through this boundary.

15.2.4.4.3.3. Mass and Momentum

For details, see Mass and Momentum in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.4.4.3.4. Particle Position

For details, see Particle Position in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.4.4.3.5. Particle Locations

For details, see Particle Locations in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.4.4.3.6. Number of Positions

Select from Direct Specification or Proportional to Mass Flow Rate. For details, see
Number of Positions in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.4.4.3.7. Particle Mass Flow

For details, see Particle Mass Flow Rate in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.4.4.3.8. Particle Diameter Distribution

For details, see Particle Diameter Distribution in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.4.4.3.9. Heat Transfer

Available when heat transfer is selected. For details, see Heat Transfer in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.4.4.3.10. Component Details

Available when the particle phase has been set up as a variable composition mixture. For details, see
Component Details in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.4.5. Fluid Values for Outlets

If you are using the inhomogeneous multiphase model and have selected the Fluid Velocity option
on the Boundary Details tab, the fluid-specific velocity information is set on the tab shown below at
an outlet boundary.

Specify the Mass and Momentum as:

• Normal Speed

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 173
Boundary Conditions

• Cartesian Velocity Components

• Cylindrical Velocity Components

• Mass Flow Rate

For details, see Mass and Momentum in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.4.6. Fluid Values for Walls

15.2.4.6.1. Particle Tracking Settings for Walls
This tab enables you to define particle behavior at walls. This is done by selecting a particle type from
the list box and specifying its properties as outlined below:

• Select a particle-wall interaction option - for details, see Settings for Particle-Wall Interaction (p. 174).

• Specify an erosion model - for details, see Erosion Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Specify a particle-rough wall model - for details see Particle-Rough Wall Model (Virtual Wall Model) in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Specify the amount of mass absorbed at a wall - for details, see Mass Flow Absorption in the CFX-Solver
Modeling Guide.

• Define the particle behavior - Select this option to control the entry of particles and to specify particle
properties at wall boundaries. The settings for this option are similar to those available for inlets and openings.
For details, see Particle Tracking Settings for Inlets and Openings (p. 173).

15.2.4.6.2. Settings for Particle-Wall Interaction

The particle-wall interaction can be controlled by selecting one of the following Wall Interaction options:

• Equation Dependent - This is the default option in ANSYS CFX and requires the specification of the
following Velocity settings:

– Restitution Coefficient - The droplet reflection at the wall can be controlled by specifying the
values for Perpendicular Coefficient and Parallel Coefficient.

The impact of droplet collision and the resulting momentum change across the collision can be
described by specifying the perpendicular and parallel coefficients of restitution. For details, see
Restitution Coefficients for Particles in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

– Minimum Impact Angle - Select this check box if you want to specify the minimum impact angle. Below
this impact angle, particles will be stopped with the fate Sliding along walls.

• Wall Film - When Wall Interaction is set to Wall Film, then the following Wall Film Interaction
models can be selected:

– Stick to Wall - This model enforces all particles that hit a wall to become part of the wall film. This
option does not require any further settings.

– Elsaesser - This model requires the specification of Wall Material.

– User Defined - The settings for this option are similar to those described for User Wall Interaction (p. 175).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
174 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating and Editing a Boundary Condition

For details on various wall interaction options, see Wall Interaction in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

User Wall Interaction - This option is available when a Particle User Routine has been created. For
details, refer to the following sections:

• Particle User Routines (p. 335)

• Wall Interaction in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

For additional modeling information on particle transport, see Particle Transport Modeling in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.4.7. Fluid Values for Interfaces

15.2.4.7.1. Fluid-Solid Interface, Fluid Side
The Fluid Values tab is available on the fluid side of a fluid-solid interface for an inhomogeneous
multiphase setup.

When you are using the inhomogeneous multiphase model, you must use a no-slip wall or set a wall
velocity. For details, see Mass and Momentum in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

When particle transport is selected, additional settings are available. These contain the same options
as those that appear for wall boundaries. For details, refer to the following sections:

• Restitution Coefficients for Particles in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Erosion Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Mass Flow Absorption in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Particles are introduced into the domain from this boundary. For details, see Fluid Values for Inlets and
Openings (p. 172).

15.2.4.7.2. Fluid-Fluid and Periodic Interfaces

For periodic and fluid-fluid interfaces, Conservative Interface Flux is the only available option
for all quantities and cannot be changed.

15.2.5. Boundary Solid Values Tab

15.2.5.1. Heat Transfer
15.2.5.1.1. Adiabatic
The heat flux across the boundary is zero. The boundary is insulated.

15.2.5.1.2. Fixed Temperature

The boundary is fixed at a specified temperature Tw .

15.2.5.1.3. Heat Flux

A heat flux is specified across the boundary. A positive value indicates heat flux into the domain.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 175
Boundary Conditions

15.2.5.1.4. Heat Transfer Coefficient

In this case, the heat flux at a boundary is implicitly specified using an external heat transfer coefficient,
h c, and an outside or external boundary temperature, T o. This boundary condition can be used to
model thermal resistance outside the computational domain. The heat flux, when calculated using the
Heat Transfer Coefficient, is:
(15.1)

where T o is the specified outside or external boundary temperature and Tw is the temperature at the
boundary (edge of the domain).

15.2.5.1.5. Conservative Interface Flux

Conservative Interface Flux implies that the heat flow in question will be between the current
solid on this boundary and another solid on the other side of the interface. This means that Conser
vative Interface Flux must also be used on the boundary on the other side of the interface.
Accordingly, the CFX-Solver will not be able to handle cases where Conservative Interface
Flux is set on just one side of the interface, or where the quantity being transferred does not exist on
the other side. CFX-Pre will issue a warning if either of these cases exist.

15.2.5.2. Additional Variables

See Boundary Details and Fluid Values Tabs for Boundary Condition Objects (p. 313) for details.

15.2.6. Boundary Sources Tab

Boundary sources of mass (continuity), energy, radiation, Additional Variables, component mass fractions,
and turbulence can be specified at inlet, opening, outlet, interface, and wall boundaries. For details, see
Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.2.7. Boundary Plot Options Tab

The Plot Options tab enables you to create Boundary Contour and Boundary Vector graphics to
display scalar and vector values at boundaries, respectively, as detailed in the following sections:

• Boundary Contour (p. 176)

• Boundary Vector (p. 177)

15.2.7.1. Boundary Contour

Selecting this option and choosing a Profile Variable draws the boundary surface colored by the selected
variable. The available variables depend on the settings on the Boundary Details and Sources tabs,
as applicable. A legend appears by default showing the variable plotted on the boundary with a local
range. You can clear visibility for the legend and the plots by clearing the check box next to the
boundary contour object associated with your boundary condition in the Outline tree view. You may
have to click the + sign next to the boundary condition in order to view the contour object in the
Outline tree view.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
176 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Working with Boundary Conditions

15.2.7.2. Boundary Vector

Selecting this option draws vectors at the nodes of the boundary surface, pointing in the direction
specified by the Profile Vector Component setting. The availability of vectors (and this option) depends
on the settings on the Boundary Details and Basic Settings tabs. For example, vector plots are available
if you specify Basic Settings > Boundary Type as Inlet and the Boundary Details > Mass and
Momentum option as velocity components.

15.3. Interface Boundary Conditions

All domain interfaces automatically create boundaries of type Interface that contain the regions
used in the domain interface. These boundaries are named <Domain Interface Name> Side
<Number>. For example, for a domain interface named myInterface, the related boundary conditions
would be called myInterface Side 1 and myInterface Side 2. At least one of these
boundaries will be auto-created for each domain involved in the interface. You can edit these boundaries
like any other boundary, but you cannot create new interface boundaries directly.

You will usually not need to edit an auto-generated Interface boundary, but options are available for
fluid-solid interfaces (which can be considered a special case of wall boundaries). Settings and options
available when editing interface boundaries can be configured. For details, refer to the following sections:

• Boundary Details: Interfaces (p. 169)

• Fluid Values for Interfaces (p. 175)

15.4. Symmetry Boundary Conditions

When specifying symmetry boundary conditions, select the locations from the drop-down list box and
select the Frame Type if your domain is rotating. No further settings are required, and the same settings
apply for fluid and solid domains.

For details, see Symmetry Plane in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

15.5. Working with Boundary Conditions

The topics in this section include:

• Boundary Condition Visualization (p. 177)

• Profile Data and CEL Functions (p. 178)

15.5.1. Boundary Condition Visualization

When you create a boundary condition in CFX-Pre, several things happen in the Viewer:

• Symbols for the boundary conditions are displayed in the viewer, based on type. The visibility of these
symbols is determined by the Label and Marker control form. For details, see Boundary Markers and La-
bels (p. 26).

• Boundary condition symbols are shown at surface display line intersections.

• Regions contained in the boundary condition are highlighted according to settings specified under Edit >
Options. For details, see 3D Viewer Toolbar (p. 18).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 177
Boundary Conditions

If multiple boundary conditions are defined on a region of mesh, an error appears in the physics valid-
ation window below the viewer.

Note

Inlets, outlets, and openings use arrow symbols that are locally normal to the boundary
surface, irrespective of the actual direction specified for the boundary condition. It is possible
to show arrows pointing in the specified direction by creating a Boundary Vector object. You
can optionally turn off the default arrow symbols by clearing the check boxes on Label and
Marker control form (see above). Also see Boundary Vector (p. 177) and Boundary Mark-
ers (p. 26) for more details.

When using CFX-Pre within ANSYS Workbench or with a pale viewer background color, the
colors of these symbols are black in order to make them more visible.

15.5.2. Profile Data and CEL Functions

Profile data can be used to define a boundary condition based on a distribution of appropriate values.

15.5.2.1. Types of Discrete Profiles

• 1D profile uses one spatial coordinate to define the data position; for example, x, y, z, or a cylindrical value.
This could be used to describe the axisymmetric flow down a cylindrical pipe (that is, the data values for a
value of ‘r’).

• 2D profile uses two spatial coordinates (Cartesian or polar); for example, (x, y), (x, z), (r, t), (a, t), and so on. If
you are importing the data from a 2D code on a planar boundary, you may want to use this as a boundary
condition in a 3D case in CFX.

• 3D profile uses three spatial coordinates; for example, (x, y, z) or (r, t, a). Among various uses of 3D Profile
Data are boundary conditions, spatially varying fluid properties, Additional Variables, or equation sources.

15.5.2.2. Multiphase Boundary Condition Example

The syntax for using profile data in CEL expressions is described in Defining User Functions from Profile
Data or Interpolation (From File) Functions (p. 328).

Consider a multiphase boundary condition set up using the following:

• The profile data file has a profile named myProfile

• One of the data fields is Temperature [K]

CFX-Pre enables a function such as myProfile.water.Temperature(x,y,z) to refer to a data

field stored in the profile. This derived value can be assigned to a parameter, such as Fixed Temper
ature.

The expressions that are automatically generated in CFX-Pre for profile boundaries are simply the ex-
pressions in terms of interpolation functions. Modify them in the same way as a normal CEL expression.

For example, the expression myProfile.Temperature(x,y,z) could be modified to 2*myPro

file.Temperature(2x,y,z). For details, see Profile Boundary Conditions in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
178 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 16: Initialization
Initialization is the process by which all unspecified solution field values are assigned at the beginning
of a simulation. These values are commonly referred to as initial values. For steady-state simulations,
they may be collectively referred to as an initial guess.

For steady-state simulations, initial values can be set automatically if a good initial guess is not known
or is not required. Although accurate initial values may not always be available, a good approximation
can reduce the time to solve a steady-state simulation and reduce the chance that the solution fails to
converge due to diverging residuals. The more complicated the simulation and models used, the more
important it becomes to start the solution process with sensible initial values. Advice about choosing
sensible initial values is available in Initialization Parameters in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

For transient simulations, the initial values must be specified for all variables because the data describes
the state at the simulation start time.

If available, the results from a previous simulation can be used to provide the initial values. In this case,
any values chosen to be automatically set will be overridden by values from the initial values file(s). See
Reading the Initial Conditions from a File in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide for details.

Global and domain initialization settings may be specified. Global settings apply to only those domains
that do not have their own initialization settings.

Information on modeling initial values is available in Initial Condition Modeling in the CFX-Solver Mod-
eling Guide.

16.1. Using the User Interface

The following topics will be discussed:

• Domain: Initialization Tab (p. 179)

• Global Settings and Fluid Settings Tabs (p. 180)

The Global Settings and Fluid Settings tabs for the global initialization object (listed as Initializ
ation under Simulation in the tree view) contain settings that specify how initial values are to be
determined, and, in some cases, the initial values themselves. They are accessible by clicking Global

Initialization , by selecting Insert > Global Initialization, or by editing the initialization object listed
in the tree view under Simulation.

16.1.1. Domain: Initialization Tab

The Initialization tab for a domain contains settings that specify how initial values are to be determined,
and, in some cases, the initial values themselves. It is accessible by editing a domain object.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 179
Initialization

16.1.1.1. Domain Initialization

This check box determines whether or not the domain is initialized based on its own settings or based
on global initialization settings. When this check box is selected, an interface that is essentially the same
as that for global initialization is displayed. Any initialization values defined on a per-domain basis will
override values defined at the global level. For details, see Global Settings and Fluid Settings Tabs (p. 180).
After specifying and applying domain initialization, an entry called Initialization is listed in the
tree view under the applicable domain.

16.1.2. Global Settings and Fluid Settings Tabs

When a simulation involves only one fluid, the Fluid Settings tab is not available, but then all of its
contents are added to the Global Settings tab.

16.1.2.1. Coordinate Frame Check Box

This check box determines whether or not a specified coordinate frame is used for interpreting initial
conditions. If the check box is not selected, the default coordinate frame, Coord 0, is used.

16.1.2.1.1. Coordinate Frame Check Box: Coordinate Frame

Select a coordinate frame to use for interpreting initial conditions. For details, see:

• Coordinate Frames (p. 283)

• Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Coordinate Frame in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

16.1.2.2. Frame Type Check Box

This check box determines whether or not a specified frame type is used for interpreting initial values
of velocity. If the check box is not selected, the default frame of reference is used. The default frame
of reference is stationary or rotating, depending on whether the domain is stationary or rotating, re-
spectively.

16.1.2.2.1. Frame Type

• Stationary

The frame of reference used to interpret initial values of velocity is the stationary frame of reference.
For example, if the initial velocity throughout a domain is parallel to the rotation axis of the domain,
the flow will initially have no swirl in the stationary frame of reference, even if the domain is rotating.

• Rotating

The frame of reference used to interpret initial values of velocity is that of the associated domain.
For example, if the initial velocity throughout a domain is specified as being parallel to the rotation
axis of the domain, and if the domain is rotating, the flow will have swirl in the stationary frame of
reference.

For details, see Frame Type in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
180 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the User Interface

16.1.2.3. Initial Conditions: Velocity Type

• Cartesian

• Cylindrical

For details, see Velocity Type in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

16.1.2.4. Initial Conditions: Cartesian Velocity Components

16.1.2.4.1. Option
• Automatic

The initial velocity field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values file
is not available, the initial velocity field is computed from built-in algorithms. For details, see Auto-
matic in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Automatic with Value

The initial velocity field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values file
is not available, the initial velocity field is set to user-specified values. For details, see Automatic with
Value in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

16.1.2.4.2. Velocity Scale Check Box

(applies only when Option is set to Automatic)

This check box determines whether or not a specified velocity scale is used. If the check box is not se-
lected, a velocity scale will be calculated internally by the CFX-Solver, based on a weighted average
value of velocity over all applicable Boundary Conditions (inlets, openings and outlets). Initial guess
values that are calculated based on the internally calculated velocity scale may be unsuitable due to
the shape of your domain, or, for example, due to a small, high-speed inlet which results in an over-
prediction of the velocity magnitude.

16.1.2.4.2.1. Velocity Scale Check Box: Value

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression for the velocity scale. This is not a normalized value; it is
essentially the velocity magnitude that will be used for all applicable velocity vectors. For details, see
Velocity Scale in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

16.1.2.4.3. U, V, W
(applies only when Option is set to Automatic with Value)

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression for each Cartesian velocity component. For details, see
Cartesian Velocity Components in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

16.1.2.5. Initial Conditions: Cylindrical Velocity Components

16.1.2.5.1. Option
For details, see Option (p. 181).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 181
Initialization

16.1.2.5.2. Velocity Scale Check Box

(applies only when Option is set to Automatic)

For details, see Velocity Scale Check Box (p. 181).

16.1.2.5.3. Axial Component, Radial Component, Theta Component

(applies only when Option is set to Automatic with Value)

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression for each cylindrical velocity component. For details, see
Cylindrical Velocity Components in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

16.1.2.6. Initial Conditions: Static Pressure

16.1.2.6.1. Option
• Automatic

The initial static pressure field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the initial static pressure field is computed from built-in algorithms.

• Automatic with Value

The initial static pressure field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the initial static pressure field is set to user-specified values.

For details, see Static Pressure in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

16.1.2.6.2. Relative Pressure

(applies only when Option is set to Automatic with Value)

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression for the relative pressure.

For details, see Static Pressure in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

16.1.2.7. Initial Conditions: Turbulence

From Option, the various initial condition settings for turbulence are:

• Low Intensity and Eddy Viscosity Ratio: This sets intensity to 1% and viscosity ratio to
1.

• Medium Intensity and Eddy Viscosity Ratio: This sets intensity to 5% and viscosity ratio
to 10.

• High Intensity and Eddy Viscosity Ratio: This sets intensity to 10% and viscosity ratio
to 100.

• Intensity and Eddy Viscosity Ratio: Use this option to specify fractional intensity and
eddy viscosity ratio.

• Intensity and Length Scale: Use this option to specify fractional intensity and length scale.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
182 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the User Interface

• k and Epsilon: Use this option to specify turbulence kinetic energy and turbulence eddy dissipation.

• k and Omega: Use this option to specify turbulence kinetic energy and turbulence eddy frequency.

• k and Eddy Viscosity Ratio: Use this option to specify turbulence kinetic energy and eddy
viscosity ratio.

• k and Length Scale: Use this option to specify turbulence kinetic energy and length scale.

• Reynolds Stresses and Epsilon: Use this option to specify Reynolds Stresses and turbulence
eddy dissipation.

• Reynolds Stresses and Omega: Use this option to specify Reynolds Stresses and turbulence
eddy frequency.

• Reynolds Stresses and Eddy Viscosity Ratio: Use this option to specify Reynolds Stresses
and eddy viscosity ratio.

• Reynolds Stresses and Length Scale: Use this option to specify Reynolds Stresses and
length scale.

For additional details, see K (Turbulent Kinetic Energy), Epsilon (Turbulence Eddy Dissipation), and
Reynolds Stress Components in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

16.1.2.7.1. Fractional Intensity

• Option: Automatic

The fractional intensity field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the fractional intensity field is computed automatically.

• Option: Automatic with Value

The fractional intensity field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the fractional intensity field is set to user-specified values.

16.1.2.7.2. Eddy Viscosity Ratio

• Option: Automatic

The eddy viscosity ratio field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the eddy viscosity ratio field is computed automatically.

• Option: Automatic with Value

The eddy viscosity ratio field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the eddy viscosity ratio field is set to user-specified values.

16.1.2.7.3. Eddy Length Scale

• Option: Automatic

The eddy length scale field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the eddy length scale field is computed automatically.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 183
Initialization

• Option: Automatic with Value

The eddy length scale field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the eddy length scale field is set to user-specified values.

16.1.2.7.4. Turbulence Kinetic Energy

• Option: Automatic

The turbulence kinetic energy field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial
values file is not available, the turbulence kinetic energy field is computed automatically.

• Option: Automatic with Value

The turbulence kinetic energy field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial
values file is not available, the turbulence kinetic energy field is set to user-specified values.

16.1.2.7.5. Turbulence Eddy Dissipation

• Option: Automatic

The turbulence eddy dissipation field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial
values file is not available, the turbulence eddy dissipation field is computed automatically.

• Option: Automatic with Value

The turbulence eddy dissipation field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial
values file is not available, the turbulence eddy dissipation field is set to user-specified values.

16.1.2.7.6. Turbulence Eddy Frequency

• Option: Automatic

The turbulence eddy frequency field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial
values file is not available, the turbulence eddy frequency field is computed automatically.

• Option: Automatic with Value

The turbulence eddy frequency field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial
values file is not available, the turbulence eddy frequency field is set to user-specified values.

16.1.2.7.7. Reynolds Stress Components

• Option: Automatic

The Reynolds stress components fields are loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an
initial values file is not available, the Reynolds stress components fields are computed automatically.

• Option: Automatic with Value

The Reynolds stress components fields are loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an
initial values file is not available, the Reynolds stress components fields are set to user-specified values.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
184 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the User Interface

16.1.2.8. Initial Conditions: Temperature

(applies only when heat transfer is active)

• Automatic

The initial temperature field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the initial temperature field is computed from built-in algorithms.

• Automatic with Value

The initial temperature field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the initial temperature field is set to user-specified values.

16.1.2.9. Initial Conditions: Radiation Intensity

(applies only when using the P1, Discrete Transfer, or Monte Carlo model for Thermal Radi-
ation)

16.1.2.9.1. Option
• Automatic

The initial radiation intensity field and blackbody temperature field are loaded from an initial values
file, if one is available. If an initial values file is not available, the initial radiation intensity field and
blackbody temperature field are computed from built-in algorithms.

• Automatic with Value

The initial radiation intensity field and blackbody temperature field are loaded from an initial values
file, if one is available. If an initial values file is not available, the initial radiation intensity field and
blackbody temperature field are set to user-specified values.

For details, see Radiation Intensity in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

16.1.2.10. Initial Conditions: Mixture Fraction

16.1.2.10.1. Option
• Automatic

The initial mixture fraction field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial
values file is not available, the initial mixture fraction field is computed from built-in algorithms.

• Automatic with Value

The initial mixture fraction field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial
values file is not available, the initial mixture fraction field is set to user-specified values.

16.1.2.10.2. Mixture Fraction

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the value of the mixture fraction throughout
the domain.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 185
Initialization

16.1.2.11. Initial Conditions: Mixture Fraction Variance

16.1.2.11.1. Option
• Automatic

The initial mixture fraction variance field is loaded from an initial values file if, one is available. If an
initial values file is not available, the initial mixture fraction variance field is computed from built-in
algorithms.

• Automatic with Value

The initial mixture fraction variance field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an
initial values file is not available, the initial mixture fraction variance field is set to user-specified values.

16.1.2.11.2. Mix. Fracn. Variance

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the value of the mixture fraction variance
throughout the domain.

16.1.2.12. Initial Conditions: Component Details

(applies only when the relevant fluid is a variable composition mixture)

16.1.2.12.1. List Box

This list box is used to select a component (of a fluid that is a variable composition mixture) in order
to set its fluid-specific initialization options.

16.1.2.12.2. [component name]: Option

• Automatic

The initial mass fraction field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the initial mass fraction field is computed from built-in algorithms.

• Automatic with Value

The initial mass fraction field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the initial mass fraction field is set to user-specified values.

16.1.2.12.3. [component name]: Mass Fraction

Available when Option is set to Automatic with Value, you must enter a numerical quantity or
CEL expression that specifies the value of the component mass fraction throughout the domain.

16.1.2.13. Initial Conditions: Additional Variable Details

This section is similar to Component Details, dealing with Additional Variables instead. For details, see
Initial Conditions: Component Details (p. 186).

16.1.2.14. Fluid Specific Initialization

(applies only when multiple fluids are involved)

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
186 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using the User Interface

The fluid-specific initialization settings are grouped together, either in the Fluid Specific Initialization
section or, in the case of global initialization, on the Fluid Settings tab.

16.1.2.15. Fluid Specific Initialization: List Box

This list box is used to select a fluid in order to set its fluid-specific initialization options.

16.1.2.16. Fluid Specific Initialization: [fluid name] Check Box

This check box determines whether or not the initialization options for the indicated fluid are specified
explicitly or are left at default values.

16.1.2.17. Fluid Specific Initialization: [fluid name] Check Box: Initial Conditions
Most of the fluid-specific initial condition settings are described in this section as they appear in the
non-fluid specific initial condition section in the case of a single-fluid simulation. Those that are not are
described here.

16.1.2.17.1. Velocity Type

The velocity type can be either Cartesian or Cylindrical. For details, see Velocity Type in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

16.1.2.17.2. Volume Fraction: Option

• Automatic

The initial volume fraction field is loaded from an initial values file, if one is available. If an initial
values file is not available, the initial volume fraction field is computed from built-in algorithms.

• Automatic with Value

The initial volume fraction field is loaded from an initial values file if one is available. If an initial values
file is not available, the initial volume fraction field is set to user-specified values.

16.1.2.17.3. Volume Fraction: Volume Fraction

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the value of the volume fraction throughout
the domain. For details, see Initial Conditions for a Multiphase Simulation in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

16.1.2.18. Solid Specific Initialization

(applies only when there are solids in porous domains)

The solid-specific initialization settings are grouped together, either in the Solid Specific Initialization
section or, in the case of global initialization, on the Solid Settings tab.

16.1.2.19. Solid Specific Initialization: List Box

This list box is used to select a solid in order to set its solid-specific initialization options.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 187
Initialization

16.1.2.20. Solid Specific Initialization: [solid name] Check Box

This check box determines whether or not the initialization options for the indicated solid are specified
explicitly or are left at default values.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
188 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 17: Source Points
Source points are sources that act on a single mesh element. The location of the point is entered in
Cartesian coordinates, and the source is created for the element whose center is closest to the specified
point. Source points appear as red spheres in the Viewer. For a transient run or run with a moving mesh,
the closest element is identified once at the start and is used for the remainder of the run.

This chapter describes:

17.1. Basic Settings Tab
17.2. Sources Tab
17.3. Fluid Sources Tab
17.4. Sources in Solid Domains
17.5. Source Points and Mesh Deformation

Sources are specified in a way similar to subdomain sources with the exceptions that momentum and
radiation sources cannot be specified and only “Total Source” values can be entered. For details, see
Subdomains (p. 193).

The visibility of source points can be turned on and off using the check box in the tree view. For details,
see Object Visibility (p. 17) and Outline Tree View (p. 5).

Additional information on sources is available in Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

17.1. Basic Settings Tab

The Basic Settings tab defines the coordinate frame and the point coordinates for the source point.

1. Enter Cartesian Coordinates for the source point.

Points entered are relative to the selected coordinate frame.

2. Use the default coordinate frame or a user-specified coordinate frame. For details, see:

• Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Coordinate Frame Basic Settings Tab (p. 283).

The default coordinate frame, Coord 0, will be used as the basis for the entered Cartesian coordinates,
unless you have created your own coordinate frame and have selected it from the drop-down list.

17.2. Sources Tab

The point sources that can be set depend on the physical models used in the simulation. Sources of
mass (continuity), energy, radiation, Additional Variables, component mass fractions, and turbulence
are all possible.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 189
Source Points

17.2.1. Single-Phase Fluid Sources

1. Select the Sources check box to specify sources for the point.

2. Select the equation source to specify.

Equation sources include other sources such as mass fraction, energy, continuity (mass), turbulence,
Additional Variables, and so on. For details, see Source Coefficient / Total Source Coefficient in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

3. Select the Continuity check box to set sources for the continuity equation.

For details, see Mass (Continuity) Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Additional information is available in:

• Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• General Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

17.2.1.1. Component Mass Fractions

This is only available when mixtures are included in the fluids list in the domain. You can specify a Total
Source and an optional Total Source Coefficient for improved convergence for strongly varying sources.
For details, see General Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

17.2.1.2. Additional Variables

Set the Total Source for the Additional Variable and an optional Total Source Coefficient. A source
for an Additional Variable can be set only if it is solved for.

17.2.1.3. Continuity
Continuity sources differ from other sources because you are introducing new fluid into the domain.
Properties that are required of the fluid, which is entering the domain, appear in the Variables section
of the form. These values are not used if the source is negative, because no new fluid is introduced into
the subdomain. For details, see Mass (Continuity) Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

17.2.1.3.1. Continuity Option

The value of the mass source is set using the Total Fluid Mass Source option. For details, see Mass
(Continuity) Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

17.2.1.3.2. Additional Variables

Set a value for any Additional Variables that are introduced with the mass source. For details, see Mass
(Continuity) Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

17.2.1.3.3. Component Mass Fractions

Enter mass fractions of each of the components in the mass source. For details, see Mass (Continuity)
Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
190 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluid Sources Tab

17.2.1.3.4. Temperature
Enter the temperature for the mass source.

17.2.1.3.5. Velocity
Set velocity components for the mass source.

17.2.1.4. Energy
A total source for the energy equation can be set. The optional Total Source Coefficient provides im-
proved convergence for strongly varying sources. An energy source can set specified when the parent
domain models heat transfer using the thermal energy or total energy models.

17.2.1.5. Turbulence Eddy Dissipation or Turbulence Kinetic Energy

When the flow is turbulent, a total source for the Turbulence Eddy Dissipation or Turbulence
Kinetic Energy can specified. The optional Total Source Coefficient provides improved convergence
for strongly varying sources. For details, see General Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

17.2.2. Multiphase Bulk Sources

In a multiphase simulation, source terms that apply to all fluids in the simulation are set on the Sources
tab. Bulk sources take account of the volume fraction of each phase when applying the source term.
For details, see Bulk Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Select Bulk Sources to specify bulk sources. Bulk sources apply to all fluids in a multiphase simulation.

17.2.3. Multiplying Sources by Porosity

Selecting the Multiply by Porosity check box causes the equation source to be scaled by the porosity
value. For example, if a porous domain has a volume porosity of 0.8, then if the Multiply by Porosity
check box is selected, 80% of the source is applied to the fluid; if the check box is not selected then
100% of the source is applied to the fluid.

17.3. Fluid Sources Tab

Fluid sources can be set when more than one fluid is selected. The options depend on the type of
simulation you are running, and whether bulk sources are used.

1. Select the fluid from the Fluid Specific Source Point Sources list

2. Select the check box next to the selected variable to enter a source, then select the Continuity check
box.

3. Enter a value for Total Source.

4. Optionally, enter a total mass source coefficient for either pressure or volume fraction.

For details, see Source Coefficient / Total Source Coefficient in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

5. Set the values for the continuity equation.

For details, see Mass (Continuity) Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 191
Source Points

17.4. Sources in Solid Domains

Source points can exist in solid domains to provide sources of thermal energy and radiation.

• Select Energy to enable an energy source.

For details, see General Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

17.5. Source Points and Mesh Deformation

When mesh deformation is selected, the volume element whose centroid is closest to the source point
at the beginning of the simulation will move with the mesh (if that part of the mesh is deforming). The
location of the point source will, therefore, move as the mesh deforms. For details, see Mesh Deforma-
tion (p. 121).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
192 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 18: Subdomains
A subdomain is a 3D region within a predefined domain that can be used to specify values for volumetric
sources. Fluid or porous subdomains (that is, when the parent domain is of type Fluid) allow sources
of energy, mass, momentum, radiation, Additional Variables, components, and turbulence to be specified.
Solid subdomains allow only sources of energy and radiation to be set.

This chapter describes:

• Creating New Subdomains (p. 193)

• The Subdomains Tab (p. 194)

• Basic Settings Tab (p. 194)

• Sources Tab (p. 194)

• Fluids Tab (p. 197)

• Mesh Motion (p. 198)

A domain must be created before a subdomain can be created. The location of a subdomain must be
a 3D region that is part of a single parent domain. 3D primitives are implicitly included in a parent domain
if 3D composites or assemblies are used in the domain location. A subdomain cannot span more than
one domain, but you can create many subdomains in each domain. You should consider subdomain
requirements when you generate a mesh, because subdomains must be created on existing 3D regions.
Definitions for primitive and composite regions are available in Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre (p. 99).

Additional information on the physical interpretation of subdomain sources and modeling advice is
available, as well as additional information on the mathematical implementation of sources, is available
in Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

The CFX Expression Language (CEL) can be used to define sources by creating functions of any CFX
System Variables. For details, see CEL Operators, Constants, and Expressions in the CFX Reference Guide.

18.1. Creating New Subdomains

New subdomains are created by selecting Insert > Sub Domain from the main menu or by clicking
Subdomain on the main toolbar. Note that creation of subdomains from the main menu or toolbar
may subsequently require selection of the appropriate analysis type and domain. Subdomains can also
be created by right-clicking the appropriate domain in the Outline view.

1. Enter a new name using the syntax described below or pick an existing subdomain to edit.

2. Select the parent domain for the subdomain.

Additional information on valid names is available in Valid Syntax for Named Objects (p. 55). You can
also edit an existing subdomain by selecting its name from the drop-down list. Existing subdomains

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 193
Subdomains

can also be edited from the Outline view using the usual methods; for details, see Outline Tree
View (p. 5).

18.2. The Subdomains Tab

After entering a name for the subdomain, or selecting the subdomain to edit, the subdomain details
view will be displayed. This contains two tabs, Basic Settings and Sources, that are accessed by selecting
the tabs located across the top. You should complete each tab in turn, proceeding from left to right.

Note

Fluid sources are on their own tab.

• Basic Settings: Sets the location and the coordinate frame for the subdomain. For details, see Basic Settings
Tab (p. 194).

• Sources: Defines volumetric source terms in the subdomain for single-phase simulations, or volumetric
source terms that apply to all fluids in a multiphase simulation. For details, see Sources Tab (p. 194).

• Fluid Sources: Defines volumetric source terms that apply to individual fluid in a multiphase simulation.

18.3. Basic Settings Tab

The following settings are required on the Basic Settings tab.

• Location (p. 194)

• Coordinate Frame (p. 194)

18.3.1. Location
Select the region name that the subdomain will occupy. The location can be defined as multiple regions,
assemblies and/or user 3D Regions. For details, see Mesh Topology in CFX-Pre (p. 99).

18.3.2. Coordinate Frame

By default, Coordinate Frame is set to Coord 0. You may use alternative coordinate frames. To create
a new coordinate frame, select Insert > Coordinate Frame from the main menu. For details, see:

• Coordinate Frames (p. 283)

• Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

18.4. Sources Tab

The volumetric sources that can be set in a subdomain depend on the physical models used in the
simulation. Sources of mass (continuity), momentum, energy, radiation, Additional Variables, component
mass fractions, and turbulence are all possible.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
194 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Sources Tab

18.4.1. Single-Phase Fluid Sources

In a single-phase simulation, the volumetric or total source terms are set on the Sources tab. For details,
see Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

1. Select the Sources check box to specify sources for the subdomain.

2. Select the Momentum Source/Porous Loss check box to specify a momentum source.

For details, see Momentum Source/Porous Loss (p. 195).

3. Select the equation source to specify.

Equation sources include other sources such as mass fraction, energy, continuity (mass), turbulence,
Additional Variables, and so on. For details, see:

• Equation Sources (p. 195)

• Source Coefficient / Total Source Coefficient in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

18.4.1.1. Momentum Source/Porous Loss

A source of momentum is introduced by setting X, Y and Z, or r, Theta and Axial components for the
momentum source under General Momentum Source. All three components must be set if a general
momentum source is defined. You can optionally specify a Momentum Source Coefficient to aid
convergence. When employing a cylindrical coordinate frame, you must specify an axis using a rotation
axis or two points.

In addition to specifying a general source of momentum, you can model porous loss in a flow using an
isotropic or directional loss model. In each case, the loss is specified using either linear and quadratic
coefficients, or permeability and loss coefficients. For the Directional Loss model, the loss in the
transverse direction can be set using the Loss Coefficient, which multiplies the streamwise loss
by the entered factor. When using the Directional Loss model, you must supply a streamwise direction.
The direction can be specified with Cartesian or cylindrical coordinates. If you choose cylindrical coordin-
ates, specify the axis using a rotation axis or two points.

For additional details on modeling momentum sources, see Momentum Sources in the CFX-Solver
Modeling Guide.

18.4.1.2. Equation Sources

Equation Sources introduces source terms to a particular scalar equation.

18.4.1.2.1. Component Mass Fractions

This will introduce a source of a particular component. A Source per unit volume or a Total Source
can be used. The optional Source Coefficient or Total Source Coefficient provides improved conver-
gence for nonlinear sources. For details, see General Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

1. In the Option and Source fields, set a component source term for a mixture.

This can be an expression or value for the total source or the source per unit volume. For details,
see General Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 195
Subdomains

2. Set an optional Total Source / Source Coefficient.

For details, see Source Coefficient / Total Source Coefficient in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

18.4.1.2.2. Additional Variables

A source for an Additional Variable can be set only if it is included in the parent domain and solved for
using a transport equation. (Poisson and Diffusive transports can also have sources.) A Source per unit
volume or a Total Source can be used. The optional Source Coefficient or Total Source Coefficient
provides improved convergence for nonlinear sources. For details, see General Sources in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

1. In the Option and Source fields, set an Additional Variable Source term.

For details, see General Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

2. Set an optional Total Source / Source Coefficient.

For details, see Source Coefficient / Total Source Coefficient in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

18.4.1.2.3. Continuity
Continuity sources differ from other sources because you are introducing new fluid into the domain.
Properties of the fluid entering the domain are required and appear in the Variables frame under the
Continuity section. For details on the following settings, see Mass (Continuity) Sources in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

• Continuity > Source: Set a mass source value for the continuity equation.

• Continuity > Option: Set the Fluid Mass Source per unit volume or the Total Fluid Mass
Source.

• MCF/Energy Sink Option: Select the appropriate sink option from Local Mass Fractions and
Temperature, Specified Mass Fractions and Local Temperature, or Specified Mass
Fractions and Temperature, as appropriate.

• Set a value for the Mass Flux Pressure Coefficient, Total Mass Source Pressure Coefficient or Mass Source
Pressure Coefficient, as appropriate.

• Set a value for the Mass Flux Volume Fraction Coefficient, Total Mass Source Volume Fraction Coefficient
or Mass Source Volume Fraction Coefficient, as appropriate.

• Set the variable values for the fluid that is introduced into the domain. The options available on this section
depend on the physical models used in the simulation. If the continuity source is negative, then these
parameters are not relevant except in the case when either Specified Mass Fractions and Local
Temperature, or Specified Mass Fractions and Temperature have been selected for the
MCF/Energy Sink Option.

– Additional Variables: Set a value for each Additional Variables that is introduced with the mass source.

– Component Mass Fractions: Set the mass fraction for each of the components in the mass source.

– Temperature: Enter the temperature for the mass source.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
196 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluids Tab

– Set the mass source turbulence quantities as required by the selected turbulence model such as Turbulence
Eddy Dissipation and Turbulence Kinetic Energy.

– Velocity: Set velocity components for the mass source.

18.4.1.2.4. Turbulence Quantities

When the flow is turbulent, sources can be specified for the required turbulence quantities such as
Turbulence Eddy Dissipation and Turbulence Kinetic Energy. A Source per unit
volume or a Total Source can be used. The optional Source Coefficient or Total Source Coefficient
provides improved convergence for nonlinear sources. For details, see General Sources in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

18.4.1.2.5. Energy
An Energy source can be specified when the parent domain models heat transfer using the Thermal
Energy or Total Energy model. A Source per unit volume or a Total Source can be used. The op-
tional Source Coefficient or Total Source Coefficient provides improved convergence for nonlinear
sources. For details, see General Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

18.4.2. Bulk Sources for Multiphase Simulations

In a multiphase simulation, source terms that apply to all fluid in the simulation are set on the Sources
tab. Bulk sources take account of the volume fraction of each phase when applying the source term.
For details, see Bulk Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

1. Select the Bulk Sources check box to specify bulk sources.

2. Sources are set in the same way as for single phase simulations. For details, see Single-Phase Fluid
Sources (p. 195).

18.4.3. Multiplying Sources by Porosity

Selecting the Multiply by Porosity check box causes the equation source to be scaled by the porosity
value. For example, if a porous domain has a volume porosity of 0.8, then if the Multiply by Porosity
check box is selected, 80% of the source is applied to the fluid; if the check box is not selected then
100% of the source is applied to the fluid.

18.5. Fluids Tab

Fluid sources are used in an Eulerian multiphase simulation to apply volumetric source terms to indi-
vidual fluids, and in particle transport to model absorption of particles in the subdomain. For details,
see Particle Absorption (p. 198).

1. Select a fluid from the Fluid list to set fluid-specific sources.

2. Toggle on the check box next to the fluid to expand the options.

3. Sources are set in the same way as for single phase simulations. For details, see Single-Phase Fluid
Sources (p. 195).

It is important to note that these source terms are not automatically multiplied by the fluid volume
fraction (that is, do not automatically reduce to zero as the volume fraction goes to zero). For details,
see Fluid-Specific Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 197
Subdomains

18.5.1. Particle Absorption

This setting is available when particle tracking is modeled. For details, see Subdomains in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

1. Select a particle type to activate particle absorption.

2. Set the absorption diameter to the desired value.

18.6. Mesh Motion

When mesh deformation is selected for the domain that contains a subdomain, the Mesh Motion tab
is available for the subdomain.

The available options are:

• Unspecified

• Stationary

• Specified Displacement

• Specified Location

• Rigid Body Solution

For details on these options, see Mesh Motion Options in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

For details on mesh deformation, see Mesh Deformation in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

See Mesh Deformation (p. 121) for information about activating mesh deformation for the domain.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
198 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 19: Rigid Bodies
This chapter describes:
19.1. Rigid Body User Interface

A rigid body is a solid object that moves through a fluid without deforming. Its motion is dictated by
the fluid forces and torques acting upon it, plus any external forces (such as gravity) and external
torques. Within ANSYS CFX, a rigid body can be modeled in two ways:

• A rigid body can be defined by a collection of 2D regions that form its faces. When a rigid body is modeled
in this way, the rigid body itself does not need to be meshed. Mesh motion is used to move the mesh on
the rigid body faces in accordance with the solution of the rigid body equations of motion.

• Alternatively, an immersed solid can be defined as a rigid body. In this case the motion of the immersed
solid is dictated by the solution of the rigid body equations of motion.

Implementation information for Rigid Bodies is available in Rigid Body Theory in the CFX-Solver Theory
Guide.

19.1. Rigid Body User Interface

The user interface for setting up a rigid body defined as a collection of 2D regions is presented in the
following sections:
19.1.1. Insert Rigid Body Dialog Box
19.1.2. Basic Settings Tab
19.1.3. Dynamics Tab
19.1.4. Initial Conditions Tab

The user interface for setting up a rigid body implemented as an immersed solid consists of rigid body
settings found on the Basic Settings tab for the immersed solid domain. These settings are essentially
the same as those on the Basic Settings and Dynamics tabs in the details view for the rigid body object.

19.1.1. Insert Rigid Body Dialog Box

Use this method to simulate a rigid body by using a collection of 2D regions.

The Insert Rigid Body dialog box is used to initiate the creation of a new rigid body object. It is accessible

by clicking Rigid Body , or by selecting Insert > Rigid Body.

Note

Another way to simulate a rigid body is by using an immersed solid that uses a Domain
Motion option of Rigid Body Solution. In this case, the rigid body settings appear in
the details view for the immersed solid domain. All of the rigid body settings for an immersed
solid appear on the Basic Settings tab for the immersed solid domain. The analogous settings
for the rigid body object are distributed between the Basic Settings and Dynamics tabs of

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 199
Rigid Bodies

the rigid body object. Although there are initialization settings on the Initialization tab of
the rigid body object, there are no corresponding initialization settings for a rigid body
defined as an immersed solid.

Immersed solids are described in Immersed Solids in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

19.1.2. Basic Settings Tab

The Basic Settings tab for the rigid body object has the following settings:

19.1.2.1. Mass
Specify the mass of the rigid body. The mass is used in the calculation of translational acceleration due
to applied forces. It is also used in combination with the specified gravity vector (the gravity vector
specified with the rigid body, not with any buoyancy model) to calculate the force due to gravity. For
details, see Gravity (p. 203).

The force due to gravity acts through the specified center of mass. For details, see Center of Mass (p. 204).

19.1.2.2. Location
Specify all 2D regions (belonging to fluid domains) that physically contact the faces of the rigid body.
The forces and torques exerted by the fluid on all of these faces will contribute to the motion of the
rigid body. Note that if the rigid body is defined as an immersed solid, then the location is automatically
just the location of the immersed solid, and no further location setting is required.

To have these faces move automatically in accordance with the rigid body solution, you must also
specify that these faces have mesh motion provided by the rigid body solution. To do this, use the
Boundary Details tab in the details view for the boundary containing the faces. Additional faces or
mesh elements, which do not form part of the rigid body, can also have their mesh motion partially or
wholly specified by the rigid body solution. To do this, use the Boundary Details tab for boundaries
and the Mesh Motion tab for subdomains. Applying the rigid body solution to additional faces or mesh
elements could be used, for example, to help control the way the mesh distorts as the rigid body moves.

19.1.2.3. Coordinate Frame

You should specify a stationary coordinate frame that has its origin at the center of mass of the (phys-
ical) rigid body when the body is in its position at the start of the simulation. The coordinate frame you
specify must have the same orientation as the axes used to define the mass moment of inertia of the
body in its initial position (see Mass Moment of Inertia (p. 201)). In this documentation, this coordinate
frame is referred to as the rigid body coordinate frame. The position and orientation of the rigid body
are always calculated relative to this coordinate frame, and all other settings for the rigid body object
(for example, gravity and degrees of freedom) are with respect to this coordinate frame, unless otherwise
specified in this documentation.

If you choose a coordinate frame that does not have the position of the rigid body at the start of the
simulation, then you must specify an initial position for the rigid body (on the Initial Conditions tab)
that corresponds to the translation required to move the coordinate frame into the rigid body's initial
position. See Initial Conditions Tab (p. 203) for more information. Note that initial conditions settings
are not currently available for rigid bodies defined as immersed solids.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
200 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rigid Body User Interface

19.1.2.4. Mass Moment of Inertia

Specify absolute values of the components of the mass moment of inertia for the rigid body with respect
to a coordinate frame that:

• Has the same initial orientation as the rigid body coordinate frame

• Has its origin at the rigid body center of mass

• Moves rigidly with the rigid body.

The mass moment of inertia components are used to define the mass moment of inertia matrix described
in Rotational Equations of Motion in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

For example, YY Component is defined as:

and XY Component is defined as:

where the center of mass is given by , and dm is a differential element of mass.

19.1.3. Dynamics Tab

The Dynamics tab for the rigid body object contains settings for the following items that influence the
motion of the rigid body:

• External forces

• External torques

• Degrees of freedom of movement

• Gravity vector.

With the exception of Rotational Degrees of Freedom all dynamics settings are in comparison to the
rigid body coordinate frame.

The Dynamics tab has the following settings:

19.1.3.1. External Force Definitions

External forces other than gravity are specified in the External Force Definitions frame. Use the Add

new item and Remove selected item icons to add or remove external force definitions from the
list.

Each external force definition has one of the following options:

• None

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 201
Rigid Bodies

This setting deactivates the external force.

• Spring

These settings enable you to set up a spring force that is applied to the rigid body. Specify the
neutral position with respect to the rigid body coordinate frame via the Linear Spring Origin settings.
Whenever the center of mass of the rigid body is at the Linear Spring Origin, the applied spring
force is zero. The spring force develops as the center of mass of the rigid body moves away from the
neutral position, with a force-to-displacement ratio specified by the Linear Spring Constant. For
details on how the center of mass is located, see Center of Mass (p. 204).

• Value

These settings enable you to specify an external force using Cartesian force components (along the
principal axes of the rigid body coordinate frame).

The external forces are applied through the center of mass of the rigid body so that they cause transla-
tional accelerations only (and not any rotational accelerations).

19.1.3.2. External Torque Definitions

External torques are specified in the External Torque Definitions frame (in the details view). Use the

Add new item and Remove selected item icons to add or remove external torque definitions from
the list.

Each external torque definition has one of the following options:

• None

This setting deactivates the external torque.

• Spring

These settings enable you to set up a spring torque that is applied to the rigid body. Specify the
neutral orientation (with respect to the rigid body coordinate frame) via the Equilibrium Orientation
settings. You define the orientation using three angular displacements (specifically, Euler angles),
which are applied by the software using the ZYX convention:

– The Euler Angle Z setting modifies the orientation by a rotation about the Z axis (using the right-hand
rule to determine the direction).

– The Euler Angle Y setting then further modifies the orientation by a rotation about the (modified) Y axis
(using the right-hand rule to determine the direction).

– The Euler Angle X setting then further modifies the orientation by a rotation about the (twice modified)
X axis (using the right-hand rule to determine the direction).

These Euler angles are described in more detail in Rigid Body Motion in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Whenever the orientation of the rigid body matches that specified by the Equilibrium Orientation
settings, the applied spring torque is zero. The spring torque develops as the rigid body rotates away
from the neutral orientation, with a torque-to-angular-displacement ratio specified by the Torsional
Spring Constant settings.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
202 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rigid Body User Interface

The torque develops due to changes in Euler angles, but is applied on the corresponding axes of the
rigid body coordinate frame. The torque spring implementation described here is recommended for
use only when both the equilibrium orientation and the rigid body orientation can be described with
small Euler angles (a few degrees).

• Value

These settings enable you to specify an external torque using Cartesian torque components around
the principal axes of the rigid body coordinate frame.

19.1.3.3. Degrees of Freedom

19.1.3.3.1. Translational Degrees of Freedom
This setting determines the combination of axes along which the rigid body may translate. In this context,
the axes are those of the rigid body coordinate frame.

19.1.3.3.2. Rotational Degrees of Freedom

This setting determines the axes about which the rigid body may rotate. In this context, the axes are
of a coordinate frame that:

• Has the same initial orientation as the rigid body coordinate frame

• Has its origin at the rigid body center of mass

• Moves rigidly with the rigid body.

19.1.3.4. Gravity
Specify a gravity vector in the rigid body coordinate frame that defines the downward direction and
the magnitude of free-fall acceleration due to gravity.

19.1.4. Initial Conditions Tab

The Initial Conditions tab contains settings for initializing the rigid body solver. These settings are
described in the following subsections.

Note

These settings are not available for rigid bodies defined as immersed solids.

Note

For the settings on the Initial Conditions tab, the Automatic option provides initial values
of zero, and the Automatic with Value option provides initial values as specified. In both
cases, the values used at the beginning of a restarted run are taken from the results of the
previous run. When you restart a run, select Continue History From and choose initial values
from the previous results. To access this option, you should be in the Define Run dialog box
of CFX-Solver Manager and both Initial Values Specification and Continue History From
must be selected.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 203
Rigid Bodies

19.1.4.1. Center of Mass

These settings define the location (in the rigid body coordinate frame) of the center of mass of the rigid
body at the start of the simulation. These settings should be set with non-zero values only if the origin
of the rigid body coordinate frame is not at the center of mass of the rigid body at the start of the
simulation. If non-zero values are required, then they represent the translation from the origin of the
rigid body coordinate frame to the position of the rigid body center of mass at the start of the simulation.

Note

Setting non-zero values for the Center of Mass settings does not impose a mesh motion at
the start of the simulation; rather, the initial position of the mesh is assumed to represent
the physical location of the rigid body at the start of the simulation.

Note

It is recommended that you define a rigid body coordinate frame that has its origin located
at the initial center of mass of the rigid body (that is, the center of mass of the rigid body
as positioned in the initial mesh). You could then set all the Center of Mass settings on the
Initial Conditions tab to zero (or select the Automatic option to set the initial values to
zero automatically).

19.1.4.2. Linear Velocity

These settings initialize the translational velocity of the rigid body in the rigid body coordinate frame.
The velocity components are taken as being along the principal axes of the rigid body coordinate frame.

19.1.4.3. Angular Velocity

These settings initialize the angular velocity of the rigid body in the rigid body coordinate frame. The
angular velocity components are taken as being about the principal axes of the rigid body coordinate
frame, using the right-hand rule to establish direction.

19.1.4.4. Linear Acceleration

These settings initialize the translational acceleration of the rigid body in the rigid body coordinate
frame. The acceleration components are taken as being along the principal axes of the rigid body co-
ordinate frame.

19.1.4.5. Angular Acceleration

These settings initialize the angular acceleration of the rigid body in the rigid body coordinate frame.
The angular acceleration components are taken as being about the principal axes of the rigid body
coordinate frame, using the right-hand rule to establish direction.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
204 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 20: Units and Dimensions
This chapter describes:
20.1. Units Syntax
20.2. Using Units in CFX-Pre
20.3. Setting the Solution Units

20.1. Units Syntax

Dimensional quantities are defined in units or a combination of units. For example, mass can have units
of [kg], [g] or [lb] (and many others); pressure can have units of [atm], [N m^-2] and [Pa] (and many
others).

The general units syntax in CFX is defined as [multiplier|unit|^power] where multiplier is a multiplying
quantity (such as mega, pico, centi, and so on), unit is the unit string (kg, m, J, and so on), and power
is the power to which the unit is raised. When typing units in expression, they must be enclosed by
square brackets, [...]. You will usually not see the brackets when selecting units from a list of commonly
used units. In general, units declarations must obey the following rules:

• A units string consists of one or more units quantities, each with an optional multiplier and optional power.
Each separate units quantity is separated by one or more spaces.

• Short forms of the multiplier are usually used. n stands for nano, μ stands for micro, c for centi, k for kilo, m
for milli, M for mega and G for giga.

• Powers are denoted by the ^ (caret) symbol. A power of 1 is assumed if no power is given.

Note

The / operator is not supported, so a negative power is used for unit division (for example,
[kg m^-3] corresponds to kilograms per cubic meter).

• If you enter units that are inconsistent with the physical quantity being described, then a dialog box will
appear informing you of the error, and the units will revert to the previous units.

• Units do not have to be given in terms of the fundamental units (mass, length, time, temperature, angle
and solid angle). For instance, Pa (Pascals) and J (Joules) are both acceptable as parts of unit strings.

• Units strings are case sensitive; for example, Kg and KG are both invalid parts of units strings.

To give the units of dynamic viscosity, which has the dimensions of Mass Length-1 Time-1, the unit
string [kg m^-1 s^-1] (or [lb ft^-1 hr^-1]) is valid.

Note

The following unit strings are invalid:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 205
Units and Dimensions

[kg/(metre sec)] [kg/(ms)]

[kg/m/s] [kg/(m.s)]
[kg/(m s)] [kg/(m*s)]
[kg/(m sec)] [lb/(ft hr)]

20.2. Using Units in CFX-Pre

There are a number of Details views in CFX-Pre that require the entry of physical quantities. For example,
when you set the physical properties for a fluid, or enter values for boundary conditions, the units in
which you input the data must be selected.

A list of possible units for the quantity of interest is provided, but you may want to use an expression
for the quantity, in which case you must specify the units. You can use any units that are consistent
with the quantity you are describing. The default units in CFX-Pre are SI.

The units selector is automatically filled in using the default units for the quantity. You can select other
commonly used units for that quantity from the drop-down list in the units selector.

20.2.1. Units Commonly Used in CFX

CFX-Pre provides you with a choice of several commonly used units to ease the task of specifying
quantities and converting results.

The full list of quantities where commonly used units are available is given in the following table:

Quantity Commonly used units

Velocity [m s^-1]

[km hr^-1]

[mile hr^-1]

[ft s^-1, knot]

Volumetric Flow [m^3 s^-1]

[litre s^-1]

[gallon hr^-1]

[gallonUSliquid hr^-1]
Mass Flow [kg s^-1]

[tonne s^-1]

[lb s^-1]
k (turbulence kinetic energy) [m^2 s^-2]

[J kg^-1]

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
206 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Using Units in CFX-Pre

Quantity Commonly used units

Epsilon (turbulence [m^2 s^-3]
dissipation rate)
[J kg^-1 s^-1]
Pressure [Pa]

[N m^-2]

[bar]

[torr]

[mm Hg]

[psi]

[psf ]
Concentration [m^-3]

[litre^-1]

[foot^-3]
Dynamic Viscosity [kg m^-1 s^-1]

[centipoise]

[g cm^-1 s^-1]

[N s m^-2]

[Pa s]

[dyne s cm^-2]

[lb ft^-1 hr^-1]

[lbf s ft^-2]
Thermal Conductivity [W m^-1 K^-1]

[cal cm^-1 s^-1 K^-1]

[BTU (ft^2 s (F/ft))^-1]

[BTU (ft^2 hr (F/ft))^-1]

Specific Heat Capacity [J kg^-1 K^-1]

[cal g^-1 K^-1]

[J g^-1 K^-1]

[BTU lb^-1 F^-1]

Thermal Expansivity [K^-1]
Kinematic Diffusivity [m^2 s^-1]

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 207
Units and Dimensions

Quantity Commonly used units

[cm^2 s^-1]
Acceleration [m s^-2]

[ft s^-2]
Temperature [K]

[C]

[R]

[F]
Density [kg m^-3]

[g cm^-3]

[lb ft^-3]
Mass Concentration [kg m^-3]

[g l^-1]
Mass Fraction [kg kg^-1]

[g kg^-1]
Length [m]

[mm]

[foot]

[in]
Mass Flow in [kg s^-1]

[tonne s^-1]

[lb s^-1]
Volumetric Flow in [m^3 s^-1]

[litre s^-1]

[gallon hr^-1]

[gallonUSliquid hr^-1]
Heat Transfer Coefficient [W m^-2 K^-1]
Heat Flux in [W m^-2]
Time [s]

[min]

[hr]
Shear Strain rate [s^-1]
Energy Source [W m^-3]

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
208 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting the Solution Units

Quantity Commonly used units

[kg m^-1 s^-3]
Energy Source Coefficient [W m-^3 K^-1]

[kg m^-1 s^-3 K^-1]

Momentum Source [kg m^-2 s^-2]
Momentum Source Lin. Coeff. [kg m^-3 s]
Momentum Source Quad. [kg m^-4]
Coeff.
Per Time [s^-1]
Angle [radian]

[degree]
Angular Velocity [radian s^-1]

[rev min^-1]
Specific Enthalpy [J kg^-1]

[m^2 s^-2]
Energy [J]

20.2.2. Defining Your Own Units

The commonly used units array is only a subset of the possible units you can use in CFX-Pre. Each unit
is a combination of one or more base dimensions. To specify your own units for a quantity, click the

Enter Expression icon for the associated variable and type the value and units into the data area
using the syntax. For details, see Units Syntax (p. 205).

There are many base units to choose from; most units in common use are valid as parts of unit strings.
You can specify any quantity in any valid units as long as you adhere to the units definition syntax.

20.3. Setting the Solution Units

There are two sets of units in CFX-Pre: the units visible when selecting Edit > Options from the main
menu, which are also used for mesh import and transformation, and the solution units set in the Solution
Units details view (available from the main menu under Insert > Solver). The solution units are the
units that the CFX-Solver writes in the results file. For details, see Units (p. 49).

Setting the solution units does not alter the units you can use to define quantities in CFX-Pre. These
are the units the results file is written in. Additionally, these are the units assumed in the summary at
the end of the out file, when data such as variable range and forces on walls is presented.

When postprocessing a results file in CFD-Post, the units used are not necessarily those used in the
results file. CFD-Post will convert to your preferred units.

Most common units can be used for the solution units; however, some important restrictions apply:

• The temperature solution units must be an absolute scale; for example, Kelvin [K] or Rankine [R]. Celsius and
Fahrenheit cannot be used. Temperature quantities elsewhere in CFX-Pre can be set in Celsius and Fahrenheit.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 209
Units and Dimensions

• The solution units must not be changed when restarting a run. The units in the initial guess file will assume
the units used in the current CFX-Solver definition (.def) file.

• You must not change the length units outside of CFX-Pre, for example, by editing the CCL in a CFX-Solver
input file. The mesh is written to the CFX-Solver input file using the length units; therefore, once the CFX-
Solver input file has been written, these units should not change.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
210 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 21: Solver Control
Solver Control is used to set parameters that control the CFX-Solver during the solution stage.

This chapter describes:

21.1. Basic Settings Tab
21.2. Equation Class Settings Tab
21.3. Particle Control Tab
21.4. Rigid Body Control Tab
21.5. Advanced Options Tab

You can find further help on setting solver parameters in Advice on Flow Modeling in the CFX-Solver
Modeling Guide.

21.1. Basic Settings Tab

The Basic Settings tab controls following common and simulation specific parameters:

• Basic Settings: Common (p. 211)

• Basic Settings for Steady-State Simulations and for Transient Blade Row Cases that use the Harmonic Balance
Transient Method (p. 213)

• Basic Settings for Transient Simulations (p. 214)

• Immersed Solid Control (p. 215)

21.1.1. Basic Settings: Common

21.1.1.1. Advection Scheme
For details, see Advection Scheme Selection in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

21.1.1.2. Transient Scheme

The Transient Scheme settings are available for steady-state simulations and for transient blade row
cases that use the Harmonic Balance transient method. For details, see Transient Scheme in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

21.1.1.3. Turbulence Numerics

The Turbulence Numerics options are First Order and High Resolution. The First Order
option uses Upwind advection and the First Order Backward Euler transient scheme. The
High Resolution option uses High Resolution advection and the High Resolution transient
scheme.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 211
Solver Control

For details, see Advection Scheme Selection in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide and Transient Scheme in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Note

The settings on the Equation Class Settings Tab (p. 216) will override the Turbulence Numerics
settings.

21.1.1.4. Convergence Criteria

For details, see Monitoring and Obtaining Convergence in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Residual Type: select either RMS or MAX.

• Residual Target: specify a value for the convergence.

For details, see Residual Type and Target Levels in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Conservation Target: optionally specify the fractional imbalance value. The default value is 0.01.

For details, see Conservation Target in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

21.1.1.5. Elapsed Wall Clock Time Control

Select the Maximum Run Time option if you want to stop your run after a maximum elapsed time
(wall clock time).

If you select this option the flow solver will automatically attempt to estimate the time to complete the
next timestep or outer loop iteration. The estimated time is the average time that it takes to solve a
previous iteration (includes the time to assemble and solve the linear equations, radiation and particle
tracking) plus the average time it is taking to write any Standard backup or transient files. The time
estimate currently does not include the time used by processes external to the flow solver. This includes
mesh refinement, interpolation and FSI with Mechanical.

21.1.1.6. Interrupt Control

Interrupt control conditions are used to specify criteria for stopping a solver run, independent of the
convergence criteria (residual target) and specified maximum number of time steps. Interrupt control
conditions are specified using logical expressions. These expressions are evaluated by CFX-Solver and
are reported in the CFX output file. After executing each iteration (of a steady-state case) or time step
(of a transient case), the solver evaluates all internal termination conditions and all user-defined interrupt
control conditions. If any of these conditions are true, then solver execution stops and the outcome is
written to the CFX output file.

Typically, interrupt control conditions are defined by single-valued logical expressions. However, single-
valued mathematical expressions can also be used. In this case, a single-valued mathematical expression
is considered to be true if and only if the result of the expression is greater than or equal to 0.5. Otherwise
it is deemed to have a value of false. For a discussion on logical expressions, see CFX Expression Language
Statements in the CFX Reference Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
212 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Basic Settings Tab

You should consider setting interrupt control conditions if you expect your case to exhibit transient
convergence behavior. For details and an example, see Using Interrupt Control in Cases with Transient
Convergence Behavior in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Note

To prevent a steady-state run from being interrupted before reaching the intended minimum
number of iterations, each interrupt condition should include a requirement that the minimum
number of iterations has been completed. For example, an interrupt condition could begin
with “aitern>5 && ” in order to require that a minimum number of 5 iterations has been
reached before the interrupt control condition can evaluate to true.

21.1.1.6.1. List Box

The list box is used to select interrupt control conditions for editing or deletion. Interrupt control con-
ditions can be created or deleted with icons that appear beside the list box.

21.1.1.6.1.1. [Interrupt Condition Name]

Enter a logical expression to specify an interrupt control condition.

21.1.1.7. Junction Box Routine

If you have created any Junction Box Routine objects, select those to include in this Solver run.

For details, see User Junction Box Routines in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

21.1.2. Basic Settings for Steady-State Simulations and for Transient Blade
Row Cases that use the Harmonic Balance Transient Method
21.1.2.1. Convergence Control: Min. Iterations
The minimum number of iterations the CFX-Solver will run.

21.1.2.2. Convergence Control: Max. Iterations

The maximum number of iterations the CFX-Solver will run.

For details, see Max. Iterations in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

21.1.2.3. Convergence Control: Fluid Timescale Control

Sets the method of time scale control for a simulation. For details, see Time Scale Control in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

For steady-state simulations, and for transient blade row simulations that use the Harmonic Balance
transient method, the following options are available:

• Auto Timescale: For details, see Auto Timescale in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide and Automatic Time
Scale Calculation in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

– Length Scale Option

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 213
Solver Control

Three options are available: Conservative, Aggressive or Specified Length Scale.

• Local Timescale Factor: For details, see Local Time Scale Factor in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Physical Timescale: For details, see Physical Time Scale in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

21.1.2.4. Convergence Control: Solid Timescale Control

For steady-state simulations, and for transient blade row simulations that use the Harmonic Balance
transient method, two options are available if the simulation involves a solid domain, and/or a solid
within a porous domain:

• Auto Timescale

• Physical Timescale

When Solid Timescale is set to Auto Timescale, the option Solid Timescale Factor is
available. For details, see Solid Time Scale Control in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

21.1.3. Basic Settings for Transient Simulations

21.1.3.1. Convergence Control
You will have already specified the number of timesteps under Analysis Type. For details, see Analysis
Type (p. 109).

21.1.3.1.1. Min. Coeff. Loops

This option determines the minimum number of iterations per timestep, and has a default value of 1.

Important

If a compressible transient flow is undertaken with only one iteration per time step, then the
solution can be incorrect if the Heat Transfer option is not set to Total Energy, or if heat
transfer is not included in the simulation. This is due to the CFX-Solver not extrapolating the
pressure at the start of the time step in these circumstances. This means that density is not
extrapolated, and so the solver cannot calculate an accurate value for the time derivative of
density on the first iteration. The workaround for this problem is to either run with at least
two iterations per time step, or to use the Total Energy option for Heat Transfer.

21.1.3.1.2. Max. Coeff. Loops

This option determines the maximum number of iterations per timestep, and has a default value of 10.
For details, see Max. Iter. Per Step in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

21.1.3.1.3. Fluid Timescale Control

Coefficient Loops is the only available option.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
214 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Basic Settings Tab

21.1.3.1.4. Solid Timescale Control

To control the solid timescale for transient runs (including transient blade row runs), use the controls
provided in the details view for the solid domain, on the Solver Control tab. For details, see Timescale
Control for Solid Domains (Transient Cases; Transient Blade Row Cases with Harmonic Balance) (p. 147).

21.1.4. Immersed Solid Control

The immersed solid is represented as a source term in the fluid equations that drives the fluid velocity
to match the solid velocity. The size of the source term is controlled by the Momentum Source Scaling
Factor setting, which can be set globally (in the global Solver Control settings) or for individual im-
mersed solids (on the immersed solid domain Solver Control tab). The default value of 10 is acceptable
most of the time. If robustness problems are encountered, the scaling factor may be decreased (for
example by a factor of 2), but at the expense of accuracy; the difference between the fluid velocity and
the specified solid velocity will generally increase, even if only by a small amount.

Boundary Model has two options:

• None

This is the default option.

• Modified Forcing

This option enables modifications to the immersed solid source term to take better account of the
boundaries of the immersed solid and their effect on the flow.

If you set Boundary Model to Modified Forcing, then the Boundary Tracking setting is available.

The Boundary Tracking setting has two options:

• Boundary Face Extrusion

Once Boundary Model is selected, this is the default option.

The Boundary Face Extrusion option requires you to specify two settings that must be set
appropriately so that each near-wall node can be reliably projected onto the best location on the
immersed boundary face. These settings are:

– Extrusion Distance

This is the distance by which each immersed boundary face is extruded outward from, and normal
to, the immersed boundary to form an imaginary volume. A bounding box, that consists of faces
of constant x, y, and z coordinate, is then constructed around each imaginary volume. If a near-
wall node falls within the bounding box, then CFX-Solver will project that near-wall node normal
to and onto the plane of the boundary face. If the projected location lies outside the face, other
mechanisms take effect to find the nearest suitable projected location.

The value of Extrusion Distance should be of the order of magnitude of the length of a fluid mesh
element in the vicinity of the immersed boundary.

– Extrusion Tolerance

This is a factor by which the solver will multiply the edge length of the bounding box for each
imaginary volume. The bounding box is mentioned in the description for the Extrusion Distance

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 215
Solver Control

setting. An overly large value will cause near-wall nodes to be mapped to locations on boundary
faces that are not necessarily the closest face.

The default value for Extrusion Tolerance is 0.01.

• Search Through Elements

When using this option, CFX-Solver will search through elements near the immersed boundary and
project the near-immersed-boundary fluid nodes onto the face edge or vertices of the immersed
solid element. This option requires no user input.

This method is less accurate than the Boundary Face Extrusion option, but can be used for
cases where no suitable Extrusion Distance can be determined.

For details, see Immersed Boundary Tracking in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

21.2. Equation Class Settings Tab

Equation class settings enable you to control some aspects of the CFX-Solver on an equation class basis.
For example, you can set:

• A different time scale

• A different advection scheme

• A different transient scheme

• Convergence control parameters for each class of equation

• Criteria parameters for each class of equation

You might want to make such changes if you suspect that a convergence problem is caused by a par-
ticular equation class.

• Select the equation class for which to specify settings.

• The settings in this tab are a subset of those found on the Basic Settings tab (see Basic Settings: Com-
mon (p. 211)).

For details, see Timestep Selection in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide and Advection Scheme Selection
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

The settings you specify on this form will override those on the Basic Settings tab. Any equation classes
that are unspecified will use the parameters set on the Basic Settings tab. The number and type of
equation classes depends on the specific physics of the problem.

For details, see Controlling the Timescale for Each Equation in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Note

For a free surface simulation, you cannot set the advection scheme for the volume fraction
(vf ) equation class because the CFX-Solver uses a special compressive advection scheme.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
216 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rigid Body Control Tab

21.3. Particle Control Tab

This section is visible when particle tracking has been selected. For details, see Particle Solver Control
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

21.4. Rigid Body Control Tab

The following options handle control of the rigid body solver.

The Update Frequency setting controls when the rigid body solver updates the position of the rigid
body. The options are:

• Every Iteration (steady-state simulations only)

This option causes the rigid body solver to update the position of the rigid body at the beginning
of each iteration.

• Every Time Step (transient simulations only)

This option causes the rigid body solver to update the position of the rigid body at the beginning
of each time step.

This option is recommended only for weakly-coupled systems (for example, where fluid flow
changes within a single time step have little effect on the rigid body motion) or when the time
step is very small.

• Every Coefficient Loop (transient simulations only)

This option:

– Causes the rigid body solver to update the position of the rigid body at the beginning of each coef-
ficient loop within each time step.

– Is recommended when there is tight coupling between the fluid flow and the motion of the rigid
body.

– Is more computationally expensive than the Every Time Step option

– Can cause issues if the flow solver requires several coefficient loop iterations to stabilize the applied
forces/torques between calls to the rigid body solver.

• General Coupling Control

This option causes the rigid body solver to update the position of the rigid body during each
"stagger" (or coupling) iteration.

During every stagger iteration, the following sequence occurs:

1. The rigid body solver reads the latest calculated forces and torques.

2. The rigid body solver solves to determine the new rigid body state (position, orientation, velocity,
and so on).

3. The CFX flow solver reads the new rigid body state.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 217
Solver Control

4. The CFX flow solver solves all the field equations, including mesh motion where appropriate, by
performing outer loop iterations (steady-state cases) or coefficient loop iterations (transient cases)
until either the maximum number of iterations/coefficient loops is reached, or until all the field
equations have converged. The mesh motion solution uses the latest rigid body state in order to
calculate the mesh motion on all boundaries or subdomains set to use the rigid body solution. If
the rigid body is an immersed solid, then the latest rigid body state is used to calculate the motion
of the immersed solid domain.

Stagger iterations are repeated until the maximum number of stagger iterations is reached or
until the time step (transients runs) or simulation (steady-state runs) is deemed to have converged,
when the following criteria are met:

– The rigid body solver has converged (angular equations only),

– The force, torque and mesh motion data transferred between the CFX flow solver and the rigid body
solver satisfy the appropriate convergence criteria, AND

– All the CFX field equations (mesh motion, mass and momentum, energy, and so on) have converged
to the appropriate convergence criteria.

When the time step (transient runs) is converged, then this guarantees an implicit solution of
all solution fields for each time step, providing the most stability when there is a strong coupling
between the fluid flow and the motion of the rigid body.

The Internal Coupling Step Control settings set limits on the minimum and maximum number
of stagger iterations.

When the Every Iteration, Every Coefficient Loop, or General Coupling Control
option is selected, the Internal Coupling Data Transfer Control settings are available. These settings
include:

• Mesh Motion Data Transfer Control

• Force Data Transfer Control

• Torque Data Transfer Control

For each of these Internal Coupling Data Transfer Control settings, you may:

• Optionally specify an Under Relaxation Factor for aiding convergence. The default value is 0.75 for all three
transferred quantities. If a case has difficulty converging due to overshoots in the force, torque and/or mesh
motion quantities passed between the two solvers, then the under-relaxation factor for one or more
quantities can be reduced to damp down the overshoots. Values that are too small will tend to increase the
number of iterations needed for convergence. On the other hand, for a case where the force, torque and
mesh motion are steady and do not change much from time step to time step, it may be possible to raise
the under-relaxation factors to 1 to speed up convergence.

Note

The rigid body solver does not apply under-relaxation to Mesh Motion Data Transfer
Control in the following situations:

– For all time steps when Update Frequency is set to Every Time Step

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
218 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Rigid Body Control Tab

– For the initial coefficient loop when Update Frequency is set to Every Coefficient
Loop

– For the initial stagger iteration when Update Frequency is set to General Coupling
Control

Note

The rigid body solver also does not apply under-relaxation to Force Data Transfer Control
and Torque Data Transfer Control, in the following situation:

– For all time steps when Update Frequency is set to Every Time Step

• Optionally specify a Convergence Target.

The convergence target is the target value of the convergence measures described below.

– For Mesh Motion Data Transfer Control, the convergence measure is the maximum of:

→ The distance from the previous to the current center of mass, divided by the greater of the previous
and current distances from the center of mass to the rigid body coordinate frame origin. Here,“previous”
refers to the previous stagger iteration, coefficient loop, and so on — whenever the rigid body solver
was last called.

→ , where , n refers to the current iteration (stagger iteration,

coefficient loop, and so on — whenever the rigid body solver was last called), refers to the previous
iteration, and is the orientation quaternion, with q0 being the scalar component and
q1 , q2 , q3 being the vector components. Here, all quantities are with respect to the rigid body coordinate
frame.

– For Force Data Transfer Control, the convergence measure is:

The magnitude of the change (from the previous value to the current value) in net force divided
by the greater of the previous magnitude of the net force and the current magnitude of the net
force, where “previous” refers to the previous stagger iteration, coefficient loop, and so on —
whenever the rigid body solver was last called.

– For Torque Data Transfer Control, the convergence measure is:

The magnitude of the change (from the previous value to the current value) in net torque divided
by the greater of the previous magnitude of the net torque and the current magnitude of the net
torque, where “previous” refers to the previous stagger iteration, coefficient loop, and so on —
whenever the rigid body solver was last called.

The convergence measures are plotted on the Rigid Body Convergence tab in CFX-Solver Manager
when running a simulation that involves the rigid body solver. For details on the plots available for
such runs, see Monitor Plots related to Rigid Bodies in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

The Angular Momentum Equation Control settings are:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 219
Solver Control

• Integration Method

An iterative process is used to calculate the solution to the angular momentum equation.

Choose one of the following options to control the integration method for this process:

– First Order Backward Euler

This option provides first-order accuracy, and is vulnerable to gimbal lock problems. For details,
see First Order Backward Euler in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

– Simo Wong

This option provides second-order accuracy. For details, see Simo Wong Algorithm in the CFX-
Solver Theory Guide.

The Iteration Convergence Criterion > Iteration Convergence setting controls the degree
to which an orientation must remain the same between successive iterations in order for the
solution to be considered converged. The value is a normalized quantity; the default should
be sufficient for most purposes.

The Maximum Number of Iterations > Max. Iterations setting (which controls the maximum
number of iterations used by the Simo Wong integration method) can be increased if you see
any warnings in the solver output that indicate a lack of convergence for the integration
method.

21.5. Advanced Options Tab

The parameters on the Advanced Options tab should not need to be changed for most simulations.

Dynamic Model Control

When Global Dynamic Model Control is selected, it enables some special modes to be implemented
in the solver for the first few iterations or timesteps. For details, see Advanced Options: Dynamic Model
Control in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

For details on Turbulence Control, see Turbulence Control in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

For details on Combustion Control, see Advanced Combustion Controls in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

For details on Hydro Control, see Hydro Control in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Pressure Level Information

Sets an X/Y/Z location for reference pressure and a pressure level.

For details, see Pressure Level Information in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Thermal Radiation Control

For details, see Thermal Radiation Control in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
220 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Options Tab

Body Forces
Under this option, Volume-Weighted should be generally used except for free surface cases.

For details, see Body Forces in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Interpolation Scheme
For details, see Interpolation Scheme in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Multicomponent Energy Diffusion

This option is available when a multicomponent flow is used with a heat transfer equation (that is,
thermal or total energy). For details, see Multicomponent Energy Diffusion in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide. The possible options are:

• Automatic: uses unity Lewis number when no component diffusivities specified and no algebraic slip
model; uses generic assembly when necessary

• Generic Assembly: sets default component diffusivities to unity Schmidt number Sc = 1; generic treatment
of energy diffusion term with support for user defined component diffusivities and algebraic slip model

• Unity Lewis Number: sets Le = 1; single diffusion term, rather than separate term for contribution of
every component, resulting in faster solver runs; the default molecular diffusion coefficient for components
is derived from thermal conductivity

Note

Forcing unity Lewis number mode when not physically valid may lead to inconsistent energy
transport. Therefore this setting is not recommended.

Temperature Damping
For details, see Temperature Damping in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Velocity Pressure Coupling

The Rhie Chow Option controls the details of the Rhie Chow pressure dissipation algorithm. Fourth
Order ensures that the dissipation term vanishes rapidly under mesh refinement. However, it can
sometimes induce wiggles in the pressure and velocity fields; for example, near shocks. The Second
Order option damps out these wiggles more rapidly, but is also less accurate. The High Resolution
option uses Fourth Order as much as possible, but blends to Second Order near pressure extrema. It is
a good choice for high speed flow. The default is Fourth Order for most simulations, but High
Resolution is automatically chosen if High Speed Numerics is activated under Compressibility
Control on the Solver Control tab. The High Resolution option may occasionally be useful in
other situations as well. For example, if you observe the simulation diverging and continuity residuals
are significantly higher than the momentum residuals prior to divergence.

Compressibility Control
The following options control parameters that affect solver convergence for compressible flows.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 221
Solver Control

The Total Pressure Option controls the algorithm used for static-to-total conversions (and vice versa).
There are three possible settings:

Incompressible
The incompressible assumption is used in all situations.

Automatic
The total pressure is calculated depending on the equation of state.

Unset
This is equivalent to Automatic when the total energy model is used, and Incompressible otherwise.

For further details, see Total Pressure in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

The Automatic option may experience robustness problems for slightly compressible fluids (such as
compressible liquids). In such cases, you should consider using the Incompressible option instead.

When the High Speed Numerics option is selected, special numerics are activated to improve solver
behavior for high-speed flow, such as flow with shocks. This setting causes the following behavioral
changes:

• It activates a special type of dissipation at shocks to avoid a transverse shock instability called the carbuncle
effect (which may occur if the mesh is finer in the transverse direction than in the flow direction).

• It activates the High Resolution Rhie Chow option to reduce pressure wiggles adjacent to shocks.

• It sets the nodal pressure gradients to zero at all pressure boundaries as well as openings.

• For steady-state flows, it modifies the default relaxation factors for the advection blend factor and gradients.

The Clip Pressure for Properties option enables the solver to accept negative absolute pressures in
the converged solution. For simulations involving compressible flow, the absolute pressure should not
be negative. However, the pressure field required to satisfy the governing equations on a finite mesh
may not necessarily satisfy this condition. By default, the solver is robust to a pressure field that may
want to temporarily lead to negative pressures, but not if negative pressures are present in the converged
solution. The solver can be made robust to negative absolute pressures in the converged solution by
activating this parameter, which clips the absolute pressure to a finite value when evaluating pressure-
dependent properties such as density.

Multiphase Control
The following options handle control of solver details specific to multiphase flows.

When the Volume Fraction Coupling option is set to Segregated, the solver solves equations for
velocity and pressure in a coupled manner, followed by solution of the phasic continuity equations for
the volume fractions. With the Coupled option, the solver implicitly couples the equations for velocity,
pressure, and volume fraction in the same matrix. The coupled volume fraction algorithm is particularly
beneficial for buoyancy-dominated flows, such as buoyant free surface problems. The coupled volume
fraction algorithm is also extremely beneficial when used in conjunction with models that include forces
that are proportional to volume fraction gradients, such as the turbulence dispersion force in Eulerian
multiphase flows and the solids pressure force in Eulerian multiphase models of granular flows (see In-
terphase Momentum Transfer Models in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide). For models of this nature, conver-

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
222 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Options Tab

gence of the segregated volume fraction algorithm tends to require much smaller physical time scales
than are required by the coupled volume fraction algorithm.

Note

If you encounter convergence difficulties when using a turbulence dispersion model in con-
junction with Segregated volume fraction coupling, then you should consider reducing
the physical time scale, or switching to Coupled volume fraction coupling.

Note

If the residuals fail to drop reasonably well while solving a case that uses the Coupled option,
it may be beneficial to reduce the mass flow under-relaxation parameter, relax mass,
below its default value. For details on this parameter, see Convergence Control Parameters
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

The Initial Volume Fraction Smoothing option can be set to None or Volume-Weighted. If the
initial conditions for volume fraction have a discontinuity, startup robustness problems may occur.
Choosing Volume-Weighted smoothing of these volume fractions may improve startup robustness.

Intersection Control
You can use the options described in this section to control the intersection of non-matching meshes.
The parameters that you set here are applied to all interfaces where Intersection Control settings have
not been applied individually in domain interface definitions. (See Intersection Control (p. 157) to learn
how to apply Intersection Control settings to individual interfaces.)

CFX provides the GGI (General Grid Interface) capability, which determines the connectivity between
the meshes on either side of the interface using an intersection algorithm. In general, two intersection
methods are provided:

• Bitmap Intersection:

Two faces on either side of the interface which have to be intersected are both drawn into an
equidistant 2D pixel map. The area fractions are determined by counting the number of pixels that
reside inside both intersected faces (that is, within the union of the two faces). The area fraction for
a face is then calculated by dividing the number of overlapping pixels by the total number of pixels
in the face. This method is very robust.

• Direct Intersection (Default):

Two faces on either side of the interface are intersected using the Sutherland-Hodgeman clipping
algorithm. This method computes the exact area fractions using polygon intersection, and is much
faster and more accurate than the bitmap method.

Note

• If Direct (one-to-one) mesh connectivity is available, the solver will ignore the Intersection
Control option and will instead use a 'topological intersection', that is, use the one-to-one inform-
ation to generate the intersection data.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 223
Solver Control

• If you are restarting a run, the intersection step is skipped and the intersection data is read from
the results file. This behavior can be overridden by setting the expert parameter force inter
section to True.

The Bitmap Resolution controls the number of pixels used to fill the 2D pixel map (see description of
the bitmap intersection method above). The higher this number, the more accurate the final calculation
of the area fractions. In general, the default resolution of 100 should be sufficient but large differences
in the mesh resolution on both sides of the interface as well as other mesh anomalies may require the
bitmap resolution to be increased. Larger numbers will cause longer intersection times, for example,
doubling the bitmap resolution will approximately quadruple the GGI intersection time.

When the Permit No Intersection option is set, the solver will run when there is no overlap between
the two sides of an interface. This parameter is mainly useful for transient cases where interface geometry
is closing and opening during the run. For example, transient rotor-stator cases with rotating valves, or
moving mesh cases where the GGI interface changes from overlap to non-overlap during the simulation
both can exhibit this type of behavior. This parameter is not switched on by default.

The Discernible Fraction option controls the minimum area fraction below which partially intersected
faces are discarded. The following default values used by the solver depend on the intersection method:

• Bitmap Intersection: 1/(Bitmap Resolution)^1.5

• Direct Intersection: 1.0E-06

The idea is that intersection inaccuracies should not lead to tiny area fractions that have no impact on
the solution.

The Edge Scale Factor option is used to control the detection of degenerate faces. Degenerate faces
are detected by comparing the face edge lengths with a characteristic length of the volume touching
the face. Degenerated faces will not be intersected and therefore, intersected faces of zero size are
discarded so that problems with the 2D projection of those faces are avoided.

The Periodic Axial Radial Tolerance option is used when determining if the surface represented by
the interface is a constant axial or radial surface. For a rotational periodic GGI interface, the solver ensures
that the ratio of the radial and axial extent compared to the overall extent of each interface side is
bigger than the specified value and therefore, the interface vertices do not have the same radial or
axial positions.

The Circumferential Normalized Coordinates Option is used to set the type of normalization applied
to the axial or radial position coordinates (η). Mesh coordinate positions on GGI interfaces using pitch
change are transformed into a circumferential (θ) and axial or radial position (η). The η coordinates span
from hub to shroud and are normalized to values between 0 and 1. In cases where the hub and/or
shroud curves do not match on side 1 and side 2, different approaches are available to calculate the
normalized η coordinates based on side local or global minimum and maximum η values:

• Mixed (Default for Fluid Fluid interfaces): Normalization of η is based on local minimum and maximum η
values as well as the η range of side 1. This method forces the hub curves on side 1 and 2 to align. Non-
overlap regions adjacent to the shroud may be produced if the shroud curves are not the same.

• Global (Default for Fluid Solid Interfaces): Normalization of η is based on global minimum and maximum
eta values. This method intersects side 1 and 2 unchanged from their relative positions in physical coordinates.
If the hub and shroud curves do not match then non-overlap regions will be produced.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
224 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Options Tab

• Local: Normalization of η is done locally for each side of the interface. This method will always produce an
intersection of side 1 and 2, but may cause undesirable scaling of the geometry in some cases.

The Face Search Tolerance Factor is a scaling factor applied to the element sized based separation
distance used to find candidates for intersection. For a given face on side 1 of the interface, candidate
faces for intersection are identified on side 2 using an octree search algorithm. The octree search uses
this tolerance to increase the sizes of the bounding boxes used to identify candidates. Making this
parameter larger will increase the size of the bounding boxes, resulting in possible identification of
more candidates.

The Face Intersection Depth Factor is a scaling factor applied to the element sized based separation
distance used when performing the direct or bitmap intersection. The final intersection of faces is only
applied to those faces that are closer to each other than a specified distance. This distance is calculated
as the sum of the average depth of the elements on side 1 and side 2 of the interface. This factor is
applied as a scaling on the default distance. It might be necessary to adjust this factor if the normal
element depth on the two interfaces sides varies a lot, or side 1 and 2 of the interface are separated
by thin regions (for example, thin fin type geometries).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 225
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
226 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 22: Output Control
The Output Control panel is used to manage the way files are written by the solver. If a transient sim-
ulation is running, you can control which variables will be written to transient results files, and how
frequently files will be created. Results can be written at particular stages of the solution by writing
backup files after a specified number of iterations. These backup files can be loaded into CFD-Post so
that the development of the results can be examined before the solution is fully converged. Monitor
data can also be written to track the solution progress. Particle tracking data can be written for postpro-
cessing in CFD-Post. Surface data can be exported.

This chapter describes:

22.1. User Interface
22.2. Working with Output Control

22.1. User Interface

The Output Control dialog box is accessible by clicking Output Control , by selecting Insert >
Solver > Output Control, or by editing the Output Control object listed in the tree view under
Simulation > Solver. You can also edit the CCL directly to change the object definition; for details,
see Using the Command Editor (p. 375).

The topics in this section include:

22.1.1. Results Tab
22.1.2. Backup Tab
22.1.3.Transient Results Tab
22.1.4.Transient Statistics Tab
22.1.5. Monitor Tab
22.1.6. Particles Tab
22.1.7. Export Results Tab
22.1.8. Common Settings

22.1.1. Results Tab

The Results tab for the Output Control object contains settings that control the content of the
results file that is written at the end of a solver run. In the case of a transient run, the results file contains
information from the last timestep.

22.1.1.1. Option
See Option (p. 254).

22.1.1.2. File Compression

See File Compression (p. 255).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 227
Output Control

22.1.1.3. Output Variables List

See Output Variables List (p. 256).

22.1.1.4. Output Equation Residuals Check Box

See Output Equation Residuals Check Box (p. 256).

22.1.1.5. Output Boundary Flows Check Box

See Output Boundary Flows Check Box (p. 256).

22.1.1.6. Output Variable Operators Check Box

See Output Variable Operators Check Box (p. 256).

22.1.1.7. Extra Output Variables List

When the Extra Output Variables List is selected, you can specify any variable that is not included in
the results file by default. For more details, see Variables in ANSYS CFX in the CFX Reference Guide.

22.1.1.8. Output Particle Boundary Vertex Fields Check Box

See Output Particle Boundary Vertex Fields Check Box (p. 256).

22.1.2. Backup Tab

The Backup tab contains settings that specify the content of backup files, and the timesteps at which
the files are written. The purpose of the backup file is to ensure that a solver run can be restarted.
Backup files can be used to restart the simulation from the point where the error occurred, saving time
and computational resources.

22.1.2.1. List Box

This list box is used to select Backup Results objects for editing or deletion. Backup Results
objects can be created or deleted with the icons that appear beside the list box.

The union of all requested backup file content, across all Backup Results objects applicable for a
given iteration, is written as a single backup file for that iteration. If no backup file content is specified
for a given iteration in any Backup Results object, then no backup file is written for that iteration.

22.1.2.2. [Backup Results Name]

22.1.2.2.1. Option
See Option (p. 254).

22.1.2.2.2. File Compression

See File Compression (p. 255).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
228 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

22.1.2.2.3. Output Variables List

See Output Variables List (p. 256).

22.1.2.2.4. Output Equation Residuals Check Box

See Output Equation Residuals Check Box (p. 256).

22.1.2.2.5. Output Boundary Flows Check Box

See Output Boundary Flows Check Box (p. 256).

22.1.2.2.6. Output Variable Operators Check Box

See Output Variable Operators Check Box (p. 256).

22.1.2.2.7. Extra Output Variables List

When the Extra Output Variables List is selected, you can specify any variable that is not included in
the results file by default. For more details, see Variables in ANSYS CFX in the CFX Reference Guide.

22.1.2.2.8. Output Particle Boundary Vertex Fields Check Box

See Output Particle Boundary Vertex Fields Check Box (p. 256).

22.1.2.2.9. Include Tracks of One-way Coupled Particles Check Box

Select or clear the check box to include or exclude tracks of one-way coupled particles to be written
to backup files. This option is available only for cases that involve one-way coupled particles. For details,
see Particle Fluid Pair Coupling Options in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

22.1.2.2.10. Output Frequency: Option

See Output Frequency Options (p. 257).

22.1.2.3. Backup Data Retention

22.1.2.3.1. Option
• Delete Old Files

Deletes the previous backup file when a new backup file is created. This only corresponds to backups
created with a specified output frequency. It does not apply to backup files created manually during
a run. It also does not apply to backup files requested by a System Coupling system.

• Keep All Files

Previous backup files are not deleted when a new backup file is created.

22.1.3. Transient Results Tab

The Trn Results tab for the Output Control object contains settings that specify the content of
transient results files, and the timesteps at which the files are written. Each transient results file contains

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 229
Output Control

results for a particular timestep. The transient results files are written in addition to the full results file
that will be written at the end of the transient simulation.

The settings on the Transient Results tab are analogous to those on the Backup tab; for details, see
Backup Tab (p. 228).

22.1.3.1. List Box

This list box is used to select Transient Results objects for editing or deletion. Transient
Results objects can be created or deleted with the icons that appear beside the list box.

Only one transient results file is written at a given time regardless of how many transient results file
objects exist. Each Transient Results object will add information to the transient results file for
that timestep. Thus, the resulting transient results file is a union of the data requested by all Transient
Results objects for that timestep.

22.1.3.2. [Transient Results Name]

22.1.3.2.1. Option
See Option (p. 254).

22.1.3.2.2. File Compression

See File Compression (p. 255).

22.1.3.2.3. Output Variables List

See Output Variables List (p. 256).

22.1.3.2.4. Include Mesh

When the Selected Variables option is selected, the Include Mesh check box will be selected, in which
case the mesh data will be written to the results file. Using the Include Mesh option will enable post-
processing of the results file and will make restarting possible.

22.1.3.2.5. Output Equation Residuals Check Box

See Output Equation Residuals Check Box (p. 256).

22.1.3.2.6. Output Boundary Flows Check Box

See Output Boundary Flows Check Box (p. 256).

22.1.3.2.7. Output Variable Operators Check Box

See Output Variable Operators Check Box (p. 256).

22.1.3.2.8. Extra Output Variables List

When the Extra Output Variables List is selected, you can specify any variable that is not included in
the results file by default. For more details, see Variables in ANSYS CFX in the CFX Reference Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
230 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

22.1.3.2.9. Output Particle Boundary Vertex Fields Check Box

See Output Particle Boundary Vertex Fields Check Box (p. 256).

22.1.3.2.10. Output Frequency

See Output Frequency Options (p. 257).

22.1.3.3. Transient Blade Row Results

Transient Blade Row Results settings are available when there is at least one disturbance defined in
the details view of the Transient Blade Row Models object.

You can control the output of variables related to the Transient Blade Row model via the following
settings:

• Option

Choose the level of output: Essential, Selected Variables, or None.

• File Compression

Choose the level of file compression as a trade-off between file size and speed.

• Output Variables List

This setting is required for the Selected Variables option.

You can multi-select variables from a list (using the Ctrl key) to have them added to the output.

• Extra Output Variables List

This setting is available for the Essential option.

You can multi-select variables from a list (using the Ctrl key) to have them added to the output.

Data compression is based on a Fourier series. The Data Compression settings control the number of
Fourier coefficients to store in the output and the portion of the simulation over which these coefficients
are accumulated.

You can specify the number of Fourier coefficients to be stored in the output.

The Accumulate at Period setting controls when the Fourier Coefficients should start being accumulated.
The available options are:

• Moving Averages

The solver continuously accumulates and updates Fourier Coefficients during the run.

Note

Once you have specified the output for transient blade row results, there is no need to create
intermediate transient results files.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 231
Output Control

For instructions on setting up and using Transient Blade Row models, see Transient Blade Row Modeling
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

22.1.4. Transient Statistics Tab

The Trn Stats tab for the Output Control object contains settings that specify the transient statistics
data to be included in the results files; for details, see Working with Transient Statistics (p. 258).

22.1.4.1. List Box

This list box is used to select Transient Statistics objects for editing or deletion. Transient
Statistics objects can be created or deleted with the icons that appear beside the list box.

22.1.4.2. [Transient Statistics Name]

22.1.4.2.1. Option
The following statistics are evaluated at each node over the history of the simulation:

• Arithmetic Average

• Minimum

• Maximum

• Standard Deviation

• Root Mean Square

• Full

22.1.4.2.2. Output Variables List

See Output Variables List (p. 256).

If a selected output variable is a vector or a tensor, the selected operation Option is applied to each
component of the variable separately. The result for each component is included in the results file. For
example, if Velocity is selected as a variable, using the Maximum option, the results file will include
the maximum value of each of the three velocity components. Note that the maximum value of each
of the components will likely have occurred at different times during the simulation. Also note that the
magnitude of the resulting velocity components will not be the same as the maximum of the velocity
magnitude (the latter can be determined by using the Maximum option for an additional variable
defined to be the velocity magnitude).

22.1.4.2.3. Start Iteration List Check Box

This check box determines whether or not a Start Iteration List is used. If this check box is cleared,
statistics will start (or continue, for restart runs) accumulation during the first timestep of the current
run.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
232 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

22.1.4.2.3.1. Start Iteration List Check Box: Start Iteration List

Enter a comma-separated list of iteration numbers corresponding to the variables selected in the Output
Variables List. If the start iteration list contains fewer entries than the Output Variables List, then the
final start iteration in the list is applied for all remaining output variables.

The start iteration for a given transient statistic specifies the timestep index at which statistic accumu-
lation begins. Prior to that timestep, statistics are initialized, as outlined in Working with Transient
Statistics (p. 258).

Note

In the case of restarted transient runs, iteration numbers are interpreted as the total accumu-
lated timestep index rather than the index for the current run.

22.1.4.2.4. Stop Iteration List Check Box

This check box determines whether or not a Stop Iteration List is used. If this check box is cleared, the
statistics will continue accumulation until the end of the run.

22.1.4.2.4.1. Stop Iteration List Check Box: Stop Iteration List

Enter a comma-separated list of iteration numbers corresponding to the variables selected in the Output
Variables List. If the stop iteration list contains fewer entries than the Output Variables List, then the
final stop iteration in the list is applied for all remaining output variables.

The stop iteration for a given transient statistic specifies the timestep index at which statistic accumu-
lation ceases. After that timestep, statistics are simply not modified.

Note

In the case of restarted transient runs, start and stop iterations are interpreted as the total
accumulated timestep index rather than the index for the current run.

22.1.5. Monitor Tab

The Monitor tab for the Output Control object contains settings that specify monitor output. The
following types of information can be monitored as a solution proceeds:

• Primitive or derived solution variables

• Fluid Properties

• Expressions.

When monitoring expressions, the expression must evaluate to a single number; for details, see Working
with Monitors (p. 260).

22.1.5.1. Monitor Objects Check Box

This check box determines whether or not monitor data is generated as a solution proceeds. If it is se-
lected, the following settings are available:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 233
Output Control

22.1.5.1.1. Monitor Coeff. Loop Convergence

(applies only for transient cases)

This check box determines whether or not monitor data is output within coefficient (inner) loops. Re-
gardless of the setting, data will be output for each timestep.

22.1.5.1.2. Monitor Balances: Option

• Full

Mass, Momentum, and other balances are written to the solver monitor file.

• None

22.1.5.1.3. Monitor Forces: Option

• Full

Forces and moments on wall boundaries are written to the solver monitor file.

It is important to note that these forces and moments do not include reference pressure effects. You
can include reference pressure effects in the force calculation by setting the expert parameter in
clude pref in forces = t.

It is also important to note that for rotating domains in a transient run, forces and moments on wall
boundaries are evaluated in the reference frame fixed to the initial domain orientation. These
quantities are not influenced by any rotation that might occur during a transient run or when a rota-
tional offset is specified. However, results for rotating domains in a transient run may be in the rotated
position (depending on the setting of Options in CFD-Post) when they are subsequently loaded into
CFD-Post for postprocessing.

• None

22.1.5.1.4. Monitor Residuals: Option

• Full

RMS/max residuals are written to the solver monitor file.

• None

22.1.5.1.5. Monitor Totals: Option

• Full

Flow and source totals (integrals over boundaries) are written to the solver monitor file.

• None

22.1.5.1.6. Monitor Particles: Option

• Full

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
234 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

If Lagrangian Particle Tracking information is included in the simulation, force, momentum, energy,
mass flow rates, and source data for particles are written to the solver monitor file.

• None

22.1.5.1.7. Efficiency Output Check Box

This check box determines whether or not the device efficiency can be monitored in CFX-Solver Manager.
When selected it also activates field efficiency output to CFD-Post. If activated, the following information
must be specified:

22.1.5.1.7.1. Inflow Boundary

A single boundary condition region of type INLET.

22.1.5.1.7.2. Outflow Boundary

A single boundary condition region of type OUTLET.

22.1.5.1.7.3. Efficiency Type

Choose between Compression, Expansion, and Both Compression and Expansion.

For more information, see Activating Efficiency Output

22.1.5.1.7.4. Efficiency Calculation Method

For each of the efficiency types, two efficiency calculation options are possible: Total to Total and Total
to Static.

For more information, see Isentropic Efficiency and Total Enthalpy

22.1.5.1.8. Monitor Points And Expressions List Box

This list box is used to select monitor point and expression objects for editing or deletion. These objects
can be created or deleted with the icons that appear beside the list box.

22.1.5.1.8.1. [Monitor Name]: Option

• Cartesian Coordinates

Monitor point data includes variable values at the node closest to the specified point. A crosshair will
be displayed in the viewer to indicate the monitored node.

• Cylindrical Coordinates

Specify the monitor point location in terms of Position Axial Comp., Position Radial Comp., and
Position Theta Comp. values.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 235
Output Control

Monitor point data includes variable values at the node closest to the specified point. A crosshair will
be displayed in the viewer to indicate the monitored node.

Note

This option disables the ability to specify the points by picking in the Viewer.

• Expression

An expression is monitored.

22.1.5.1.8.2. [Monitor Name]: Output Variables List

(applies only when Option is set to Cartesian Coordinates or Cylindrical Coordinates)

Select the variables to monitor.

Tip

Hold the Ctrl key when clicking to select multiple variables.

22.1.5.1.8.3. [Monitor Name]: Cartesian Coordinates

(applies only when Option is set to Cartesian Coordinates)

Enter coordinates for the point location to monitor.

Tip

After you click a coordinate entry area, all of the coordinate entry areas turn yellow to show
that you are in Picking mode. You can then select locations from the viewer using the mouse.
To manipulate the object in the viewer while in Picking mode, use the viewer icons (rotate,
pan, zoom) in the toolbar. You can end Picking mode by changing the keyboard focus (by
clicking in another field, for example).

22.1.5.1.8.4. [Monitor Name]: Cylindrical Coordinates

(applies only when Option is set to Cylindrical Coordinates)

Enter coordinates for the point location to monitor in terms of Position Axial Comp., Position Radial
Comp., and Position Theta Comp. values.

Note

This option disables the ability to specify the points by picking in the Viewer.

Cylindrical coordinates are defined with respect to the global coordinate frame, unless a
local coordinate frame is selected.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
236 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

22.1.5.1.8.5. [Monitor Name]: Expression Value

(applies only when Option is set to Expression)

Enter a CEL expression that evaluates to a single number that is to be monitored.

22.1.5.1.8.6. [Monitor Name]: Coordinate Frame

Set the coordinate frame used for the monitor point or expression; for details, see Coordinate Frames
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

For a monitor point that uses Cartesian or cylindrical coordinates, the coordinate frame is used to interpret
the specified coordinates. For a monitor point that uses an expression, the coordinate frame affects all
CEL functions that are used in the expression and that return the component of a vector (for example,
force_x()).

22.1.5.1.8.7. [Monitor Name]: Monitor Location Control

(applies only when Option is set to Cartesian Coordinates or Cylindrical Coordinates)

Monitor Location Control settings determine where the monitor is placed with respect to the mesh,
and how often the monitor position is updated. The following Monitor Location Control options are
available:

Interpolation Type

• Nearest Vertex

This option causes monitor point data to be taken from the mesh vertex nearest to the specified
coordinates. The nearest mesh vertex is determined initially and again every time the monitor
position is updated (based on the Position Update Frequency setting).

• Trilinear

This option causes monitor point data to be interpolated to the specified coordinates using a
weighted average of the data from the vertices of the containing mesh element. The containing
mesh element, and the values of the weighting factors, are determined initially and again every
time the position is updated (based on the Position Update Frequency setting).

Note

If Interpolation Type is set to Trilinear and the specified coordinates are not con-
tained by the current mesh, CFX-Solver reverts to Nearest Vertex behavior. As a
result, you may receive unexpected monitor output. However, if the monitor position
updates, normal Trilinear behavior resumes whenever the coordinates are contained
by the mesh. This might occur if the simulation includes a moving mesh or a stationary
monitor point in a rotating domain.

Domain Name

• If the check box is selected, you must set the domain name to which the specified coordinates will be
restricted.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 237
Output Control

• If the check box is cleared, CFX-Solver searches over all domains for a location match. In this case, the
matching domain for a stationary monitor point can potentially change each time the monitor point is
updated. This might occur if, for example, the simulation includes a moving mesh or has multiple frames
of reference.

Frame Type

• If the check box is selected, choose whether the specified coordinates are relative to the Local frame
(which could be rotating) or the Stationary frame. If the simulation involves transient rotating domains,
and the frame type is set to Stationary, then the monitor location will acknowledge any rotational
periodic interfaces that you have set up, and periodic expansion will be assumed.

• If the check box is cleared, the specified coordinates are, by default, relative to the local frame.

Note

If you position a stationary monitor point too close to a frame-change interface, such as
a Transient Rotor-Stator or sliding mesh interface, then the monitor point may not con-
sistently find the nearest vertices in the same domain as the mesh moves. This can lead
to unpredictable output values from the monitor. You should restrict such monitors to
one of the domains on either side of the interface using Domain Name.

Position Update Frequency

Determine how frequently the monitor position is updated, if at all. This option is relevant only in simulations
that include a moving mesh or transient rotating domains (steady-state rotating domains are frozen and,
therefore, do not actually rotate). Otherwise, the monitor point interpolation does not change and the
position remains constant.

• Initial Mesh Only

The monitor point interpolation is based on the initial mesh.

• Every Timestep or Every Iteration

The monitor point interpolation is updated as the simulation proceeds.

22.1.5.1.8.8. [Monitor Name]: Monitor Statistics

(applies only when Option is set to Expression)

You can select one or more statistical quantities (for example, Arithmetic Average and Standard
Deviation) to be evaluated for the expression value over a moving interval. This interval represents
the recent history of the solution. When you run the simulation, CFX-Solver computes the statistical
quantities in addition to the expression value.

Note

• Monitor statistics are not supported for cases that use variable time steps.

• You can refer to monitor statistics in CEL expressions. For details, see Using Monitors in
CEL (p. 262).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
238 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

The following Monitor Statistics options are available:

Interval Option
Control how frequently the values of the selected statistics are updated. Each update, the values are calcu-
lated using the most recent iterations that fit into the interval.

• Moving Interval

Updates statistical values every iteration.

• Previous Complete Interval

Updates statistical values at the completion of the previous interval. The values remain fixed until
each subsequent interval is complete.

Note

Statistical quantities are only plotted for complete intervals, and will not be displayed
before the first interval is complete.

Statistics List
Select statistics for CFX-Solver to evaluate. You can select multiple statistics using the Ctrl key.

• Arithmetic Sum

Sums all values of the monitor within the current interval.

• Arithmetic Average

Calculates the arithmetic mean of the current interval.

• Difference from the Mean

Subtracts the arithmetic average of the current interval from the monitor value at the end of the
interval.

• Maximum

Displays the maximum monitor value that occurs within the current interval.

• Minimum

Displays the minimum monitor value that occurs within the current interval.

• Root Mean Square

Calculates the square root of the arithmetic mean of the squares of the monitor values within
the current interval.

• Standard Deviation

Calculates the sample standard deviation of the current interval.

• Time Integral

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 239
Output Control

Approximates the time integral of the monitor over the interval, where time is in solution units.
This option is available only for transient simulations.

Interval Definition
Control the size of the evaluation interval. You can select different options for steady-state and transient
cases.

The following options are available for steady-state cases:

• Iteration

Specifies the interval as a number of solver iterations.

The following settings are available for transient cases:

• Time Period

Specifies the interval as a number of operational periods. This setting is only available to transient
blade row cases. The period length is the value set in the Transient Blade Row Models
object, under Transient Method > Time Period.

• Time

Specifies the interval as an amount of simulation time.

• Timestep

Specifies the interval as a number of time steps.

Note

When a case with a monitor statistic is restarted with a different Interval Definition
setting, the statistic may be discontinuous at the start of the simulation.

22.1.5.1.9. Aerodynamic Damping: Frame Overview

Aerodynamic damping monitors are available for transient blade row cases that involve wall boundaries
that have the Periodic Displacement mesh motion boundary condition.

Aerodynamic damping per vibration cycle is a measure of the net energy transferred mechanically from
the blade to the fluid over one vibration cycle of the blade. The damping value is evaluated by computing
the total work that the blade surface imparts on the fluid over the time period corresponding to a given
mode of vibration. For details on the calculation, see Equation 6.2 in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

A positive value of aerodynamic damping indicates that the vibration is damped (for the frequency
being studied). Conversely, a negative value of aerodynamic damping indicates that the vibration is
undamped.

22.1.5.1.10. Aerodynamic Damping List Box

This list box is used to select aerodynamic damping monitor objects for editing or deletion. These objects
can be created or deleted with the icons that appear beside the list box.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
240 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

22.1.5.1.11. Aerodynamic Damping: [Aerodynamic Damping Name]: Option

• Full Period Integration

With this option set, the damping value calculation involves an integration over the last complete
integration interval. In this context, the first integration interval starts at the beginning of the run (or,
in the case of restarts, the initial run). The size of an integration interval is displayed as a read-only
value, as described below. The damping value is calculated only upon the completion of each integ-
ration interval.

• Moving Integration Interval

With this option set, the damping value calculation involves an integration over a time interval that
has a duration of one integration interval and that ends at the current time step. The damping value
is calculated for each time step.

22.1.5.1.12. Aerodynamic Damping: [Aerodynamic Damping Name]: Normalization

Enter a value and units for normalization of the aerodynamic damping value. The aerodynamic damping
value, which has units of energy and represents the work done per period, is normalized by the specified
normalization value, which also has units of energy, resulting in a dimensionless normalized value of
aerodynamic damping.

22.1.5.1.13. Aerodynamic Damping: [Aerodynamic Damping Name]: Location Type

Specify a mesh region or a boundary that represents the surface over which integration is carried out
as part of the aerodynamic damping calculation. Only boundaries that have a Periodic Displace
ment mesh motion option (as specified on the Boundary Details tab), or mesh regions that are used
in such boundaries, may be selected.

22.1.5.1.14. Aerodynamic Damping: [Aerodynamic Damping Name]: Integration Multiplier

Enter an integer that multiplies with the period of mesh motion to yield the Integration Interval.

22.1.5.1.15. Aerodynamic Damping: [Aerodynamic Damping Name]: Integration Interval

This is a read-only value indicating the size of the time interval over which integration is carried out as
part of the aerodynamic damping calculation. It is equal to the period of mesh motion multiplied by
the specified Integration Multiplier. The period of mesh motion is the inverse of the Frequency value
specified on the Boundary Details tab (see Periodic Displacement in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide)
for the boundary over which integration is carried out as part of the aerodynamic damping calculation.

22.1.5.1.16. Radiometer: Frame Overview

(applies only when using the Discrete Transfer or Monte Carlo thermal radiation model)

A radiometer is a user defined point in space that monitors the irradiation heat flux (not incident radi-
ation) arriving at the required location. The user specification involves much more than just the location
of the sensor, as it also requires the viewing direction, its temperature and some numerical controls for
each particular sensor.

By default, radiometers are ideal and the efficiency factor is 1.

A cyan arrow with a cross-hair is used to denote the location of each sensor in the viewer.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 241
Output Control

For details, see Radiometers in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

22.1.5.1.17. Radiometer: List Box

This list box is used to select radiometer objects for editing or deletion. These objects can be created
or deleted with the icons that appear beside the list box.

22.1.5.1.17.1. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Option

• Cartesian Coordinates

22.1.5.1.17.2. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Cartesian Coordinates

Enter Cartesian coordinates that describe the location of the radiometer. These coordinates are interpreted
in the coordinate frame associated with the radiometer. For details, see Coordinate Frames (p. 283) and
also Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

22.1.5.1.17.3. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Temperature

Enter the temperature of the radiometer.

22.1.5.1.17.4. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Quadrature Points

Enter the number of rays used for ray tracing from the radiometer.

22.1.5.1.17.5. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Coordinate Frame Check Box

This check box determines whether the coordinate frame used to interpret the location and direction
specifications of the radiometer will be specified or left at the default of Coord 0.

22.1.5.1.17.6. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Coordinate Frame Check Box: Coordinate Frame

Select a coordinate frame to interpret location and direction specifications of the radiometer. For details,
see Coordinate Frames (p. 283) and also Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

22.1.5.1.17.7. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Diagnostic Output Level Check Box

This check box determines whether the diagnostic output level will be specified or left at the default
of 0.

22.1.5.1.17.8. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Diagnostic Output Level Check Box: Diagnostic
Output Level

Enter a number greater than zero. The CFX-Solver will write the ray traces to a series of polylines in a
.csv file that can be visualized in CFD-Post. This can be used to determine if the number of quadrature
points is optimal. For details, see Radiometers in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

22.1.5.1.17.9. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Direction: Option

• Cartesian Components

22.1.5.1.17.10. Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Direction: X Component,Y Component, Z Component

(applies only when Monitor Objects check box: Radiometer: [Radiometer Name]: Direction: Option
is set to Cartesian Components)

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
242 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression for each Cartesian component of a direction vector that
represents the orientation of the radiometer.

22.1.5.1.18. Monitor Surfaces: Frame Overview

Monitor Surfaces are defined on 2D User Locations (see Importing a User Surface into CFX-Pre (p. 289))
and can be used for monitoring and post-processing selected variables at the User Surface location in
ANSYS CFD-Post.

Monitor surfaces can be used to observe the solution at a Monitor Surface location while the solver is
in progress (see Monitor Run in Progress in the CFD-Post User's Guide).

Additionally, by specifying output variables on the surface but selecting None on the Results tab the
amount of data written to solver results files can be reduced. For details, see the Option (p. 254) setting
for the Results tab.

Note

Monitor surfaces (and by extension live monitoring of solutions in CFD-Post) is not supported
for Transient Blade Row cases or ANSYS Workbench.

Note

Monitor Surfaces are always defined in the stationary frame of reference and cannot move
relative to any frame of reference, or with any rotating domain.

22.1.5.1.19. Monitor Surfaces: List Box

This list box is used to select Monitor Surface objects for editing or deletion. Monitor Surface objects
can be created or deleted with the icons that appear beside the list box.

22.1.5.1.19.1. Monitor Surfaces: [Monitor Surface Name]: Option

Only User Locations can be used to define a Monitor Surface.

22.1.5.1.19.2. Monitor Surfaces: [Monitor Surface Name]: Coordinate Frame

Select a coordinate frame to define the Monitor Surface in. To create a new coordinate frame, see Cre-
ating a New Coordinate Frame (p. 283). By specifying a coordinate frame that rotates, the monitor surface
will effectively remain stationary relative to that frame, and rotate relative to the global frame. This
enables simpler live monitoring and post-processing for cases with rotating domains.

22.1.5.1.19.3. Monitor Surfaces: [Monitor Surface Name]: Output Variables List

See Output Variables List (p. 256).

Select the output variables to write to the results file at the Monitor Surface location. Conservative values
for these variables will be interpolated from the volume data onto the Monitor Surface.

22.1.5.1.19.4. Monitor Surfaces: [Monitor Surface Name]: Output Location List

Choose the User Location to write solution data from.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 243
Output Control

22.1.5.1.19.5. Monitor Surfaces: [Monitor Surface Name]: File Compression Level

See File Compression (p. 255).

22.1.5.1.19.6. Monitor Surfaces: [Monitor Surface Name]: Output Frequency

See Output Frequency Options (p. 257).

22.1.5.1.20. Monitor Surfaces: Monitor Location Data Retention

This behaves in the same way as the Backup Data Retention (p. 229) option on the Backup tab but only
applies to monitor location data files.

22.1.6. Particles Tab

The Particles tab for the Output Control object contains settings that specify whether the particle
data is recorded, and details of how the data is collected and recorded.

This tab is available only when the morphology option is set to Particle Transport Fluid or
Particle Transport Solid in CFX-Pre; for details, see Basic Settings Tab (p. 115).

The particle data is initially written to particle track files, which contain a specified level of detail about
particles involved in your simulation. The files are written to the directory with the same name as your
current run. An option on the Particles tab controls whether or not the track files are retained after
their data is copied into the final results file (and any backup results files).

22.1.6.1. Particle Track File Check Box

This check box determines whether or not to customize the type and amount of particle track data re-
corded in the results file.

22.1.6.1.1. Option
• All Track Positions (default)

Point data is collected for all track positions, as determined by the Track Positions setting.

• Specified Position Interval

Point data is collected for a subset of all track positions. The entire set of track positions is determined
by the Track Positions setting. The subset is controlled by the Interval setting. For example, if
Track Position Interval is left at its default value of 1, then the result is the same as setting Option to
All Track Positions. Setting Interval to 2 will cause point data to be collected for every second track
position; setting Interval to 3 will cause point data to be collected for every third track position, and
so on.

• Specified Distance Spacing

Point data is collected for evenly-spaced points along each track. The spacing is controlled by this
parameter, and represents a physical distance.

• Specified Time Spacing

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
244 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

Point data is collected for points along each track with the points spaced by time according to this
parameter. The physical distance between data collection points is therefore a function of the particle
velocity along each track.

• None

This option can be used to avoid writing any track information. This might be useful if you are not
interested in particle tracks or want to avoid the additional disk space required to store the tracks. If
this option is set, no tracks will be available in CFD-Post. In contrast to the track file information,
sources are required for a clean re-start of a particle case and must be written to the results file.

Note

For a transient run, final particle positions are always added to the track information, and
therefore can be seen at the end of a run.

22.1.6.1.2. Track Positions Check Box

(applies only when Particle Track File Check Box: Option is set to All Track Positions or
Specified Position Interval)

This check box determines whether the Track Positions setting will be specified or left at the default
value: Element Faces.

22.1.6.1.3. Track Positions Check Box: Track Positions

• Control Volume Faces

Points are written each time a sub-control volume boundary is crossed. This produces the more precise
and larger track files than the other option.

• Element Faces

Points are written to the track file each time a particle crosses the boundary of an element.

22.1.6.1.4. Interval
(applies only when Particle Track File Check Box: Option is set to Specified Position Interval)

Enter an integer that specifies the spacing (in terms of points) between points along the tracks.

22.1.6.1.5. Track Distance Spacing

(applies only when Particle Track File Check Box: Option is set to Specified Distance Spacing)

Enter a numerical quantity that specifies the physical distance interval between successive points on
the track. Data will be collected only for those points.

22.1.6.1.6. Track Time Spacing

(applies only when Particle Track File Check Box: Option is set to Specified Time Spacing)

Enter a numerical quantity that specifies the physical time interval between successive points on the
track. Data will be collected only for those points.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 245
Output Control

22.1.6.1.7. Track Printing Interval Check Box

This check box determines whether the Track Printing Interval setting will be specified or left at the
default value: 1.

22.1.6.1.8. Track Printing Interval Check Box: Interval

Output data is collected for every nth particle track, where n is the specified number.

22.1.6.1.9. Keep Track File Check Box

Determines whether or not the track files are kept. When the track files are kept, they can be found
below the working directory in a directory that has the same name as the run. For example, for the first
solution of dryer.def, the track files are kept in a directory called dryer_001.

The data will be copied into the results file regardless of whether or not the track files are kept. CFD-
Post can extract the track file data from the results file for postprocessing.

22.1.6.1.10. Track File Format Check Box

Determines whether the track file format will be specified, or left at the solver default value: Unformatted.
The track file will remain in the working directory after finishing a run only if you select the Keep Track
File option to force the solver to not delete it.

22.1.6.1.11. Track File Format Check Box: Track File Format

• Formatted

Formatted track files are in human-readable ASCII format but take up much more disk space than
unformatted track files.

The general structure of formatted ASCII track files will print the Number of Particle Positions in a
Block at the top of the file preceding repetitions of the following:
Particle Track Number
X Position
Y Position
Z Position
Traveling Time
Traveling Distance
Particle Diameter
Particle Number Rate
Particle Mass Fraction Component 1
Particle Mass Fraction Component 2
....
Particle Mass Fraction Component n
Particle U Velocity
Particle V Velocity
Particle W Velocity
Particle Temperature
Particle Mass

Note

Particle Mass Fraction Component 1- n only appear for multi-component particle materials
and Particle Temperature only appears when heat transfer is activated.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
246 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

• Unformatted

Unformatted track files are written in a non-readable, binary, format.

22.1.6.2. Particle Histogram

This option allows you to define particle histogram data of track variables on user-specified boundary
patches and/or particle injection regions.

In steady-state, particle histograms are written/overwritten each time particles are tracked. In transient
simulations, particle histograms are over written within a time step loop (i.e. coefficient loops). The
histograms of the last coefficient loop of a time step is stored in the run directory.

22.1.6.2.1. Histogram Type

Each of the histogram types are obtained by splitting the range of data into bins of equal size. The
main difference between each type is the method in which the data is counted.

• Raw

For each bin, you count the number of points from the data set that fall into each bin.

• Normalized

For each bin in the Normalized histogram, you normalize the count in terms of the total number of
observations.

• Accumulated

In the Accumulated histogram, the vertical axis count is a cumulative count of the current bin plus
all bins for smaller values of the response variable.

• Accumulated and Normalized

For the Accumulated and Normalized histogram option, the vertical axis count is a cumulative nor-
malized count of the current bin plus all bins for smaller values of the response variable.

22.1.6.2.2. Number of Bins

Number of discrete intervals or classes that accumulate data is divided into based on the frequency of
the data.

22.1.6.2.3. Particle Definition

The Particle Definition allows you to select the particle type for which the histogram output is created.
x and y variable lists only show particle track variables filtered according to the particle type selected
in Particle Definition.

22.1.6.2.4. x Variable
The response variable. Any valid particle track variable is supported. Response variables outside of the
user specified min/max limits are stored in bins '1' or 'n'.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 247
Output Control

22.1.6.2.5. y Variable
The count variable. For the Raw histogram type, this variable can hold any particle track variable. For
all other histogram types, this variable is restricted to the particle number rate option only.

Note

Particle number rates are evaluated without distinguishing incoming particles from outgoing
particles.

22.1.6.2.6. x Var. Lower Bound

Lower bound for histogram response variable (X axis). Histogram lower bound variables use context-
sensitive dimensions that depend on the dimension of y-variable specified.

22.1.6.2.7. x Var. Upper Bound

Upper bound for histogram response variable (X axis). Histogram upper bound variables use context-
sensitive dimensions that depend on the dimension of y-variable specified.

22.1.6.2.8. Sample Location

Specify a boundary patch or particle injection region against which the histogram will be plotted.

Note

You can only select individual boundary patches or particle injection regions in CFX-Pre.

22.1.6.2.9. Export Format

All particle histogram data is written to file in a CFX CSV Histogram format. You can specify the output
file name in CCL using the Filename Prefix option. If no user-defined filename can be found, the fol-
lowing file naming convention applies:

• Steady-state run:

<Particle Type Alias Name>_<Histogram Alias Name>.csv

For example: MyParticle_Histo1.csv

• Transient run:

<Particle Type Alias Name>_<Histogram Alias Name>_<Timestep Number>.csv

For example: MyParticle_Histo2_3.csv

22.1.6.2.10. Export Frequency

Only supported export frequency option is: Every Timestep.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
248 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

22.1.6.3. Transient Particle Diagnostics

This section is available for transient simulations using particle tracking and enables you to output
various particle data; for details, see Transient Particle Diagnostics in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

22.1.6.4. Transient Particle Diagnostics: List Box

Shows the current Transient Particle Diagnostics outputs. You can click to create a new diagnostics

output file or click to delete an existing one.

22.1.6.5. Transient Particle Diagnostics: [Transient Particle Diagnostics Name]

22.1.6.5.1. Option
• Particle Penetration

• Total Particle Mass

• User Defined - This option can be used to specify a user-defined Diagnostic Routine to evaluate the dia-
gnostics information based on particle variables specified in Particle Variables List. Optionally, you can
also select the Monitored Values List check box and specify a comma-separated list of names for monitored
values. For details, see User Diagnostics Routine in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

22.1.6.5.2. Particles List

Select particles to be used for output from the drop-down list, or click and select from the Particles
List dialog box.

22.1.6.5.3. Spray Mass Frac.

The fraction of the total spray mass contained within an imaginary cone, the half-angle of which is the
spray angle. The cone tip is at the point of injection and the cone axis is parallel to the direction of in-
jection.

22.1.6.5.4. Penetration Origin and Direction: Option

• Specified Origin and Direction

22.1.6.5.5. Penetration Origin and Direction: Injection Center

Enter the Cartesian coordinates of the center of injection.

22.1.6.5.6. Penetration Origin and Direction: Injection Direction

22.1.6.5.6.1. Option

• Cartesian Components

Specify the Cartesian components (Direction X Comp., Direction Y Comp., and Direction Z Comp.) of
the injection direction.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 249
Output Control

22.1.6.5.7. Axial Penetration: Option

• Axial Penetration

See Spray Penetration in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide in Transient Particle Diagnostics in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide for details.

• None

22.1.6.5.8. Radial Penetration: Option

• Radial Penetration

See Spray Penetration in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide in Transient Particle Diagnostics in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide for details.

• None

22.1.6.5.9. Normal Penetration: Option

• Normal Penetration

See Spray Penetration in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide in Transient Particle Diagnostics in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide for details.

• None

22.1.6.5.10. Spray Angle: Option

• Spray Angle

See Spray Penetration in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide in Transient Particle Diagnostics in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide for details.

• None

22.1.6.5.10.1. Spray Angle: Spray Radius at Penetration Origin Check Box

Enable to specify a spray radius for the penetration origin.

22.1.6.5.10.2. Spray Angle: Spray Radius at Penetration Origin Check Box: Spray Radius

Enter a penetration origin spray radius.

22.1.7. Export Results Tab

The Export Results tab for the Output Control object is used to specify export files; for details, see

Working with Export Results (p. 263).

Note

The flow solver Export Results supports "Stationary" wall boundary conditions only when
mesh motion is activated.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
250 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

22.1.7.1. List Box

This list box is used to select Export Results objects for editing or deletion. Export Results
objects can be created or deleted with the icons that appear beside the list box.

22.1.7.2. [Export Name]: Option

This option allows you to export a specified list of Particle Track Data on specified boundary patches
or particle injection regions. The particle track data is written to a file and can be imported and manip-
ulated after the run. This option requires you to define a list of particle track variables to be exported,
as well as a location where the data is sampled from.

22.1.7.3. [Export Name]: Export Format

The Export Format check box determines whether the export format will be specified or left at its default
of CGNS.

The only available export format option for Particle Track Data is CFX CSV.

22.1.7.3.1. Filename Prefix Check Box

This check box determines whether or not a user-specified prefix is used in the filenames of exported
files. By default, CFX-Solver will use the object name as the filename prefix. For details, see File Naming
Conventions (p. 263).

22.1.7.3.2. Filename Prefix Check Box: Filename Prefix

Specify a prefix to use in the filenames of exported files.

22.1.7.3.3. Include Topology Check Box

(applies only when the export format option is set to CFX CSV BC Profile)

This check box determines whether or not the CFX-Solver will include the mesh connectivity data in
the exported profile file. With the mesh connectivity data included, the exported profile file can be
imported into CFD-Post for visual examination. For example, you might want to visualize the pressure
harmonics from a blade flutter case or a blade row interaction case before using the profile in ANSYS
Mechanical.

22.1.7.3.4. Include File Info Header Check Box

(applies only when the export format option is set to CFX CSV BC Profile)

This check box determines whether or not the CFX-Solver will include the file information header in
the exported profile file. The file information header provides the version number of CFX-Solver, the
date, the time, and the name of the case.

22.1.7.3.5. Precision Check Box

(applies only when the export format option is set to CFX CSV BC Profile)

This check box determines whether or not a user-specified precision is used for real data.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 251
Output Control

22.1.7.3.6. Precision Check Box: Precision

(applies only when the export format option is set to CFX CSV BC Profile)

Specify the number of significant digits in the fractional part of real number data in the exported CFX
CSV BC Profile file. Valid values range from 0 to 20. By default, the CFX-Solver writes 8 significant digits
in the fractional part. A value of 0 causes the CFX-Solver to write 8 significant digits. If an insufficient
precision is specified for a case involving a very fine mesh, the coordinates of two close mesh nodes
can become identical due to truncation of their digits.

22.1.7.4. [Export Name]: Export Frequency

22.1.7.4.1. Option
• Time List

See Time List (p. 257).

• Time Interval

See Time Interval (p. 257).

• Iteration List

See Iteration List (p. 257).

• Iteration Interval

See Iteration Interval (p. 257).

• Every Iteration

• End of Run

This is only available option for Particle Track Data.

22.1.7.5. [Export Name]: Export Surface

22.1.7.5.1. List Box
This list box is used to select Export Surface objects for editing or deletion. Export Surface
objects can be created or deleted with the icons that appear beside the list box. Solution fields are re-
quired either on individual 2D boundary regions or on composite boundary regions.

22.1.7.5.2. [Export Surface Name]: Option

• Selected Variables

• Acoustic Dipole/Acoustic Rotating Dipole

• Harmonic Forced Response

The Harmonic Forced Response option is only available for Transient Blade Row analysis.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
252 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

22.1.7.5.3. [Export Surface Name]: Particle Definition List

Particle Definition allows you to select the particle type for which the Particle Track Data is exported
to file. The Output Variables list will only show particle track variables filtered according to the particle
type selected in Particle Definition.

22.1.7.5.4. [Export Surface Name]: Output Boundary List

(applies only when Option is set to Selected Variables or Acoustic Dipole/Acoustic
Rotating Dipole)

See Output Boundary List and Output Region Naming (p. 264).

For the Particle Track Data option, particle track variables can only be sampled from boundary patches
and particle injection regions.

22.1.7.5.5. [Export Surface Name]: Location Type

(applies only when Option is set to Harmonic Forced Response)

For a Harmonic Forced Response analysis, you can use the Location Type setting to choose how loca-
tion(s) for exported data are selected. The options are:

• Boundary: Enables you to select a boundary condition patch for data export.

• Mesh Regions: Enables you to select one or more mesh regions for data export. For example, you can
choose to export data from an entire blade surface, or only the pressure side, suction side, or blade tip, in
order to help map CFD results to a structural mesh.

Note

This feature is only supported for:

• Time Domain Cases: blade flutter, inlet disturbance, Transient Rotor Stator (TRS)

• Harmonic Analysis Cases: blade flutter

22.1.7.5.6. [Export Surface Name]: Output Variables List

(applies only when Option is set to Selected Variables). For details, see Output Variables
List (p. 256).

For the Particle Track Data option, only particle track variables can be specified.

22.1.7.5.7. [Export Surface Name]: Output Nodal Area Vectors Check Box
(Applies only when Option is set to Selected Variables)

To export acoustic data for LMS noise analysis, select this check box, and the Value check box contained
within Output Nodal Area Vectors.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 253
Output Control

22.1.7.5.8. [Export Surface Name]: Excitation Frequency

(Applies only when Option is set to Harmonic Forced Response)

• Engine Order: Enables you to specify the engine order excitation for a blade row interaction analysis, in
order to export the first harmonics of the surface pressure for the specific engine order excitation. For details,
see Case 4: Harmonic Forced Response in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide. You may not be able capture the
specific mode if the time integration (number of timesteps per period) detail is not compatible with the
engine order selected. Note that specifying an engine order of zero results in the export of time averaged
pressure values.

• Blade Boundary: Enables you to export the first harmonics of pressure fields corresponding to blade vibration
frequency from the blade flutter analysis. This output will be used to obtain the aerodynamic damping in
the Harmonic Forced Response analysis.

22.1.7.5.9. [Export Surface Name]: Accumulation Period

(Applies only when Option is set to Harmonic Forced Response)

For a Harmonic Forced Response analysis, you can use the Accumulation Period option to
specify the time over which the exported data is gathered to export the most accurate results. You can
choose between:

• Last Period: You should use this option if the signal is fully periodic to the corresponding fundamental
frequency.

For the Engine Order option under Excitation Frequency, the specified engine order must cor-
respond to the fundamental frequency or its harmonics, where the fundamental frequency is the
disturbance frequency being modeled.

For the Blade Boundary option under Excitation Frequency, the fundamental frequency corres-
ponds to the vibration frequency of the specified blade boundary.

• Full Revolution: You should use this option if the signal is fully periodic over a time period corresponding
to the blade passing through a full 360 degrees.

For the Engine Order option under Excitation Frequency, you can specify any integer engine
order that may not correspond to any harmonics of the fundamental disturbance frequency.

For the Blade Boundary option under Excitation Frequency, the blade vibration frequency must
correspond to an integer multiple of the rotor rotation frequency.

22.1.8. Common Settings

22.1.8.1. Option
• Selected Variables

Selected vertex fields are written to the results file. The fields are chosen from the Output Variables
List. No clean restart is possible from these files.

• Boundary Only (available only on the Trn Results tab)

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
254 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

The selected transient results are written only to the vertices on the boundaries, reducing the size of
each .trn file but also restricting the variable data available for postprocessing to that on the
boundaries. Interior data will be undefined and, as such, this option is not recommended for postpro-
cessing moving mesh simulations. Where available, hybrid data from each requested variable will be
written, otherwise conservative values will be used. Data is not exported on symmetry boundaries
or 1:1 periodic interfaces.

• Smallest (not available on the Results tab)

Mesh data and all solution vertex fields are written. A restart is possible from these files, but the restart
will not be clean (you can expect a temporary increase in residual values).

• Essential

The smallest file that preserves a clean restart is written. This includes data written in the Smallest
category and the following:

– GGI control surface fields

– Boundary face solution arrays

– Mass flow data fields

• Standard

This contains data written in the Essential category and the following:

– Hybrid fields

– Postprocessing fields

• None

Used when no output of results is required (for example, during solver performance benchmarking).

22.1.8.2. File Compression

• None

This offers no compression.

• Default

This is a compromise between disk space and processing load.

• Best Speed Least Compression

• Low Speed Most Compression

You may want to increase the compression level for large backup files, or if you do not have much disk
space.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 255
Output Control

22.1.8.3. Output Variables List

Allows you to select the output variables to write to the results file. Select the desired variables from

the list or click the icon to select from a list of all variables. Output Variable List is available only
when the option is set to Selected Variables or Boundary Only.

22.1.8.4. Output Equation Residuals Check Box

When Output Equation Residuals is set to All, the equation residuals for all equations are written to
the results file for steady-state solutions. The residuals can then be viewed in CFD-Post. They appear
as ordinary variables available from the full list of variables. This parameter replaces the expert parameter
output eq residuals.

22.1.8.5. Output Boundary Flows Check Box

When Output Boundary Flows is set to All, equation flows, including mass flows, are written to the
file you have set up. These flows enable accurate evaluations of forces, heat flows, and mass flow related
calculations in CFD-Post. These flows are always written for Standard backup/results and transient
files. They are not written for Selected Variables and Smallest transient files, unless the Output
Boundary Flows parameter is set to All.

22.1.8.6. Output Variable Operators Check Box

When Output Variable Operators is set to All, you get all available operators that the solver has
calculated (for example, gradients, High Resolution betas) for the variables in the Output Variables
List. This option only applies to minimal transient results files, selected variables, backup results and
results files. These operators are always written for Standard files, but may also be written for Selec
ted Variables and Smallest files by setting this parameter to All.

22.1.8.7. Output Particle Boundary Vertex Fields Check Box

For cases with particles, when Output Particle Boundary Vertex Fields is selected, the following
boundary vertex fields are written:

• Inlets, outlets, openings and interfaces:

– Mass flow density

– Momentum flow density

– Energy flow density

• Walls:

– Mass flow density

– Stress

– Erosion rate density.

For transient cases, the following additional boundary vertex fields are written:

• Inlets, outlets, openings and interfaces:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
256 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

– Time integrated mass flow density

– Time integrated momentum flow density

– Time integrated energy flow density

• Walls:

– Time integrated mass flow density

– Time integrated erosion rate density.

For additional details, see Particle Boundary Vertex Variables in the CFX Reference Guide

22.1.8.8. Output Frequency Options

This determines how often backup and transient results files are written during a run.

22.1.8.8.1. Timestep Interval

Enter a number that specifies the number of timesteps between the writing of each results file.

22.1.8.8.2. Timestep List

Enter a comma-separated list of timestep numbers that specifies the timesteps at which files are written.

22.1.8.8.3. Time Interval

Enter a number that specifies the simulation time interval between the writing of each file. The simulation
time interval is added to a running total that starts at the simulation start time. An iteration within half
a timestep of the current total has a file written.

22.1.8.8.4. Time List

Enter a comma-separated list of simulation times that specifies the iterations at which files are written.

22.1.8.8.5. Every Timestep

No further input is needed. A backup or transient results file is written for every timestep in a transient
simulation.

22.1.8.8.6. Every Iteration

No further input is needed. A backup or transient results file is written for every iteration.

22.1.8.8.7. Iteration Interval

Enter a number that specifies the number of iterations between the writing of each file.

22.1.8.8.8. Iteration List

Enter a comma-separated list of iteration numbers that specifies the iterations at which files are written.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 257
Output Control

22.1.8.8.9. Wall Clock Time Interval

(Only available for backup files)

Enter a number that specifies the wall clock time interval between the writing of each backup file.

This is used to create backup files every so often in real time. For example, on an overnight simulation
you might choose to have a backup file created every two hours, regardless of how many iterations or
timesteps had been performed.

22.1.8.8.10. None
No results files will be written. You might choose this option to temporarily turn off writing backup or
transient files but keeping the definition of what to include in the files so that you can easily re-enable
them.

22.2. Working with Output Control

The following topics will be discussed:

• Working with Transient Statistics (p. 258)

• Working with Monitors (p. 260)

• Working with Export Results (p. 263)

22.2.1. Working with Transient Statistics

This section describes the generation and output of running statistics for solution variables. The available
statistics are arithmetic average, minimum, maximum, root-mean-square (RMS) and standard deviation.

This follows from the same statistical theory that is used to determine statistical Reynolds Stresses, for
example, in turbulence modeling.

Note

Transient statistics of boundary-only variables are not reliable on interfaces that are re-inter-
sected, for example due to:

• Movement resulting from mesh deformation, or

• The use of a Transient Rotor Stator frame change/mixing model.

22.2.1.1. Statistic Initialization and Accumulation

Arithmetic averages, RMS values, and the minimum and maximum values are initialized using the
solution values and are updated with each time step.

Standard deviations are initialized with a value of zero. The type of standard deviation that is computed
is the sample standard deviation.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
258 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Working with Output Control

Whenever the standard deviation is computed, the arithmetic average and RMS statistics are also
computed.

22.2.1.2. Statistics as Variable Operators

Transient statistics are operators that act on variables (both conservative and hybrid values) identified
in the Output Variables List. Like other variable operators, the data written to results files have names
like <variable>.<statistic> where <variable> is the name of the specified variable and <statistic>
is one of the following:

• Trnmin (Minimum)

• Trnmax (Maximum)

• Trnavg (Arithmetic average)

• Trnrms (Root mean square)

• Trnsdv (Standard deviation)

Tip

To output transient statistics for intermediate results, be sure to select the Output Variable
Operators check box on the Transient Results tab.

Choose the Full option if all variable operators are desired.

A significant consequence of treating transient statistics as operators is that only one instance of a
<variable>.<statistic> exists during the entire simulation. For example, even if multiple transient
statistics objects containing the arithmetic average of velocity are requested, only one statistic will ever
exist. The potential for specifying different start (stop) iterations for these transient statistics objects is
addressed by using the earliest (latest) value specified; that is, statistics are accumulated over the largest
range of timesteps possible as defined by the start and stop iterations for all transient statistics objects.

Note

If you want to re-initialize a given statistic (that is, remove the history from the statistic), you
must shut down and restart the simulation with a new start (stop) iteration. This step is re-
quired to ensure that the new statistic accumulation interval is not included when searching
for the earliest and latest start and stop iteration values, respectively.

22.2.1.3. Using Statistics with Transient Rotor-Stator Cases

You can use transient statistics to examine the convergence of a transient/rotor stator case. This is done
by obtaining averaged variable data over the time taken for a blade to move through one pitch. By
comparing consecutive data sets, you can examine if a pseudo steady-state situation has been reached.
Variable data averaged from integer pitch changes should be the same if convergence has been achieved.

Each of the variables that are created by the CFX-Solver can be used in CFD-Post to create plots or
perform quantitative calculations.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 259
Output Control

22.2.2. Working with Monitors

22.2.2.1. Setting up Monitors
To add basic monitors:

1. Click Output Control or select Insert > Solver > Output Control from the main menu.

The Output Control dialog box will appear.

2. Click the Monitor tab.

3. Select Monitor Objects.

4. Select which variables to monitor (Balances, Forces, Residuals, Totals, Particles).

By default, all of the listed quantities are monitored.

To add monitors for points and expressions:

1. In the Monitor Points and Expressions frame, click Add new item .

The Insert Monitor Point dialog box appears, asking for the name of a new monitor.

2. Enter a name, or accept the default name, and then click OK.

The [Monitor Name] frame expands to show a set of input fields.

3. Specify the settings for the monitor object. For details, see Monitor Points And Expressions List Box (p. 235).

4. Add more monitor objects as desired.

To add monitors for aerodynamic damping (for transient blade row runs that involve boundaries that
move periodically):

1. In the Aerodynamic Damping frame, click Add new item .

The Insert Aerodynamic Damping dialog box appears, asking for the name of a new monitor.

2. Enter a name, or accept the default name, and then click OK.

The [Aerodynamic Damping] frame expands to show a set of input fields.

3. Specify the settings for the monitor object. For details, see Aerodynamic Damping: Frame Overview (p. 240).

4. Add more monitor objects as desired.

Click OK or Apply to set the definitions of all of the monitor objects. All monitor points will be displayed
in the viewer.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
260 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Working with Output Control

22.2.2.2. Transient/ Mesh Deformation Runs

For a transient run or run with a moving mesh, the monitor point location can either update with the
mesh or it can remain based off of the initial mesh. For details, see [Monitor Name]: Monitor Location
Control (p. 237).

22.2.2.3. Output Information

Information on the variables to be monitored is given near the start of the .out file. In the following
example the variables Velocity and Pressure were requested for the Output Variables List in the .ccl
file.

+-----------------------------------------------------------------------+
| User Defined Monitor Points |
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------+
Monitor Point: my monitor point
Domain: rotor
Monitor vertex location (x,y,z): 4.101E-01, 5.703E-02, 5.263E-02
User specified location (x,y,z): 4.100E-01, 5.618E-02, 4.951E-02
Distance to user specified location: 3.231E-03
Valid variables from output variable list:
Air Ideal Gas.Velocity u
Air Ideal Gas.Velocity v
Air Ideal Gas.Velocity w
Pressure
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------+

The “Monitor vertex location” shows the actual location that is being monitored (the closest vertex to
the “User specified location”). The “Distance to user specified location” shows the difference between
the specified and actual monitoring location.

The “Output variable list” shows the full name of all variables that will be monitored.

22.2.2.4. Expression
When using the Expression option for a monitor, the results of the evaluated expression are output
at each iteration. Enter an expression that evaluates to a single value at each timestep. The following
are examples of expressions that could be monitored:

• force()@MainWall / (0.5*areaAve(density)@Inlet * areaAve(vel)@Inlet *

area()@MainWall)

• volumeAve(CO2.mf)@Domain 1

The variable names should be preceded with the fluid name when applicable. You can view a list of
variable names in the Expression details view by right-clicking in the Definition window when editing
an expression.

22.2.2.5. Viewing Monitor Values during a Run

You can view a plot of monitor point values during a solver run. For details, see Monitors Tab in the
CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

22.2.2.6. Viewing Monitor Point Values after a Run

You can view monitor point values easily in the CFX-Solver Manager after a run. For details, see Exporting
Plot Variables and Coordinates in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 261
Output Control

You can also extract monitor point values from a .res file using the cfx5dfile command. The fol-
lowing syntax is used:
cfx5dfile <file> -read-monitor

where <file> is a CFX-Solver input or results file containing monitor point information. The output
is sent to standard output (you may want to add a redirect to write the output to a text file, for example:
cfx5dfile <file> -read-monitor > out.txt

The output is produced as a list of variable names, followed by a comma-delimited list of values that
correspond to the order of variable names. One line of these values is produced for every iteration that
has been carried out.

You can enter:

cfx5dfile -help

to obtain more information.

22.2.2.7. Using Monitors in CEL

Within CEL expressions, you can use the probe function to refer to monitors and monitor statistics.
For example:

• If Monitor Point 1 is an expression-based monitor (a monitor point with Option set to Expression),
with Standard Deviation in the specified statistics list:

– You can obtain the value of (the expression being monitored by) Monitor Point 1 at the current
time step with:

probe(Expression Value)@Monitor Point 1

(Here, “Expression Value” is not an example; it is part of the syntax.)

– You can obtain the standard deviation of the value of Monitor Point 1 over the current interval (the
size of which is specified in the definition of Monitor Point 1) with:

probe(Expression Value.Standard Deviation)@Monitor Point 1

• If Monitor Point 2 is a location-based monitor (a monitor with Option set to Cartesian Coordin
ates or Cylindrical Coordinates):

– You can obtain the value of variable Pressure at Monitor Point 2 at the current time step with:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
262 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Working with Output Control

probe(Pressure)@Monitor Point 2

Note

You cannot directly obtain statistics from a location-based monitor. As a workaround, you
can obtain statistics from an expression-based monitor, with the expression including a probe
of a variable at the location-based monitor.

Note

The probe function does not calculate a value for a statistic until the defined interval is
complete. As a result, a “probe” function that retrieves a statistic from an expression-based
monitor:

• Should not be used in a CEL expression for a quantity that is required at all times, for example,
a boundary condition.

• Causes any interrupt control condition in which it is used to be invalid (and ignored) until the
required interval is complete.

For details on setting up monitor statistics, see [Monitor Name]: Monitor Statistics (p. 238).

For an example of using a monitor statistic as part of interrupt control, see Using Interrupt Control in
Cases with Transient Convergence Behavior in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

22.2.3. Working with Export Results

The topics in this section include:

• File Naming Conventions (p. 263)

• Propagating Older Time Step Values (p. 264)

• Output Boundary List and Output Region Naming (p. 264)

• Output Variables List (p. 264)

22.2.3.1. File Naming Conventions

Each instance of an Export Results object will correspond to a particular group of files in a transient
run.

Transient data is written into a series of files, named using the form:

<prefix>_<timestep>.<extension>

• <prefix> defaults to the Export Results object name unless you override this with the parameter
“Filename Prefix”

• <timestep> is a string containing the timestep number

• cgns is the only available <extension>

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 263
Output Control

The mesh information (mesh coordinates and nodal area vectors, if applicable) is written into a separate
file to save disk space, because the mesh information does not change with time. The mesh filename
is of the form:

<prefix>_mesh.cgns

A link is created for each solution file (<prefix>_<timestep>.cgns) to map the mesh coordinates
to the mesh file (<prefix>_mesh.cgns). If you write your own reader, you need not open the mesh
file separately to read in the mesh coordinates for each solution file.

22.2.3.2. Propagating Older Time Step Values

When exporting results to 3rd party applications, it is possible that values from an earlier time step are
written at time steps where true data does not exist - for example at time steps where minimal results
files were requested in the solver control setup. This is done because some 3rd party software can only
successfully read exported files when a consistent number of variables exists in each file. It is up to you
to recognize that these “dummy variables” are not accurate at the particular time step.

22.2.3.3. Output Boundary List and Output Region Naming

The default behavior of this parameter is to attempt to create one composite boundary region per do-
main. The boundary condition patches do not have to be in the same domain so that rotating dipole
sources and regular dipole sources will be contained in the same export file if this is desired.

Each export surface object name is unique. If the export surface lies within one domain, the name of
each exported surface will simply be the Export Surface object name. If the export surface lies
across multiple domains, a region will be exported for each domain spanned by the export surface.
Such regions are named using the form "<domain name>.<export surface name>".

22.2.3.4. Output Variables List

When either of the acoustic options are selected, the output variables list is implied. For both acoustic
options, there is output for pressure on vertices and the surface mesh (x, y, z and topology). For the
rotating dipole option there is also output for nodal area vectors.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
264 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 23: Transient Blade Row Models
This chapter describes the Transient Blade Row Models object that can appear in the Outline
tree.

For instructions on setting up and using Transient Blade Row models, see Transient Blade Row Modeling
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

This chapter describes:

23.1. Inserting a New Transient Blade Row Models Object
23.2.Transient Blade Row Models Details View

23.1. Inserting a New Transient Blade Row Models Object

Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide describes a procedure for in-
serting a Transient Blade Row Model object.

To insert a Transient Blade Row Models object:

1. Do one of the following:

• Right-click Flow Analysis 1 (or whichever analysis is applicable) in the Outline tree, then select
Insert > Transient Blade Models from the shortcut menu.

• Select Flow Analysis 1 (or whichever analysis is applicable) in the Outline tree, then select Insert
> Transient Blade Row Models from the main menu.

2. Click OK.

23.2. Transient Blade Row Models Details View

The Transient Blade Row Models details view is available after you insert the object of the same name.
For details, see Inserting a New Transient Blade Row Models Object (p. 265).

The following sections describe the settings in the Transient Blade Row Models details view:
23.2.1.Transient Blade Row Model Settings
23.2.2.Transient Method

23.2.1. Transient Blade Row Model Settings

The Transient Blade Row Model > Option setting can have one of the following values:

• None

This option disables Transient Blade Row modeling. It is useful when running transient simulations
without any transformations.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 265
Transient Blade Row Models

• Profile Transformation

The Transient Method settings (Time Period, Time Steps, and Time Duration) must be configured.
These settings are described in Transient Method (p. 270).

• Time Transformation

To help the solver apply the Time Transformation method to the applicable domains, you must ac-
curately characterize a disturbance. For details, see Time Transformation Disturbance Settings (p. 266).

The Transient Method settings (Time Period, Time Steps, and Time Duration) must be configured.
These settings are described in Transient Method (p. 270).

• Fourier Transformation

To help the solver apply the Fourier Transformation method to the applicable domains, you must
accurately characterize a disturbance. For details, see Fourier Transformation Disturbance Set-
tings (p. 268).

The Transient Method settings (Time Period, Time Steps, and Time Duration) must be configured.
These settings are described in Transient Method (p. 270).

23.2.1.1. Time Transformation Disturbance Settings

The Time Transformation method improves solution accuracy over that of the Profile Transform-
ation method when there is unequal pitch between the blade row subsets on each side of a domain
interface that uses the Transient Rotor Stator frame change/mixing model.

A given domain can receive a disturbance from:

• An upstream or downstream domain interface that uses the Transient Rotor Stator frame change/mixing
model. For example, the wake from a blade can pass through a domain interface and disturb the
downstream domain(s).

• Inlet or outlet (or opening) boundaries. For example, a boundary condition could use a CEL function
that depends on space and time in order to mimic the wake of an upstream blade.

The Time Transformation method can be applied to a domain that has an inlet or outlet
disturbance.

To characterize a disturbance, create a new item by clicking Add new item , enter a unique name
for the disturbance, then specify information about the disturbance in one of the following ways:

• Rotor Stator option

This option can be applied only when the disturbance originates from a domain interface that uses
the Transient Rotor Stator frame change/mixing model.

After selecting this option:

1. Select a Domain Interface from the existing domain interfaces that use the Transient Rotor Stator
frame change/mixing model.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
266 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Transient Blade Row Models Details View

2. For each side of the interface (Side 1 and Side 2, which correspond to the first and second sides of the
selected domain interface, respectively) specify the Option setting.

The Option setting for each side is used to determine the domain(s) to which the Time Transformation
method is applied. The options for each side are:

– Automatic

This option causes the solver to identify the domain(s) directly touching the applicable side of the
interface. This option is suitable when all the domains that are affected by the disturbance are in
contact with the applicable side of the interface.

– Domain List

This option enables you to manually select the domain(s) that are on the applicable side of the
interface and that are affected by the disturbance. You might need to use this option if, for example,
a blade row is modeled with two domains with one being downstream of the other, in which case
you would select both domains as being on one side of the interface, even though one of those
domains does not touch the interface.

– None

This option prevents the present disturbance (but not any other disturbances) from applying the
Time Transformation method to any domain that is on the applicable side of the interface.

For details, see Case 1: Transient Rotor Stator Single Stage in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Rotational Flow Boundary Disturbance option

Use this option to characterize a disturbance that originates from a boundary condition (for example,
an inlet or outlet boundary condition that is specified using one or more CEL expressions that depend
on space and time).

After selecting this option:

1. Set Domain Name to the name of the domain(s) that are affected by the disturbance.

2. Set the Signal Motion settings:

– Setting Option to Stationary causes the signal to be stationary in the absolute (stationary) frame
of reference.

– Setting Option to Rotating enables you to select a coordinate frame as a way of specifying the
signal motion. Any boundary using this coordinate frame will be made transient periodic with the
period calculated from the pitch and rotating speed of the signal. For details on moving coordinate
frames, see Frame Motion Settings (p. 286).

3. Specify information about the external blade row that creates the disturbance in the External Passage
Definition settings:

– For a case with rotational periodicity, specify Passages in 360: the number of passages in 360° of
the external blade row that creates the disturbance. Also specify Pass. in Component: the number
of passages in the external blade row that creates the disturbance.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 267
Transient Blade Row Models

4. For a case with rotational periodicity, the Passages in 360 and Pass. in Component settings on the
domain Basic Settings tab apply.

For details, see Case 2: Flow Boundary Disturbance in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

23.2.1.2. Fourier Transformation Disturbance Settings

23.2.1.2.1. Basic Settings Tab
The Fourier Transformation method improves solution accuracy over that of the Profile Trans-
formation method when there is unequal pitch between the blade row subsets on each side of a domain
interface that uses the Transient Rotor Stator frame change/mixing model.

The Fourier Transformation method works for compressible as well as incompressible flows and for all
ranges of disturbance pitch ratios from small to very large. For example, the Fourier Transformation
method can handle a once-per-revolution disturbance on a blade passage, which is a situation that
cannot be handled with the Time Transformation method.

A given domain can receive a disturbance from:

• Inlet or outlet (or opening) boundaries. For example, a boundary condition could use a CEL function
that depends on space and time in order to mimic the wake of an upstream blade.

• An upstream or downstream domain interface that uses the Transient Rotor Stator frame change/mixing
model. For example, the wake from a blade can pass through a domain interface and disturb the
downstream domain(s).

To characterize a disturbance, create a new item by clicking Add new item , enter a unique name
for the disturbance, then specify information about the disturbance in one of the following ways:

• Rotor Stator option

This option can be applied only when the disturbance originates from a domain interface that uses
the Transient Rotor Stator frame change/mixing model.

After selecting this option:

1. Select a Domain Interface from the existing domain interfaces that use the Transient Rotor Stator
frame change/mixing model.

2. For each side of the interface (Side 1 and Side 2, which correspond to the first and second sides of the
selected domain interface, respectively) select the Phase Corrected option and then specify the
Phase Corrected Intf. and Sampling Domain Intf. settings.

The Phase Corrected Intf. setting specifies the periodic GGI-only interface (having rotational
periodicity) to which to apply the phase shift with respect to the sampling domain interface
signal.

The Sampling Domain Intf. setting specifies the non-periodic non-frame-change GGI-only inter-
face on which the Fourier coefficients will be accumulated. This is the interface between a pair
of adjacent blades in a given component.

For details, see Case 1: Transient Rotor Stator Single Stage in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
268 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Transient Blade Row Models Details View

• Rotational Flow Boundary Disturbance option

Use this option to characterize a disturbance that originates from a boundary condition (for example,
an inlet or outlet boundary condition that is specified using one or more CEL expressions that depend
on space and time).

After selecting this option:

1. Specify the Phase Corrected Intf. and Sampling Domain Intf. settings.

The Phase Corrected Intf. setting specifies the periodic GGI-only interface (having rotational
periodicity) to which to apply the phase shift with respect to the sampling domain interface
signal.

The Sampling Domain Intf. setting specifies the non-periodic non-frame-change GGI-only inter-
face on which the Fourier coefficients will be accumulated. This is the interface between a pair
of adjacent blades in a given component.

2. Set the Signal Motion settings:

– Setting Option to Stationary causes the signal to be stationary in the absolute (stationary) frame
of reference.

– Setting Option to Rotating enables you to select a rotating coordinate frame as a way of specifying
the signal motion. Any boundary using this coordinate frame will be made transient periodic with
the period calculated from the pitch and rotating speed of the signal. For details on moving coordinate
frames, see Frame Motion Settings (p. 286).

3. Specify information about the external blade row that creates the disturbance in the External Passage
Definition settings:

– For a case with rotational periodicity, specify Passages in 360: the number of passages in 360° of
the external blade row that creates the disturbance. Also specify Pass. in Component: the number
of passages in the external blade row that creates the disturbance.

4. For a case with rotational periodicity, the Passages in 360 and Pass. in Component settings on the
domain Basic Settings tab apply.

For details, see Case 2: Flow Boundary Disturbance in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Blade Flutter option

Use this option to characterize a disturbance that originates from the periodic motion of a wall
boundary.

After selecting this option:

1. Specify the Phase Corrected Intf. and Sampling Domain Intf. settings as applicable.

The Phase Corrected Intf. setting specifies the periodic GGI-only bitmap-intersection-method
interface (having rotational periodicity) to which to apply the phase shift with respect to the
sampling domain interface signal.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 269
Transient Blade Row Models

The Sampling Domain Intf. setting specifies the non-periodic non-frame-change GGI-only inter-
face on which the Fourier coefficients will be collected. This is the interface between a pair of
adjacent blades in a given component.

2. Specify the Blade Boundary.

The Blade Boundary setting specifies the wall boundary with a Periodic Displacement
mesh motion boundary condition that creates the disturbance. This boundary contains the in-
formation required (frequency, and phase angle) to compute the phase shift to be applied on
the rotationally periodic boundaries.

For details, see Case 3: Blade Flutter in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Note

You must ensure that the disturbance is periodic in time when using the Rotational
Flow Boundary Disturbance option.

23.2.1.2.2. Advanced Options Tab

It is possible to specify some further parameters to control the Fourier Transformation model. These
parameters are specified on the Advanced Options tab of the Transient Blade Row Models details
view. This tab becomes visible once you set Transient Blade Row Model > Option to Fourier
Transformation.

On the Advanced Options tab, you can select Fourier Transformation Control > Frequency Filtering.

23.2.1.2.2.1. Frequency Filtering

Frequency filtering is available on the Advanced Options tab under Fourier Transformation Control.
Frequency filtering enables filtering of undesired frequencies that might be present in the solution and
that could trigger instabilities. The Scaled Domain Damping option requires that you set a value
for Damping Scale Factor. This value is a dimensionless positive number that has a lower bound of
0.0, which specifies that there is no filtering. The recommended value for Damping Scale Factor is
1.0.

23.2.2. Transient Method

You can select the methodology for obtaining a transient solution: Time Integration, or Harmonic
Balance. For additional information, see Transient versus Harmonic Solution Method in the CFX Reference
Guide.

Note

If you restart a case from existing Fourier Transformation results, you do not have to specify
the minimum number of periods for the specified method.

The following topics are discussed:

23.2.2.1.Time Integration
23.2.2.2. Harmonic Balance

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
270 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Transient Blade Row Models Details View

23.2.2.1. Time Integration

The Time Period settings are used to establish a value for the time period in which each disturbance
of interest cycles an integer number of times. The options for obtaining this number are:

• Value

This option requires that you specify a value for the time period directly.

• Passing Period

When this option is selected, the time period is calculated automatically as:

– For inlet disturbance cases:

The signal pitch divided by the relative velocity between the signal and the domain.

– For transient rotor stator cases:

The result of dividing the blade pitch by the absolute value of the angular velocity of the rotor(s),
for the specified domain.

Note that the blade pitch is indirectly specified via the Passages in 360 setting on the Basic Settings
tab for the domain.

This resulting time period is displayed as the Passing Period.

• Automatic

When this option is selected, the time period is calculated automatically. The calculation uses the
information specified for each disturbance, and the blade pitch of the domain. Note that the blade
pitch of a domain is indirectly specified via the Passages in 360 setting on the Basic Settings tab
for the domain.

The time period is given a value such that, during one period, each disturbance undergoes an integer
number of cycles. This time period is displayed as the Passing Period.

The Min. Timesteps / Per. is computed and displayed; it is the minimum number of time steps required
to resolve each disturbance cycle period into an integer number of time steps.

In a typical transient simulation, you can specify the time step size directly. However, when using a
Transient Blade Row model, the time step size is set indirectly.

The Time Steps settings control the size of a time step indirectly in one of two ways, depending on
the option you choose:

• Number of Timesteps per Period

The time step size is computed by dividing the Time Period setting by a number, Timesteps/Period,
that you specify.

• Timestep Multiplier (available only when the Time Period option is set to Automatic)

The time step size is computed by dividing the Time Period setting by the number of time steps per
period, where the latter is the product of Min. Timesteps / Per. and Timestep Multiplier.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 271
Transient Blade Row Models

You must ensure that the number of time steps per period is sufficient to resolve each disturbance.

The Time Duration settings control the length of the simulation directly by controlling the number of
periods. This setting also indirectly controls the total number of time steps in the simulation.

CFX-Pre automatically determines, lists, and uses the domains with the longest passing period. For the
Fourier Transformation results to be sensible, CFX-Solver requires a minimum of 15 of the longest
periods for the transient rotor stator cases, and a minimum of five of the longest periods for the inlet
disturbance cases. Alternatively, you can use the extended list to select any other domain. If you pick
a domain from the extended list, which does not have the longest passing period, then CFX-Pre will
warn you. In this case, you will have to ensure that the Number of Periods per Run is increased to
match what is needed for the domain with the longest passing period.

23.2.2.2. Harmonic Balance

Specify the number of modes to retain in the approximation. For guidelines on Harmonic Analysis, see
Harmonic Analysis in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
272 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 24: Mesh Adaption
Mesh Adaption in CFX is the process by which the mesh is selectively refined in areas that are affected
by the adaption criteria specified. This means that as the solution is calculated, the mesh can automat-
ically be made finer or coarser in locations where solution variables change rapidly, in order to resolve
the features of the flow in these regions.

Each mesh element is given an Adaption Level. Each time the element is split into smaller elements,
the new elements are assigned an Adaption Level that is one greater than the element it was generated
from. The maximum number of Adaption Levels is controlled to prevent over-refinement.

In CFX, mesh adaption is only available for single domain, steady-state problems with limited physics.
A full list of limitations can be found in Mesh Adaption Limitations in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide. The
Mesh Adaption process is performed by CFX-Solver. However, the parameters that control the Adaption
process are defined in CFX-Pre on the Mesh Adaption form.

This chapter describes:

• Overview (p. 273)

• Setting Up Mesh Adaption (p. 275)

• The Details View for Mesh Adaption (p. 276)

• Advanced Topic: Adaption with 2D Meshes (p. 279)

24.1. Overview
The following will take place when CFX-Solver is run (on steady-state problems). The process is shown
in the diagrammatic form below (Figure 24.1: Mesh Adaption Process (p. 274)).

1. The CFX-Solver solves for solution variables using the mesh that is contained in the CFX-Solver input file,
or specified using an initial values file. The CFX-Solver uses Convergence Criteria that have been specified
on the Basic Settings tab of the Mesh Adaption form; the Convergence Criteria specified on the Solver
Control form is not used at this stage.

2. A Mesh Adaption Step (one loop of the adapt-solve cycle) takes place. Using the solution calculated in
this first step, together with the Adaption Criteria specified on the Mesh Adaption Basic Settings form,
the mesh is refined in selected areas. For details, see Mesh Adaption in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

3. The CFX-Solver solves for solution variables using the mesh created by the Mesh Adaption step. The CFX-
Solver uses the Convergence Criteria specified on the Basic Settings tab of the Mesh Adaption form;
the Convergence Criteria specified on the Solver Control form is not used at this stage.

4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the Max. Num. Steps (specified on the Basic Settings of the Mesh Ad-
aption form) is reached.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 273
Mesh Adaption

5. Finally, CFX-Solver solves for solution variables using the mesh that was created by the final Mesh Adaption
step. The Convergence Criteria used by the CFX-Solver at this stage are those specified on the Solver
Control form.

Figure 24.1: Mesh Adaption Process

The Mesh Adaption step itself consists of the following:

1. The Adaption Criteria are applied to each edge of each element in the mesh.

2. Nodes are added to the existing mesh according to the Adaption Criteria. The number of nodes added is
dependent on the total number of nodes to be added and the node allocation parameter.

3. The solution already calculated on the older mesh is linearly interpolated onto the new mesh.

If the CFX-Solver is being run in parallel, then each “Solve” step is preceded by a mesh partitioning
step.

Additional information on how elements are selected for adaption, how elements are divided, and the
limitations of mesh adaption in CFX is available in Mesh Adaption in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
274 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setting Up Mesh Adaption

24.2. Setting Up Mesh Adaption

To set up mesh adaption:

1. Select Insert > Solver > Mesh Adaption.

The Mesh Adaption dialog box appears.

2. Select or clear Activate Adaption.

If selected, Mesh Adaption performs when the solver is run.

3. Under Region List, select the regions to adapt.

For details, see Region List (p. 276).

4. Select or clear Save Intermediate Files.

For details, see Save Intermediate Files (p. 276).

5. Specify the required Adaption Criteria.

For details, see Adaption Criteria (p. 276).

6. Specify the required Adaption Method.

For details, see Adaption Method (p. 277).

7. Specify Adaption Convergence Criteria.

For details, see Adaption Convergence Criteria (p. 278).

8. Select Adaption Variables from the Variables List.

9. Enter the Maximum Number of Adaption Steps (Max. Num. Steps) allowed.

The default is 3. For details, see Max. Num. Steps (p. 277).

10. Select how many nodes should be present in the adapted mesh. Options are:

• Multiple of Initial Mesh

• Final Number of Nodes

For details, see Option (p. 277).

11. Select an option for Adaption Method > Option.

For details, see Adaption Method (p. 277).

12. Specify the Adaption Convergence Criteria to be used for each adaption step.

For details, see Adaption Convergence Criteria (p. 278).

This is different from the Convergence Criteria used to terminate the run, which is set in Solver
Controller. For details, see Basic Settings Tab (p. 211).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 275
Mesh Adaption

13. Switch to the Advanced Options tab or click OK to accept the mesh adaption settings. For details, see
Advanced Options Tab (p. 278).

24.3. The Details View for Mesh Adaption

The following tabs are presented on the details view of Mesh Adaption:

• Basic Settings Tab (p. 276)

• Advanced Options Tab (p. 278)

24.3.1. Basic Settings Tab

The following sections describe the options available on the Basic Settings tab for Mesh Adaption.

24.3.1.1. Region List

Region List contains the names of all 3D Regions and Assemblies in the problem. Select any or all of
the 3D regions to be used for mesh adaption.

Note

Mesh adaption cannot be used in multidomain simulations or in cases with external solver
coupling. Mesh adaption also cannot be used for transient, mesh-motion, radiative-tracking,
or particle-transport cases.

24.3.1.2. Save Intermediate Files

If Save Intermediate Files is selected, an intermediate results file is saved immediately before each
mesh adaption step begins. At the end of the run, these intermediate files are stored in a subdirectory
with the same name as the run, in the directory that contains the CFX-Solver results file.

24.3.1.3. Adaption Criteria

For each adaption step, and for each mesh element, the adaption criteria are applied, and mesh elements
meeting the adaption criteria are refined. There are two methods of specifying how the adaption criteria
are specified. For details, see Adaption Method (p. 277).

24.3.1.3.1. Variables List

The Variables List is used to select the variables that make up part of the Adaption Criteria.

During the adaption process, if only one variable is selected, the value of the variable is observed for
each element defining the selected regions specified by the Region List. The maximum variation in
value of the variable along any edge of an element is used to decided whether the element is to be
modified. If multiple variables are selected, the maximum of variation of all the variables for a given
element is used to decide whether or not an element should be modified.

To save unnecessary processing, it is important to ensure that variables selected will vary during the
calculation. For instance, do not select Density as a variable for an incompressible flow calculation.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
276 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 The Details View for Mesh Adaption

24.3.1.3.2. Max. Num. Steps

The number of steps that the adaption process performs is specified by Max. Num. Steps. It is recom-
mended that you select a number between 1 and 5.

Note

If CFX-Solver runs on the CFX-Solver input file and finishes normally, this number of Adaption
Steps will take place. If CFX-Solver is stopped and then restarted from the results file produced,
only the remaining number of Adaption Steps will take place in the restarted run.

24.3.1.3.3. Option
The number of nodes in the final mesh generated by the adaption process is controlled by the value
selected in Option.

Select Final Number of Nodes, to specify the number of nodes in the final mesh, or Multiple of Initial
Mesh, which enables specification of the number of nodes in the final mesh as a multiple of the initial
mesh.

If Multiple of Initial Mesh is selected, it is also necessary to specify a Node Factor multiplier greater
than 1.2. If Final Number of Nodes is selected, then specify the number of Nodes in Adaption Mesh
that is no more than a factor of five greater than the number of nodes in the initial mesh.

Note

The final mesh will not contain exactly the number of nodes specified in either case. For
details, see Mesh Adaption in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

24.3.1.4. Adaption Method

The Adaption Method used by the adaption process to apply the Adaption Criteria is controlled by
the options specified in the Adaption Method section of the form.

24.3.1.4.1. Option
The Adaption Method is specified as either Solution Variation, or Solution Variation * Edge Length.

If Solution Variation * Edge Length is selected, the Adaption Criteria takes account of both the
variation of the solution variable over the edge of the element and the length of the edge. The result
of having applied the Adaption Criteria to each edge of an element is then multiplied by the length
of the edge. The maximum value of all the edges of the element is used to decide whether an element
is to be refined. This means that in areas of the flow where the solution variation is similar, adaption
will take place preferentially in regions where the mesh length scale is largest.

24.3.1.4.2. Minimum Edge Length

When Solution Variation is specified by Option, the Adaption Criteria is applied using only the max-
imum variation of a solution variable across any edge associated with an element. This option does not
use the length of the edge in the calculation. In this case, consider specifying a Minimum Edge Length
to avoid refining the mesh too far at a discontinuity in the solution. For details, see Mesh Adaption in
the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 277
Mesh Adaption

24.3.1.5. Adaption Convergence Criteria

The convergence criteria used to specify when the CFX-Solver stops running on the original and inter-
mediate meshes is specified in the Adaption Convergence Criteria section of the form. The available
parameters are the same as those used to determine the final convergence of the solution. For details,
see Basic Settings Tab (p. 211).

24.3.2. Advanced Options Tab

It is possible to specify some further parameters to control the adaption process, these are specified
on the Advanced Options tab of the Mesh Adaption form.

24.3.2.1. Node Alloc. Parameter

Setting the node allocation parameter, Node Alloc. Parameter, controls how much the mesh is refined
at each adaption step. For some problems, it may be that it is better to refine a lot in the early steps,
and for others it may be more appropriate to refine more in the later steps.

Node Alloc. Parameter is used as follows. On the nth adaption step, approximately Sn nodes are added
to the mesh, where

M is the maximum number of nodes that can be added to the original mesh calculated from having
applied the Adaption Criteria to the selected regions and c is the value of Node Alloc. Parameter.
For details, see Adaption Criteria (p. 276).

When Node Alloc. Parameter is set to 0, then the same number of nodes is added for each adaption
step. When Node Alloc. Parameter is negative, more nodes are added in the later adaption steps.
When it is positive, more nodes are added in the earlier adaption steps. The table below shows the
percentage of nodes that will be added at each adaption step when Max. Num. Steps is set to a value
of 3 and different values of Node Alloc. Parameter are specified.

Node Alloc. Step Step 2 Step

Parameter 1 3
-2.0 7.14 28.57 64.28
-1.0 16.66 33.33 50.00
0.0 33.33 33.33 33.33
0.5 43.77 30.95 25.27
1.0 54.54 27.27 18.18
2.0 73.47 18.36 8.16

It is recommended that you set a value for Node Alloc. Parameter in the range -2 to 2.

24.3.2.2. Number of Levels

The value of this parameter specifies the maximum number of times any element of the original mesh
can be subdivided. It must not be greater than Max. Num. Steps.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
278 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Advanced Topic: Adaption with 2D Meshes

24.4. Advanced Topic: Adaption with 2D Meshes

2D Meshes are not supported in CFX. However, CFX can use 3D meshes that are one element thick.
This section outlines a workaround for such meshes when using mesh adaption.

CFX 2D meshes contain hexahedral, prismatic and potentially pyramidal and tetrahedral elements. In
the support of prismatic inflation in 3D meshes, special restrictions are applicable to the adaption of
prismatic elements. If adaption is applied to a 3D mesh that is one element thick, an error will result.
In order to work around this, set the environment variable CFX5_REFINER_NO_TRICOLUMNS to 1
before starting CFX-Pre. Note that any refinement that takes place will be 3D refinement that will intro-
duce additional elements in the third dimension. This environment variable can also be used when the
input mesh has prismatic elements that have opposite triangular faces on the boundary. This can arise
if the mesh has been imported from a mesh generation tool other than CFX-Mesh.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 279
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
280 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 25: Expert Control Parameters
This chapter describes:
25.1. Modifying Expert Control Parameters

All geometry, domain, boundary condition, mesh, initial value and solver parameter information is
written to the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File.

The CFX-Solver input file contains the relevant information required by the CFX-Solver to conduct the
CFD simulation. This information mainly consists of numerical values that set up the simulation, as well
as controls for the CFX-Solver.

Many of these parameters are set in CFX-Pre. For example, on the Solver Control panel, you can set
the accuracy of the numerical discretization. Expert control parameters are settings that do not require
modification for the majority of CFD simulations, and cannot immediately be set through the CFX-Pre
interface. For details, see CFX-Solver Expert Control Parameters in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Note that expert control parameters are only intended for use by customers who are experienced in
using CFX, or who have been instructed to use expert control parameters by ANSYS customer support.
Use of these parameters is not fully supported, and may cause unexpected or unintended consequences
for both the performance of the CFX-Solver and the quality of the results. For details, see When to Use
Expert Control Parameters in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

25.1. Modifying Expert Control Parameters

1. Select Insert > Solver > Expert Parameter.

The Expert Parameters details view appears.

2. Make changes to the appropriate sections on any of the following tabs: Discretization, Linear Solver,
I/O Control, Convergence Control, Physical Models, Particle Tracking, or Model Overrides.

Making changes requires selecting options and setting specific values. For parameters with a small
number of choices (such as logical parameters), select an option from the drop-down list. Other
parameters require data entry (such as real numbers).

For details on each of the parameters listed on these tabs, see CFX-Solver Expert Control Parameters
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

3. Repeat the previous step as desired.

4. Click OK.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 281
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
282 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 26: Coordinate Frames
By default, all quantities used in CFX-Pre are defined with reference to the global Cartesian coordinate
frame. In some cases, it is useful to use a different coordinate frame for specifying boundary conditions,
initial conditions, source components or spatially varying material properties. It is possible to specify
one or more local coordinate frame objects to which you can then refer. This chapter describes the user
interface for creating local coordinate frame objects. For details, see Coordinate Frames in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

Local Coordinate Frame objects may be defined in terms of Cartesian coordinates. Here, the numbers
1, 2, 3 are used to denote the Cartesian X, Y, Z axes.

This chapter describes:

26.1. Creating a New Coordinate Frame
26.2. Coordinate Frame Basic Settings Tab

26.1. Creating a New Coordinate Frame

1. Select Insert > Coordinate Frame.

The Insert Coordinate Frame dialog box appears

2. Set Name to a unique name for the coordinate frame.

Coord 0 cannot be used as a name as it is the default coordinate frame. For details, see Valid
Syntax for Named Objects (p. 55).

3. Click OK.

The coordinate frame details view appears, with the Basic Settings tab visible.

4. Specify the basic settings.

For details, see Coordinate Frame Basic Settings Tab (p. 283).

5. Click OK.

An object named after the coordinate frame is created and listed in the tree view under Simula
tion.

26.2. Coordinate Frame Basic Settings Tab

The Basic Settings tab for a coordinate frame object contains settings that specify the coordinate frame.
It is accessible by creating a new coordinate frame or by editing a coordinate frame listed in the tree
view.
26.2.1. Coordinate Frame: Option
26.2.2. Coordinate Frame: Centroid
26.2.3. Coordinate Frame: Direction

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 283
Coordinate Frames

26.2.4. Coord Frame Type

26.2.5. Reference Coord Frame
26.2.6. Origin
26.2.7. Z-Axis Point
26.2.8. X-Z Plane Point
26.2.9. Frame Motion Settings
26.2.10. Visibility Check Box

26.2.1. Coordinate Frame: Option

26.2.1.1. Point and Normal
This method can be used to make Cartesian coordinate frames. The origin of the coordinate frame is
set to the centroid of a specified 2D region (which is available only when a mesh exists). Axis 3 of the
coordinate frame is then computed as locally normal to the 2D region; its direction can be reversed if
not satisfactory (after examining the coordinate frame representation in the viewer). Optionally, Axis 1
may be given a prescribed orientation about Axis 3 by specifying a point that is interpreted as lying on
the 1-3 plane with a positive Axis 1 coordinate. If such a point is not specified explicitly, the global origin
is used. Axis 2 is found by the right-hand rule.

26.2.1.2. Axis Points

This method can be used to make Cartesian coordinate frames. The coordinate frame is created by
specifying three points. It is important to understand how these three points are used to create a co-
ordinate frame. For details, see Coordinate Frame Details in the CFD-Post User's Guide.

26.2.2. Coordinate Frame: Centroid

26.2.2.1. Location
(applies only when Option is set to Point and Normal)

Select a 2D region or combination of 2D regions, the centroid of which will be used as the origin of
the coordinate frame.

Tip

Hold the Ctrl key when clicking to select multiple regions.

Tip

With Single Select selected, you may click locations in the viewer to make them available
for selection.

26.2.2.2. Centroid Type

(applies only when Option is set to Point and Normal)

• Absolute

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
284 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Coordinate Frame Basic Settings Tab

The true centroid position is used. If the specified region is not planar, the absolute centroid may
not lie on the surface.

• Nearest Point on Mesh

The mesh node nearest to the true centroid is used.

26.2.3. Coordinate Frame: Direction

26.2.3.1. Invert Normal Axis Direction Check Box
(applies only when Option is set to Point and Normal)

This check box determines whether or not the direction of the Z axis is reversed from that initially de-
termined.

26.2.3.2. Point on Reference Plane 1-3 Check Box

(applies only when Option is set to Point and Normal)

This check box determines whether or not the theta=0 direction is defined explicitly by a point in the
1-3 plane. If selected, you must specify that point.

26.2.3.3. Point on Reference Plane 1-3 Check Box: Coordinate

Enter global Cartesian coordinates that define a point on the 1-3 plane of the coordinate frame. The
direction of this point from the nearest point on Axis 3 is the direction of Axis 1. Axis 1 corresponds
with the radial direction for theta=0.

Tip

With Single Select selected, you may click 2D locations in the viewer to select their cor-
responding points.

26.2.4. Coord Frame Type

(applies only when Option is set to Axis Points)

Coordinates interpreted with reference to the coordinate frame will be interpreted as Cartesian. For
details, see Cartesian Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

26.2.5. Reference Coord Frame

(applies only when Option is set to Axis Points)

Select an existing coordinate frame to use as a basis for interpreting the point data that defines the
present coordinate frame.

26.2.6. Origin
(applies only when Option is set to Axis Points)

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 285
Coordinate Frames

In the reference Coordinate Frame, enter coordinates that define the origin of the present coordinate
frame.

Tip

With Single Select selected, you may click 2D locations in the viewer to select their cor-
responding points.

26.2.7. Z-Axis Point

(applies only when Option is set to Axis Points)

In the reference Coordinate Frame, enter coordinates that define a point on the positive side of the
Z axis of the present Coordinate Frame.

Tip

With Single Select selected, you may click locations in the viewer.

26.2.8. X-Z Plane Point

(applies only when Option is set to Axis Points)

In the reference Coordinate Frame, enter coordinates that define a point on the X-Z plane of the
present Coordinate Frame.

The direction of this point from the nearest point on the Z axis is the direction of the X axis.

Tip

With Single Select selected, you may click locations in the viewer.

26.2.9. Frame Motion Settings

The options are:

• Stationary

• Rotating

You can specify a constant angular velocity for the coordinate frame by setting Option to Rotating
and specifying a (constant) value (which could be in the form of a CEL expression) for the Angular
Velocity. You will also have to specify a stationary axis about which the rotation occurs, using the
Axis Definition settings.

A boundary condition can use a rotating coordinate frame as its local frame of reference in order to
cause an applied profile (for example, a pressure profile) to move.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
286 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Coordinate Frame Basic Settings Tab

26.2.10. Visibility Check Box

This check box determines whether or not the graphics representation of the coordinate axis is displayed
in the viewer.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 287
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
288 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 27: User Locations
User locations enable you to specify an arbitrary set of points and connectivities that are not directly
associated with the volume mesh, upon which the solver can write solution data. Post processing of
these locations in CFD-Post provides a more efficient way to view data in regions of known interest
and additionally can reduce the size of transient results files.

This chapter describes:

27.1. User Surfaces
27.2. Importing a User Surface into CFX-Pre

27.1. User Surfaces

User surfaces can be defined by .csv files that were exported from CFD-Post. (For details on the export
of surface data from CFD-Post, see Export Commands in the CFD-Post User's Guide.)

27.2. Importing a User Surface into CFX-Pre

1. Select Insert > User Surface.

The Insert User Surface dialog box appears.

2. Set Name to a unique name for the user surface.

3. Click OK.

The details view for the user surface appears.

4. Click the browse icon ( ).

The Select User Surface File dialog box appears.

5. With Files of type set appropriately, select the file that defines your user surface, and click Open.

6. In the details view, optionally select Visibility to view the surface in the graphics window.

7. Click OK.

An object named after the user surface is created and listed in the tree view under Simula
tion>User Locations.

Note

When submitting a run to a cluster or running on a different machine, the path to the .csv
file must be valid on that cluster/machine.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 289
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
290 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 28: Materials and Reactions
The tree view contains a Materials object and a Reactions object, which contain all the currently
available materials and reactions.

A Material details view is available for editing the properties of new or existing fluids, solids, and mix-
tures. The new or modified materials can then be selected for use in your simulation or reaction defin-
itions. For details, see Materials (p. 291).

A Reaction details view is available for editing the properties of new or existing reactions. For details,
see Reactions (p. 304).

Note

You can set only those material properties that will be used in the CFD model. For example,
you can set the buoyancy properties only if your model involves buoyant flow.

You can use CEL to define fluid property variation through an expression if it is required. For
example, you could define Dynamic Viscosity to be a function of Temperature.

28.1. Materials
The Material details view, accessible by editing a material from the tree view or by creating a new
material, is used to prepare materials for availability in a simulation.

The following topics will be discussed:

28.1.1. Library Materials
28.1.2. Material Details View: Common Settings
28.1.3. Material Details View: Pure Substance
28.1.4. Material Details View: Fixed Composition Mixture
28.1.5. Material Details View: Variable Composition Mixture
28.1.6. Material Details View: Homogeneous Binary Mixture
28.1.7. Material Details View: Reacting Mixture
28.1.8. Material Details View: Hydrocarbon Fuel

28.1.1. Library Materials

CFX-Pre provides an extensive list of library materials. Properties for these have already been defined
and are known to CFX-Pre. If you modify a library material during a simulation using the Material details
view, the modified definition is stored in the simulation file and is therefore local to your simulation.

On the Outline tab, right-click Materials and select Import Library Data to open the Select Library
Data to Import dialog box. From here, you can select a material to load.

If necessary, you can open the File to Import dialog box by clicking Browse . The dialog box will
open with the default location: <CFXROOT>/etc/materials-extra/. This directory contains CCL

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 291
Materials and Reactions

files that can be used to load additional materials into CFX-Pre (for example, Redlich Kwong, IAPWS, or
Interphase Mass Transfer materials).

After importing material(s) from a library, you should inspect the material property data to ensure that
it is adequate for the specific application.

If you want to use a material defined in one simulation in another simulation, the recommended
method is to use the Export and Import CCL features to load the material definition from a local file.
This is done by exporting CCL objects of type LIBRARY:LIBRARY/MATERIAL. For details, see Import
CCL Command (p. 33) and Export CCL Command (p. 34).

28.1.2. Material Details View: Common Settings

28.1.2.1. Option
Any material can consist of one or more materials. If a material contains only a single pure species, then
it is known as a pure substance. If it contains more than one species, then it is known as a mixture. The
materials are assumed to be mixed at the molecular level in the mixture.

The type of material is set using the following options:

• The Pure Substance option should be used to create a fluid whose properties, such as viscosity, density,
or molar mass, are known. All existing and newly created pure substances appear in the materials list and
you can then create mixtures from them. For details, see Material Details View: Pure Substance (p. 295).

• The Fixed Composition Mixture option should be used to create a mixture with fixed mass fractions
of each material. The mass fraction of each material is specified and is not allowed to change during the
course of the simulation in space or time. For details, see Material Details View: Fixed Composition Mix-
ture (p. 298).

• The Variable Composition Mixture option should be used to create a mixture whose mass fractions
are allowed to change during the course of a simulation in space and time. The mass fraction of each mater-
ial is not specified when defining the fluid. You can use a fixed composition mixture as a material in a variable
composition mixture.

For details, see Material Details View: Variable Composition Mixture (p. 299).

• The Homogeneous Binary Mixture option applies to equilibrium phase change calculations. For details,
see Material Details View: Homogeneous Binary Mixture (p. 301).

• The Reacting Mixture option is used for a chemical reaction, such as combustion.

For details, see Material Details View: Reacting Mixture (p. 302).

• The Hydrocarbon Fuel option. For details, see Material Details View: Hydrocarbon Fuel (p. 303).

28.1.2.2. Material Group

The Material Group filter is used to group materials by type, as well as restrict what materials can be
mixed when the physical models include reactions or phase change. A material can be a member of
more than one material group if it has a consistent set of properties. Material Group will always be
set to at least one of the following:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
292 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Materials

28.1.2.2.1. User
Any user-defined materials, not assigned to one of the other groups, are shown in or can be added to
this group. For example, materials loaded from a previous CFX-Pre simulation are shown in this group.

28.1.2.2.2. Air Data

This group contains Ideal Gas and constant property air. Constant properties are for dry air at both 0
[C], 1 [atm] (STP) and 25 [C], 1 [atm].

28.1.2.2.3. CHT Solids

Contains solid substances that can be used for solid domains when performing conjugate heat transfer
modeling.

28.1.2.2.4. Calorically Perfect Ideal Gases

Contains gases that obey the Ideal Gas Law.

28.1.2.2.5. Constant Property Gases / Liquids

These groups contain gas and liquid substances with constant properties.

The gas properties are calculated at STP (0 [C] and 1 [atm]). Gas materials in this group can be combined
with NASA SP-273 materials for use in combustion modeling simulations.

28.1.2.2.6. Dry/Wet Redlich Kwong

No materials appear in this group by default, they must be loaded from a pre-supplied materials file.
All materials in this group use the built-in Redlich-Kwong equation of state and are suitable for performing
equilibrium, homogeneous, phase change modeling.

For any given pure substance, there are three different materials. There is a material with a RK tag, used
for dry vapor calculations, and three materials with RKv, RKl and RKlv suffixes, which are used for
equilibrium phase change (wet vapor) calculations.

28.1.2.2.7. Dry/Wet Redlich Kwong RGP

No materials appear in this group by default, they must also be loaded from a pre-supplied materials
file. All materials in this group use the Redlich-Kwong equation of state with properties specified in a
TASCflow RGP file. These materials are suitable for performing equilibrium, homogeneous, phase change
modeling.

Like the built-in Redlich Kwong group, for any given pure substance there are three different materials.
There is a material with a RK tag, used for dry vapor calculations, and three materials with RKv, RKl
and RKlv suffixes, which are used for equilibrium phase change (wet vapor) calculations.

28.1.2.2.8. Dry/Wet Peng Robinson RGP

No materials appear in this group by default, they must also be loaded from a pre-supplied materials
file. All materials in this group use the Redlich-Kwong equation of state with properties specified in a
TASCflow RGP file. These materials are suitable for performing equilibrium, homogeneous, phase change
modeling.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 293
Materials and Reactions

Like the built-in Redlich Kwong group, for any given pure substance there are three different materials.
There is a material with a RK tag, used for dry vapor calculations, and three materials with RKv, RKl
and RKlv suffixes, which are used for equilibrium phase change (wet vapor) calculations.

28.1.2.2.9. Dry/Wet Soave Redlich Kwong RGP

No materials appear in this group by default, they must also be loaded from a pre-supplied materials
file. All materials in this group use the Redlich-Kwong equation of state with properties specified in a
TASCflow RGP file. These materials are suitable for performing equilibrium, homogeneous, phase change
modeling.

Like the built-in Redlich Kwong group, for any given pure substance there are three different materials.
There is a material with a RK tag, used for dry vapor calculations, and three materials with RKv, RKl
and RKlv suffixes, which are used for equilibrium phase change (wet vapor) calculations.

28.1.2.2.10. Dry/Wet Steam

No materials appear in this group by default, they must also be loaded from a pre-supplied materials
file. Materials in this group use the IAPWS equation of state. Again, the materials are suitable for either
dry or wet steam calculations.

28.1.2.2.11. Gas Phase Combustion

Contains materials that can be used for gas phase combustion. All materials in this group use the Ideal
Gas equation of state. The specific heat capacity, enthalpy and entropy for each of the materials are
specified using the NASA SP-273 format. For details, see NASA Format in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.2.2.12. Interphase Mass Transfer

This group contains materials that can be used for Eulerian or Lagrangian interphase mass transfer. This
group currently contains a number of materials that have liquid or gas reference states, which are
consistent for performing phase change calculations. The gas phases use the ideal gas equation of state
and temperature-dependent specific heat capacity. The associated liquid phases use constant properties.

28.1.2.2.13. Particle Solids

Contains a list of solids that can be used in Particle Tracking calculations.

28.1.2.2.14. Soot
This group contains solid substances that can be used when performing soot calculations.

28.1.2.2.15. Water Data

This group contains liquid and vapor water materials with constant properties. The materials in this
group can be combined with NASA SP-273 materials for use in combustion modeling simulations.

28.1.2.3. Material Description

This parameter can be toggled on to view a detailed description of the substance. Click Edit the Material

Description to edit the description (to a maximum of 120 alphanumeric characters).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
294 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Materials

28.1.2.4. Thermodynamic State

This parameter sets the state of a substance to solid, liquid or gas. There are certain limitations imposed
by selecting a particular state. For example, a solid must always have at least density, specific heat ca-
pacity and thermal conductivity specified.

28.1.2.5. Coordinate Frame

For material properties that are set using expressions containing X, Y, or Z, you may want to supply a
custom coordinate frame as the basis for evaluation of such properties. For details, see Coordinate
Frame (p. 295), Coordinate Frames (p. 283), and Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.3. Material Details View: Pure Substance

The following topics will be discussed:

• Basic Settings Tab (p. 295)

• Material Properties Tab (p. 295)

28.1.3.1. Basic Settings Tab

The Basic Settings tab is used to set the type of material, its state, an optional description and an op-
tional coordinate frame.

1. Set the Material Group.

For details, see Material Group (p. 292).

2. The Material Description field is optional.

For details, see Material Description (p. 294).

3. Select the Thermodynamic State.

For details, see Thermodynamic State (p. 295).

4. Optionally set a custom coordinate frame for any material properties that depend on expressions in X, Y,
or Z.

For details, see Coordinate Frame (p. 295), Coordinate Frames (p. 283), and Coordinate Frames in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.3.2. Material Properties Tab

There are two main categories specifying properties of a pure substance: General Material and
Table. A General Material can have its thermodynamic, transport and radiation properties defined
in the most general manner using any of the built-in flow solver models, constants, or CEL expressions.
A table material uses a TASCflow RGP file to look up the required values. For details, see Table (p. 297).

28.1.3.2.1. General Material

General Materials can have their Equation of State set to the following options:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 295
Materials and Reactions

• Equation of State - Value (p. 296).

• Equation of State - Ideal Gas (p. 296).

• Equation of State - Real Gas (p. 296).

For details on equations of state, see Equation of State in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.3.2.1.1. Equation of State - Value

The following tab appears when Equation of State is set to Value. Value uses whichever model for
density that is supplied by the user. For example, the equation of state model could be a constant or
a CEL expression.

• Equation of State > Option. For details, see Option in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Specify the Density and Molar Mass. An expression can be used for Density that depends on temperature
and/or pressure. In this case, the CFX-Solver may build property tables in order to calculate enthalpy and
entropy. If you use this option, check the table generation settings.

Additional information on Material Properties is available in:

• Specific Heat Capacity in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Transport Properties in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Radiation Properties in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Buoyancy Properties in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Electromagnetic Properties in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.3.2.1.2. Equation of State - Ideal Gas

• If you set the specific heat capacity using a CEL expression, the solver will build tables for enthalpy and en-
tropy. If you use this option, check the table generation settings.

• For an ideal gas, specify the Molar Mass. For details, see Molar Mass in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Additional information on ideal gas is available in:

• Ideal Gas in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Reference State Properties in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Transport Properties in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.3.2.1.3. Equation of State - Real Gas

The Real Gas option can be specified to model non-ideal gases and some liquid phase properties.
Set Model to one of the following:

• Aungier Redlich Kwong (the default model)

• Peng Robinson

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
296 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Materials

• Soave Redlich Kwong

• Standard Redlich Kwong.

To load the Real Gas materials into CFX-Pre:

1. On the Outline tab, right-click Materials and select Import Library Data.

2. In the Select Library Data to Import dialog box, click Browse and open the MATERIALS-redkw.ccl,
MATERIALS-sredkw.ccl, or MATERIALS-pengrob.ccl file, which contain pre-defined real gas
materials model.

3. Select the group of materials to load and click OK.

4. Complete all of the data fields on the Materials Properties tab to use a Real Gas equation of state, then
click OK.

Additional information on Real Gas models is available in:

• Real Gas in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Specific Heat Capacity in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Transport Properties in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Real Gas Properties in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide

28.1.3.2.2. Table
Table uses a CFX-TASCflow real gas property (RGP) file to load real fluid property data (see Real Fluid
Properties in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide). You can load all of the RGP files that are supplied with
CFX quickly by following the instructions given in Loading an .rgp file in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.
When defining materials that use data in tables not supplied with CFX, the definition is carried out
separately by specifying the filename and component name for each material in turn. When Table is
selected, the following form appears:

TASCflow RGP file Table Format is the only type supported for CFX.

1. Click Browse beside Table Name to browse to the file containing the Real Gas Property Table data.

2. Enter the Component Name (as an RGP file can contain many components).

The component name corresponds to the name of a component in an RGP file. You may need to
open the RGP file in a text editor to discover the exact name of the component you want to select.
For details, see Detailed .rgp File Format in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.3.2.3. Table Generation

For some equation of state and specific heat capacity settings (such as Redlich Kwong, IAPWS, and
general materials having variable density and specific heat set with CEL expressions), the CFX-Solver
builds internal property tables for efficient property evaluation. The most commonly required table is
enthalpy as a function of temperature and possibly pressure. This table is built if the specific heat capacity
is a function of temperature, and, possibly pressure. Entropy tables are also used to convert static and
total pressure (or vice versa). For example, at a boundary condition you may specify the total pressure

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 297
Materials and Reactions

and the flow solver will use entropy tables to calculate the static pressure. When using CEL expressions
for density and specific heat capacity the solver uses an adaptive algorithm to control the generation
of the tables. In some cases, it may be necessary to alter some table generation details, as described
by the following parameters:

28.1.3.2.3.1. Minimum and Maximum Temperature

These correspond to the lower and upper temperature bounds of the table. The selected values should
exceed the expected temperature range somewhat, but to keep the size of the table from becoming
too big, it should not exceed the expected range by a factor much greater than 2.

28.1.3.2.3.2. Minimum and Maximum Absolute Pressure

These correspond to the lower and upper absolute pressure bounds of the table. As with the temperature
bounds, the selected values should exceed the expected absolute pressure range, but not by too much.

28.1.3.2.3.3. Error Tolerance

The table generation algorithm used by the solver is adaptive, and may cluster values where needed
to resolve nonlinearities in the property definitions. The table generation is required to satisfy an error
tolerance, defined as the relative error between the interpolation error and the exact value. The default
tolerance (0.01 for enthalpy and 0.03 for entropy) is usually adequate.

28.1.3.2.3.4. Maximum Points

This parameter specifies the maximum number of points (values) for each table dimension. Fewer points
may be required if the error criterion is met sooner. The default value of 100 is usually adequate.

Note

If the error tolerance cannot be met with the specified maximum number of points, the CFX-
Solver will revert to a uniform table with a resolution set to the maximum number of points.

28.1.3.2.3.5. Pressure/Temperature Extrapolation

This controls the solver behavior when evaluating properties at temperatures or pressures beyond the
table range. If extrapolation is activated, the property will be extrapolated based on its slope at the
table boundary; otherwise, the value at the table boundary will be used. In either case, a message is
written to the output file that an out-of-bounds has occurred. If this happens, you should consider in-
creasing the table range accordingly.

28.1.4. Material Details View: Fixed Composition Mixture

This panel describes the Material details view when creating a fixed composition mixture. Fixed com-
position mixtures can consist of pure substances only and not other fixed composition mixtures. You
can include any combination of materials in a fixed composition mixture. To combine materials from
different material groups, however, you must first select the Material Groups that contain those mater-
ials. For example, to select Air at 25 C and Water at 25 C, you would first need to select the
groups Air Data and Water Data.

For details, see Multicomponent Flow in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
298 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Materials

28.1.4.1. Basic Settings Tab

1. Select the Material Group(s) that contain the required materials.

2. Use Materials List to add new materials to the mixture.

3. The Material Description field is optional.

For details, see Material Description (p. 294).

4. Select the Thermodynamic State.

For details, see Thermodynamic State (p. 295).

5. Optionally set a custom coordinate frame for any material properties that depend on expressions in X, Y
or Z.

For details, see Coordinate Frame (p. 295), Coordinate Frames (p. 283), and Coordinate Frames in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

6. Select a material, from the Child Materials list box.

7. Enter the fixed Mass Fraction of the material within the mixture.

The sum of the mass fractions for all the materials in a mixture must be 1.

28.1.4.2. Mixture Properties Tab

Mixture Properties can be used to explicitly set values when the Ideal Mixture model produces unsat-
isfactory results. When you create a fixed composition mixture, the mixture properties are determined
by mass averaging the properties of the component materials. In some cases, the ideal mixture rule
used by the CFX-Solver may not be representative of the mixture properties. You can customize the
individual thermodynamic and transport properties by selecting the appropriate check boxes and directly
specifying the mixture properties.

For details, see Mixture Properties (Fixed, Variable, Reacting) in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

For additional information on options for specific heat capacity, see Specific Heat Capacity in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.5. Material Details View: Variable Composition Mixture

This panel describes the Material details view when creating a variable composition mixture. Components
of a variable composition mixture can be pure substances and fixed composition mixtures. For details,
see Multicomponent Flow in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.5.1. Basic Settings Tab

1. Select the Material Group(s) that contain the required materials.

2. Use Materials List to add new materials to the mixture.

3. The Material Description field is optional.

For details, see Material Description (p. 294).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 299
Materials and Reactions

4. Select the Thermodynamic State.

For details, see Thermodynamic State (p. 295).

5. Optionally set a custom coordinate frame for any material properties that depend on expressions in X, Y
or Z.

For details, see Coordinate Frame (p. 295), Coordinate Frames (p. 283), and Coordinate Frames in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.5.2. Mixture Properties Tab

In some cases, the ideal mixture rule used by the CFX-Solver may not be representative of the mixture
properties.

When you create a variable composition mixture (and also when you create a reacting mixture), the
thermodynamic mixture properties can be determined by:

• Mass averaging the properties of the component materials (by choosing the corresponding Ideal Mixture
option), or

• Applying custom functions based on the properties and mass fractions of the component materials (by
choosing options other than Ideal Mixture).

The Thermodynamic Properties settings include:

• Equation of State, with these options:

– Ideal Mixture - This option uses mass averaging of the properties of the component materials.

– Mixture Density - You specify values and/or CEL expressions for:

→ Density

→ The partial derivative of density with respect to pressure (at constant temperature), and

→ The partial derivative of density with respect to temperature (at constant pressure).

These quantities can be functions of component mass fractions and component properties (such
as density).

– Mixture Pressure - You specify values and/or CEL expressions for:

→ Absolute pressure

→ The partial derivative of absolute pressure with respect to specific volume (at constant temperature),
and

→ The partial derivative of absolute pressure with respect to temperature (at constant specific volume).

These quantities can be functions of component mass fractions and component properties.

• Specific Heat Capacity, with these options:

– Ideal Mixture

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
300 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Materials

– Mixture Specific Heat Capacity - You specify the type of heat capacity (as being based on
constant volume or constant pressure). You also specify values and/or CEL expressions for:

→ Specific heat capacity

→ Specific enthalpy

→ Specific entropy

These quantities can be functions of component mass fractions and component properties (such
as specific heat capacity, static enthalpy, and static entropy, respectively).

When entering expressions for the Thermodynamic Properties settings, terms that involve component
properties should adhere to the general variable syntax described in Quantitative CEL Functions in
ANSYS CFX.

You can override the individual transport properties by selecting the appropriate options and directly
specifying the mixture properties.

For details, see Mixture Properties (Fixed, Variable, Reacting) in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

For additional information on options for specific heat capacity, see Specific Heat Capacity in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.6. Material Details View: Homogeneous Binary Mixture

Homogeneous binary mixtures are used to define the phase boundary between two chemically equivalent
materials in different thermodynamic states. For example, you could define the vapor pressure curve
between water and steam. The vapor pressure curve is used by the flow solver to determine the satur-
ation properties of the two materials. A homogeneous binary mixture is required for running the Equi-
librium phase change model. Additionally, it can be used with the Eulerian multiphase thermal phase
change model or the Lagrangian particle tracking evaporation model.

The Basic Settings tab is used to specify the two materials that form the mixture. On the Saturation
Properties tab, the saturation properties can be specified.

28.1.6.1. Basic Settings Tab

1. Select the Material Group(s).

2. Select the two constituent materials for the binary mixture.

3. The Material Description field is optional.

For details, see Material Description (p. 294).

28.1.6.2. Saturation Properties Tab

28.1.6.2.1. General
The General option can be used to specify the saturation temperature or Antoine coefficients for
materials that do not use a table or Redlich Kwong equation of state. If you set Pressure > Option to
Antoine Equation option, then the flow solver automatically calculates saturation temperature.
For details, see Antoine Equation in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide. If you set Pressure > Option to

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 301
Materials and Reactions

Value, you must specify the saturation pressure and the corresponding saturation temperature. For
details, see Using a General Set-up in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.6.2.2. Table
Files of type (*.rgp) are filtered from the list of files in the current directory.

28.1.6.2.3. Real Gas

When Real Gas is chosen, the saturation properties are calculated using the material properties
specified for the constituent components, and there is no need to set any values. As a consequence,
the material properties for components in the mixture must all use the same Real Gas equation of state.
For details, see Using a Real Gas Equation of State in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.1.6.2.4. Table Generation

For details, see Table Generation (p. 297).

28.1.7. Material Details View: Reacting Mixture

The following topics will be discussed:

• Basic Settings Tab (p. 302)

• Mixture Properties Tab (p. 303)

28.1.7.1. Basic Settings Tab

A reacting mixture contains at least one reaction. For details, see Reactions (p. 304). The details for each
of the components are set under Component Details on the Fluid Models tab when defining your
domain. For details, see Fluid Models Tab (p. 122).

1. Select the Material Group types.

2. Select the reactions from the Reactions List.

3. The Material Description field is optional.

For details, see Material Description (p. 294).

4. Select the Thermodynamic State.

For details, see Thermodynamic State (p. 295).

5. Optionally set a custom coordinate frame for any material properties that depend on expressions in X, Y,
or Z.

For details, see Coordinate Frame (p. 295), Coordinate Frames (p. 283), and Coordinate Frames in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

6. From Additional Materials List, select any additional inert materials (which do not take part in any reac-
tion).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
302 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Materials

28.1.7.2. Mixture Properties Tab

Mixture properties for reacting mixtures are the same as for variable composition mixtures. For details,
see Mixture Properties Tab (p. 300).

For details on modeling reacting mixtures, see Using Combustion Models in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

28.1.8. Material Details View: Hydrocarbon Fuel

The following topics will be discussed:

• Basic Settings Tab (p. 303)

• Proximate/ Ultimate Analysis Tab (p. 303)

• Mixture Materials Tab (p. 303)

More information about hydrocarbon fuel models is available in Hydrocarbon Fuel Model Setup in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide and in Hydrocarbon Fuel Analysis Model in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

28.1.8.1. Basic Settings Tab

This tab is identical to the Basic Settings tab for pure substances. For details, see Basic Settings Tab (p. 295).

28.1.8.2. Proximate/ Ultimate Analysis Tab

For details, see Hydrocarbon Fuel Analysis Model in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

28.1.8.3. Mixture Materials Tab

The material components in the model need to be mapped to solver alias names. For example, carbon
dioxide could be represented in the solver by CO2, Carbon Dioxide CO2, CO2 modified, and
so on.

Particle Mixture defines the components of the hydrocarbon fuel particles. The names for the ash,
char and raw combustible component materials must be given.

Gas Mixture is for identifying the components of the gas-phase reacting mixture. Two options are
available:

• Mixture asks for the name of the associated gas-phase material (reacting mixture) and provides parameters
to identify the components of the gas phase, which are relevant for the hydrocarbon fuel model.

• Mixture with HCN NO additionally enables entering the names for the gas components involved in
the fuel-nitrogen model.

Note that here the components of the gas phase are identified only for the hydrocarbon fuel model.
The reacting mixture material still must be created with all its components in the same way as for
gaseous combustion. It may have additional components in addition to those identified here.

Binary Mixture is for defining the homogeneous binary mixture material, which describes the heat
transfer between the particle and the fluid mixture. For the two materials in the binary mixture you
should specify the raw combustible material for the particle and the volatiles fuel for the gas phase.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 303
Materials and Reactions

28.2. Reactions
The Reaction details view, accessible by editing a reaction from the tree view or by creating a new re-
action, is used to prepare reactions for availability in a simulation.

Once a reaction is created, it is available for inclusion in a fluid that is a reacting mixture or a variable
composition mixture. For details, see:

• Material Details View: Reacting Mixture (p. 302)

• Material Details View: Variable Composition Mixture (p. 299).

28.2.1. Basic Settings Tab

Four types of reactions can be created on the Basic Settings tab:

• Single Step (p. 304)

• Multiple Step (p. 305)

• Flamelet Library (p. 305)

• Multiphase (p. 306)

28.2.2. Single Step

This option displays three other tabs in addition to Basic Settings. One of them is a Reactants tab,
displaying a list of reactants and specifying the ratio with which they react together and the order of
the reaction. A list of products is also set on the Products tab and includes the ratio with which they
are produced. Reaction Rates has optional forward and backward reaction rates and third body terms
can be applied.

28.2.2.1. Single Step: Basic Settings

1. Optionally, select Reaction Description to enter a description for the reaction (to a maximum of 120 al-
phanumeric characters).

2. Optionally, specify any additional materials for this reaction using the Additional Materials List.

3. Optionally, select Reaction or Combustion to set a reaction or combustion model.

Any settings specified here will override the choice of models selected on the Fluid Models tab
of the domains form (unless the choice of models on the Fluid Models form is set to None).

This is implemented to enable reaction-step specific combustion modeling for multi-step reactions. For
details, see Reaction-Step Specific Combustion Model Control in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.2.2.2. Single Step: Reactants

For details, see Multiphase: Reactants (p. 306).

1. Option assumes the value Child Materials when creating a reaction involving one phase.

2. Choose the reactant(s) to add from the Materials List drop-down.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
304 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Reactions

3. Enter the Stoichiometric Coefficient for the each of the selected components.

4. Optionally, specify a reaction order.

If the reaction order is not entered, it will default to the same value as the stoichiometric coefficient.

28.2.2.3. Single Step: Products

The Products tab is identical to the Reactants tab, with the only difference being that the settings
here apply to the products instead of the reactants.

28.2.2.4. Single Step: Reaction Rates

1. For each of Forward Reaction Rate and Backward Reaction Rate, Option defines the reaction rate de-
pendency. Select from:

• Arrhenius in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Arrhenius with Temperature PDF in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Expression in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

2. The Pre Exponential Factor and Temperature Exponent are required elements for the Arrhenius
reaction type.

3. The temperature limit list (Lower Temperature and Upper Temperature) is required for the Arrhenius
with Temperature PDF reaction type.

4. Reaction Activation enables Activation Temperature or Activation Energy to be set.

5. Some reactions require a Third Body Term to proceed.

For details, see Third Body Terms in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

6. You can define a reaction in terms of a dependency, equilibrium or an expression.

For details, see Reaction Rate Types in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.2.3. Multiple Step

A list of Single Step reactions is required to define a Multi Step reaction.

1. Set Option to Multi Step.

Hold the Ctrl key to select multiple reactions from the list.

Alternatively, click Select from a second list to open the Materials List list box.

2. Optionally, select Reaction Description to enter a description for the reaction.

28.2.4. Flamelet Library

A flamelet library is imported with optional customization of the Laminar Burning Velocity.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 305
Materials and Reactions

1. Set Option to Flamelet Library.

2. Click Browse to browse to the flamelet library file. The file that contains your flamelet library should
be selected.

3. Optionally, select Reaction Description to enter a description for the reaction.

4. Select Laminar Burning Velocity to specify an expression for the laminar flame speed definition.

When using a flamelet library, the definition for the library is specified in the Reaction details view. The
name, library file and, optionally, laminar flame speed definition is specified. The reaction can then be
used in a fluid that is a variable composition mixture. For details, see Material Details View: Variable
Composition Mixture (p. 299). and Laminar Flamelet with PDF Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.2.5. Multiphase
This option is used to create reactions between more than one phase. For details, see Reaction Models
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

28.2.5.1. Multiphase: Basic Settings

The setup of multiphase reactions is carried out by selecting the reaction Option to Multiphase. For
details, see Multiphase Reactions and Combustion in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

1. For multiphase reactions the only option available for the Material Amount Option is Mass Coeffi
cient.

2. Optionally, select Reaction Description to enter a description for the reaction.

28.2.5.2. Multiphase: Reactants

Multiphase reactions are specified in terms of Parent Materials (the phase containing a reacting
material), and Child Materials (the reacting materials themselves).

The Parent Materials List contains the phases from which reacting materials are selected.

1. For the currently selected parent material, (such as Coal), select the reactant materials from that phase
from the materials list (for example, Coal > Materials List).

If a participating phase is a pure substance, it should be selected as both a parent and child mater-
ial.

2. For each child material, enter a mass coefficient.

3. Reaction Order is only required for reactions of type Mass Arrhenius.

If unset, it defaults to 1.

28.2.5.3. Multiphase: Products

The setup on the Products tab is identical to the Reactants tab. For details, see Multiphase: React-
ants (p. 306).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
306 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Reactions

28.2.5.4. Multiphase: Multiphase Reactions

The Multiphase Reaction Rate > Option can be one of:

• Mass Arrhenius in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Gibb Char Oxidation Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Field Char Oxidation Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 307
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
308 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 29: Additional Variables
Additional Variables are non-reacting scalar components that can be transported through the flow.

Modeling information for Additional Variables is available:

• Additional Variables in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Additional Variables in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

Implementation information for Additional Variables in multiphase flow is available:

• Additional Variables in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide

• Additional Variables in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide

This chapter describes the procedure for creating an Additional Variable and the user interfaces used
to define and apply Additional Variables:
29.1. User Interface
29.2. Creating an Additional Variable

29.1. User Interface

The following topics are discussed:

• Insert Additional Variable Dialog Box (p. 309)

• Basic Settings Tab for Additional Variable Objects (p. 309)

• Fluid Models and Fluid Specific Models Tabs for Domain Objects (p. 310)

• Boundary Details and Fluid Values Tabs for Boundary Condition Objects (p. 313)

29.1.1. Insert Additional Variable Dialog Box

The Insert Additional Variable dialog box is used to initiate the creation of a new Additional Variable.

It is accessible by clicking the Additional Variable icon , or by selecting Insert > Expressions, Functions
and Variables > Additional Variable.

29.1.2. Basic Settings Tab for Additional Variable Objects

The Basic Settings tab is used to define the fundamental properties of an Additional Variable. It is ac-
cessible by creating a new Additional Variable or by editing an Additional Variable listed in the tree
view.

29.1.2.1. Variable Type

• Specific

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 309
Additional Variables

The Additional Variable is solved on a per-unit-mass basis. For details, see Volumetric and Specific
Additional Variable in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Volumetric

The Additional Variable is solved on a per-unit-volume basis. For details, see Volumetric and Specific
Additional Variable in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Unspecified

The Additional Variable is defined in terms of an algebraic expression using CEL. For details, see Un-
specified Additional Variables in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

29.1.2.2. Units
Specify the units that describe the Additional Variable. For details, see Additional Variables in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

29.1.2.3. Tensor Type

The Additional Variable's Tensor Type can be set to Scalar or Vector. If an Additional Variable is
defined as type Vector, the components of a vector algebraic equation can be defined at the domain
level.

Vector Additional Variables cannot be directly referenced in CEL expressions. The syntax for referencing
a component of a vector Additional Variable is as follows:
<Component Name>.<Additional Variable Name>_x

29.1.3. Fluid Models and Fluid Specific Models Tabs for Domain Objects
The settings for Additional Variables on the Fluid Models tab are used to enable Additional Variables
in the domain. For multiphase simulations, settings for unspecified and volumetric Additional Variables
are available only on the Fluid Specific Models tab. For specific Additional Variables homogeneous
transport equations can be set on the Fluid Models tab or on a per-fluid basis on the Fluid Specific
Models tab if the Additional Variable has been set to Fluid Dependent on the Fluid Models tab.

29.1.3.1. Additional Variable Details: List Box

This list box is used to select an Additional Variable in order to set the details of its application to the
domain.

29.1.3.2. Additional Variable Details: [Additional Variable Name] Check Box

This check box determines whether or not the Additional Variable is to be modeled in the domain.

29.1.3.2.1. Option
29.1.3.2.1.1. Transport Equation

The transport of the Additional Variable of type Volumetric is modeled by a transport equation. For
details, see Additional Variables in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
310 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

29.1.3.2.1.2. Diffusive Transport Equation

The transport of the Additional Variable is modeled by a transport equation. The advection term is
dropped from the transport equation. For details, see Additional Variables in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

29.1.3.2.1.3. Homogeneous Transport Equation

The transport of the Additional Variable is modeled by a transport equation. This option is available
only on the Fluid Models tab and only for multiphase flows (that is, only for homogeneous applications).
For details, see:

• Homogeneous Additional Variables in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Homogeneous Additional Variables in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

29.1.3.2.1.4. Homogeneous Diffusive Transport Equation

The transport of the Additional Variable is modeled by a transport equation. The advection term is
dropped from the transport equation. This option is available only on the Fluid Models tab and only
for multiphase flows (that is, only for homogeneous applications). For details, see:

• Homogeneous Additional Variables in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Homogeneous Additional Variables in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

29.1.3.2.1.5. Poisson Equation

The transport of the Additional Variable is modeled by a transport equation. The transient and advection
terms are dropped from the transport equation. For details, see Additional Variables in the CFX-Solver
Theory Guide.

29.1.3.2.1.6. Homogeneous Poisson Equation

The transport of the Additional Variable is modeled by a transport equation. The transient and advection
terms are dropped from the transport equation. This option is available only on the Fluid Models tab
and only for multiphase flows (that is, only for homogeneous applications). For details, see:

• Homogeneous Additional Variables in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Homogeneous Additional Variables in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver Theory Guide.

29.1.3.2.1.7. Fluid Dependent

When the Fluid Dependent option is selected, the Additional Variable model details can be set for
each fluid on the Fluid Specific Models tab.

29.1.3.2.1.8. Algebraic Equation

A given quantity or CEL expression specifies the value of the Additional Variable throughout the domain.
Application of this option is, in the context of the fluids to which the Additional Variable is applied, ef-
fectively the same as setting the Additional Variable type to Unspecified.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 311
Additional Variables

29.1.3.2.1.9. Vector Algebraic Equation

A total of three given quantities, CEL expressions, or both, specifies the vector value of the Additional
Variable throughout the domain. Application of this option is, in the context of the fluids to which the
Additional Variable is applied, effectively the same as setting the Additional Variable type to Unspecified.

29.1.3.2.2. Value
(applies only when Additional Variable Details: [Additional Variable name] Check Box: Option is
set to Algebraic Equation)

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the value of the Additional Variable
throughout the domain.

29.1.3.2.3. Kinematic Diffusivity Check Box

(applies only when Additional Variable Details: [Additional Variable name] Check Box: Option is
set to Transport Equation, Diffusive Transport Equation, or Poisson Equation)

When running a Transport Equation Additional Variable, this check box determines whether the mo-
lecular diffusion term is added to the transport equation for the Additional Variable. For turbulent flow,
the turbulent diffusion term (which is a consequence of averaging the advection term) is automatically
included. Setting the kinematic diffusivity to zero includes the turbulent diffusion term only.

You must select this check box when using the Poisson equation or diffusive transport equation. If you
do not, a blue warning message will appear to remind you.

29.1.3.2.4. Kinematic Diffusivity Check Box: Kinematic Diffusivity

(applies only when Additional Variable Details: [Additional Variable name] check box: Option is
set to Transport Equation, Poisson Equation, Diffusive Transport Equation)

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the value of the kinematic diffusivity
throughout the domain.

29.1.3.2.5. AV Properties for Fluid: Frame Overview

(applies only for homogeneous Additional Variables)

The settings contained in this frame are used to optionally specify the kinematic diffusivity of the selected
Additional Variable. The kinematic diffusivity may differ for each fluid in the domain. The solver calculates
a single effective kinematic diffusivity based on the kinematic diffusivity of the Additional Variable in
each fluid. For details, see Homogeneous Additional Variables in Multiphase Flow in the CFX-Solver
Theory Guide.

29.1.3.2.6. AV Properties for Fluid: List Box

This list box is used to select a fluid in the domain in order to optionally specify the kinematic diffusivity
of the selected Additional Variable in that fluid.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
312 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User Interface

29.1.3.2.7. AV Properties for Fluid: [Fluid Name] Check Box

This check box determines whether or not the kinematic diffusivity of the selected Additional Variable
in the selected fluid is specified. Not specifying the kinematic diffusivity implies that the Additional
Variable is non-diffusive.

29.1.3.2.8. AV Properties for Fluid: [Fluid Name] Check Box: Kinematic Diffusivity
(applies only when Additional Variable Details: [Additional Variable name] Check Box: Option is
set to Homogeneous Transport Equation, Homogeneous Diffusive Transport Equation, or Homo-
geneous Poisson Equation)

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression that specifies the value of the kinematic diffusivity,
throughout the domain, of the selected Additional Variable in the selected fluid.

29.1.3.2.9. Vector xValue, Vector yValue, and Vector zValue

(applies only when Additional Variable Details: [Additional Variable Name] Check Box: Option is
set to Vector Algebraic Equation)

Enter a numerical quantity or CEL expression for each vector algebraic equation component.

29.1.4. Boundary Details and Fluid Values Tabs for Boundary Condition Objects
The Boundary Details and Fluid Values tabs for a boundary condition object contain settings that
specify the values, fluxes, and transfer coefficients of Additional Variables at the boundary condition
location. These tabs are accessible, when applicable, by editing a boundary condition object.

The Additional Variables that require specification are those that have been applied to the domain (to
which the boundary condition belongs) in a form other than an algebraic equation.

For single phase flow, the Additional Variable settings are on the Boundary Details tab. For multiphase
flow, the Additional Variable settings for homogeneous Additional Variables are on the Boundary Details
tab and those for fluid-specific Additional Variables are either on the Boundary Details tab or the Fluid
Values tab.

The types of boundary conditions that may allow the specification of Additional Variables are:

• Inlet

• Opening

• Wall

• Outlet

29.1.4.1. Additional Variables: List Box

This list box is used to select an Additional Variable in order to set the details of its boundary condition
specification.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 313
Additional Variables

29.1.4.2. Additional Variables: [Name]

29.1.4.2.1. Option
• Zero Flux

• Value

• Flux in

This option is applicable for Wall boundary conditions and, for Poisson and Diffusive transport models,
Inlet boundary conditions.

• Transfer Coefficient

• Wall Flux In

This option is applicable for multiphase flow only.

• Wall Transfer Coefficient

This option is applicable for multiphase flow only.

29.1.4.2.2. Value
(applies when Additional Variables: [Additional Variable Name]: Option is set to Value or Transfer
Coefficient)

29.1.4.2.3. Flux
(applies when Additional Variables: [Additional Variable Name]: Option is set to Flux in)

29.1.4.2.4. Transfer Coefficient

(applies when Additional Variables: [Additional Variable Name]: Option is set to Transfer Coefficient)

29.2. Creating an Additional Variable

1. Click the Additional Variable icon or select Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > Addi-
tional Variable.

The Insert Additional Variable dialog box appears.

2. Set Name to a unique name for the new Additional Variable. For details, see Valid Syntax for Named Ob-
jects (p. 55).

3. Click OK.

The Additional Variable details view opens on the Basic Settings tab.

4. Specify the basic settings. For details, see Basic Settings Tab for Additional Variable Objects (p. 309).

5. Click OK.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
314 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating an Additional Variable

An object named after the Additional Variable is created and listed in the tree view under Expres-
sions, Functions and Variables > Additional Variables.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 315
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
316 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 30: Expressions
The Expressions workspace is used to generate and edit expressions using the CFX Expression Language
(CEL), which you can then use in CFX-Pre in place of almost any numeric value (as long as the correct
units are returned by the expression).

Note

In an expression, a term that has no units can be added to a term that has angular units, in
which case the software internally applies radians to the term that has no units.

Note

CFX-Pre evaluates CEL expressions with single (not double) precision.

Important

There is some CEL that works in CFX-Pre and CFX-Solver, but not in CFD-Post. Any expression
created in CFX-Pre and used as a Design Exploration output parameter could potentially
cause fatal errors during the Design Exploration run, so you should create all expressions for
Design Exploration output parameters in CFD-Post.

This chapter describes:

30.1. Expressions Workspace
30.2. Creating an Expression
30.3. Modifying an Expression
30.4. Importing or Exporting an Expression

30.1. Expressions Workspace

By double-clicking Expressions in the Outline workspace, or by inserting or editing an existing expres-
sion, the Expressions workspace opens in a new tab (see Figure 30.1: Sample Expressions Work-
space (p. 318)). This workspace consists of a tree view and a details view. The following tabs are available
in the details view:

• Definition, used to edit the definition of an expression selected in the Expressions tree view. For details,
see Definition (p. 318).

• Plot, used to plot an expression versus a variable. For details, see Plot (p. 319).

• Evaluate, used to evaluate an expression when all quantities on which it depends are given. This is useful
for verifying that an expression is correctly specified. For details, see Evaluate (p. 319).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 317
Expressions

Figure 30.1: Sample Expressions Workspace

30.1.1. Definition
CEL expressions can be defined using any combination of constants, variables, mathematical functions
and other CEL expressions. For details, see CFX Expression Language (CEL) in the CFX Reference Guide.

Tip

Right-clicking in the Definition window provides access to a list of all available variables,
expressions, locators, functions and constants. Although valid values can be chosen from
each of the various lists, the validity of the expression itself is not checked until you click
Apply.

Additional Variables can be used in expressions as soon as they have been completely spe-
cified. After they have been created, they appear in the list of available variables when right-
clicking in the Definition window. For details, see:

• CFX Expression Language (CEL) in the CFX Reference Guide

• CEL Operators, Constants, and Expressions in the CFX Reference Guide.

Click Reset to undo changes made after opening the CEL expression for editing.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
318 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Creating an Expression

30.1.2. Plot
The Plot tab is used to plot the selected expression against one variable. CFX-Pre automatically finds
the variables associated with an expression, even if the expression depends on another expression.

For example, when previewing the expression halfRadius, defined as 0.5*radius, where radius
is an expression that depends on the variables x and y, CFX-Pre presents x and y as the variables upon
which halfRadius depends.

1. Set up an expression in the Definition tab, or open an existing expression. Click the Plot tab.

2. Under Number of Points, set the number of sample data points for the plot.

Sample points are connected by line segments to approximate the functional relationship.

3. Under Expression Variables, select the independent variable.

4. Set the range for the independent variable.

5. Set Fixed Value for all of the remaining independent variables.

6. Click Plot Expression to view the resulting chart.

The Plot Expression button changes to Define Plot. This can be clicked after viewing the plot in
order to make adjustments to the plot specification.

30.1.3. Evaluate
The Evaluate tab is used to evaluate an expression when all variables upon which the equation depends
are specified. CFX-Pre automatically finds the variables associated with an expression, even if the expres-
sion depends on another expression.

For example, when previewing the expression halfRadius, defined as 0.5*radius, where radius
is an expression that depends on the variables x and y, CFX-Pre presents x and y as the variables upon
which halfRadius depends.

1. Under Expression Variables, enter values for all listed variables.

2. Click Evaluate Expression.

The resulting expression is evaluated using the given variable values.

30.2. Creating an Expression

1. You can create an expression using any of the following methods:

• On the Outline tab, right-click Expressions and select Insert > Expression.

• Click Expression in the main toolbar.

• Select Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > Expression from the menu bar.

Whichever method you choose, the Insert Expression dialog box appears.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 319
Expressions

2. Under Name, type a name for the new expression.

3. Click OK.

4. In the Expressions details view, under Definition, enter an expression. For details on using the Definition
area, see Definition (p. 318).

5. Click Apply.

6. Optionally, select Plot or Evaluate to examine the expression.

Note

In the Expressions details view, you can right-click and select Insert > Expression to add
more expressions, but only if no existing expression is highlighted.

30.3. Modifying an Expression

1. In the Expressions tree view, double-click any expression, or right-click an expression and select Edit.

The Expression details view displays the definition of the expression.

2. Under Definition, modify the expression. For details on using the Definition area, see Definition (p. 318).

3. Make any desired changes and click Apply.

4. Optionally, select Plot or Evaluate to examine the expression.

30.4. Importing or Exporting an Expression

Expressions can be imported and exported in simulations. For details, see:

• Import CCL Command (p. 33)

• Export CCL Command (p. 34).

Any number of CCL objects can be exported; this section describes exporting only expressions to a file.

30.4.1. Importing CCL Expressions

You can import expressions using the Import CCL function. For details, see Import CCL Command (p. 33).

1. Select File > Import > CCL.

2. Under Import Method, select Append or Replace.

Append imports expressions and overwrites any that currently exist in memory. Expressions that
do not match ones being imported are not changed. Replace deletes all expressions in memory
before importing.

3. Select a location from which to import.

4. Select a file to import.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
320 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Importing or Exporting an Expression

5. Click Open.

Important

Take care when importing CCL files because data can be overwritten.

30.4.2. Exporting CCL Expressions

You can export expressions using the Export CCL function. For details, see Export CCL Command (p. 34).

1. Select File > Export > CCL from the main menu bar.

2. Clear Save All Objects.

3. Under Save All Objects, select LIBRARY > CEL > EXPRESSIONS.

4. Select a location to which to export.

5. Enter a name for the exported file.

6. Click Save.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 321
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
322 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 31: User Functions
The user function details view is used to create new interpolation functions (1D or 3D Cloud of Points),
and user CEL functions. It is accessed from the Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > User
Function or the User Function icon on the main toolbar.

User function objects you create are listed under Expressions, Functions and Variables > User Func-
tions in the tree view. Based on the Option setting in the user function details view, there are three
types of user function objects:

• Interpolation functions (1D or 3D Cloud of Points) are created by setting Option to Interpolation
(Data Input).

• Importing profile data from a file creates a user function object with the Option setting Interpolation (From
File). This type of user function cannot be created directly by inserting a new user function but can be edited
using the user function details view.

• User CEL functions are created by setting Option to User Function. This type of user function object
must be created after a user CEL routine object.

This chapter describes:

31.1. Interpolation (Data Input) User Functions
31.2. Interpolation (From File) User Functions
31.3.Table User Functions
31.4. User CEL Functions
31.5. Profile Data Format

31.1. Interpolation (Data Input) User Functions

A user function with the option Interpolation (Data Input) is used to create a function from
a set of coordinates paired with the values of a variable at those coordinates. For example, this could
be used if you wish to specify an inlet temperature using some experimentally-measured values of
temperature at various points on the inlet, or if you want to specify some property of a material as a
function of temperature using a table of known values.

If you have data in a profile data file, then instead of creating a user function directly, you should import
the profile data as described in Profile Boundary Conditions in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide. More
details can be found in Interpolation (From File) User Functions (p. 327).

This section describes:

31.1.1. One Dimensional Interpolation
31.1.2.Three Dimensional Interpolation
31.1.3. Importing Data from a File
31.1.4. Defining User Functions from Interpolation (Data Input) Functions

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 323
User Functions

31.1.1. One Dimensional Interpolation

1D interpolation functions can be used to specify any quantity in CFX-Pre for which a standard CEL
function (such as sin, cos, step, and so on) can be used. The function is created by interpolating
from a list of points and a list of values at those points.

For a 1D interpolation using the Interpolation (Data Input) option, you should set a single
coordinate value and a single value associated with the coordinate. The coordinate and the value are
interpreted in the local coordinate frame, which will depend on where the function is used. For example,
if the function is used to set a boundary condition value, the coordinate frame selected for that
boundary condition will apply. For details, see Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Data for 1D interpolation can be entered manually or read from a file. If the file contains data in the
profile data format, then it can be imported as described in Profile Boundary Conditions in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide. Otherwise, numerical values for the 1D interpolation can be imported directly
into CFX-Pre using the instructions below. Also see Importing Data from a File (p. 326) for more inform-
ation on how to import the numerical values from a file.

1. Set Option to Interpolation (Data Input).

Additional information on the other function type is available in:

• Three Dimensional Interpolation (p. 325)

• User CEL Functions (p. 329).

2. Under Argument Units, enter a single unit.

This will usually be a coordinate axis dimension (for example, m, cm, rad, and so on), but can be
any dimension. A variable using these units is passed to the interpolation function (for example,
x, y, r, z, and so on) when setting a quantity in CFX-Pre.

3. Under Result Units, enter a single unit.

This unit should be a valid unit for the quantity you will be specifying (for example, type m s^-1
for a velocity).

4. Set Interpolation Data > Option to One Dimensional.

5. Right-click in the window to import data from a file or delete an entry.

6. Enter a single Coordinate value.

7. Enter a Value associated with the Coordinate.

8. Click Add to add the point value to the list (or Remove to remove a highlighted value from the list).

For details on the Extend Min and Extend Max options, see Extended Minimum and Maximum (p. 325).

The coordinate axis to which the coordinate value relates is determined by the argument passed when
calling the interpolation function. For example, for a Cartesian Velocity Component specified inlet, the
U component could be set to the expression MyInterpFunction(r), where MyInterpFunction
is the function name of the 1D interpolation function, and r is the CFX radius system variable. The co-

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
324 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Interpolation (Data Input) User Functions

ordinate values you specify in this details view will then refer to values of r on the inlet boundary, and
the value would be the velocity value at each r location.

31.1.1.1. Extended Minimum and Maximum

The Extend Min and Extend Max options enable you to increase the valid range of the interpolation
function beyond the maximum or minimum specified coordinate values. The value the function will
take at coordinate values lower than the minimum specified coordinate, which is equal to the value at
the minimum specified coordinate. Similarly, the value at the maximum specified coordinate is extended
for higher coordinate values.

31.1.2. Three Dimensional Interpolation

3D interpolation functions can be used to specify any quantity in CFX-Pre for which a standard CEL
function (for example, sin, cos, step, and so on) can be used. The function is created by interpolating
values between a “cloud of points” using a distance weighted average based on the closest three points.
Common applications include setting an initial guess or a profile boundary condition from experimental
data values.

For a 3D interpolation using the Interpolation (Data Input) option, you should set X, Y, and
Z coordinate values and a single value associated with the coordinate. The coordinates and the value
are interpreted in the local coordinate frame, which will depend on where the function is used. For
example, if the function is used to set a boundary condition value, the coordinate frame selected for
that boundary condition will apply. For details, see Coordinate Frames (p. 283) and Coordinate Frames
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide. If the local coordinate frame is cylindrical, the units for the Argument
List should still be those of a Cartesian frame.

Data for 3D interpolation can be entered manually or read from a file. If the file contains data in the
profile data format, then it can be imported as described in Profile Boundary Conditions in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide. Otherwise, numerical values for the 3D interpolation can be imported directly
into CFX-Pre using the instructions below. Also see Importing Data from a File (p. 326) for more inform-
ation on how to import the numerical values from a file.

1. Enter a unique function name that you will use when setting the value of a quantity using an expression.

2. Argument Units: Enter a comma separated list of the units used for the coordinates.

These will usually be coordinate axis dimensions (for example, [m], [cm], and so on).

3. Under Result Units, enter a single unit.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 325
User Functions

This unit should be a valid unit for the quantity you will be specifying (for example, [m s^-1] for
a velocity).

4. Right-click in the window to import data from a file or delete an entry.

5. Enter a comma, separating X, Y, Z coordinate values.

The coordinates are interpreted in the local coordinate frame, which will depend on where the
function is used.

6. Enter a Value associated with the Coordinate.

7. Click Add to add the point to the list (or Remove to remove a highlighted value from the list).

31.1.3. Importing Data from a File

After you create a user function (Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > User Function),
you see the function in the details view with the Option set to Interpolation (Data Input).

To import data from a file, set the Interpolation Data > Option setting as desired, then right-click in
the Interpolation Data list and select Import Data... from the shortcut menu. This displays the Import
Cloud Interpolation Data dialog box.

• For 1D data, Column Selection fields appear. You can select which column of data in your import file is
appropriate for the coordinates and values.

• For 3D interpolations, columns are selected in the same way, with X, Y, and Z data all required.

• Each line of the file must contain numbers, separated by a space or comma.

• Once the data is read into CFX-Pre, the values will be written directly to the solver input file and the data
file will not be read again. If its contents are changed, then you must return to CFX-Pre and explicitly import
the data again to update the stored values.

31.1.4. Defining User Functions from Interpolation (Data Input) Functions

A user function can be used in CEL expressions in any place that a standard CEL function (for example,
sin, cos, step, and so on) can be used. For a user function with the Interpolation (Data Input)
option selected, you can enter an expression using the following notation:

• 1D interpolation
<Function Name>(arg1[units])

• 3D interpolation
<Function Name>(arg1[units], arg2[units], arg3[units])

When using a system variable, an expression, or a value, you do not need to specify units. For example,
a pipe inlet velocity profile might be set by entering:
inletvelocity( r)

or
inletvelocity( x, y, z)

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
326 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Interpolation (From File) User Functions

31.2. Interpolation (From File) User Functions

If you have a file which contains data in the profile data format, then it can be imported as described
in Profile Boundary Conditions in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide. The user function which is created by
the import process will have the Interpolation (From File) option selected. Note that this
type of user function cannot be created directly by inserting a new user function.

The data in a profile data file is read directly by the CFX-Solver each time the solver is started or restarted.
Modifications to the numerical values in the profile data file can be made without returning to CFX-Pre.

31.2.1. Viewing and Editing Data Imported from a Profile Data File
When you import data from a profile data file, a corresponding user function is created in the Outline
view under Simulation > Expressions, Functions and Variables > User Functions. Right-click the
user function and select Edit to view and edit the Basic Settings.

In the Basic Settings tab, the Value Fields interact with the Parameter List to control the variables
associated with each field when profile data is used to create boundary conditions automatically (see
Profile Boundary Conditions in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide).

To change the variables associated with a field:

1. Select an element in the Value Fields list.

2. Click the drop-down arrow beside the Parameter List field and select (or Ctrl-select) the variables that
you want to associate with the field that you specified in the previous step. If a variable that you want to
select does not appear, click Multi-select from extended list to see all of the variables that are available.

If the imported profile data has three Cartesian spatial fields (i.e. x, y, and z), you can display the profile
data in the viewer by editing the corresponding user function. To display the profile data in the viewer:

1. Select the Plot Options > Visibility check box.

2. Optionally select the Color by Profile Variable check box and select a Profile Variable.

3. Optionally select the Profile Vector check box to visualize vectors defined from the variables in the profile
file. There are two types of vector quantities available for selection in the drop-down list:

• Standard Vectors

These vector quantities are automatically constructed from the variables in the profile file,
wherever CFX-Pre is able to recognize the available variables as components of a vector quantity.
You cannot modify the settings for these vectors.

• User Defined

This selection enables you to manually specify the vector components individually. You can
specify the Vector Type as either Cartesian or Cylindrical. The Profile Variable drop-
down boxes enable you to select any variable defined in the file for each component. Components
must all have the same dimensions.

4. Optionally change the rendering options (such as the type and size of the symbol used to mark each
profile data point) by doing one of the following:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 327
User Functions

• Right-click the profile in the tree view and select Render > Properties.

• Right-click the profile in the viewer and select Render > Properties.

You can also control the visibility of the profile data by the visibility check box in the tree view, and by
the Hide command in the menu that appears when you right-click the profile in the viewer.

31.2.2. Defining User Functions from Profile Data or Interpolation (From File)
Functions
A user function can be used in CEL expressions in any place in which a standard CEL function (for ex-
ample, sin, cos, step, and so on) can be used. For a profile data function or an Interpolation (Data Input)
function, you can enter an expression using the notation:
<Function Name>.<Value Field Name>(arg1[units], arg2[units], …)

where the value field name identifies which column of data from the profile data file should be used
(the allowed values are shown when editing the user function). When using a system variable, an ex-
pression, or a value, you do not need to specify units. For example, a pipe pressure profile might be set
by entering:
inletvelocity.Total Pressure(r)

if the profile data file contained a profile labelled “inletvelocity” with a data column labelled “Total
Pressure”.

31.3. Table User Functions

If you have a file which contains data in the table data format, then it can be imported as described in
Importing Table Data (p. 63). The user function is created in the Outline view under Simulation > Ex-
pressions, Functions and Variables > User Functions and will have the Table option selected. Note
that this type of user function cannot be created directly by inserting a new user function.

A Table Function looks up data from an external data file, identifying which row of data to use by using
the row index(es) as the function argument(s). The row index can either be just the row number, or the
specified Index Fields if these are included in the table data file. For the file format, see Table Data
Format (p. 331).

The data in a table data file is read directly by the CFX-Solver each time the solver is started or restarted.

31.3.1. Defining User Functions from Table Data

A user function can be used in CEL expressions in any place in which a standard CEL function (for ex-
ample, sin, cos, step, and so on) can be used. For a table data function, you can enter an expression
using the notation:
<Table Name>.<Value Field Name>(index1, index2, …)

where the value field name identifies which column of data from the table data file should be used
(the allowed values are shown when editing the user function). The index argument must be an integer
or integers which identify which row of the table should be used to lookup the result. If the table data
file does not contain the "Index Fields" section, then a single index which corresponds to the table row
number must be used as the argument - if there are n rows of numerical data in the file, then the valid
arguments are from 1 to n. If the table data file does contain the "Index Fields" section, then the index

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
328 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 User CEL Functions

arguments supplied must correspond to values of each Index Field, which must match a single row in
the table.

31.4. User CEL Functions

User CEL functions are used in conjunction with user CEL routines. A user CEL function must be created
after a user CEL routine. For details, see User CEL Routines (p. 333). User CEL functions set the name of
the user CEL routine associated with the function, the input arguments to pass to the routine and the
expected return arguments from the routine.

1. Select the user CEL routine name (user routine name) from the drop-down list that the function will apply
to. For details, see Function Name (p. 329).

2. Enter the input Argument Units list to pass to the subroutine.

For details, see Argument Units (p. 329).

3. Enter the Result Units list output from the subroutine.

For details, see Result Units (p. 330).

31.4.1. Function Name

The function name is assigned when you create a new user CEL function, and is equivalent to the name
you would set for an expression. You use this name, together with the input arguments, when setting
the expression for the quantity of interest. For details, see Defining Quantities with User CEL Func-
tions (p. 329). The function name should follow usual naming rules (it may contain spaces but should
not include underscores).

31.4.1.1. Defining Quantities with User CEL Functions

After you have created a user CEL function, you can use it to specify any quantity in CFX-Pre for which
a standard CEL function (for example, sin, cos, step, and so on) can be used. You can enter an expression
using the notation:
<Function Name>(arg1[units], arg2[units], ...)

When using a system variable, an expression, or a value, you do not need to specify units. For example,
a pipe inlet velocity profile might be set by entering:
inletvelocity(MaxVel, r, 0.2[m])

where inletvelocity is the function name of the user CEL function, MaxVel is an existing expression
or value, r is a system variable, and 0.2[m] corresponds to the pipe diameter.

You would enter the above expression as one of the velocity components at the inlet boundary condition
(you may also want to use it as a velocity component of the initial guess).

31.4.2. Argument Units

You should enter the units of each argument that you will be passing to the subroutine. Units should
be comma separated and correspond to the order used when setting the expression for a quantity in
CFX-Pre. For example, enter [m], [m s^-1], [Pa] if you are passing a length, velocity, and pressure value
to the subroutine. The values of arguments passed to a subroutine are specified when you set an ex-
pression for a quantity in CFX-Pre. For details, see Defining Quantities with User CEL Functions (p. 329).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 329
User Functions

31.4.3. Result Units

The result argument units are the units of the return arguments from the subroutine. Units should be
comma separated and correspond to a valid unit for the quantity that you are specifying.

31.5. Profile Data Format

A profile data file is formatted as follows:
# Comment line
# The following section (beginning with [Name] and ending with
# [Data]) represents one profile, which can be repeated
# to define multiple profiles.
[Name]
My Boundary
[Spatial Fields]
r, theta, z
.
.
.
[Data]
X [ m ], Y [ m ], Z [ m ], Area [ m^2 ], Density [ kg m^-3 ]
-1.773e-02, -5.382e-02, 6.000e-02, 7.121e-06, 1.231e+00
-1.773e-02, -5.796e-02, 5.999e-02, 5.063e-06, 1.231e+00
.
.
.
# -------- end of first profile 'My Boundary'----------
[Name]
Plane 2
.
.
.

Notes about the profile data format:

• The name of each locator is listed under the [Name] heading.

• The names of the fields are case-insensitive (that is, [data] and [Data] are acceptable).

• The names of variables used in the data fields are case sensitive.

For example, u [m] is a valid x velocity component, whereas U [m] is an unrecognized field name.
You have to map this unrecognized field name with a valid variable name when loading into CFX-
Pre. This is consistent with the use of CEL elsewhere.

• Comments in the file are preceded by # (or ## for the CFX polyline format) and can appear anywhere in the
file.

• Commas must separate all fields in the profile. Any trailing commas at the end of a line are ignored. Any
additional commas within a line of data will be a syntax error.

• Blank lines are ignored and can appear anywhere in the file (except between the [<data>] and first data
line, where <data> is one of the key words in square brackets shown in the data format).

• If any lines with text are included above the keyword [Name], a syntax error will occur. Such lines should
be preceded by # character to convert them into comments.

• Multiple data sets are permitted within the same file by repeating the sequence of profiles; each profile
begins with keyword [Name].

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
330 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Profile Data Format

• Point coordinates and the corresponding variable values are stored in the [Data] section.

• [Spatial Fields] can contain 1, 2, or 3 values, corresponding to 1D, 2D, or 3D data.

• Within the [Data] section, the Spatial Fields must be the first entries in each row of data, before the other
variables.

• The data file has a .csv extension for compatibility with other software packages.

When this data file is read in, it is checked for any format violations; physics errors are shown for
such situations.

Note

A file exported from CFD-Post in a user-specified coordinate system contains a coordinate

frame ([CoordFrame]) section. The coordinate frame definition is written to the profile
file; CFX-Pre defines the coordinate frame when you initialize the data.

Additional information on profile data is available:

• Physics Message Window (p. 12)

• RULES and VARIABLES Files in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide

• Profile Boundary Conditions in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

31.5.1. Table Data Format

The table data format is the same as a regular profile except it contains index fields instead of spatial
fields.

A table data file is formatted as follows:

[Name]
Input Parameter Values

[Index Fields]
Table Index

[Data]
Table Index, massFlowOut2 [kg s^-1], InletTemp [K]
1, 1.23, 345.0
3, 1.24, 345.0
5, 1.23, 350.0
7, 1.24, 350.0

Notes about the table data format:

• The [Index Fields] section is optional: if omitted, the row number is used to index the table data.

• Any fields used as Index Fields must contain integer values only.

• If Index Fields are specified, then each row in the table must correspond to a different set of index field
values .

The notes pertaining to the profile data format also apply to the table data format. For details, see
Profile Data Format (p. 330).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 331
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
332 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 32: User Routines
User routines are Fortran subroutines (User CEL Functions, Junction Box Routines, and Particle User
Routines) that you write for the CFX-Solver. You use the User Routine details view to create objects
that link your Fortran subroutines to the CFX-Solver. To access the User Routine details view, either
select Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > User Routines or click Insert User Routine
in the main toolbar.

Once your User Routines have been created and linked, they appear in the tree view under Simulation
> Expressions, Functions and Variables > User Routines.

User Routine Details View

The User Routine details view creates objects that link your Fortran subroutines to the CFX-Solver.

There are four types of user routines:

• User CEL Routines (p. 333)

• Junction Box Routines (p. 335)

• Particle User Routines (p. 335)

• For details on the fourth user-routine option, Transient Particle Diagnostics Routine, refer
to User Diagnostics Routine in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

32.1. User CEL Routines

Available when Option is set to User CEL Function, User CEL Routines are used in conjunction
with User CEL Functions to define quantities in CFX-Pre based on a Fortran subroutine. The User CEL
Routine is used to set the calling name, the location of the subroutine, and the location of the Shared
Libraries associated with the subroutine.

1. Enter the Calling Name (p. 334) of the subroutine within the subroutine file.

You should always use lowercase letters for this even when the subroutine name in the Fortran
file is in uppercase.

2. Enter the Library Name and Library Path.

The library name will usually be your subroutine filename (without any extensions). The library
path is the path to the directory containing the system dependent directories and supports lists
of paths. For details, see Library Name and Library Path (p. 334).

User CEL Functions are created after the associated routine has been defined. For details, see:

• User CEL Functions (p. 329)

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 333
User Routines

• User CEL Functions and Routines in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

32.1.1. Calling Name

The Calling Name is the name of the subroutine within a Fortran file. This name appears immediately
after the SUBROUTINE statement in a Fortran file. It is usually in upper case in the Fortran file, but
should always be entered in lower case. It must not include spaces but may contain underscores (this
is different from the usual naming rules).

32.1.2. Library Name and Library Path

This is the name of the shared library. The Library Name will be the name of the file containing the
subroutine, ignoring any file extensions (for example, InletProfile for the file named InletPro-
file.F). The filename depends on how you ran the cfx5mkext command:

• If you did not specify a -name option when running the cfx5mkext command, the filename will be the
name of your shared library. For details, see Shared Libraries in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• If you did specify the -name option when running the cfx5mkext command, the filename will be the
name you specified.

Note that if you look at the actual filename of the shared library, it will have a lib prefix (UNIX only)
and either a .so, .sl, or .dll suffix depending on your platform. Do not include the prefix or suffix
in the Library Name.

The Library Path is the absolute path to the directory that contains the shared libraries in subdirectories
for each platform. The pathname depends on how you ran the cfx5mkext command:

• If you did not specify a -dest option when running the cfx5mkext command, this will be the path to the
directory in which the cfx5mkext command was executed. For details, see Shared Libraries in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

• If you did specify the “-dest” option when running the cfx5mkext command, the pathname will be the
name you specified.

On UNIX platforms, the Library Path will look like:

/home/user/SharedLibraries

On Windows systems, the Library Path will look like:

F:\user\SharedLibraries

If you are running in parallel and specify only a single library path, then each machine should be able
to locate the shared libraries using the specified Library Path. On Windows systems, you may have to
map network drives so that the path to the libraries is the same on each machine. However, you can
also specify the Library Path as a list. ANSYS CFX will try to locate your shared libraries on each machine
in the parallel run using the list of paths provided. Comma (,), colon (:) and semi-colon (;) separated
lists are valid. For example, when running in parallel across Windows and UNIX machines, a valid path
may look like:

/home/user/SharedLibraries, C:\Shared Libraries

The colon used after a Windows drive letter is treated correctly and is not interpreted as a list separator.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
334 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Particle User Routines

32.2. Junction Box Routines

Junction box routines are used to call your own Fortran subroutines during execution of the CFX-Solver.
You must create a junction box routine object so that the CFX-Solver knows the location of the sub-
routine, the location of the shared libraries associated with the subroutine, and when to call the sub-
routine. Each of these items is specified in the details view. For details, see User Junction Box Routines
in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

To complete the Junction Box Routine details:

1. The first three parameters are identical to those described for the User Function option, under Calling
Name (p. 334) and Library Name and Library Path (p. 334).

2. Enter the Junction Box Location at which to call the subroutine. For details, see Junction Box Routine
Options and Parameters in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Junction box routines appear in the LIBRARY section of a CCL file. You can create many junction box
routines in CFX-Pre, but only call the required routines during execution of the CFX-Solver. This enables
you to read in a CCL file containing a list of junction box routines and then select only those that you
want to call. This selection is made on the Solver Control tab. For details, see Basic Settings Tab (p. 211).

32.3. Particle User Routines

Particle user routines are used to create user defined injection regions and particle user sources. Creating
a user routine with the Particle User Routine option selected is identical to creating a routine
with the User CEL Function option selected. For details, see:

• User CEL Routines (p. 333)

• Particle Injection Regions Tab (p. 143)

• Particle User Sources in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 335
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
336 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 33: Simulation Control
Simulation controls enable you to define the execution of analyses and related tasks in the simulation,
such as remeshing. Specific controls include definitions of global execution, termination controls, and
the ability to have more than one configuration. Additional information regarding these topics is provided
in Execution Control (p. 339) and Configurations (p. 349), respectively.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 337
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
338 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 34: Execution and Termination Control
This chapter describes:
34.1. Execution Control
34.2.Termination Control

34.1. Execution Control

The Execution Control settings described below apply to all configurations in the simulation. You can
override these settings for any configuration from the Run Definition tab on the details view of the
Configuration (for details, see Run Definition Tab (p. 355)) or the Define Run dialog box in the CFX-
Solver Manager (for details, see The Define Run Dialog Box in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide).

This section describes:

34.1.1. Overview of Defining CFX-Solver Startup
34.1.2.The Details View for Execution Control

34.1.1. Overview of Defining CFX-Solver Startup

To define how a CFX-Solver can be started, the number of settings that you need to set up for Execution
Control depends on the case:

• In some cases, you need to specify only the name of a CFX-Solver input file (*.def or *.mdef). For cases
that require initialization from previous results, you also need to specify the name of a results file (*.res).

• You can configure runs in serial or parallel:

– Serial run is the default way of running a CFD case. During a serial run, all computation is done by a single
process running on one processor.

– Parallel run partitions the computation into more than one process and is done on more than one processor
in a single machine (local parallel processing) or on more than one machine (distributed parallel processing).
You also have the option of specifying how the computation is partitioned for a parallel run.

• You can optionally select the system priority for the interpolator and solver computation as well as settings
such as precision and memory allocation.

When you have finished defining how CFX-Solver will start, click OK or Apply to save the settings.

Details of the above steps are described in the next section.

34.1.2. The Details View for Execution Control

You access the details view for Execution Control from CFX-Pre by clicking Insert > Solver > Execution
Control or by right-clicking on Simulation Control in the details view and selecting Insert > Execution
Control.

The tabs presented in the details view for Execution Control are described in the following sections:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 339
Execution and Termination Control

• Run Definition Tab (p. 340)

• Initial Values Tab (p. 341)

• Partitioner Tab (p. 342)

• Solver Tab (p. 345)

• Interpolator Tab (p. 345)

34.1.2.1. Run Definition Tab

To configure the Run Definition tab:

Under Execution Control > Run Definition > Solver Input File, ensure that the name of a CFX-Solver
input file (extension .def or .mdef) is specified.

Note that CFX-Solver input file names must not contain spaces when run with an associated ANSYS
input file (.inp).

• In the Execution Control details view of CFX-Pre, there is an option to change the order of the nodes in the
mesh. Depending on the case, this reordering may result in a reduction in the run time for the CFX-Solver.
From Mesh Options > Node Reordering > Options, you can select None, Cuthill McKee and Reverse
Cuthill McKee. If either Cuthill McKee or Reverse Cuthill McKee is selected, you can choose
None, Ascending or Descending for Sorting Within Levels. Additional information is in Initial Condition
Modeling in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Set Type of Run to Full or Partitioner Only.

– Full runs the partitioner if applicable, and then runs the solver.

– Partitioner Only is used for parallel runs only and does not run the solver. This writes a .par file.

• You can select or clear Double Precision. This setting will determine the default (single or double) precision
of the partitioner, solver, and interpolator executables. For details on the precision of executables, see
Double-Precision Executables in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide. The precisions of the partitioner,
solver, and interpolator executables can be optionally overridden individually on the Partitioner, Solver,
and Interpolator tabs.

• You can select or clear Large Problem. This setting will determine the default (“large problem” or not)
problem size capability of the partitioner, solver, and interpolator executables. For details on the problem
size capability of the executables, see Large Problem Executables in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.
The problem size capability of the partitioner, solver, and interpolator executables can be optionally over-
ridden individually on the Partitioner, Solver, and Interpolator tabs.

• You can configure the Parallel Environment as required (see Parallel Environment (p. 341)).

• System Coupling input files are always written if there are boundary conditions set to use the System
Coupling option. Additionally, you can request that a System Coupling Input (.scp) file is written regardless
of the boundary condition options, by selecting Always write System Coupling Input File. The System
Coupling Input file is written alongside the CFX-Solver input (.def) file and has the same name except for
the file extension (.scp).

For details on System Coupling, see:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
340 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Execution Control

– Coupling CFX to an External Solver in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

– System Coupling User's Guide in the System Coupling User's Guide

• You can elect to have CFX-Pre quit upon writing CFX-Solver Input file by selecting Quit CFX-Pre when
Solver Input File Written > Quit.

34.1.2.1.1. Parallel Environment

Under Parallel Environment, select a Run Mode option. The run mode determines whether the run
is serial (the default when defining a run in which a problem is solved as one process), or parallel
(problem is split into partitions).

• A serial run (the default) requires no additional configuration.

• For a local parallel run, specify the number of partitions. This value is the number of separate processes that
will be executed by the host.

Note that distributed parallel runs cannot be set up in CFX-Pre. For more information on Parallel Pro-
cessing, see Parallel Run in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

34.1.2.2. Initial Values Tab

The Initial Values tab is used for specifying initial values via results files.

If you do not specify initial values via results files, the software will use initialization data from (in order
of precedence):

• In CFX-Pre on the Initialization tab in the Domain details view

• In CFX-Pre on the Initialization tab in the Global Initialization details view

• Automatically generated initial values

However, automatically generated initial values may not be suitable for some steady-state cases and
are insufficient for all transient cases.

If you do specify initial values via results files, those values will override any initial values listed above,
as applicable.

You can set initial values via results files in a variety of places as listed here (in order of precedence):

• In CFX-Solver Manager in the Define Run dialog box on the Initial Values tab

• In CFX-Pre in the Configuration details view on the Initial Values tab

Note that for cases with multiple configurations, initial values cannot be set globally (that is, in CFX-
Solver Manager or in CFX-Pre in the Execution Control details view); they can only be set per config-
uration (that is, in CFX-Pre in the Configuration details view).

• In CFX-Pre in the Execution Control details view on the Initial Values tab

You can set initial values via results files as follows:

1. On the Initial Values tab, select the Initial Values Specification check box to show the initial values
settings.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 341
Execution and Termination Control

2. Click New to create an initial values object.

3. Select an initial values object from the list.

4. Choose the source of initial values for the initial values object.

The Results File option is the only option available. Specify the name of the results file from
which initial values should be obtained.

5. Optionally specify Interpolation Mapping settings in order to select, position, and/or replicate the data.
For details, see Interpolation Mapping in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

6. Select Continue History From if you want to continue the run history (convergence history, monitor
plots, time and time step counters, etc…) and use the smoothest restart possible from the selected Initial
Values File. The run will continue from the one contained in the specified initial values object. Note that,
in CFX-Pre, the Continue History From option is made visible by selecting Initial Values Control. Note
that the run history will reset if Continue History From is not selected.

7. The Use Mesh From setting determines which file provides the mesh that is used for the analysis: the
Solver Input file or the Initial Values file. The mesh from the Initial Values file can be used in a limited set
of circumstances. See Using the Mesh from the Initial Values File in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide for details.
Note that, in CFX-Pre, the Use Mesh From option is made visible by selecting Initial Values Control.

Full details for Initial Values Files can be found in Reading the Initial Conditions from a File in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

34.1.2.3. Partitioner Tab

Use the Partitioner tab to configure mesh partitioning options for parallel runs.

Note

Once started, the run progresses through partitioning, and then into the solution of the CFD
problem. Extra information is stored in the CFX output file for a parallel run. For details, see
Partitioning Information in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

You can select a partition file to load by selecting Initial Partition File and clicking Browse . The
*.par file is only available if a model has already been partitioned. The number of partitions in the
partitioning file must be the same as on the Run Definition tab.

Note

An existing partition file cannot be used if the simulation involves either the Monte Carlo or
Discrete Transfer radiation model. Partitions may be viewed prior to running CFX-Solver. For
details, see CFX Partition File in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

Run Priority may be set to Idle, Low, Standard or High (Standard is selected by default). For a
discussion of these priorities, see The cfx5control Application in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
342 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Execution Control

34.1.2.3.1. Executable Settings

You can override the precision set on the Run Definition tab by selecting Override Default Precision
and then setting the precision. For details on the precision of executables, see Double-Precision Execut-
ables in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

You can override the problem size capability (“large problem” or not) set on the Run Definition tab by
selecting Override Default Large Problem Setting and then setting the problem size capability (via
the Large Problem check box). For details on the problem size capability of the executables, see Large
Problem Executables in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

34.1.2.3.2. Partitioning Detail

Under Partitioning Detail, you can specify various partition method options.

34.1.2.3.2.1. Partition Type

Configure the base partition method. Available Partition Type selections include:

• Multilevel Graph Partitioning Software - MeTiS in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide. When first running in par-
allel, it is recommended that Partition Type be set to MeTiS.

• Optimized Recursive Coordinate Bisection in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Recursive Coordinate Bisection in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Directional Recursive Coordinate Bisection in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• User Specified Direction in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Radial in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Circumferential in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Simple Assignment in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

34.1.2.3.2.2. Partition Weighting

Configure how partitions are weighted between machines. Available Partition Weighting selections
include:

• Automatic (default): Calculates partition sizes based on the Relative Speed entry specified for each machine
in the hostinfo.ccl file. Machines with a faster relative speed than others are assigned proportionally
larger partition sizes.

Note

The entry of relative speed values is usually carried out during the CFX installation process.
Parallel performance can be optimized by setting accurate entries for relative speed.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 343
Execution and Termination Control

• Uniform: Assigns equal-sized partitions to each process.

Note

Both Uniform and Automatic give the same results for local parallel runs; it is only for
distributed runs that they differ.

• Specified: Only available in CFX-Solver Manager. For details, see Partitioner Tab in the CFX-Solver Manager
User's Guide.

34.1.2.3.2.3. Multidomain Option

Configure how domains are partitioned. Available Multidomain Option selections include:

• Automatic (default): If the case does not involve particle transport, this is the same as the Coupled
Partitioning option; otherwise it is the same as the Independent Partitioning option.

• Independent Partitioning: Each domain is partitioned independently into the specified number of
partitions.

• Coupled Partitioning: All connected domains are partitioned together, provided they are the same
type (i.e. solid domains are still partitioned separately from fluid/porous domains). For details, see Optimizing
Mesh Partitioning in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Note

Coupled partitioning is often more scalable, more robust and less memory expensive than
independent partitioning because fewer partition boundaries are created. However, coupled
partitioning may worsen the performance of particle transport calculations.

34.1.2.3.2.4. Multipass Partitioning

When Coupled Partitioning is activated, you can further choose to set the Multipass Partitioning
option. The Transient Rotor Stator option is relevant only for simulations having transient rotor
stator interfaces. It uses a special multipass algorithm to further optimize the partition boundaries. This
approach generates circumferentially-banded partitions adjacent to each transient rotor stator interface,
which ensures that interface nodes remain in the same partition as the two domains slide relative to
each other. Away from the interface, the partitioning is handled using whichever method is specified
for the Partition Type.

34.1.2.3.3. Partition Smoothing

Partition smoothing attempts to minimize the surface area of partition boundaries by swapping vertices
between partitions. Partition smoothing reduces communication overhead and improves solver robust-
ness. Smoothing is enabled by default, but may be disabled by changing Partition Smoothing > Option.

If smoothing is enabled, the algorithm will, by default, perform a maximum of 100 sweeps. The maximum
number of smoothing sweeps can be specified by changing the value of Partition Smoothing > Max.
Smooth. Sweeps. The smoothing algorithm will stop before this value is reached if it finds no improve-
ment between successive sweeps.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
344 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Execution Control

For further details on partition smoothing, see Optimizing Mesh Partitioning in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide.

34.1.2.3.4. Partitioner Memory

If required, you can adjust the memory configuration under Partitioner Memory. For details, see Con-
figuring Memory for the CFX-Solver in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

34.1.2.4. Solver Tab

Select the Solver tab to configure solver settings.

• Under Run Priority, you can select Idle, Low, Standard or High. For a discussion of these priorities as
well as how you can change them after the execution of the solver has started, see The cfx5control Applic-
ation in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

• You can override the precision set on the Run Definition tab. From Executable Settings > Override Default
Precision, select or clear Double Precision. For details on the precision of executables, see Double-Precision
Executables in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

• You can override the problem size capability (“large problem” or not) set on the Run Definition tab by se-
lecting Override Default Large Problem Setting and then setting the problem size capability (via the
Large Problem check box). For details on the problem size capability of the executables, see Large Problem
Executables in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

• If required, you can adjust the memory configuration under Solver Memory. For details, see Configuring
Memory for the CFX-Solver in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

34.1.2.5. Interpolator Tab

Select the Interpolator tab.

• Under Run Priority, you can select Idle, Low, Standard or High. For a discussion of these priorities, see
The cfx5control Application in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

• You can override the precision set on the Run Definition tab by selecting Override Default Precision and
then setting the precision. For details on the precision of executables, see Double-Precision Executables in
the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

• You can override the problem size capability (“large problem” or not) set on the Run Definition tab by se-
lecting Override Default Large Problem Setting and then setting the problem size capability (via the
Large Problem check box). For details on the problem size capability of the executables, see Large Problem
Executables in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

• If required, under Interpolator Memory, you can adjust the memory configuration. For details, see Config-
uring Memory for the CFX-Solver in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide.

• You can select Domain Search Control to access the Bounding Box Tolerance setting (see below).

• You can select Interpolation Model Control to access the Enforce Strict Name Mapping for Phases,
Particle Relocalization Tolerance, and Mesh Deformation Option settings (see below).

The Bounding Box Tolerance and Particle Relocalization Tolerance settings are described in Adjusting
the Bounding Box Tolerance in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 345
Execution and Termination Control

The Enforce Strict Name Mapping for Phases setting controls how fluids are mapped between the
Initial Values files and the Solver Input File. By default, when interpolating from multiple Initial Values
files onto a single Solver Input File, if each Initial Values file contains just one fluid, then the CFX-Inter-
polator regards all of these fluids as being the same fluid, regardless of the Fluid Definition name. You
can change this default behavior by turning on the Enforce Strict Name Mapping for Phases setting.
This forces the CFX-Interpolator to use the Fluid Definition names to match each fluid from each Initial
Values file with the appropriate fluid in the Solver Input File.

The Mesh Deformation Option setting controls which mesh in the Initial Values File is used to check
the mesh displacements: the initial mesh or the final mesh. The options are Automatic, Use Latest
Mesh, and Use Initial Mesh. When the Automatic option is selected, the initial mesh will be
used if the Continue History From check box is selected, and the latest mesh will be used if the Con-
tinue History From check box is cleared.

34.2. Termination Control

The Termination Control settings apply to the simulations with one or more configurations. This section
describes:
34.2.1. Overview of Configuration Termination
34.2.2. Details View for Termination Control

34.2.1. Overview of Configuration Termination

Many simulations with one or more configurations will terminate naturally without explicitly introducing
Termination Control. However, in some cases explicit Termination Control is required. For example,
consider a case where a simulation has a sequence of configurations that are set up to run one after
the other with the sequence to then return to the first configuration in the sequence (this could occur
when modeling an internal combustion engine where there could be a configuration for each of the
intake, compression, power and exhaust strokes and the simulation repeatedly cycles through each of
the four configurations). There can be one or more conditions for terminating a simulation. Each termin-
ation condition can be based on the number of times a configuration has been executed or whenever
a CFX-Solver interrupt condition for a configuration has been satisfied.

To define the conditions under which a simulation should be terminated you need to:

1. If required, create one or more termination Control Conditions.

2. For each Control Condition, select the appropriate termination control Option.

3. For each Control Condition set the Configuration Name appropriate for the termination control condition.

4. For each Control Condition, set the appropriate Number of Steps or Condition Name(s).

When you have finished defining how the simulation will terminate, click OK or Apply to save the set-
tings. Details of the above steps are described in the next section.

34.2.2. Details View for Termination Control

You access the details view for Termination Control from CFX-Pre by clicking Insert > Configurations
> Termination Control or by right-clicking on Simulation Control in the details view and selecting
Insert > Termination Control.

The following describes the details of the Termination Control tab.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
346 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Termination Control

Control Conditions

A list displaying the available termination control conditions. Click Add new item to add a new termin-
ation control condition. To change its settings, the termination control condition must be highlighted.

You can highlight a condition by selecting it from the displayed list. Click Delete to delete a highlighted
termination control condition.

Control Condition: Options

The options for termination control are either Max. Configuration Steps or Solver Interrupt Conditions.
The former setting is used to terminate a simulations after a selected configuration has been executed the
prescribed number of times. The latter setting is used to terminate a simulation whenever the named CFX-
Solver interrupt conditions for the selected configurations have been satisfied. Note that the latter option
is only valid if CFX-Solver interrupt conditions have been defined. For details, see Interrupt Control (p. 212).

Control Condition: Configuration Name

Choose the configuration for which the termination control is to be applied.

Control Condition: Number of Steps

This setting is used to set to the maximum number of times the specified configuration is to be executed
in the course of the simulation.

Control Condition: Condition Name(s)

This setting is used to identify the names of the solver interrupt condition for the specified configuration
to be used to terminate the simulation.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 347
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
348 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 35: Configurations
This chapter describes how to control the sequencing of configurations for a simulation, how to define
when remeshing is required, and procedures for defining how CFX-Solver can be started for a configur-
ation. The Configuration settings described below apply to a specified flow analyses in the simulation.

This chapter describes:

35.1. Overview of Defining a Configuration
35.2.The Details View for Configuration

35.1. Overview of Defining a Configuration

To set up the sequencing of configurations in a simulation, you need to define a configuration for each
step in the simulation. Typically, there is a configuration for each analysis in the simulation. You are
required to define at least one activation condition for each configuration. You set up the desired se-
quencing of configurations in a simulation by your choice of activation conditions. For each required
configuration:

1. Create the configuration.

2. Set the name of the analysis to be associated with the configuration.

3. Create the required number of activation controls for the configuration.

4. Set the activation control option to activate the configuration at the start of the simulation or following
the completion of another configuration.

Note that it is possible to have more than one configuration activated at the start of the simulation.
You also have the option of specifying more than one activation condition for a configuration (for ex-
ample, a configuration can be activated at the start of the simulation as well as at the completion of
another configuration).

To control when remeshing is to occur, you are required to:

1. Create a remeshing definition.

2. Select the appropriate remeshing option.

3. Set up the remeshing activation condition.

4. Identify the location where the remeshing is to occur.

5. Supply any additional information required by the selected remeshing option.

To define how a CFX-Solver can be started, the number of settings that you need to define for Config-
uration depends on the case:

• In some cases, you need only to specify the name of a CFX-Solver input file (*.def or *.mdef). For cases
that require initialization from previous results, you also need to specify the name of a results file (*.res).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 349
Configurations

• You can configure runs in serial or parallel:

– Serial run is the default way of running a CFD case. During a serial run, all computation is done by a single
process running on one processor.

– Parallel run partitions the computation into more than one process and is done on more than one processor
in a single machine (local parallel processing) or on more than one machine (distributed parallel processing).
You also have the option of specifying how the computation is partitioned for a parallel run.

• You can optionally select the system priority for the interpolator and solver computation as well as settings
such as precision and memory allocation.

When you have finished setting the parameters for the configuration, click OK or Apply to save the
settings.

Details of the above steps are described in the next section.

35.2. The Details View for Configuration

You access the details view for a configuration in CFX-Pre by double-clicking its Simulation Control >
Configurations entry in the Outline view or by right-clicking its Simulation Control > Configurations
entry in the Outline view and selecting Edit.

The tabs presented in the details view for the configurations are described in the following sections:

• General Settings Tab (p. 350)

• Remeshing Tab (p. 351)

• Run Definition Tab (p. 355)

• Partitioner Tab (p. 355)

• Solver Tab (p. 355)

• Interpolator Tab (p. 355)

35.2.1. General Settings Tab

The General Settings tab for a configurations requires that you:

1. Select the Flow Analysis for the configuration.

2. Define at least one Activation Condition. There are two Option values available for each Activation
Condition:

• Start of Simulation to activate the configuration at the start of the simulation.

• End of Configuration to activate the configuration whenever any one of a prescribed configuration
completes.

One activation condition is automatically generated for you and the default Option is set to Start of

Simulation. If required, create additional activation conditions by clicking New . To change the

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
350 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 The Details View for Configuration

settings for an activation condition or to delete a condition (by clicking Delete ), you must highlight
a condition by selecting it from the displayed list.

35.2.2. Remeshing Tab

The Remeshing tab allows you to introduce one or more remeshing definitions within the configuration

being edited. To create a remeshing definition, click New . For additional details, see Remeshing
Guide in the CFX Reference Guide.

Each remeshing definition requires that you:

1. Select either the User Defined or ICEM CFD Replay value for the Option setting. Additional settings,
which depend on the option selected, are described in the sections User Defined Remeshing (p. 352)
and ANSYS ICEM CFD Replay Remeshing (p. 353), presented below.

2. Select one or more activation condition(s) to be used to activate the remeshing object during the
configuration’s execution. This selection is made from a list of the solver Interrupt Control conditions
(for details, see Interrupt Control (p. 212)) that were defined for the Flow Analysis specified in the
General Settings tab.

3. Select the mesh Location that will be replaced by remeshing. This selection is made from a list of the
3D mesh regions that are used in the Flow Analysis specified in the General Settings tab.

Each remeshing definition also allows you to specify a comma separated list of Mesh Reload Options
that control how the new mesh replaces the previous one. The new mesh could, for example, be reloaded
as a .gtm file using [mm] length units and all relevant mesh transformations by specifying:
Mesh Reload Options = "replacetype=GTM,replaceunits=mm,notransform=false"

These and other options are summarized in the table below.

Table 35.1: Reload Options

Reload Description and Values

Option
notransform True (default) ensures mesh transformations are not performed on mesh reload.

True or False
replacetype Type of replacement mesh file.

ANSYS: cdb and inp files

CFX4: geo files

CFX5: CFX 5.1 files

CGNS: cgns and cgn files

GEM: TfC files

GTM: gtm files

GtmDirect: def and res files

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 351
Configurations

Reload Description and Values

Option
GTM_DSDB: ANSYS cmdb and dsdb files

Def: def files that are older than CFX 5.6 (or if duplicate node removal is required)

Fluent: cas and msh files

Generic: ICEM CFD mesh (cfx, cfx5, msh) files

GRD: CFX-TASCflow (grd) files

IDEAS: unv files

MSC: Patran out and neu files

PDC: GridPro files

replacegenargsGeneric mesh import options (as space separated list):

-g: Ignore degenerate element errors

-n: Do not do duplicate node removal

-T: specify duplicate node removal tolerance (float).

-D: Primitive naming strategy ; either Standard Naming Strategy or Derived

Naming Strategy.
replacespecargsSpace-separated list of type-specific import arguments, as discussed in Supported
Mesh File Types (p. 73).
replaceunits Length units of the replacement mesh.

micron, mm, cm, m, in, ft

35.2.2.1. User Defined Remeshing

Full control over how the replacement mesh is generated is provided by the User Defined remeshing
option. When this option is used, a user-defined command is required to gather all input data needed
for remeshing and for create the replacement mesh file. The CFX-Solver, however, automatically executes
the following tasks:

• Import the new mesh into the problem definition

• Interpolate solution data from the previous mesh onto the new mesh

• Repartition the new mesh if a parallel run mode is used

• Restart the equation solution process.

In addition to the required and optional general settings described above, the User Defined option
requires specification of:

• An External Command that is responsible for generating a replacement mesh file

• The name of the Replacement File.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
352 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 The Details View for Configuration

The External Command is submitted to the operating system for execution. This may be a command
to start a mesh (re)generation executable directly with certain inputs, or a shell script that executes
several commands. It is important to note that this command is submitted from the current run directory
(for example case_001.dir), so care is required when using relative paths to files during remeshing.

Useful inputs to the remeshing process may be extracted from the most recently generated CFX-Solver
Results file. For details, see Remeshing Guide in the CFX Reference Guide. This file is located in the run
directory, and is simply called res (no prefix or suffix) at the time of submitting the External Command
to the operating system.

For additional details, see User Defined Remeshing in the CFX Reference Guide.

35.2.2.2. ANSYS ICEM CFD Replay Remeshing

Remeshing using the ANSYS ICEM CFD mesh generator is highly automated when the ICEM CFD Replay
remeshing option is used. This is accomplished by combining settings made in the Flow Analysis
(specified on the configuration’s General Settings tab) with a batch run of the ANSYS ICEM CFD mesh
generator using replay (session) files.

When this option is used the CFX-Solver automatically executes the following tasks:

• Compile a comprehensive remeshing replay file from a combination of provided and user-specified
replay files

• Execute the ANSYS ICEM CFD mesh generator in batch mode, using the remeshing replay file

• Import the new mesh into the problem definition

• Interpolate solution data from the previous mesh onto the new mesh

• Repartition the new mesh if a parallel run mode is used

• Restart the equation solution process.

In addition to the required and optional general settings described above, the ICEM CFD Replay option
requires specification of:

• An ANSYS ICEM CFD Geometry File (with a tin extension) that contains the reference geometry

• A Mesh Replay File (with an rpl extension) that contains a recording of the steps (that is, the com-
mands) used to generate the mesh in the ANSYS ICEM CFD application.

Additional, optional settings include:

• ICEM CFD Geometry Control definitions

• ICEM CFD Mesh Control definitions

• Scalar Parameter definitions.

For additional details, see ICEM CFD Replay Remeshing in the CFX Reference Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 353
Configurations

35.2.2.2.1. ICEM CFD Geometry Control

Option settings for ICEM CFD Geometry Control other than None are used to modify the reference
geometry contained in the ICEM CFD Geometry File according to the mesh motion specifications defined
in the CFX case setup. If the geometry control option is set to Automatic, then one or more ICEM CFD
Part Map definitions may be defined. Each definition provides a mapping between:

• An ICEM CFD Parts List, which is a list of parts (or families) defined in the referenced Geometry File

• The translation of the centroid of a Boundary defined in the Flow Analysis.

These definitions are applied, in conjunction with the default geometry control replay file (icemcfd_Geo-
mCtrl.rpl contained the <CFXROOT>/etc/Remeshing directory), to modify the reference geometry
prior to regenerating the mesh. If the geometry control option is set to User Defined Replay File, then
a File Name is required and the specified file is used instead of the default geometry control replay
file.

35.2.2.2.2. ICEM CFD Mesh Control

Options settings for ICEM CFD Mesh Control other than None are used to set values of some pre-
defined parameters used by ANSYS ICEM CFD during remeshing. If the mesh control option is set to
Automatic, then one or more ICEM CFD Part Parameter definitions may be defined. Each definition
provides a mapping for an ICEM CFD Parameter that governs mesh attributes like the maximum element
size (emax) or the maximum element height (ehgt), between:

• An ICEM CFD Parts List, which is a list of parts (or families) defined in the referenced Geometry File

• A Monitor Point defined in the Flow Analysis.

These definitions are applied in conjunction with the default mesh control replay file (icemcfd_MeshC-
trl.rpl contained the <CFXROOT>/etc/Remeshing directory), to modify the reference geometry
prior to regenerating the mesh. If the mesh control option is set to User Defined Replay File, then a
File Name is required and the specified file is used instead of the default mesh control replay file.

35.2.2.2.3. Scalar Parameter

Scalar Parameter definitions are used to set values of additional pre- or user-defined parameters refer-
enced in any of the replay files used by ANSYS ICEM CFD during remeshing. Each definition provides
a mapping between a scalar parameter used during remeshing (with the same name as the Scalar
Parameter definition) and a Monitor Point defined in the Flow Analysis.

The parameters listed in the table below are used in the default geometry control replay file, and become
relevant if a Scalar Parameter definition is created with the same name.

Table 35.2: Scalar Parameters

Scalar Parameter Description

ICEM CFD Geometry Scale The specified scale is used to address length unit differences
between the geometry contained in the specified ANSYS ICEM
CFD Geometry File and the mesh contained in the CFX-Solver
Input file. For example, if the length unit is [mm] in the ANSYS
ICEM CFD geometry and [m] in the CFX-Solver InputCFX-Solver
Input file, then the geometry scale should be set to 0.001.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
354 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 The Details View for Configuration

Scalar Parameter Description

OFFSET X PartName The specified offset values are added to the centroid
displacements (see the discussion on ICEM CFD Geometry
OFFSET Y PartName Control presented above) that are applied for the part (or
family) named PartName. Note that the ICEM CFD Geometry
OFFSET Z PartName Scale is also applied to the offset specified offset.

35.2.3. Run Definition Tab

Select the Configuration Execution Control option to override the global Execution Control settings
for the configuration. Note that, when this is selected, the configuration will not inherit any settings
from the global Execution Control settings. Once the Configuration Execution Control option is selected,
settings on the Run Definition, Initial Values, Partitioner, Solver, and Interpolator tabs become
available.

The remaining settings on the Run Definition tab are the same as the equivalent settings described
in Run Definition Tab (p. 340) (once the Configuration Execution Control setting is selected), although
only the settings that are relevant for Configuration Execution Control are available on the tab. You
can override these settings for the specific configuration from the Define Run dialog box in the CFX-
Solver Manager (for details, see The Define Run Dialog Box in the CFX-Solver Manager User's Guide).

35.2.4. Initial Values Tab

These settings are essentially the same as those described in Initial Values Tab (p. 341).

For configurations, when choosing the source of initial values for the initial values object, an additional
option is available: Configuration Results. To use this option, specify the name of the configur-
ation from which initial values should be obtained. This option allows the results (which become available
at run time) of another configuration to be used as initial values for the configuration being defined.

35.2.5. Partitioner Tab

These settings are the same as those described in Partitioner Tab (p. 342) except that the option to
specify an initial partition file is not available for configurations.

35.2.6. Solver Tab

These settings are the same as those described in Solver Tab (p. 345).

35.2.7. Interpolator Tab

These settings are the same as those described in Interpolator Tab (p. 345).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 355
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
356 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 36: Quick Setup Mode
Quick Setup mode is a mode of operation for CFX-Pre that greatly simplifies the physics setup for a
case. More complex physics, such as multiphase, combustion, radiation, advanced turbulence models,
and so on are not available in Quick Setup mode. You can, however, use Quick Setup mode to get
started, and then add more physics details later.

Note

You can switch to Quick Setup mode by selecting Tools > Quick Setup Mode from the main
menu.

This chapter describes:

36.1. Starting a New Case in Quick Setup Mode
36.2. Simulation Definition Tab
36.3. Physics Definition
36.4. Boundary Definition
36.5. Final Operations

36.1. Starting a New Case in Quick Setup Mode

To start a new simulation in Quick Setup mode:

1. Start CFX-Pre.

2. Select File > New Case from the main menu.

The New Case dialog box appears.

3. Select Quick Setup and click OK.

The Simulation Definition area opens.

36.2. Simulation Definition Tab

Under Simulation Definition, you can set the analysis type data, the fluid data, and import a mesh file.

• Simulation Data (p. 357)

• Working Fluid (p. 358)

• Mesh Data (p. 358)

36.2.1. Simulation Data

A short description of each of the Problem Type options is displayed in CFX-Pre.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 357
Quick Setup Mode

36.2.1.1. Problem Type

Problem Type can be set to any of the following:

• Single Phase

Only one fluid is present in a single phase simulation, and it is usually a pure substance.

• Multi-Component

If this option is selected, the simulation is used to model the average properties of a mixture of
chemical species.

• Multi-Phase

This option contains more than one fluid, each of which is modeled separately. In general, unlike
multi-component simulations, the fluids are of different chemical species.

36.2.2. Working Fluid

Under Working Fluid, you select the fluids for use in the domain.

• Fluid(s)

If Analysis Type is set to Single Phase, you may select only one fluid for the domain. If Multi-
Phase was chosen, you may select at least two fluids.

• Mixture

If you are defining a multi-component simulation, you must provide a name for your custom material,
which is defined by the fluids specified under Components.

• Components

Select the fluids you plan to use in the simulation from this drop-down menu. At least two fluids are
required.

36.2.3. Mesh Data

• Mesh File

Click Browse to open the Import Mesh dialog box and search for the mesh file to import.

The most common mesh file formats can be imported in Quick Setup mode. If other mesh formats,
advanced options or user import methods are required, General mode should be used.

For details, see Importing and Transforming Meshes (p. 71).

• Available Volumes > 3D Regions

Using the drop-down menu, select the 3D region you want to use for the domain. By default, all 3D
regions of mesh from the selected mesh file will be selected.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
358 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Boundary Definition

36.3. Physics Definition

Under Physics Definition, you will set the type of simulation and specify model data such as the pressure,
heat transfer, and turbulence options.

• Analysis Type (p. 359)

• Model Data (p. 359)

36.3.1. Analysis Type

Select the analysis type: Steady State or Transient.

• Steady State

No further settings are required.

• Transient

If Transient is selected, set the Total Time and Time Step values for the transient simulation.

36.3.2. Model Data

• Reference Pressure

Set a value for the reference pressure. For details, see Setting a Reference Pressure in the CFX-Solver
Modeling Guide.

• Heat Transfer

Select the heat transfer model. For details, see Heat Transfer: Option (p. 123).

• Turbulence

Select the turbulence model. For details, see Turbulence: Option (p. 124).

36.4. Boundary Definition

CFX-Pre will automatically create boundary conditions based on name matching criteria, but you can
define your own as follows:

1. Right-click in the blank area and select New to create a new boundary condition.

A dialog box will pop up and ask for the name of the boundary condition you want to create.

2. Accept the default name or enter a new name.

3. Click OK.

4. Set Boundary Type to one of: Inlet, Outlet, Symmetry, or Wall.

Opening type boundary conditions are not available using Quick Setup mode.

5. Set the location (2D Region) for the boundary condition.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 359
Quick Setup Mode

You may use the Ctrl key to multi-select a group of 2D regions for the single boundary condition.

6. Fill in information specific to the type of boundary condition.

Additional information for a particular setting is available. For details, see Boundary Details
Tab (p. 164).

7. Repeat the preceding steps for each remaining boundary condition you want to create.

You may delete any boundary conditions that are not required for the simulation simply by right-
clicking the boundary condition in the list and selecting Delete from the shortcut menu.

A default boundary condition will be created automatically for any 2D regions on the boundary of
the domain, which have not been assigned a boundary condition. By default, the default boundary
condition is a no-slip adiabatic wall.

8. Click Next to continue.

36.5. Final Operations

The final step enables you to select from various options.

Important

If there are additional settings you need to address that are not covered in Quick Setup
mode, you must select Enter General Mode. The other two options will automatically
write a solver (.def) file based on the settings defined in Quick Setup mode.

1. Select one of these options:

• Start Solver enters General mode, writes the solver (.def) file, and passes it to the CFX-Solver
Manager.

• Start Solver and Quit (available in stand-alone mode) writes the solver (.def) file, passes it
to the CFX-Solver Manager, and then shuts down CFX-Pre.

• Enter General Mode enters General mode in CFX-Pre.

2. Click Finish to exit Quick Setup mode.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
360 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 37: Turbomachinery Mode
Turbo mode in CFX-Pre is a specialist mode enabling you to set up turbomachinery simulations, such
as compressors or turbines, in a simple manner. Each component of a rotating machine can be simply
defined by selecting a mesh file and some basic parameters and then the boundary conditions and in-
terfaces between the components are automatically generated. In addition to the quick setup, existing
turbomachinery simulations can be easily modified to use alternative meshes or to add extra components
with minimum effort. Turbo mode is designed to complement ANSYS TurboGrid but supports all the
common mesh file formats that are supported in the General mode.

Consider an axial turbine made up of three stages (three stators and three rotors). In a design process
you may first want to construct six individual cases in order to check the flow around each individual
component. Next you might want to analyze some of the “stator-rotor-stator” portions of the machine,
creating three more analysis cases. Once these analyses are complete, you might want to re-design one
of the rotors, and re-create the stator-rotor-stator analysis with the new rotor. Other cases to investigate
might include multiple blade passages for some/all components, and ultimately you will want to analyze
the entire three stage (six component) machine. Turbo mode is designed to handle all of these cases.

Note

• You can switch to Turbo mode when working on a general simulation by selecting Tools > Turbo
Mode at any time during the simulation.

• Turbo Mode is designed specifically for the setup of Turbo cases, so if it is used for unsuitable
cases some data may be lost.

• After setting up a turbomachinery simulation in CFX-Pre, the simulation setup can become invalid
if you make changes to the mesh or mesh topology, including changes that affect the number
of blade passages. Re-running Turbo mode (available from the Tools menu in CFX-Pre) might
fully or partially correct the setup. If necessary, any remaining boundary inconsistencies can be
corrected in General mode.

This chapter describes:

37.1. Starting a New Case in Turbo Mode
37.2. Navigation through Turbo Mode
37.3. Basic Settings
37.4. Component Definition
37.5. Physics Definition
37.6. Interface Definition
37.7. Disturbance Definition
37.8. Boundary Definition
37.9. Final Operations

37.1. Starting a New Case in Turbo Mode

To start a new case in Turbo mode:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 361
Turbomachinery Mode

1. Launch CFX-Pre from the ANSYS CFX Launcher.

2. Select File > New Case from the main menu.

3. Select Turbomachinery and click OK.

Note

You do not need to specify a filename until the end of Turbo mode, as you will either specify
the name for the .def file on the Final Operations panel, or you will return to General
mode and make any further required changes to your simulation definition.

37.2. Navigation through Turbo Mode

There are a number of buttons available in Turbo mode to navigate through the wizard. In the most
part, these behave in the standard manner (that is, Next moves to the following page, Back moves to
the previous page, and so on).

The Cancel button:

• Will close Turbo mode (revert back to General mode)

• Will not cause data to be committed, except for any changed component definitions

• Will not delete from the simulation any meshes that have already been imported while in Turbo mode.

37.3. Basic Settings

When Turbo mode is first entered, the Basic Settings panel appears.

37.3.1. Machine Type

The machine type can be any one of Pump, Fan, Axial Compressor, Centrifugal Compressor,
Axial Turbine, Radial Turbine, or Other. In all cases, as part of the Turbo System functionality,
the machine type will be part of the data passed between CFX-Pre and CFD-Post in order to aid workflow.

37.3.2. Axes
The axis of rotation for the turbo component is set relative to the Global Coordinate frame (Coord 0)
by default. You can choose a user-specified coordinate frame from the drop-down list or create a new

one by selecting . For details, see Coordinate Frames (p. 283). For details, see Coordinate Frames in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

37.3.2.1. Coordinate Frame

Choose a Coordinate Frame or click the to create a new coordinate frame. For details, see Coordinate
Frames (p. 283). For details, see Coordinate Frames in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

37.3.2.2. Rotational Axis

Select the rotational axis relative to the chosen coordinate frame.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
362 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Component Definition

37.3.2.3. Axis Visibility

Toggle to select the visibility of the axis.

37.3.3. Analysis Type

The analysis type determines whether your problem is Steady State, Transient, or Transient
Blade Row. If the problem is transient, set Total Time to the total simulation time and Time Steps to
the timestep increment. For example, to study 10 timesteps over 0.1 seconds, set Total Time to 0.1
[s] and Time Steps to 0.01 [s]. If you choose the Transient Blade Row option under Analysis type,
you have the option of choosing between the Time Transformation and Fourier Transform
ation methods under Methods.

For details, see Analysis Type (p. 109).

37.4. Component Definition

The Component Definition panel is used to set up the component names, and import and/or transform
the meshes used in the simulation.

37.4.1. Component Selector

Displays the components currently being used in the simulation. Components can be added, removed
and altered using the commands available through right-clicking in the component selector area.

Command Action
New Component Creates a new component.
Delete Deletes an existing component. Does not delete the
mesh.
Delete Component Deletes both an existing component and the
and Mesh component’s mesh. This command is only available in
Standalone mode; it is not available in Workbench.
Move Component Moves the selected component up in the component
Up list.
Move Component Moves the selected component down in the
Down component list.
Axial Alignment Automatically moves meshes, along the axis of rotation,
in order to align the inlet and outlet regions.

You must ensure that the components are ordered correctly in the selector from top (inlet end) to
bottom (outlet end).

37.4.2. Component Type

If the component is rotating, the angular speed is required under Value. The rotation axis is defined
on the Basic Settings panel. For details, see Rotational Axis (p. 362).

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 363
Turbomachinery Mode

37.4.3. Mesh File

Click Browse to assign a mesh file to the selected component. The Import Mesh dialog box will
appear requesting the filename, location, and file type. For some file types, the mesh units must be
specified; this is indicated by the presence of a Mesh Units drop-down menu. If a mesh file has previously
been specified, selecting a new mesh file will result in the original file being deleted and the new mesh
being imported. In addition to this, the Reload Mesh Files feature is available in General mode that
allows multiple mesh files to be replaced at once. For details, see Reload Mesh Files Command (p. 33).

Note

The Reload Mesh Files feature is not required (and is not available) in CFX-Pre launched
from ANSYS Workbench.

If you want to use a mesh volume that has already been imported as part of another component, do
not specify a mesh file here and set Available Volumes > Volumes to the appropriate region.

37.4.4. Passages and Alignment

This section shows the details of the mesh geometry. In the default state, it will display the number of
blades in the mesh file and the number in 360 degrees. To change these values click the Edit button.

For quick response, the Preview button provides immediate feedback of the changes made. Once the
correct settings are selected, clicking Done will apply the transformation. You can select Cancel to
discard your latest change or select Reset to return all parameters to their default values.

37.4.4.1. Passages/Mesh
Passages Per Mesh is an indication of the number of blade passages that exist in the selected mesh
file. The value will normally be 1.

37.4.4.2. Passages to Model

This parameter is used to specify the number of passages in the section being modeled. This parameter
is optional for most cases except for Transient Blade Row using the Fourier Transformation method. For
the Fourier Transformation method, you have to specify at least two passages. This value is used in
CFD-Post. For details, see Fourier Transformation in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

37.4.4.3. Passages in 360

This parameter is optional and is used to specify the number of passages in the machine. This value is
used in CFD-Post.

If this value is not specified it is automatically calculated based on how many copies of the mesh are
required for modeling a full 360 degree section.

37.4.4.4. Theta Offset

Rotates the selected mesh, about the rotational axis, through an angle theta. The offset can be a single

value or set to an expression by clicking .

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
364 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Physics Definition

37.4.5. Available Volumes

Set Volumes to the 3D region(s) that apply for the selected component.

Normally this will not be required—it simply contains all of the mesh volumes for the mesh file specified
above. However, if you want to set up a case where a single mesh file contains the meshes for multiple
components, select the appropriate mesh volume here.

37.4.6. Region Information

This section shows the names of the mesh regions that have been recognized as potential boundaries
and interfaces. This name matching is done using the template names provided, which can be configured
for your particular mesh files as appropriate. If the list of names that is shown is incorrect or incomplete,
these can be modified accordingly. In the default case, this data should not need changing.

Turbo mode in CFX-Pre does not fully support meshes generated using the Split Mesh Regions at
Trailing Edge setting in ANSYS TurboGrid. For meshes created using this setting, it may be necessary
to manually adjust the regions selected under Region Information in order to obtain the correct inter-
faces and boundaries.

37.4.7. Wall Configuration

The Wall Configuration settings, which are available only for rotating components, are Tip Clearance
at Shroud and Tip Clearance at Hub. A setting of Yes causes the applicable wall (shroud or hub) to
be counter-rotating in the rotating frame of reference such that it is stationary in the absolute frame
of reference.

Note that each of the settings affects only whether the applicable wall is counter-rotating or not. Thus,
in the case of a hub-mounted swiveling blade with a clearance at the hub, it is true that the blade rotates
with the hub, and so, for that case, the appropriate setting for Tip Clearance at Hub is No.

The default values for the Wall Configuration settings are Yes for Tip Clearance at Shroud and No
for Tip Clearance at Hub.

37.5. Physics Definition

Properties of the fluid domain and solver parameters are specified on the Physics Definition panel.

37.5.1. Fluid
Choose a Fluid from the list. Only one is permitted.

37.5.2. Model Data

37.5.2.1. Reference Pressure
This sets the absolute pressure level that all other relative pressure set in a simulation are measured
relative to. For details, see Setting a Reference Pressure in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

37.5.2.2. Heat Transfer

This model selection depends upon the type of fluid you have chosen. For details, see Heat Transfer in
the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 365
Turbomachinery Mode

37.5.2.3. Turbulence
The models available depend upon the fluid that has been chosen. For details, see Turbulence and
Near-Wall Modeling in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

37.5.2.4. Mass Flow

• Per Component

Specify the mass flow per modeled (mesh) sector.

• Per Machine

Specify the total mass flow (that is, for the full wheel).

• Per Passage

Specify the mass flow per blade set (including splitters).

37.5.3. Boundary Templates

Select from one of the commonly used configurations of boundary conditions or choose None. The
configurations are listed from the least robust option to the most robust. For details, see Recommended
Configurations of Boundary Conditions in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

37.5.4. Interface
Select a default interface type that will be applied to components. This can be modified later on a per-
component basis.

37.5.5. Solver Parameters

37.5.5.1. Advection Scheme
For details, see Advection Scheme Selection in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

37.5.5.2. Convergence Control

This option is only available for steady-state simulations and determines how the timestep size is used
to aid convergence. You can select Automatic (timestep size controlled by the solver) or Physical
Timescale (enter a timestep value).

37.5.5.3. Time Scale Option

This option is only available for steady-state simulations. The automatic time scale algorithm can be
either conservative or aggressive. For details, see Automatic Time Scale Calculation in the CFX-Solver
Theory Guide.

37.5.5.4. Max. Coeff. Loops

This option is only available for transient simulations. With a default value of 10, this option determines
the maximum number of iterations per timestep. For details, see Max. Iter. Per Step in the CFX-Solver
Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
366 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Interface Definition

37.6. Interface Definition

Domain interfaces are used to connect multiple assemblies together, to model frame change between
domains, and to create periodic regions within and between domains. Domain interfaces are automat-
ically generated based on the region information.

• The list box shows the existing interfaces. You can right-click and select New to create a new interface or
Delete to delete an existing one.

• Clicking on an interface from the list allows for the viewing and editing of its properties, including Side 1,
Side 2 and Type. For details, see Type (p. 367).

CFX-Pre will automatically attempt to determine the frame change and periodic regions. For details,
see Type (p. 367). Such interfaces are named according to the following: for two domains, A and B:

• Internal Interface connection in domain A: A Internal Interface

Note

For Transient Blade Row cases using the Fourier Transformation method, a new internal
interface is created between the two blade passages.

• Periodic connection in domain A: A to A Periodic

• Periodic connection in domain B: B to B Periodic

• Fluid-Fluid interface between domain A and B: A to B <type> or B to A <type>

where <type> can be one of Frozen Rotor, Stage, or Transient Rotor Stator. For details,
see Type (p. 367).

Turbo mode in CFX-Pre supports automatic interface detection and creation only when each side of
the interface consists of matching regions. The mesh does not need to match 1:1, but each region on
one side of the interface must have a corresponding region on the other side of the interface. Meshes
that do not satisfy this requirement can be used in Turbo mode, but it will be necessary to inspect and
modify the interfaces that are created automatically in order to ensure that the interfaces are correct.

37.6.1. Type
The frame change interfaces model the interface between a rotating assembly and a stationary assembly.
For details, see Frame Change/Mixing Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide. When the analysis type
is steady state, four options are available to model frame change:

• None

• Stage: For details, see Stage (Mixing Plane) in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Periodic

• Frozen Rotor: For details, see Frozen Rotor in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

For transient or Transient Blade Row simulations, the following four options are available to model
frame change:

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 367
Turbomachinery Mode

• None

• Stage: For details, see Stage (Mixing Plane) in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

• Periodic

• Transient Rotor-Stator: For details, see Transient Rotor-Stator in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

In addition, a frame change interface of type None is created for tip clearance regions and disconnected
regions of mesh within a component (for example between an inlet section and a blade section). Peri-
odic interfaces are used in regions where a portion of the flow field is repeated in many identical regions.
The flow around a single turbine blade in a rotating machine, or around a single louvre in a whole array
in a heat exchanger fin are such examples.

37.7. Disturbance Definition

For a Transient Blade Row simulation, the Disturbance Definition panel is used to define the type of
disturbance being modeled for the Time Transformation and Fourier Transformation methods.

37.7.1. Type
The following options are available under Type:

• Rotor Stator

This option is available for the Time Transformation and Fourier Transformation methods, and can
be applied only when the disturbance originates from a domain interface that uses the Transient
Rotor Stator frame change/mixing model.

• Rotational Flow Boundary

Use this option to characterize a disturbance that originates from a boundary condition (for example,
an inlet or outlet boundary condition that is specified using one or more CEL expressions that depend
on space and time).

For details, see Transient Blade Row Models Details View (p. 265).

37.8. Boundary Definition

The Boundary Definition panel is used to set boundary conditions for the remaining surfaces in the
simulation.

• The list box shows the existing interfaces. You can right-click and select New to create a new interface or
Delete to delete an existing one.

• The Flow Specification options (Wall Influence On Flow) vary with the boundary type. For details, see
Flow Specification/Wall Influence on Flow (p. 369).

CFX-Pre uses the information gained from domain interfaces and region specification to automatically
create the required boundary condition locations, in addition to any template boundary configuration
that you have chosen. You can check the definition for each one by clicking on a boundary and viewing
the properties displayed. You can change the properties of any of the automatic boundary conditions.
You should ensure that you set the parameter values for the inlet and outlet boundary conditions because
they will assume default values.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
368 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Final Operations

37.8.1. Boundary Data

Specify the boundary type and select the location from the drop-down list. Alternatively, while the
Location list is active, click in the viewer to directly select the surface.

37.8.2. Flow Specification/Wall Influence on Flow

The options available for Flow Specification and Wall Influence on Flow will depend on the boundary
type. For information on each type of boundary, refer to the relevant section in the Boundary Conditions
documentation:

• Boundary Details: Inlet (p. 165)

• Boundary Details: Outlet (p. 165)

• Boundary Details: Opening (p. 166)

• Boundary Details: Wall (p. 167)

• Symmetry Boundary Conditions (p. 177)

37.9. Final Operations

1. Select one of the following operations:

• Start Solver enters General mode, writes the solver (.def) file with the specified name and passes
it to the CFX-Solver Manager.

• Start Solver and Quit writes the solver (.def) file with the specified name, passes it to the
CFX-Solver Manager and shuts down CFX-Pre. This option is not available when running CFX in ANSYS
Workbench.

• Enter General Mode simply enters General mode without writing any files.

If you are running CFX-Pre in ANSYS Workbench, the only available option is Enter General
Mode. In this case, the solver can be started from ANSYS Workbench.

2. Click Finish to exit Turbo mode.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 369
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
370 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 38: Library Objects
Model library templates contain CCL physics definitions for complex simulations. Loading a Model Library
imports the CCL definition contained in a template file.

Once this is done, a mesh can be imported and the locations of domains, boundaries, and so on can
be assigned. Template files are located in <CFXROOT>/etc/model-templates/ directory (CFX-Pre
will open this directory when a new simulation is created in Library mode).

Model libraries are designed to simplify the problem setup of simulations involving complex physics.
Once the problem definition is loaded, CFX-Pre enters General mode, allowing changes to any or all
parameters.

Selecting Library Template from the New Case dialog box in CFX-Pre enables you to choose one of
the following simulation model templates:

• Boiling Water (p. 371)

• Cavitating Water (p. 372)

• Coal Combustion (p. 372)

• Comfort Factors (p. 372)

• Evaporating Drops (see Liquid Evaporation Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide)

• Multigray Radiation (p. 373)

• Oil Combustion (see Liquid Evaporation Model: Oil Evaporation/Combustion in the CFX-Solver Modeling
Guide)

• Spray Dryer (see Liquid Evaporation Model: Spray Dryer with Droplets Containing a Solid Substrate in the
CFX-Solver Modeling Guide)

38.1. Boiling Water

The boiling water model template contains domain settings for a simulation modeling the boiling of
water. The domain boiling device is specified with two fluids: Water at 100 C and Water
Vapour at 100 C. Water at 100 C is the continuous phase and Water Vapour at 100
C is the dispersed phase. The inhomogeneous multiphase model is employed. For details, see The In-
homogeneous (Interfluid Transfer) Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Boiling is modeled by setting the Mass Transfer option on the Fluid Pair Models tab to Phase
Change (which uses the Thermal Phase Change model and requires a saturation temperature).

Review all settings applied to the simulation and create suitable boundary conditions. For details, see
Thermal Phase Change Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide. Initialization data must also be set. For
details, see Initial Conditions for a Multiphase Simulation in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 371
Library Objects

38.2. Cavitating Water

The cavitation model template contains domain settings and fluid models for a cavitating flow. The
domain cavitating device is specified with two fluids, Water at 25 C and Water Vapour
at 25 C. The homogeneous multiphase model is employed. The Homogeneous Model in the CFX-
Solver Modeling Guide.

The Rayleigh Plesset model is used to model cavitation in the domain. For details, see Rayleigh
Plesset Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Boiling is modeled by setting the Mass Transfer option on the Fluid Pair Models tab to Phase
Change (which uses the Thermal Phase Change model and requires a saturation temperature).

Review all settings applied to the simulation and create suitable boundary conditions. For details, see
Cavitation Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide. Initialization data must also be set; for details, see
Initial Conditions for a Multiphase Simulation in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

38.3. Coal Combustion

The coal combustion analysis template contains all the material definitions to perform a coal calculation
using proximate/ultimate input data. Analysis data is provided for a commonly used coal. The template
includes a global single-step devolatilization mechanism, together with materials and reactions for
performing NOx calculations, including fuel NOx generation and NO reburn.

Further information on proximate/ultimate analysis is available. For details, see Hydrocarbon Fuel
Model Setup in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

38.4. Comfort Factors

There are expressions for calculating Mean Radiant Temperature and Resultant Temperature for use in
HVAC simulations. Resultant Temperature is a comfort factor defined in [92]. Two options are available:

• Derive the factors during postprocessing, as user scalar variables.

A CFD-Post macro is available for this purpose, and is accessed using the Macro Calculator from the
Tools menu. This is the most common approach. For details, see Comfort Factors Macro in the CFD-
Post User's Guide.

• Compute them as run time Additional Variables.

This method is best used when the control system depends upon a derived comfort factor. The ap-
proach involves using the comfort-factors.ccl library file in CFX-Pre.

Most users are likely to prefer the first option, but sometimes the second option will be required, for
example when the model simulates a ventilation system in which the control system depends dynam-
ically on derived comfort factors.

The model library template creates two Additional Variables: PMV (Predicted Mean Vote) and PPD
(Predicted Percentage of Dissatisfied), which are comfort factors defined in [93].

A User Fortran routine named usr_pmvppd.F has been developed for computing the values of PMV,
and can be found in the etc/model-templates/ directory of your ANSYS CFX installation. The
template contains a CCL definition for the user routine named pmvppd, which calls the Fortran routine.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
372 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Multigray Radiation

Values for U, V, W, temperature and radiation intensity are passed to the routine and the dimensionless
value of PMV is returned. The value is then used to calculate PPD based on the formula:
(38.1)

Only a fixed value for humidity for PMV and PPD can be used at the present time. The values should
be supplied as partial pressure of water vapor.

Radiation and the ISO tables for metabolic rate and clothing thermal resistance are included in the
template file, which can be accessed by opening the following file in a text editor:

<CFXROOT>/etc/model-templates/comfort-factors.ccl

You can also use customized values pertinent to your simulation. Full details are given in the template
file itself.

Compiling the routine requires the use of the cfx5mkext utility. For details, see Creating the Shared
Libraries in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

An absolute Library Path must be set for the User Routine. For details, see User CEL Routines (p. 333).

38.5. Multigray Radiation

The multigray radiation template contains domain settings for a simulation modeling combustion. The
domain combustor is specified with a methane/air burning mixture. It is solved using the Eddy
Dissipation combustion model, the Discrete Transfer thermal radiation model and the
Multigray spectral model.

Review all settings applied to the simulation and create suitable boundary conditions. For details, see:

• Combustion Modeling in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Radiation Modeling in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Additional information on multigray radiation is available; for details, see:

• Eddy Dissipation Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• The Discrete Transfer Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide

• Spectral Model in the CFX-Solver Modeling Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 373
 Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
374 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 39: Command Editor Dialog Box
The Command Editor dialog box is a text interface for CFX-Pre and CFD-Post. You can use it to issue
commands or to create or modify the CCL that defines the state.

This chapter describes:

39.1. Using the Command Editor
39.2. Performing Command Actions
39.3. Using Power Syntax

39.1. Using the Command Editor

To start the Command Editor:

1. Select Tools > Command Editor. Alternatively, right-click any object that can be modified using the
Command Editor and select Edit in Command Editor.

• If you select Tools > Command Editor, the Command Editor opens and displays the current state re-
gardless of any selection.

– If the Command Editor dialog box has not been used previously, it will be blank.

– If the Command Editor dialog box has been used previously, it will contain CCL commands. If you
do not want to edit the CCL that appears, click Clear to erase all content.

• If you right-click an object and select Edit in Command Editor, the CCL definition of the specific object
populates the Command Editor automatically. Modify or add parameters as required, then process
the new object definition to apply the changes.

2. Click in the Command Editor.

3. Prepare the content of the Command Editor by adding new content, modifying the existing content, or
both.

The types of content that may be prepared are CCL, action commands, and power syntax. Combin-
ations of these types of content are allowed. For details, see:

• CFX Command Language (CCL) Syntax in the CFX Reference Guide.

• Command Actions in the CFD-Post User's Guide.

• Power Syntax in ANSYS CFX in the CFX Reference Guide.

Right-click in the Command Editor to access basic editing functions. These functions include Find,
which makes a search tool appear at the bottom of the Command Editor dialog box. Enter a search
term and click either Next or Previous to search upwards or downwards from the insertion point
or text selection. To hide the search tool, press Esc.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 375
Command Editor Dialog Box

4. Click Process.

The contents are processed: CCL changes will affect CCL object definitions, actions will be carried
out, and power syntax will be run.

To replace the CCL currently displayed in the Command Editor with CCL in a file:

1. From the Command Editor, right-click Import. The Import CCL dialog box is displayed. For details, see
Import CCL Command (p. 33).

2. Select the appropriate file.

3. Click Open. Note that independent of the Import Method selection on the Import CCL dialog, the CCL
in the Command Editor is always replaced by the CCL loaded from the file.

4. Click Process.

39.2. Performing Command Actions

Many of the operations performed in the user interface can also be driven by processing a command
action in the Command Editor. For example, you can delete a domain named Domain1 by processing
the following command:
>delete /FLOW/DOMAIN:Domain1

Command actions are preceded by a prompt consisting of a right angle bracket (>). For details, see
Command Actions in the CFD-Post User's Guide.

39.3. Using Power Syntax

Power Syntax (Perl) commands can be issued through the Command Editor. This can be useful when
performing repeated operations such as creating multiple objects with similar properties. Any valid
power syntax command can be entered in the editor and processed. Power Syntax commands are
preceded by a prompt consisting of an exclamation mark (!). For details, see Power Syntax in ANSYS
CFX in the CFX Reference Guide.

Release 19.1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
376 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.